DVP-PLC Application Manual Programming】: Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

DVP-PLC Application Manual
Programming
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram
Preface-The Background and Functions of PLC ...................................................... 1-1
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram........................................................ 1-1
1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram ... 1-2
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram ............................................................. 1-4
1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram .................................................................. 1-8
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure ......................... 1-11
1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram ............................................................... 1-14
1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program........................................................ 1-16
Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function

2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number .............................................................. 2-1
2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H] ................................................................................... 2-7
2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y] .............. 2-9
2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M] ........................................... 2-11
2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S] ................................................. 2-12
2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T] ......................................................... 2-13
2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]...................................................... 2-16
2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F] ........................................................ 2-28
2.8.1 Data register [D] ........................................................................................ 2-28
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] ................................................................................ 2-29
2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics .................................................. 2-30
2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] ........................................ 2-30
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register ................................................... 2-33
2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions.................................... 2-53
2.12 Fault Code Information ................................................................................... 2-84
Chapter 3 Basic Commands

3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command .................................. 3-1
3.2 Basic Commands Explanations ......................................................................... 3-3
Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands

4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET] ................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) ...................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation .................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program .............................................. 4-7
4.5 Categories of Procedures ................................................................................. 4-8
4.6 IST command .................................................................................................. 4-18
Chapter 5 Application Commands

5.1 Summary of Parameters ................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Application Command Structure ........................................................................ 5-7
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values ............................................................................. 5-12
5.4 Index register E, F ........................................................................................... 5-15
5.5 Index for Commands ........................................................................................ 5-17
Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49........................................... 6-1

Chapter 7 Application Commands API 50-99........................................... 7-1
Chapter 8 Application Commands API 100-149 ....................................... 8-1
Chapter 9 Application Commands API 150-199 ....................................... 9-1
Chapter 10 Application Commands API 215-246 ..................................... 10-1
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

Preface----The Background and Functions of PLC
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is one of electronic equipments. It was called Sequence Controller
before. It was named Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacture Association)
in 1978 and defined as electronic equipment. The operation of PLC is in the following:
Step 1. Read the external input signal, such as the status of keypad, sensor, switch and pulse.
Step 2. Using microprocessor to execute the calculations of logic, sequence, timer, counter and formula according to
the status and the value of the input signal read in the step 1 and pre-write programs saved inner to get the
corresponding output signal, such as open or close of relay, operation of controlled machine or procedure to control
automatic machine or procedure of manufacture. PLC also can be used to maintain and adjust of production program
by editing or modifying the peripheral equipments (personal computer/handheld programming panel). The common
program language of PLC is ladder diagram.
There are stronger functions in PLC with the development and application requirements of electronic technology,
such as position control, network and etc. Output/Input signals are DI (Digital Input), AI (Analog Input), PI (Pulse
Input), DO (Digital Output), AO (Analog Output) and PO (Pulse Output). Thus PLC plays an important role in the
feature industry.
1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram

Ladder diagram is an automatic control diagram language that developed during World War II. At first, it just has
basic components, such as A contact (normally open), B contact (normally close), output coil, timer counter and etc.
(The power panel is made up of these basic components) It has more functions, differential contact, latched coil and
the application commands, add, minus, multiply and divide calculation, that traditional power panel cant make since
PLC is developed.
The working principles of the traditional Ladder Diagram and the PLC Ladder Diagram are similar to each other;
the only difference is that the symbols for the traditional ladder diagram are expressed in the format that are close to
its original substance, while those for the PLC ladder diagram employ the symbols that are more explicit when being
used in computers or data sheets. In the Ladder Diagram Logics, it could be divided into the Combination Logics
and the Sequential Logics, and is described as follows:
1.
Combination Logics:
The following example is the combination logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram
separately.
Traditional Ladder Diagram
PLC Ladder Diagram
X0
Y0
X0
X1
Y1
X1
Y2
X2
X2
X4
X3
Y0
Y1
X4
Y2
X3
1-1

Example 1: Circuit 1 utilizes one X0 (NO: Normally Open) switch, which is normally known as the A switch or
contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the OFF condition at regular time (not pressed); the
output point Y0 is thus in OFF condition. However, once the switch motion (the button is pressed) is
conducted, the contact will be ON, and the output point Y0 will be in ON condition.
Example 2: Similarly, Circuit 2 utilizes the X1 (NC: Normally Close) switch, which is normally known as the B switch
or contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the ON condition at regular time; the output point
Y0 is thus in ON condition. While the switch motion is conducted (which is in the OFF condition), the
output point Y0 is in OFF condition.
Example 3: This is an example of combination logics output, which has more than one input equipment. The output
point Y2 will be in ON condition when X2 is in OFF condition or X3 and X4 are in ON condition.
2.
Sequential logics:
The sequential logics are a type of circuit that possesses the Draw-Back structure, which is to draw back the
circuits output result and has it serve as the input condition. Thus, under the same input condition, different
output results will be generated in accordance with previous conditions and motions with different orders.
The following example is the sequential logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram
separately.
Traditional Ladder Diagram
X5
X6
PLC Ladder Diagram
X5
Y3
X6
Y3
Y3
Y3
When the above circuit is just supplied with power, although the X6 switch is ON, the X5 switch is still OFF, thus,
the output relay Y3 will be in OFF condition; output of the relay will only be ON after X5 is ON. Once the output relay
Y3 is in ON condition, there will be a feedback signal containing the ON condition from Y3 to connect in parallel with
the A contact of X5; this circuit is thus also known as the self-latched circuit. The circuit motion is showed in the
following chart:
Device status
X5
X6
Y3
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Step
N: is in OFF condition Y: is in ON condition

From above chart, you can find that the same input may get different result. For example, in the step 1 and 3, the
status of X5 and X6 are in OFF condition but Y3 is in OFF condition in step 1 and in ON condition in step3. That is due
to the self-latched circuit feedback input. In this example, it explains with contact A, contact B and output coil. The
usage of other equipments is the same with this. Please refer to the chapter 3 for the detail.
1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram
1-2

Although the working principles are in accordance with each other for the traditional ladder diagram and the PLC
ladder diagram, PLC is indeed utilizing the microcomputer chip (MCU) to simulate the motion of the traditional ladder
diagram, which is to use the scan method to look over one by one the conditions of all input devices and output coils,
and afterwards, with the conditions in consideration, to calculate and generate the same output result as that of the
traditional ladder diagram based on the logics of the combination status of the ladder diagram. However, since that
there is only one MCU, the only way to examine the circuits is to look it over one after another within the ladder
diagram program, then calculate the output result in compliance with the program and the input/output status, and
finally, output the results to the external interface; thereafter, start over with the readout of the input status, the
calculation, output, and repeatedly go over the above-mentioned motions again; the time needed to complete the
whole set of cyclic motion is called one Scan Time.
The scan time will become longer in accordance with the
increment of the program. With this scan time, it will incur repeated input detections, and thus, result in delay in the
output responses; and the longer the delay time, the greater the error towards the control, and whats worse, is that
the condition might be unqualified for the control requests. By then, PLC (with faster Scan Time) would be chosen to
do the job; the scan speed is thus an essential specification to PLC. Thanks to the advanced technique of ASIC (IC
with specific functions) within the microcomputer, PLC of the present has made greater progress in the scan speed,
and what follows is the scanning chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram Program.
Read input state from outside
X0
X1
Start
Y0
Y0
Calculate the result by ladder

diagram algorithm (it doesnt sent
to the outer output point but the
inner equipment will output
immediately.)
M100 X3
X10
Y1
Execute in cycles
:
:
X100 M505
Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
In addition to the difference of scan time, PLC ladder diagram and traditional ladder diagram also has difference
in reverse current. In the following chart of traditional ladder diagram, if X0, X1, X4 and X6 are in ON condition and
the others are in OFF condition, output point Y0 will be in ON condition as shown as dotted line in the following
diagram. But in the PLC ladder diagram will have error in the peripheral equipmentWPLSoft due to scan method of
MCU is from up to down and from left to right.
1-3

Reverse current of traditional ladder diagram
X1
X0
X2
Y0
Reverse current of PLC ladder diagram
X1
X0
X2
Y0
Y0
X4
X3 a
X5
X6
X4
X3 a
X5
X6
There is a fault in the 3rd row of ladder diagram.
1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram

Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made
up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder
diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of
electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical
equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has
the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesnt have the real components in it.
In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the
coil is OFF. You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a).
Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Close,
NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words
makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/ subtraction or shift, you could use
byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also
value of counting time and times.
In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the
corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC: (Refer to Chapter 2 for detail)
Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input
Input relay
point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input
signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldnt change the state of
input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via HPP. The contacts (contact a, b) can be
used unlimitedly. If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and
cant be used with other functions.
Equipment indication method: X0, X1,X7, X10, X11,. The symbol of equipment is X
and the number uses octal. There are numeric indications of input point on MPU and
expansion unit.
1-4

Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output
Output relay
point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of
other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external
load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesnt have the
corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,Y7, Y10, Y11,. . The symbol of equipment is Y and the
number uses octal. There are numeric indications of output point on MPU and expansion
unit.
Internal relay
The internal relay doesnt connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in PLC. Its
function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the
corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other
internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay cant output
directly, it should output with output point.
Equipment indication: M0, M1,, M4, M5. The symbol of equipment is M and the number
uses decimal number system.
STEP
DVP PLC provides input method for controlling program of step actions. It is very easy to
write control program by using the conversion of control step S of command STL. If there is no
step program in the program, step point S could be used as internal relay M or alarm point.
Equipment indication: S0, S1,S1023. The symbol of equipment is S and the number
uses decimal.
Timer
Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its
contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value
of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and
each timer has its timing period. Once the coil is OFF, the contact wont act (contact a is open
and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero.
Equipment indication: T0, T1,,T255. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses
decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period.
Counter
Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of
counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter. When coil is form OFF
to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit
and high-speed counter for user to use.
Equipment indication: C0, C1,,C255. The symbol of equipment is C and the number
uses decimal.
1-5

Data register
PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and
counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary
number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store
double words.
Equipment indication: D0, D1,,D9,999. The symbol of equipment is D and the number
uses decimal.
File register
The file register can be used to store data or parameter when the register that PLC needs is
not enough during handling data and parameter. It can store 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in
each file register. It uses two continuous number of file register to handle double word. There are
1600 file registers for EP series and 10000 file registers for EH series. There is not the real
equipment number for file register, thus it needs to execute READ/WRITE of file register via
commands API147 MEMR, API148 MEMW or the peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft.
Equipment indication: K0~K9,999. There is no equipment symbol and uses decimal
number for number.
Index register
Index register E and F are 16-bit data register just the same as general data register. It can
be wrote and read freely and has the function of index indication to use for character device, bit
device and constants.
Equipment indication: E0~E7, F0~F7. The symbols of equipment are E, F and the number
uses decimal.
The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:

Ladder Diagram
Structure
Explanation
Command
Normally open, contact a
LD
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Normally close, contact b
LDI
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Serial normally open
AND
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Parallel normally open
OR
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Parallel normally close
ORI
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Rising-edge trigger switch
LDP
X, Y, M, S, T, C
LDF
X, Y, M, S, T, C
ANDP
X, Y, M, S, T, C
ANDF
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Falling-edge trigger
switch
Rising-edge trigger in
serial
Falling-edge trigger in
serial
1-6
Equipment

Ladder Diagram
Structure
Explanation
Command
Equipment
Rising-edge trigger in
parallel
ORP
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Falling-edge trigger in
parallel
ORF
X, Y, M, S, T, C
Block in serial
ANB
none
Block in parallel
ORB
none
Multiple output
MPS
MRD
MPP
none
Output command of coil

drive
OUT
Y, M, S
Step ladder
STL
Application
command
Please refer chapter 3 basic command and

chapter 5 application command
INV
none
Basic command,
Application command
Inverse logic
Block: The block is the ladder diagram that made up of the serial or parallel calculation of two or above equipments. It
will get the result of parallel block or serial block according to operation character.
Serial block
Parallel block
Divergent line and combinative line: the vertical line is usually a separation for devices. This line is combination line
for the left device (it means that there are at least two columns or above circuit at
the left connect to this vertical line) this line is the divergent line for the right
device (it means that there are at least two rows or above circuit connect to this
line.
combinative line of block 1

divergent line of block 2
combinative line of block 2
1-7

Network: this is the complete network that made up of devices and blocks. The vertical line or continuous line and the
block or device that line can connect to is the same network.
Independent network:
Network1
Network2
Incomplete network:
1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram

The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during
the edited of DPLSoft and WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The maximum contacts in a row
are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to
continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be
used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows.
X0
X1
X2
X4
X3
X5
X6
X7
X10
C0
C1
00000
X11
X12
X13
Y1
00000
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling,
including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is
the explanation order.
8
X0
X1
6
5
4
5
Y1
X4
T0
M3
Y1
M0
TMR
X3
1-8
T0
K10
M1

The explanation of command order:
1
2
3
4
LD
OR
AND
LD
AND
ORB
LD
AND
LD
AND
ORB
ANB
OUT
TMR
5
6
7
8
X0
M0
X1
X3
M1
Y1
X4
T0
M3
Y1
T0
K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram

1.
LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.
LD command
LD command
AND Block
OR Block
The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP
and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0
X0
Time
OFF
2.
ON
Time
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.
AND
command
AND
command
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
3.
OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR
command
OR
command
OR
command
1-9

The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
4.
ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.
ANB command
5.
ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORB
command
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to
down or from left to right.
6.
MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs.
The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between
horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the
contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of
ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command
can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol .
MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same
horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can
recognize the command MRD by the symbol .
MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because it is the last
item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending.
1-10

MPS
You can recognize this command by the symbol .
Basically, that is all right to use the above method to
MPS
analyze but sometimes compiler will omit the same

outputs as shown at the right.
MRD
MPP
7.
MPP
STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This
command helps the programmer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will
be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we can get clear procedure, and original step point will
have the action of power loss after each step point S transfer to the next step point. In this way, we could
transfer to our procedure diagram from the left diagram to the PLC structure diagram below.
M1002
S0
M1002
initial
pulse
S21
SET
S0
S0
S
SET
S21
S21
S
SET
S22
S22
e
S
S0
S22
8.
RET
RET command: you should add RET command after finishing step ladder program and RET command should
add after STL command as shown in the following.
S20
e
S
RET
S20
e
S
RET
Refer to chapter 4 for the structure of step ladder [ STL ] , [ RET ].
1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure
1-11

Ladder Diagram
X0
X2
X1
Y0
X1
M0
C0
SET
S0
M1
M2
S0
S
Y0
X10
Y10
SET
S10
S
S11
S
X11
Y11
SET
S11
SET
S12
SET
S13
X12
Y12
SET
S20
S
S10
S12
S
S13
S
S20
X13
S0
RET
X0
CNT
C0
C0
X1
M0
X1
M1
M2
M2
RST
END
C0
K10
LD
OR
LD
OR
ORI
ANB
LD
AND
ORB
ANI
OUT
AND
SET
STL
LD
OUT
SET
STL
LD
OUT
SET
SET
SET
STL
LD
OUT
SET
STL
STL
STL
LD
OUT
RET
LD
CNT
LD
MPS
AND
OUT
MRD
ANI
OUT
MPP
ANI
OUT
END
X0
X1
X2
M0
M1
M2
Y0
X1
Y0
C0
S0
S0
X10
Y10
S10
S10
X11
Y11
S11
S12
S13
S11
X12
Y12
S20
S20
S12
S13
X13
S0
OR
1 block
2 OR
block
Serial
block
AND
3 block
Serial block
4 ANI
Output state will keep on

5 handling according to
program scan state
Multiple
outputs
Step ladder Start
State working item and

step point transfer
9 S10 state take out
10 Take out X11 state
11

step point transfer
12 S11 state take out
13 Take out X12 state
step point transfer
14
Simultaneous
15 divergence
End of step ladder
State working item
and step point transfer
Return
S0
17
C0K10
C0
18 Read C0
X1
M0
X1
M1
Multiple
outputs
M2
M2
Program End
Syntax Fuzzy Structure

The analytic process of correct ladder diagram should be from left to right or from up to down. But there are some
exceptions as shown in the following.
Example 1: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.
1-12

X0
X2
X4
X1
X3
X5
Good method
LD
OR
LD
OR
ANB
LD
OR
ANB
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
Bad method
LD
OR
LD
OR
LD
OR
ANB
ANB
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
The results for the above two programs to convert to ladder diagram are the same. Why one is better than the
other? That is due to operation of MPU. The operation of the program in the left side is one block merges to another
one. Although the length of the program at the right side is the same as the left one, the operation of the program in
the right side is merged at the last. (command ANB is used to merge, it cant use more than 8 continuous times). In
this program, it just needs to use continuous two times of command ANB and MPU allows that. But when the program
needs to use more than continuous 8 times of command ANB, MPU wont allow. So the best method is to merge once
the block is established and in this way the logic of programmer will be in order.
Example 2: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same.
X0
X1
X2
X3
Good method
LD
OR
OR
OR
X0
X1
X2
X3
Bad method
LD
LD
LD
LD
ORB
ORB
ORB
X0
X1
X2
X3
The difference is very clear in these two programs. In the bad method, the more program code it needs and the
operation memory of MPU also needs to increase. So that is better to decode in the order of the definition.
The error figures of ladder diagram
When editing ladder diagram, you can use all ladder symbols to make up all kinds of figures. When drawing
ladder diagram, you should start from left power line and end with the right power line (the right power line will be
omitted when using DPLSoft ladder diagram) due to the principle for PLC to handle figure program is from up to down
and from left to right (it is drew from left to right and draw the next new row after finishing drawing a row). They are the
common error figure in the following.
It cant do OR operation upward.
1-13

There is reverse power flow during the circuit that
is from input to output signal.
reverse flow power
The correct is output from right upper corner.
If you want to merge or edit, the order should be

from left upper corner to right lower corner. The
block of dot line should move up.
It cant do parallel operation with empty device.
Empty device cant do operation with other device.
There is no device in the middle block.
The device in series should be arranged in parallel

with the block that it connects in series.
.
The position of Label P should be in the first row of
the complete network.
The block that is connected in series should be

arranged in parallel with the upper horizontal line.
1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram

To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ANB when series block and parallel block
connect in series.
1-14

X0
X1
Command
X2
LD
X0
LD
X1
OR
X2
ANB
X1
Command
X0
X2
LD
X1
OR
X2
AND
X0
To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ORB when single equipment and block are
connected in parallel.
Command
T0
X1
X2
LD
T0
LD
X1
AND
X2
ORB
X1
X2
Command
T0
LD
X1
AND
X2
OR
T0
In figure a of ladder diagram, it does not illegal due to the reverse power flow. In figure a, the upper block is
shorter than lower block, you could make it legal by switching them.
command
X0
X1
X3
X2
X4
Fig. a
LD
X0
OR
X1
AND
X2
LD
X3
AND
X4
ORB
X3
X4
X1
X2
command
X0
Fig. b
LD
X3
AND
X4
LD
X1
OR
X0
AND
X2
ORB
1-15

You can omit commands MPS, MPP when the multiple outputs in the same horizontal line dont need to operate
with other input device.
X0
command
Y1
MPS
AND
OUT
MPP
OUT
Y0
X0
Y1
Y0
command
Y0
OUT
AND
OUT
X0
Y1
Y0
X0
Y1
Correct the circuit of reverse flow power

In the following examples, the figure at the left is the ladder diagram that is draw by our definition but there is
reverse flow power in it. Therefore, we correct it and show it at the right side.
Example 1:
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X10
LOOP1
X6
X7
X5
reverse flow power
X10
LOOP1
Example 2:
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X7
X10
LOOP1
X6
reverse flow power
X3
reverse flow power
X6
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
LOOP1
X0
X1
X4
X7
X10
LOOP 2
1.7 The Example for Designing Basic Program
1-16

Start, Stop and Latching
In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch.
Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are several latching circuits in the
following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally
contact X2Off, and Y1=On are set at the same time, if
X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls priority of
Y1
X2
Y1
X1
stop.
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally
X1
X2
Y1
contact X2 Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and

latching) are valid at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be
Y1
active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start.

Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands
The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made up
of RST and SET command.
It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind
Top priority of stop

X1
the same time, therefore it calls priority of stop.

It is top priority of start when SET command is set after
RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is
Y1
RST
Y1
RST
Y1
SET
Y1
X2
SET command. When executing PLC from up to down, The

coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at
SET
Top priority of start

X2
X1
ON so it calls top priority of start.
Example 4: latched
Auxiliary relay M512 is latched at the right side. (refer to
X1
PLC user manual) the circuit at the right side will be latched
when power is on and it will be also latched once the power
loss and power on again. Therefore the latched is continuous.
SET
M512
RST
M512
X2
M512
Y1
The common control circuit
1-17

Example 5: condition control
X1
X3
Y1
X1
X3
Y1
X2
X2
X4
Y1
Y2
X4
Y1
Y2
Y2
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched
circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series.
Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
Example 6: Interlock control
X1
X3
Y2
X1
Y1
Y1
X3
X2
X4
X2
X4
Y1
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y2
The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2.
Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other wont act. (This is called interlock.)
Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2 wont act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of
ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
Example 7: Sequential Control
X1
X3
Y2
Y1
If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be

an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left
Y1
side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after
X2
X4
acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential.
Y1
Y2
Y2
Example 8: Oscillating Circuit

The period of oscillating circuit is T+T
1-18

Y1
Y1
Y1
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1
normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1.
In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON.
Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF and output 0. Scan repeatedly, the period of oscillating circuit is nT+T.
X0
Y1
TMR
T0
X0
Kn
T0
Y1
Y1
nT
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next
scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal
number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 9: Blinking Circuit
X0
T2
TMR
T1
Kn1
X0
n2 T
T1
TMR
X0
T2
Kn2
Y1
T1
Y1
n1 T
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two
timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer
(clock period)
Example 10: Triggered Circuit
X0
M0
M0
Y1
Y1
M0
X0
Y1
M0
Y1
1-19

In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of T (a
scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF and normally close M0
and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once
a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This
circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a
period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
Example 11: Delay Circuit
X0
TMR
T10
K1000
X0
T10
Y1
Y1
100 seconds
TB = 0.1 sec
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close
contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delay 100 seconds once input X0 is OFF
and T10 is ON. Please refer to timing chart above.
Example 12: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input X0 is
ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
X0
TMR
T5
T5
K50
X0
T6
5
seconds
T5
Y4
Y4
Y0
Y4
X0
TMR
T6
K30
T6
3
seconds
Example13: Extend Timer Circuit
X0
In this circuit, the total delay time from input X0 is
TMR
T11
Kn1
TMR
T12
Kn2
T11
close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is

clock period.
T12
Y1
Example 14: The method of enlarge counter range
1-20

X13
CNT
C5
Kn1
CNT
C6
Kn2
RST
C5
RST
C6
The range of 16-bit counter is 0~32,767. If using

two counters as figure in left side, the counter range
C5
can be enlarge to n1*n2. When counter C5 attains n1,

counter C6 will counts one time and reset itself. Then
counter C6 will count the pulse of X13. When counter
X14
C6 attains n2, the pulse of X13 will be n1*n2.
C6
Y1
Example 15: Traffic light control (by using step ladder command)
Traffic light control
Vertical
Light
Vertical
light
Horizontal
light
Light Time
Horizontal
Light
Red light
Yellow
light
Green
light
Green
blink light
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y2
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y12
35 Sec
5 Sec
25 Sec
5 Sec
Timing chart:
Vertical
Light
Red Y0
Yellow Y1
Green Y2
25 Sec
5 Sec
Horizontal
Light
5 Sec
Red Y10
Yellow Y11
Green Y12
25 Sec
5 Sec
5 Sec
1-21

SFC Figure:
Ladder Diagram:
M1002
M1002
S0
S20
TMR
T0
S21
T1
S22
S23
T0
K350
Y2
T10
S31
TMR
T1
K250
TMR
T2
K50
M1013
T2
S30
Y0
Y2
Y1
TMR
T10
K250
TMR
T11
K50
M1013
T11
S32
T12
S0
S
Y12
Y12
S20
S
S33
T12
TMR
T13
K350
SET
S0
SET
S20
SET
S30
S127
TMR
T0
SET
S21
K350
T0
K50
Y10
S0
Y0
Y11
TMR
ZRST
S21
S
Y2
T13
TMR
T1
SET
S22
TMR
T2
K250
T1
S0
S22
S
K50
M1013
Y2
T2
SET
S23
S
S30
S
S23
Y1
Y12
TMR
T10
SET
S31
TMR
T11
K250
T10
S31
S
K50
M1013
Y12
T11
SET
S32
S
S32
Y11
TMR
T12
SET
S33
K50
T12
S33
S
Y10
TMR
S23 S33
S
S
T13
T13
K350
S0
RET
END
1-22

Drawing by SFC Editor (WPLSoft )
Drawing by SFC
Internal Ladder Diagram View

LAD-0
M1002
LAD-0
ZRST
S0
SET
S0
S127
S0
Transferred condition 1
0
T0
TRANS*
S20
S30
S21
S31
S22
S32
S23
S33
S22
TMR
T2
K50
M1013
Y2
T13
TRANS*
4
S0
T12
TRANS*
1-23
2 DVP-PLC Function
2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number
ES, EX, SS Models:
Type
Item
Device
External input relay
External output relay

For general
M Auxiliary For latched *

For special
Relay bit mode
100ms timer
T
Timer
10ms counter
1ms timer
16-bit count up for general
16-bit count up for latched *
Counter
Step
point
32-bit count
1-phase input
up/down
high-speed 1-phase 2 inputs
counter for
2-phase 2 inputs
latched*
Initial step point latched *
Zero point return latched *
Register WORD data
latched *
T
Present value of timer
Present value of counter

For general
For latched *
Data
register
For special
Constant
Pointer
For index indication
Usage Range
X0~X177, 128 points, octal
Total is
number system
256
Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal
points
number system
M0~M511,
M768~M999,
744 points
Total is
1280
M512~M767, 256 points
points
M1000~M1279, 280 points
When the timer

indicated by TMR
T64~T126, 63 points (when Total is command attains the
128
M1028=On, it is 10ms,
setting, the T contact
points
M1028=Off, it is 100ms)
with the same number
T127, 1 points
will be ON.
Total
is
C0~C111, 112 points
When the counter
128
indicated by CNT
C112~C127, 16 points
points
(DCNT) command
C235~C238, C241, C242,
attains the setting, the
Total is
C244, 7 points
C contact with the
13
C246, C247, C249, 3 points
same number will be
points
ON.
C251, C252, C254, 3 points
S0~S9, 10 points
Total is
Usage device of step
S10~S19, 10 points (use 128
ladder diagram (SFC)
with IST command)
points
S20~S127, 108 points
When timer attains,
the contact of timer
T0~T127, 128 points
will be ON.
When timer attains,
C0~C127, 16-bit counter, 128
C235~C254, 32-bit counter, 13 points
will be ON.
D0~D407, 408 points
Total is
600
points It can be memory
D408~D599, 192 points
area for storing data.
D1000~D1311, 312 points
Total is E and F can be used
(for V4.9 and above)
D1000~D1143, 144 points 312 points as the special
purpose of index
(144
(for V4.8 and below)
E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points) indication
points
For master control nested loop
N0~N7, 8 points
For CJ, CALL commands
P0~P63, 64 points
Interrupt
Decimal
Hexadecimal
External interrupt
Communication interrupt
Contacts can switch to

On/Off in program
(some is latched)
(some are latched)

T0~T63, 64 points
Time interrupt
Function
Correspond to
external input point
Correspond to
external output point
Control point of
master control nested
loop
Location pointer of
CJ, CALL
I6, 1 point (10~99ms)

Location pointer of
(for Version 5.7)
interrupt subroutine
I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
I150
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation)
* latched area is fixed, it cant be changed.

2-1
2 DVP-PLC Function
EP/SA models:
Type
Item
Device

For general
Auxiliary For latched *

Relay
For special
Range
Function
X0~X177, 128 points, octal number
Correspond to
Total
system
is
Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number 256 Correspond to
points
system
M0~M511, 512 points (*1)
Contacts can be
Total switched during

is
ON/OFF in the
M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3)
4096
M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some points program (some is
M512~M999, 488 points (*3)
are latched)
latched)
T0~T199, 200 points (*1)

100ms
T192~T199 for subroutine

T250~T255, 6 points (accumulative
When the timer that
TMR command
Total
indicates attains the
is
T200~T239, 40 points (*1)
256 setting, the T contact
T240~T245, 6 points (accumulative points
with the same
type) (*4)
number will be On.
T246~T249, 4 points (accumulative
type) (*4)
Timer
Relay bit mode
10ms
1ms
16-bit count up
32-bit count up/down
type) (*4)
C0~C95, 96 points (*1)
C96~C199, 104 points (*3)
C200~C215, 16 points (*1)
When the timer that
32-bit high-speed
CNT(DCNT)
Total
command indicates
C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 9 is
250 attains, the contact C
points (*3)
points
with the same
C246, C247, C249, 1-phase 2
counter
inputs, 3 points (*3)
Counter
C216~C234, 19 points (*3)
number will be On.
C251, C252, C254, 2-phase 2

inputs, 3 points (*3)
Initial step point
2-2
S0~S9, 10 points (*1)

S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST
Step
Zero point return
point
For general
S20~S512, 492 points (*1)
For latched *
S512~S895, 384 points (*3)
For alarm
S896~S1023, 128 points (*3)
command) (*1)
Total
is
1024 ladder diagram
points
2 DVP-PLC Function
Type
Item
Device
Range
Function
When timer attains,
T0~T255, 256 points
the contact will be

On.
Register WORD data
For general
When timer attains,
the contact will be On.
D0~D199, 200 points (*1)

D200~D999, 800 points (*3)
Data
For latched*
D2000~D4999, 3000 points

(*3)
register
For special
D1000~D1999, 1000 points
For index indication
E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points (*1)
It is the memory area

for storing data. E and
Total is
F can be used as
5000 points
special purpose of
index indication
It is expansion
None File register *
K0~K1599 (1600 points) (*4)
register for storing

data
Master control nested
N0~N7, 8 points
P0~P255, 256 points
Pointer
External interrupt
For
interrupt
Time interrupt
High-speed counter
reaches interrupt
The control point of

The location point of
CJ, CALL
I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6

points
I6, I7, 2 points (1~99ms,
time base=0.1ms)

interrupt subroutine.
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
Constant
Communication interrupt I150

K
Decimal number system
Hexadecimal number system
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
*1: non-latched area is fixed, it cant be changed.

*2: non-latched area can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.
*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.
*4: latched area is fixed, it cant be modified. (the area marked withcant be changed)
2-3
2 DVP-PLC Function
Latched setting for each EP/SA model:
M
Auxiliary relay
For general
For latched
Special auxiliary relay
Latched
M0~M511
M512~M999
Factory setting is
latched
M1000~M1999
M2000~M4095
It is fixed to be
non-latched
T
Timer
Start: D1200(K512)
End: D1201(K999)
Factory setting is latched

Start: D1202(K2000)
End: D1203(K4095)
100 ms
10 ms
10ms
1 ms
100 ms
T0 ~T199
T200~T239
T240~T245
T246~T249
T250~T255
It is fixed to be
non-latched
It is fixed to be
non-latched
16 bits count up
C0~C95
C96~C199
It is fixed to be
latched
Start: D1208
It is fixed to be
K96
non-latched
End: D1209
K199
For
Special
Latched
general
register
S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S511
C
Counter
Some are latched and

cant be changed
Accumulative type
It is fixed to be latched
32 bits count up/down

C200~C215
It is fixed to
be
non-latched
C216~C234
It is fixed to be
latched
Start: D1210
K216
End: D1211
K234
32 bits count up/down high

speed counter
C235~C255
Start: D1212K235
End: D1213K255
Latched
For general
S512~S895
S896~S1023
It is fixed to be non-latched
Start: D1214K512
End: D1215K895
For general
Latched
Special register
Latched
D0~D199
D200~D999
D1000~D1999
D2000~D9999
Factory setting is
latched
It is fixed to be
non-latched
cant be changed
Start: D1216 (K200)
Start: D1218 (K2000)
End: D1217 (K999)
End: D1219 (K4999)
S
Step relay
D
Register
K0~K1599
Data Register
EH model:
Relay bit mode
Type
Item
Device
X0~X377, 256 points, octal number system
Y0~Y377, 256 points, octal number system
For general
M
Auxiliary For latched

relay
For special
100ms
Timer
10ms
1ms
2-4
Range
M0~M499, 500 points (*2)

M500~M999, 500 points (*3)
M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3)
M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some are
latched)
T0~T199, 200 points (*2)
T192~T199 is for subroutine
T250~T255, 6-point Accumulative type (*4)
T200~T239, 40 points (*2)
Function
Total
is
512
points
Corresponds to
Corresponds to
Total
is
4096
points
Contacts can be
switched between
On/Off in the program
(some is latched)
Total
is
256
points
When the timer that

set by TMR
command attains, the
T contact with the
same number will be
On.
2 DVP-PLC Function
Type
Item
Device
16-bit count up
C
32-bit count
Counter up/down
High-speed
counter
Register WORD data
Step
points
Function
C0~C99, 100 points (*2)

C100~C199, 100 points (*3)
Total
C200~C219, 20 points (*2)
is
C220~C234, 15 points (*3)
253
C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 10 points (*3) points
C246~C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4 points(*3)
C251~C254, 2-phases 2 inputs, 4 points (*3)
When the timer that

set by CNT(DCNT)
command attains, the
contact C will be On.
Initial step
point
For zero point
return
For general
For latched
S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command) Total

is
(*2)
1024
ladder diagram (SFC)
S20~S499, 480 points (*2)
points
S500~S899, 400 points (*3)
For alarm
S900~S1023, 124 points (*3)
S0~S9, 10 points (*2)
T0~T255, 256 points
When timer attains,

will be On.

When timer attains,

will be On.
For general
D
Data
register
For latched
For special
For index
None File register
D0~D199, 200 points, (*2)

D200~D999, 800 points (*3)
D2000~D9999, 8000 points (*3)
D1000~D1999, 1000 points
E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points (*1)
For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points
Interrupt
Pointer
It is the memory area

Total is for storing data. E
10000 and F can be used as
points special purpose of
index indication
K0~K9999(10000 points) (*4)
Constant
Range
N0~N7, 8 points
Expansion register for

storing data
control point
The location pointer of
CJ, CALL
External interrupt
I00(X0), I10(X1), I20(X2), I30(X3), I40

(X4), I50(X5), 6 points
(=1, rising-edge trigger
, =0, falling-edge
trigger
)
Time interrupt
I6, I7, I8, 3 points(1~99ms) time

base=1ms
I8, 1 point (1~99, time base=0.1ms)
High-speed counter
attained interrupt
Pulse interrupt
Communication
interrrupt
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points

I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
I150
Decimal system
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit
operation)
Hexadecimal system

2-5
2 DVP-PLC Function
*1: the area of non-latched is fixed, it cant be changed.
*2: the area of non-latched, it can be changed to latched area by parameter setting.
*3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting.
*4: latched area is fixed, it cant be modified. (the area marked withcant be changed)
Latched setting for each EH model:

M
Auxiliary relay
For general
For latched
Special auxiliary relay
Latched
M0~M499
M500~M999
M1000~M1999
M2000~M4095

they cant be changed.
Start: D1202(K2000)
End: D1203(K4095)
Start: D1200(K500)
End: D1201(K999)
100 ms
T
Timer
C
Counter
S
Step relay
10 ms
10ms
1 ms
T0 ~T199
T200~T239
T240~T245
T246~T249
T250~T255
Factory setting is
Factory setting is
non-latched
non-latched
Accumulative type
Fixed latched
Start: D1204 (HFFFF)*1 Start: D1206 (HFFFF)*1
End: D1205 (HFFFF)*1 End: D1207 (HFFFF)*1
16-bit count up
32-bit high-speed count up/down
C0~C99
C100~C199
C200~C219
C220~C234
C235~C245
C246~C255
Non-latched
Latched
Non-latched
Latched (default)
Latched (default)
(default)
(default)
(default)
Start: D1208 (K100)
Start: D1210 (K220)
Start: D1212 (K235)
End: D1209 (K199)
End: D1211 (K234)
End: D1213 (K255)
Zero point
For general
Latched
Step point for alarm
Initial
return
S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S499
S500~S899
S900~S1023
Non-latched (default)
Latched (default)
Always is latched
Start: D1214 (K500)

End: D1215 (K899)
D
Register
100 ms
For general
Latched
Special register
Latched
D0~D199
D200~D999
D1000~D1999
D2000~D9999
Non-latched (default)
Latched (default)
Latched (default)
Some is latched, it cant
be changed
Start: D1216 (K200)

End: D1217 (K999)
Start: D1218 (K2000)

End: D1219 (K9999)
* 1: HFFFF means factory setting is non-latched.

When switching between power On/Off or MPU RUN/STOP mode, the memory type of version 5.5 and higher of ES,
ES/EX/SS series will be as following:
Memory type
Power
Off=>On
Non-latched
Clear
Latched
Special M,
Special D,
index register
2-6
STOP=>RUN
RUN=>STOP
When M1033=Off, clear

When M1033=On, unchanged
Unchanged
Initial
Unchanged
Clear all M1031

Clear all M1032
Non-latched
latched area
area
Factory
setting
Clear
Unchanged
Unchanged
Clear
Unchanged
Unchanged
Initial
setting
2 DVP-PLC Function
The memory type of EP/SA/EH models will be as following:
Memory type
Power
Off=>On
Non-latched
Clear
STOP=>RUN
RUN=>STOP
When M1033=Off, clear
Unchanged
Initial
Unchanged
Unchanged
Clear
Unchanged
File Register
Factory
setting
Clear
When M1033=On, No change
Latched
Special M,
Special D,
index register
Clear all M1031

Clear all M1032
Non-latched
latched area
area
Initial
setting
Unchanged
Unchanged
2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H]

K
Decimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)

K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation)
Hexadecimal

Constant
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the
explanation of value types.
1.
Binary Number (BIN)

It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the
following.
Bit
Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble
It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent

number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte
It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0). It can used to

represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word
It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to

represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double Word
It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to

represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows.
DW
Double Word
W1
W0
BY3
NB7
BY2
NB6
NB5
Word
BY1
NB4
NB3
BY0
NB2
NB1
Byte
NB0
Nibble
Bit
2.
Octal Number (OCT)
The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17(device number)
2-7
2 DVP-PLC Function
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17(device number)
3.
Decimal Number (DEC)
The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.

To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
To be the device number of S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
4.
BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD)

It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the
four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output
value to 7-segment display to be display.
5.
Hexadecimal Number (HEX)
The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.

To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in
decimal number.
Exception:
The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For
example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately.
Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100 means 100 in
hexadecimal number.
Reference Chart:
Binary
(BIN)
Octal
(OCT)
For PLC internal operation

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2-8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Decimal
(DEC)
BCD
(Binary Code Decimal)
Hexadecimal
(HEX)
Constant K,
For DIP Switch and 7-segment
Equipment
Constant H
equipment M, S, T, C,
display
X, Y number
D, E, F, P, I number
0
0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0
1
1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
1
2
2
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
2
3
3
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
3
4
4
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
4
5
5
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1
5
6
6
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
6
7
7
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
7
10
8
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
8
11
9
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
9
12
10
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0
A
13
11
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
B
14
12
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
C
15
13
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 1
D
2 DVP-PLC Function
Binary
(BIN)
Octal
(OCT)
For PLC internal operation

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
:
:
:
0 1 1 0
0 0 1 1
Decimal
(DEC)
BCD
(Binary Code Decimal)
Hexadecimal
(HEX)
Constant K,
For DIP Switch and 7-segment
Equipment
Constant H
equipment M, S, T, C,
display
X, Y number
D, E, F, P, I number
16
14
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0
E
17
15
0 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
F
20
16
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
10
21
17
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 1
11
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
143
99
1 0 0 1
1 0 0 1
63
2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y]
Input/output contact number:(octal number)
For MPU, the number of input and output contact will be counted from X0 and Y0. The number will be changed
with points of MPU. For I/O expansion unit, the number of input / output terminal is counted with the connection
sequence of MPU.
For ES, EX, SS Models:
Model no DVP-14ES DVP-14SS DVP-20EX
DVP-24ES
DVP-32ES
DVP-60ES
Expansion I/O
Input X
X0~X7
(8 Points)
X0~X7
(8 Points)
X0~X7
(8 Points)
X0~X17
(16 Points)
X0~X17
(16 Points)
X0~X43
(36 Points)
X20(X50)~X177
(Note)
Output Y
Y0~Y5
(6 Points)
Y0~Y5
(6 Points)
Y0~Y5
(6 Points)
Y0~Y7
(8 Points)
Y0~Y17
(16 Points)
Y0~Y27
(24 Points)
Y20(Y30)~Y177
(Note)
Note: Besides DVP-60ES, the started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output
number of expansion unit from Y20. The started input number of DVP-60ES is X50 and the started
output number of DVP-60ES is Y30. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is
less than 8 points, it will count with 8 points.
EP/SA model:
Model no
DVP-12SA (Note1)
DVP-14EP
DVP-32EP
Expansion I/O
Input X
X0~X7 (8 points)
X0~X7 (8 points)
X0~X17 (16 points)
X20~X177 (note 2)
Output Y
Y0~Y3 (4 points)
Y0~Y7 (8 points)
Y0~Y17 (16 points)
Y20~Y177 (note 2)
Note 1: All SA functions are the same as EP except function expansion card. All SA expansion units share
with SS series.
Note 2: The started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output number of
expansion unit from Y20. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is less than
8 points, it will count with 8 points.
2-9
2 DVP-PLC Function
EH model:
Model no DVP-16EH
DVP-20EH
DVP-32EH
DVP-48EH
DVP-64EH
DVP-80EH
Expansion I/O
Input X
X0~X7
(8 points)
X0~X13(12
points)
X0~X17
(16 points)
X0~X27
(24 points)
X0~X37
(32 points)
X0~X47
(40 points)
X20~X377
(note)
Output Y
Y0~Y7
(8 points)
Y0~Y7(8
points)
Y0~Y17
(16 points)
Y0~Y27
(24 points)
Y0~Y37
(32 points)
Y0~Y47
(40 points)
Y20~Y377
(note)
Note: Besides DVP-16EH and DVP-20EH, the started input/output number of expansion unit starts with
the last number of MPU. The started input number of DVP-60EH is X20 and the started output
number of DVP-60EH is Y20. The numbers of expansion I/O are sequential numbers. The input
number can be up to X377 and output number can be up to Y377.
Input relay: X0~X377
The number of input relay (or called input terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be up
to 256 points, the range as follows: X0~X7, X10~X17, , X370~X377.
Output relay: Y0~Y377
The number of output relay (or called output terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be
up to 256 points, the range as follows: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17, , Y370~Y377.
Input/output contact Function:
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input
equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The
On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but cant be changed by using
peripheral equipment (HPP or WPLSoft).
( There is a special relay M1304 in EH model to force input contact X On/Off by peripheral equipment
HPP or WPLSoft, but PLC wont receive any external input signal at this time.)
Output contact Y Function:
The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off
signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage
times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for output coil Y and it is
recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last
output Y with PLC program scan method.
2-10
2 DVP-PLC Function
X0
2 , i.e.
The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit
Y0
decided by On/Off of X10.
Y0 is repeated
X10
2
Y0
The Handling Process of PLC Program (Batch I/O)
Input signal
Input signal:
input X
1.
memory of input signal before executing
input terminal
program.
read in memory
2.
Input signal memory
Y0
read Y0 state from memory
Y0
M0
Device Memory
Write Y0 state into
X0
The input signal state in memory wont change

if On/Off of the input signal changes during
read X0 state from memory
Program
PLC will read the On/Off of input signal into the
executing. The new On/Off state will be read

into memory in the next scan.
3.
signal OnOff or OffOn to the contact will be

10ms.
Write M0 state into
Program:
PLC executes each command in program from
output
Output
The delay time from the changes of external
address 0 after reading On/Off state of input
output latched memory
signal in input signal memory and save each

On/Off of output coil into each equipment
output terminal
Y output
memory.
Output:
1.
When executing END command, send On/Off

state of Y in memory to output latched memory.
In fact, this memory is the coil of output relay.
2.
The delay time from the change of OnOff or

OffOn of relay coil to contact On/Off.
2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M]

The number of auxiliary relay:(decimal number)
ES, EX, SS models:
For general
Auxiliary relay
For latched
M
For special
M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

M512~M767, 256 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
M1000~M1279, 280 points. Some are latched.
Total is
1280
points
2-11
2 DVP-PLC Function
EP/SA models:
For general
Auxiliary relay
For latched
M
M0~M511, 512 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

Total is
M512~M999, M2000~M4095, 2584 points. It can be changed to
4096
non-latched area by parameters.
points
For special
M1000~M1999, 1000 points.
For general
M0~M499, 500 points. It can be changed to latched area by setting

parameters.
EH models:
Auxiliary relay
M
For latched
For special
Total is
M500~M999, M2000~M4095, 2596 points. It can be changed to 4096
points
non-latched area by setting parameters.
M1000~M1999, 1000 points. Some are latched.
Auxiliary Relay Function

There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in
program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but cant drive external load directly. There are three types
divided by its characteristics.
1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to OFF when power loss during running. Its state will be OFF when
power on after power loss.
2. Auxiliary relay for latched : The state will be saved when power loss during running and the state when
power on after power loss will be the same as the state before power loss.
3. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please dont use undefined
auxiliary relay. Please refer to 2.10 Special relay and special register for each
special auxiliary relay and 2.11 Functions of special auxiliary relay and special
registers.
2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S]

The numbering of auxiliary relay (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS models:
Step relay S
Initial latched
S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
Zero point
return latched
S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be Total is

128
latched area.
points
Latched
For initial
S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
For zero point
S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be
return
non-latched area.
For general
S20~S511, 492 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
EP/SA Models:
Step relay S
For latched
For alarm
2-12
S512~S895, 384 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area
Total is
1024
points
by parameters.
2 DVP-PLC Function
EH Models:
Step relay S
For initial
S0~S9, 10 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.
For zero point
S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command). It can be latched
return
area by setting parameters.
For general
For latched
For alarm
Total is
S20~S499, 480 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. 1024
S500~S899, 400 points. It can be non-latched area by setting points
parameters.
S900~S1023, 124 points. It can be latched area by setting
parameters.
The function of step relay:

Step relay S is the basic equipment of step ladder diagram and it can set process easily in PLC. In step ladder
diagram (or call Sequential Function Chart, SFC), it should be used with command STL, REL and etc.
There are 1024 points, S0~S1023, in step relay S. Like output relay Y, there are output coil and A, B contacts in
each step relay S and unlimited usage times in program. But it cant drive external load directly. Step relay (S) can be
used as general auxiliary relay when not use with step command. There are four types divided by its characteristics.
1. Initial step relay
: S0~S9, 10 points.
In Sequential Function Chart (SFC), it is the step point for initiating.
2.
Zero point return step

relay
: S10~S19, 10 points.
S10 S19 are for zero point return when using API 60 IST in program. If it cant
use IST command, they will be used as general step relay.
3.
General step relay
: EP/SA model: S20~S511, 492 points. EH mode: S20~S499, 480 points.

Those step points that are used as general in sequential function chart (SFC).
They will be cleared when power loss after running.
4.
Latched step relay
: ES, EX, SS models: S20~S127, 108 points. EP models: S512~S895,

384points. EH models: S500~S899, 400 points.
In sequential function chart (SFC), latched step relay will be saved when power
loss after running. The state of power on after power loss will be the same as
the sate before power loss.
5.
Step relay for alarm
: EP/SA models: S896~S1023, 128 points. EH models: S900~S1023, 124

points.
The step relay for alarm uses with alarm drive command API 46 ANS to be the
contact for alarm. It is used to record warning and eliminate external
malfunction.
2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T]

The numbering of timer (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS models:
100ms for general T0~T63, 64 points
Timer T
10ms for general

1ms for general
T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms. when M1028=Off, it

is 100ms)
T127, 1 points
Total is
128
points
2-13
2 DVP-PLC Function
EP/SA model:
Timer T
100ms for general

100ms for
accumulative
10ms for general
10ms for
accumulative
1ms for
accumulative
T0~T199, 200 points. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.)

T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area.
T200~T239, 40 points.
Total is
256
points
EH model:
100ms for general
Timer T
100ms for
accumulative
10ms for general
10ms for
accumulative
1ms for
accumulative
T0~T199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.

(T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.)
T200~T239, 40 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters.
Total is
256
points
Timer function:
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be ON when the
present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as
settings.
The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
There are three types divided by these characteristics as follows.
1.
General timer:
ES/EP/SA Series
Models
EH Series Models
General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if
timer attains when executing command TMR.
General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if
X0
TMR
T0
K100
T0
Y0
When X0=On, timer T0 is counted up with

100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present
value of timer equals to setting (K100).
10 sec
When X0=Off or power off, timer T0 will be
X0
present
T0 value
cleared to 0 and output coil T0 will be OFF.
K100
Y0
2.
2-14
Accumulative timer:
2 DVP-PLC Function
ES/EP Series Models :
EH Series Models
X0
T250
TMR
K100
T250
Y0
T1
T2
T1+T2=10sec
When X0=On, timer T250 is counted up with

100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present
value of timer equals to settings (K100).
If X0=Off or power off during counting, timer
T250 pauses and keep on counting after X0=On. The
present value counts up till the present value of timer
equals to settings (K100), output coil T0=On.
X0
K100
present
T250 value
Y0
3.
Timer for subroutine

If timer is used in subroutine or have interrupt in subroutine, use timer T192~T194 for it.
ES/EP Series Models :
EH Series Models
If general timer is used in subroutine or interrupt to insert in subroutine and the subroutine wont be executed,
timer cant count correctly.
Designate method of settings: actual setting time of timer = unit * settings.
1.
Designate constant K: Settings designates constant K directly
2.
Designate indirectly D: Settings use data register D to be indirect designation
The detail of timer:

Beside timer used for subroutine, the flow chart of general timer is in the following:
When X0=On,
it starts to count.
input reflash
Timer will start when executing TMR command.

If scan time is longer, same scan will count with
plural timing pulse automatically.
X0
TMR
T0
K100
contact T0 is On
T0 counts to
10sec now,
but contact
isnOn.
T0
contact Y0=On
Y0
1st scan
2nd scan
Nth scan
(N+1)th scan
From action above, the action since the coil is started to be ON in detail are in the following:
T
+T0
-
:
1ms timer is 0.001 second, 10ms timer is 0.01 second, 100ms timer is 0.1 second
Setting time of timer (second)
T0
Scan time (second)
2-15
2 DVP-PLC Function
If contact is wrote prior to TMR command in program, it needs to add 2*T0 (two times scan time) in the worst
situation.
If timer setting is 0, output contact will be ON when TMR command is executed in the next time.
2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]

The numbering of counter (by decimal number):
ES, EX, SS model:
Counter C

High speed counters C
16 bits count up for

C0~C111, 112 points
general
C112~C127, 16 points. it is always latched area
Total is
latched
141
C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points. It is always
points
1-phase input
latched area
1-phase 2 inputs
C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It is always latched area
2-phase inputs
C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It is always latched area
EP/SA models:
Counter C

High speed counters C

general
latched
32 bits count
up/down for
general
32 bits count
up/down for
latched
1-phase input for
latched
1-phase 2 inputs
for latched
2-phase 2 inputs
for latched
C0~C95, 96 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.

C96~C199, 104 points. It can be non-latched area by setting
parameters.
C200~C215, 15 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area.
Total is
C216~C234, 19 points. It can be changed to be non-latched 250
points
area by setting parameters.
C235~C242, C244, 9 points. It can be changed to be
C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It can be changed to be
C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It can be changed to be
EH models:
16-bit count up for
general
16-bit count up for
latched
Counter C
for general
for latched
Software 1-phase 1
input
Hardware 1-phase 1
32 bits count up/down input
High-speed counters C Hardware 1-phase 2
inputs
Hardware 1-phase 2
inputs
C0~C99, 100 points. It can be changed to be latched area

by parameters.
C100~C199, 100 points. It can be changed to be
non-latched area by parameters.
C200~C219, 20 points. It can be changed to be latched area
by parameters.
C220~C234, 15 points. It can be changed to be non-latched
Total is
area by parameters.
253
points
area by parameters.
area by parameters.
area by parameters.
area by parameters.
Features:
2-16
2 DVP-PLC Function
Item
16 bits counters
Type
Count
direction
Settings
Designate for
constant
Present
value change
Output
contact
Reset action
Present
register
Contact
action
General
32 bits counters
General
High speed
Count up
0~32,767
Constant K or data register D
Count up/down
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
Counter will stop when attaining Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings
settings
When count attains settings, When count up attains settings, contact will be ON and latched.
contact will be ON and latched. When count down attains settings, contact will reset to OFF.
The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to OFF.
16 bits
After scanning, act together.
32 bits
After scanning, act
together.
Act immediately when count attains. It

has no relation with scan period.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from OFF to ON, the present value of counter equals to settings and output
coil is ON. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C199:
1.
Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be ON
immediately at the first count.
2.
General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value
before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss.
3.
If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at
the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the
same as settings.
4.
The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1999)
to be indirect setting.
5.
If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be
positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768.
Example:
LD
X0
RST
C0
LD
X1
CNT
C0 K5
LD
C0
OUT
Y0
X0
RST
C0
CNT
C0
X1
K5
C0
Y0
2-17
2 DVP-PLC Function
1. When X0=On, RST command is executed,
C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to
OFF.
X0
2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will

count up (add 1).
X1
3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0

contact is ON and C0 = setting =K5. C0
wont accept X1 trigger signal and C0
remains K5.
5
4
C0
present
value
settings
2
1
0
Contacts Y0, C0
32-bit general addition/subtraction counters C200~C234:
1. The setting range of general 32-bit counter is K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. (not for DVP ES, EX and SS
MPU)
2. Special auxiliary relay used to switch count up/down of general 32-bit addition/subtraction counters decided by
M1200~M123. For example: When M1200=Off, C200 is for addition. When M1200=On, C200 is for
subtraction.
3. Settings can be constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1999 is not included) and also can
be positive/negative number. If using data register D, it will occupy two continuous data register.
4. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If it is latched counter, counter will save the present
value and the contacts state and keep on counting when power is on after power loss.
5. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way, once
counter counts down to -2,147,483,648 the next value will be 2,147,483,647.
Example:
2-18
LD
X10
OUT
M1200
LD
X11
RST
C200
LD
X12
CNT
C200 K-5
LD
C200
OUT
Y0
X10
M1200
X11
RST
C200
DCNT
C200
X12
K-5
C200
Y0
2 DVP-PLC Function
1. X10 drives M1200 to decide C200 is
addition or subtraction.
2. When X11 is from Off to ON and RST
X10
gradual
increase
gradual
increase
gradual decrease
X11
command is executed, C200 will be clear X12

to 0 and contact will be off.
3.
C200
When X12 is from Off to On, counter present
value
will add one (count up) or subtract 1 (count
down).
4. When counter C200 is from K-6 to K-5,
output contact
is On before.
the contact of C200 is from Off to On. contacts

When counter C200 is from K-5 to K-6, the Y0, C0
-1
0
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-8
contact of C200 will be from On to Off.

5. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the
next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same
as settings.
32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C254:
1.
Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is : K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647.
2.
The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C244 is decided by the On/Off of
special auxiliary relay M1235~M1244. For example: if M1235=Off, C235 is addition and if M1235=On,
C235 is subtraction.
3.
The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C246~C254 is decided by the On/Off of
special auxiliary relay M1246~M1254. For example: if M1246=Off, C246 is addition and if M1246=On,
C246 is subtraction.
4.
The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D (special data
register D1000~D1999 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data
register.
5.
If using DMOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value which is large than setting to any high-speed
counter, at the next time that input point X of counter is from Off to On, this contact doesnt have any
change and it will do addition and subtraction with present value.
6.
The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way,
once counter counts down to -2,147,483,648, the next value will be 2,147,483,647.
2-19
2 DVP-PLC Function
High-speed counter for ES / EX / SS series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 5KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.
Type
Input
C235
X0
U/D
X1
X2
X3
C236
U/D
1-phase input
C237 C238 C241
U/D
R
U/D
U/D
C242
C244
U/D
R
U/D
R
1-phase 2 inputs
C246 C247 C249
U
U
U
D
D
D
R
R
S
U:
Increasing
A:
A phase input
S:
Start input
D:
Decreasing
B:
B phase input
R:
Clear input
2-phase inputs
C251 C252 C254
A
A
A
B
B
B
R
R
S
Input points X0 and X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 40KHz.
High-speed counter for EP/SA series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 10KHz, total frequency: 40KHz.
Type
1-phase input
1-phase 2 inputs
2-phase inputs
Input
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
X0
U/D
U/D
U/D
U
U
U
A
A
A
X1
U/D
R
R
D
D
D
B
B
B
X2
U/D
U/D
R
R
R
R
X3
U/D
R
S
S
S
X4
U/D
X5
U/D
U:
Increasing
A:
A phase input
S:
Start input
D:
Decreasing
B:
B phase input
R:
Clear input
1.
Input point X0, X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 20KHz
2.
There are two functions for input points X5

When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.
When M1260=On, it is Global reset for C235~C239.
C235~C240 are high-speed counters for EH series and they are program interrupted 1-phase high-speed
counter (10KHz) and total frequency is 20KHz. C241~ C254 are Hardware High Speed Counter, is called HHSC.
pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC 1 can up to 100 KHz; HHSC2 and HHSC3 can up to 30KHz (both of
single phase and AB phase).
C241, C246, C251 share HHSC0
1. Each HHSC can be used for a number one time and it uses command DCNT to designate.
2. There are three modes for each HHSC:
2-20
A.
1-phase input, it is called Pulse/Direction mode
B.
1-phase 2 inputs, it is called CW/CCW mode
C.
2-phase inputs, it is called AB phase mode

2 DVP-PLC Function
Type
Type
Input
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
Program-interrupted 1-phase
High-speed Counter
1-phase input
Hardware High-speed Counter

1-phase input
1-phase 2 inputs
2-phase inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
U/D
U/D
U
D
R
S
U/D
U/D
R
S
U/D
U/D
U/D
A
B
R
S
U
D
R
S
U/D
R
S
A
B
R
S
U/D
U
D
R
S
R
S
U/D
A
B
R
S
U
D
R
S
R
S
U:
Increasing
A:
A phase input
S:
Start input
D:
Decreasing
B:
B phase input
R:
Clear input
A
B
R
S
3. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:

A.
There are Reset signal and Start signal of external inputs in HHSC0~3. It also can be Reset signal
by setting special M, M1272 (HHSC0), M1274 (HHSC1), M1276 (HHSC2) and M1278 (HHSC3).
And it can be Start signal by setting special M, M1273 (HHSC0), M1275 (HHSC1), M1277
(HHSC2) and M1279 (HHSC3).
B.
If input external control signals of R and S arent used when using high-speed counter, the
function of input signal can be closed by setting M1264/ M1266/ M1268/ M1270 and M1265 /
M1267/ M1269/ M1271 to True. The corresponding external input can be used as general inputs.
Please refer following for using.
C.
When using special M to be high-speed counter, control input with START and TRSET and the
action will be affected with scan time.
2-21
2 DVP-PLC Function
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3
X0
X4
Counting pulse
X14
X10
Current value
of counter
U/D
U
A
HHSC0
HHSC1

X1
X5
X11
Comparator
HHSC2
Counting pulse
X15
Comparison value
reached setting
B
HHSC3
DHSCS occupies one group setting value

DHSCR occupies one group setting value

D1225
D1226
D1227
Setting value:0~3 respectively

represent Mode 1~4
(1~4 frequency mode )
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D mode setting flag
HHSC0 M1246
M1251
C241
M1241
HHSC1 M1247
M1252
HHSC2 M1248
M1253
C242
M1242
C243
M1243
Comparison value DHSCZ occupies two groups setting value

reached output
Counting
up/down flag
Counting mode
selection
D1228
C244
M1244
HHSC3 M1249
High speed
comparison
command
M1254
DHSCS
SET/RESET
DHSCR
I 010 ~ I 060 interrupt

counting value reset
DHSCZ
X2
X6
X12
X16
M1264
M1266
M1268
M1270
M1272
M1274
M1276
M1278
I 010 M1289
I 020 M1290
I 030 M1291
I 040 M1292
I 050 M1293
I 060 M1294
AND
OR
Comparison value
reached operation
Reset signal R
Interrupt inhibit flag
X3
X7
X13
X17
M1265
M1267
M1269
M1271
M1273
M1275
M1277
M1279
AND
OR
Start signal S
4. Counting mode selection

ES/EX/SS/EP high-speed counter uses special D1022 in 2-phase inputs counting mode to select
double frequency mode. D1022 content will be loaded in at the first scan time when PLC switches
from STOP to RUN. (ES/EX/SS series MPU (V5.5 and higher) supports this function.
Device No.
D1022
Functions
Double frequency setting of counter counting method
D1022=K1
Normal frequency mode
D1022=K2
Double frequency mode (factory setting)
D1022=K4
Four times frequency mode
Double frequency mode (, means the action of counting)

Counting
mode
1
2-22
(normal frequency)
2-phase
inputs
Wave for counting mode
A-phase
B-phase
counting up
counting down
2 DVP-PLC Function
Counting
mode
Wave for counting mode
A-phase
(double
frequency)
B-phase
counting up
counting down
A-phase
4 (four times
frequency)
B-phase
counting up
counting down
There are 1 to 4 times frequency for EH hardware high-speed counter (HHSC0~3) and set by Special D1225~D1228.
Facotry setting is double frequency.
Type
Special
D(settings)
1(normal
frequency)
1-phase input
2(double
frequency)
Count down (-1)
U/D
U/D FLAG
U/D
U/D FLAG
1(normal
frequency)
2(double
frequency)
1(normal
frequency)
2(double
frequency)
3(three times
frequency)
4(four times
frequency)
1-phase 2
inputs
2-phase 2
inputs
Count up (+1)
5. Device number and special registers for high-speed counter

Device number
Functions
M1150
M1151
M1152
Declare DHSZ command to be used for multi-group setting comparison mode

Multi-group setting comparison finishes to execute a cycle
Declare DHSZ command to be used in frequency control mode
2-23
2 DVP-PLC Function
Device number
Functions
M1153
M1264
M1265
M1266
M1267
M1268
M1269
M1270
M1271
M1272
M1273
M1274
M1275
Frequency control finishes executing.

C235 ~ C244 are count direction of high-speed counters.
When M12=Off, C2 is count up. When M12=On, C2 is count
down.
C246 ~ C249, C251 ~ C254 are monitor count direction of high-speed
counters.
When C2 counts up, M12=Off. When C2 count down, M12
=On.
Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC0
Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0
External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0
External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1
M1276
M1277
M1278
M1279
M1289
M1290
M1291
M1292
M1293
M1294
M1312
M1313
M1314
M1315
M1316
M1317
M1320
M1321
M1322
M1323
M1324
M1325
M1326
M1327
M1328
M1329
M1330
M1331

Disable high-speed counter interrupt insert I010~I060
Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I010
C235 Start input point control
C235 Reset input point control
C235 Start/Reset enable control
M1235 ~ M1244
M1246 ~ M1249
M1251 ~ M1254
2-24
2 DVP-PLC Function
Device number
Functions
M1332
M1333
D1022

ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models double frequency selection of AB phase counter
The register to record the comparison item of settings comparison mode of
multi-group
The register to record the comparison item of frequency control mode
Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the high word of pulse
output frequency.
Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the low word of pulse
output frequency.
First group counter setting, C241, C246 and C251 counting mode
Second group counter setting, C242, C247 and C252 counting mode
Third group counter setting, C243, C248 and C253 counting mode
4th group counter setting, C244, C249 and C254 counting mode
HHSC0~ HHSC3 counting mode of EH hardware high-speed counter
When setting to 1, it is normal frequency. Setting to 2 is double
frequency.(Factory setting)
Setting to 3 is three times frequency and setting to 4 is four times frequency.
D1150
D1151
D1152
D1153
D1225
D1226
D1227
D1228
D1225 ~ D1228
1-phase inputs high-speed counter:

Example:
LD
X10
RST
C241
LD
X11
OUT
M1241
LD
X12
DCNT
C241 K5
LD
C241
OUT
Y0
1.
X11 drives M1241 to decide C241 is

addition or subtraction.
2.
When X10=On and RST command is
executed, clear C241 to 0 and reset
output contact to off.
3.
When X12=On, C241 receives count
signal from X0 and counter will count up
(+1) or count down (-1).
4.
When counter C241 attains settings
K5, C241 will be ON. If there is still
signal input for X0, it will keep on
counting.
X10
RST
C241
X11
M1241
X12
DCNT
C241
K5
C241
Y0
counting down
X11,M1241 contact
counting up
X10
X12
X0
C241
present
value
7
5
4
3
4
0
1
0
Y0, C241 contact
2-25
2 DVP-PLC Function
5.
C241 for ES, EX, SS, EP series has external input Reset X1 signal.
6.
C241 for EH series has external input Reset signal (X2), Start signal (X3).
7.
EH series external input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact
of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8.
EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of
start signal is disabled by M1273.
9.
Counting mode (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be set by D1225.
Factory setting is double frequency.
1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counters:

Example:
1.
LD
X10
RST
C246
LD
X11
DCNT
C246 K5
LD
C246
OUT
Y0
When X10=On and RST command is executed,

clear C246 to 0 and reset output contact to off.
2.
When X11=On, C246 receives count signal

from X0 input terminal and counter will count up
(+1) or receive count signal from X1 input
terminal and counter will count down (-1).
X10
RST
C246
DCNT
C246
X11
K5
C246
Y0
X10
X11
X0
count up
X1
count down
C246
present
value
7
5
3.
When C246 attains settings K5, C246 will be

on. After C246 is ON, if there is counter pulse
input, C246 will keep on counting.
3
2
4
0
1
0
Y0, C246 contact
4.
C246 for EH series has external input Reset signal X2 or Start signal X3.
5.
C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be normal frequency or double frequency by setting D1225. Factory setting
is double frequency.
6.
EH series external input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input
contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1265.
7.
EH series internal input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input
contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1273.
2-26
2 DVP-PLC Function
2-phase AB input high-speed counter:
Example:
LD
X10
X10
RST
C251
LD
X11
DCNT
C251 K5
LD
C251
OUT
Y0
RST
C251
DCNT
C251
X11
K5
C251
Y0
1.
When X11=On, RST command is executed and reset C251 to 0, output contact is reset to off.
2.
C251 receives A phase counting signal of X0 input terminal and B phase counting signal of X1 input
terminal to execute add 1 (count up) or subtract 1 (count down) when X12=on. EH series can set different
frequency for counting mode.
3.
When counter C251 attains settings K5, C251 contact will be ON. After C251 is On, if there is counter
pulse input, C251 will keep on counting.
4.
For ES/EP/SA series, it can be set to normal frequency, double frequency or four times frequency by
D1022 (counting mode setting). Factory setting is double frequency.
5.
EH series C251 has external input reset signal X2 and start signal X3.
6.
The counting mode (normal frequency, double frequency, third times frequency, four times frequency) of
EH series C251 (HHSC0) can be set by D1225. Factory setting is double frequency.
7.
EH series external input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input
contact of start signal is disabled by M1265.
8.
EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input
contact of start signal is disabled by M1273.
ES/EX/SS, EP/SA series:
X10
X11
A-phase X0
B-phase X1
C251 present value
3
1
0
Counting up
Counting down
1
0
Y0, C251 contact
2-27
2 DVP-PLC Function
EH series:(double frequency)
X10
X11
A-phase
X0
B-phase
X1
C251
present
value
2
1
0
counting up
counting down
1
0
Y0. C251 contact
2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F]

2.8.1 Data register [D]
It is used to store numerical data and data length is 16-bit (-32,768~+32,767). The left-most bit is sign bit. Two
16-bit registers also can be combined to a 32-bit register (The number for each 32-bit register will be (D0, D1), (D2,
D3) ..and the number for upper bit will be greater than low bit.) The left-most bit sign bit and the store range is
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647.
ES, EX, SS model:
Data register D
For general
D0~D407, 408 points
For latched *
D408~D599, 192 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
Special
D1000~D1143, 144 points. (Some are latched area)
Index register E, F
E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points
For general
D0~D199, 200 points. (It is fixed to be unlatched area)
Total is
744
points
EP/SA model:
Data register D
File register
2-28
For latched
D200~D999, D2000~D4999, 3800 points. (It can be used to

be unlatched area by setting parameter.)
Special
D1000~D1999, 1000 points. (Some are latched area)
Index register E, F
E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points
Total is
5000
points
K0~K1599, MPU 1600 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
2 DVP-PLC Function
EH model:
For general
Data register D For latched
D0~D199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting

parameter
D200~D999,
D2000~D9999,
8800points.
It
can
non-latched area by setting parameter
For special
D1000~D1999, 1000 pints. Some are latched.
Index register E, F
E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points.
be Total is
10000
points
K0~K9999, MPU is 1000 points. (It is fixed to be latched area)
File register
There are five types of register which sorts by characters in the following:
1.
General register
: The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or
power is off. If M1033=On when PLC switches from Run to STOP, data wont be
cleared but the data will be cleared to 0 when power is off.
2.
Latched register
: The data is the latched register wont be cleared when PLC is power off. If you want
to clear the data in this register, you should use RST or ZRST command.
3.
Special register
: Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system
status, error messages, monitor state. Please refer to chapter 2.11 for detail.
4. Index register [E], [F] : Index registers are 16-bit registers. There are 2 points, E and F, for ES/EX/SS
models. There are 8 points, E0~E3 and F0~F3, for EP models. There are 16 points,
E0~E7 and F0~F7, for EH models. If you want to use index register to be 32-bit
register, you should indicate E and at this moment F cant be used.
5.
File register
: There are 1600 file registers (K0~K1599) for EP/SA MPU and 10000 file registers
(K0~K9,999) for EH MPU. There is no real device number for file register, you should
execute read/write of file register by command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW,
peripheral device HPP or WPLSoft.
2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F]

Index registers E, F are 16-bit data register, just the same as general
16-bit
16-bit
E0
F0
data register. It can be wrote/read.

It can be used as 32-bit register. But at this time, this register should
be indicated to E and F cant be used. Otherwise, the data will be
32-bit
error. (It is recommend to use command DMOVP K0 E and clear E
E0
upper 16-bit
F0
lower 16-bit
and F to 0 when power on.

The combination of E and F when using as 32-bit register are:
(E0, F0) , (E1, F1) (E2, F2) .(E7, F7)
2-29
2 DVP-PLC Function
When X0=On and E0=8, F0=14, D5E0=D(5+8)=D13, D10F0
X0
MOV
K8
E0
MOV
K14
F0
MOV
D5E0
D10F0
=D(10+14) = D24, the content in D13 will be moved to D24.
The function of Index register is the same as general operand. It can be used to move or compare and used to
be index for byte device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit device (X, Y, M, S). For ES/EP/SA series, it cant be
used for constant (K, H). But for EH series, it can be used for constant (K, H).
ES/EX/SS models: E0, F0 2 points
EP model: E0~E3, F0~F3, total is 8 points
EH model: E0~E7, F0~F7, total is 16 points
some commands dont support index function, please refer to chapter 5.4 for using index register E and F.
When using command mode of WPLSoft to use constant (K,H) to be index register, it needs to use symbol @:
Example: MOV K10@E0 D0F0
2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics
EP/SA/EH series will check following when PLC is power on or change from STOPRUN.
1. M1101 (if it starts file register function)
2. D1101 (the start number of file register of EP/SA series (K0~K1599), for EH series is K0~K9999)
3. D1102 (item number for reading, EP/SA series is K0~K1600 and EH series is K0~K10000)
4. D1103 (the address to save the reading data, the start address of designated file register D
(K2000~K9999). It is used to decide if transferring file to designated register automatically.
Note:
The action which read from file register to data register D wont be executed when D1101 for EP/SA model
is greater than 1600, D1101 for EH model is greater than 8,000 or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or
greater than 9,999.
When starting executing the action to read data from file register to data register, PLC will stop reading
once the address of file register or data register D exceeds usage range.
There are 1600 file registers for EP/SA models and 10000 file registers for EH models. There is no actual
number for file register, therefore it should use command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW or peripheral
HPP02 and WPLSoft to execute the read/write of file register. If the address of file register for reading
exceeds useful range, the data for reading will be 0.
2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I]
2-30
2 DVP-PLC Function
ES, EX, SS models:
N
For master control nested
N0~N7, 8 points
P0~P63, 64 points
Pointer
Insert timer interrupt

I
I6, 1 point (10~99ms, time

base=1ms) (for Version 5.7)
Interrupt Insert external

I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points
interrupt
Insert communication
I150
interrupt
Control point of master

control nested
Location pointer of CJ,
CALL
Location pointer of
EP/SA models:
N
N0~N7, 8 points
P0~P255, 256 points
The control point of

CJ, CALL
Insert external
interrupt
Pointer
I
I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6

points
I6, I7, 2 points (10~99ms, time
Insert time interrupt
base=1ms)
For
Insert high-speed
interrupt counter attained
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
interrupt
Insert
communication
I150
interrupt
EH models:
control point
CJ, CALL
N0~N7, 8 points
P0~P255, 256 points
I00(X0), I10(X1), I20(X2), I30(X3),

I40(X4), I50(X5), 6 points
Insert external
interrupt
(=1, rising-edge trigger
, =0,
)
falling-edge trigger
I6 , I7 , I8 , 2 points (
1~99ms, time base=1ms)
Insert time interrupt
I8 , 1 points ( 0.1~9.9ms, time
base=0.1ms)
Interrupt
Insert high-speed
I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points
counter attained
interrupt
Insert pulse
I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points
interrupt
Insert
I150
communication
interrupt
Pointer
Nest Level Pointer N: used with command MC and MCR. MC is master start command. When MC command is
executed, the commands between MC and MCR will be executed normally. MC-MCR master
command supports nested program structure and the maximum is 8 levels, which is
numbered from N0 to N7. Refer to chapter3.7 for detail information.
2-31
2 DVP-PLC Function
Pointer P: use with application commands API 00 CJ, API 01 CALL, API 02 SRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 commands CJ,
CALL, SRET usage method for more information.
CJ condition jump:
P**
X0
0
CJ
When X0=On, program will jump from 0 to N
P1
(designated label P1) and keep on executing

without executing the address between 0 and
X1
Y1
N.
X2
P1 N
When X0=Off, program will execute from 0 and
Y2
keep on executing the followings. CJ command

wont be executed at this time.
CALL subroutine, SRET subroutine END:
P**
X0
20
CALL
P2
When X0 is On, it will jump
Call subroutine P**
X1
24
to P2 to execute the
designated subroutine as
Y1
executing CALL
command. When
FEND
executing SRET
P2
(subroutine
P2)
Y0
command, return to
subroutine
Y0
SRET
address 24 to go on
executing.
subroutine return
Interrupt pointer I:
It is used with application command API 04 EI, API 05DI, API 03 IRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 for more information.
There are five functions below. Interrupt insert should be used with EI, interrupt insert enable, interrupt insert disable
and IRET interrupt insert return, etc.
1. External interrupt insert
When input signal of input terminal X0~X5 is triggered on rising-edge or

falling-edge, it will interrupt present program and jump to the designated
interrupt insert subroutine pointer I00(X0), I10(X1), I20(X2), I30(X3),
I40(X4), I50(X5) to execute and return to previous address to execute
when executing IRET command. That is due to special hardware circuit
design of PLC MPU and is not affected by scan period.
2. Timer interrupt insert
It is special hardware circuit design in PLC MPU. It will stop present program
and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute
automatically every a period time (can be set to 10ms~99ms).
3. Counter attained interrupt insert :
The comparison command API 53 DHSCS of high-speed counter can

designate to interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt
insert subroutine to execute interrupt pointer I010, I020, I030, I040, I050,
I060 when comparison attained.
2-32
2 DVP-PLC Function
4. Pulse interrupt insert
5. Communication interrupt insert :
Using pulse output command API 57 PLSY to send interrupt vector

I130(corresponds to M1342) and I140(corresponds to M1343) at the same
time when pulse output the first pulse. But it should start flag M1342 and
M1343 first. And it also can set to send interrupt vector I110 (corresponds to
M1340) and I120(corresponds to M1341) once pulse finishes to output the
last pulse.
When using communication command RS, it can be set to have interrupt
request when receiving specific charcters. Interrupt number is I150 and
specific characters is set to low byte of D1168.
When PLC connects to communication device and received data length is
not the same, setting end character to D1168 and interrupt subroutine to
I150. When PLC receives this end character, it will execute interrupt
subroutine I150.
2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register

The kinds and functions of special auxiliary relay (Special M) and special registers (special D) are as shown in
the following. Please notice that some equipment with the same number will be different to the different model. In the
following chart, the meaning of column Attribute are: R means can only read. R/W means can read/write.
- means can do nothing. # means system setting, user can read the detail explanation of the setting in the manual.
* means can refer following for explanation.
Special
M
Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Normally open contact (a contact). This contact

M1000* is ON when running and it is ON when the Off
status is set to RUN.
Normally OFF contact (b contact). This contact
M1001* is OFF in running and it is OFF when the status On
is set to RUN.
ON only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is
M1002* contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUN Off
moment. Pulse width=scan period.
On
Off
NO
Off
Off
On
NO
On
On
Off
NO
Off
Off
On
NO
On
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
-
R
-
NO
-
Off
-
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R
R
R
R
R/W
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
R/W
R/W
NO
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
OFF only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is

M1003* contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUN On
moment. Pulse width=scan period.
Off
M1004* On when error occurs
Password of data backup memory card and
Off
M1005
MPU password dont match
Off
M1006 Data backup memory card isnt initial
Off
M1008* Monitor timer flag (ON: PLC WDT time out)
M1009 System used
- ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: PLSY Y0 mode
M1010 selection. It is continuous output when it is ON. Off
EHPULSE will be output at the END.
M1011*
M1012*
M1013*
M1014*
M1015*
10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off

100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off
1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off
1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off
High-speed timer activates
When it is Off, it will display two right-most bits.
M1016* When it is On, it will display (two right-most bits
+ 2000).
M1017* 30 seconds adjustment
M1018 Flag for Radian/Degree, On for degree
M1019* Cancle X0~X17 input delay
Factory
setting
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2-33
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
M
Function
M1020
M1021
M1022
Zero flag
Borrow flag
Carry flag
PLSY Y1 mode selection, it is continuous
M1023
output when it is ON.
M1024 System used flag
If PLC receive illegal communication request
M1025 when HPP, PC or HMI connects to PLC, M1025
will be set and save the error code in D1025.
M1026 EP/EH: Startup flag of RAMP module
M1027 PR output flag
10ms/100ms time switch flag. The base setting
flag of T64~T126 is 100ms, when timer is OFF
M1028
and the base setting flag is 10ms when it is
ON.
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y0 of
PLSY and PLSR command execution
completed or other relative command execution
M1029* completed
EH: The first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) output
complete executing or other relative command
execution completed
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y1 of
PLSY and PLSR command execution
M1030* completed
EH: The second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3)
output complete executing
ES
EX
SS
EP
EH
SA
Off STOP RUN

Attribute Latched
On RUN STOP
Off Off
Off
Off Off
Off
Off Off
Off
R
R
R
NO
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
R/W
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1031* Clear all non-latched memory
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1032* Clear all latched memory

M1033* Memory latched at STOP
Off
Off
Off
R/W
R/W
NO
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
R/W
YES
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
R
R/W
R/W
R/W
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
M1034* All Y outputs disable

Start X input point to be RUN/STOP switch and
M1035* correspond to D1035 (for EP/SA models, only
X7 can be used)
M1039* Constant scan mode
M1040 Step transition inhibits
M1041 Step transition starts
M1042 Start pulse
M1043 Zero point return completed
M1044 Zero point condition
M1045 All outputs clear inhibit
M1046 STL state setting (On)
M1047 STL monitor enable
M1048 Flag for alarm point state
M1049 Monitor flag for alarm point
M1050 I001 masked
M1051 I101 masked
Off
Factory
setting
M1052
I201 masked
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1053
M1054
M1055
M1056
M1057
I301 masked
I401 masked
I501 masked
I6 masked
I7 masked
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2-34
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
M
M1059
M1060
M1061
M1062
M1063
M1064
M1065
M1066
Function
I010~I060 masked
System error message 1
Operator error
Syntax error
Program error
ES
EX
SS
EP
EH
SA
Off STOP RUN

Attribute Latched
On RUN STOP
Off Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off Off
Off Off
Off Off
-
Factory
setting
R/W
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
M1067* Program execution error
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1068* Execution error locked (D1068)

ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: time pulse unit switch of
PWM command Y1. When it is ON, the time
pulse unit is 100us and when it is OFF, the time
M1070 pulse unit is 1ms.
EH: Unit setting for PWM command of the 1st
pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1). On is 100us and Off is
1ms.
Unit setting for PWM command of the 2nd pulse
M1071
CH1 (Y2, Y3). On is 100us and Off is 1ms.
M1072 Execute PLC RUN command
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1073
System used
M1074
System used
NO
Off
M1076* Real time clock error
- Off
Off
NO
Off
M1077
Off
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
- Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
NO
Off
R/W
NO
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1075* FLASH write error
M1078
M1079
M1080
M1081
Battery voltage is too low or malfunction

PLSY command Y0 pulse output stop
immediately flag
PLSY command Y1 pulse output stop
immediately flag
System used
M1095
FLT command change direction flag

Enable/Disable execute interrupt program in
FROM/TO mode
Matrix compared flag. If the result is the same,
M1088 = 1. If the result is different, M1088 = 0.
Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first
bit and M1090=1.
Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first
bit and M1090=1.
Matrix finding bit flag. When find it, it will stop
comparing and M1091=1.
Matrix pointer error flag. When pointer Pr
exceeds this range, M1092=1.
Matrix pointer increases flag. It will add 1 to
present pointer.
Matrix pointer clears flag. It will clear present
pointer to 0.
Carry flag for matrix rotate/shift output
M1096
Complement flag for matric shift input
M1097
Direction flag for matrix rotate/shift
M1098
M1099
M1083
M1088
M1089
M1090
M1091
M1092
M1093
M1094
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Matrix count bit 0 or 1 flag
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
It is On when matrix count result 0
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
2-35
2 DVP-PLC Function
M1106* DIP switch function card SW3 state

ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off Off
Off
R/W
NO
R/W
Yes
Off Off
R
NO
Off
R
Off
NO
Off
R
Off
NO
R
Off Off
NO

Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off

Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Special
M
M1100
Function
A sampling flag of SPD command
M1101* To decide whether start file register or not

M1112* TR1 transistor output

M1113* TR2 transistor output
M1115* Start switch for accel/decel pulse output
M1116* Acceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output
M1117* Target attained frequency flag
M1118* Deceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output
M1119* Completed function flag
M1120
Communication protocol holding
M1121
Transmission ready
M1122
Sending request
M1123
Receiving completed
M1124
Receiving wait
M1125
Communication reset
M1126
M1128
STX/ETX user/system selection

MODRD/RDST/MODRW commands. Data
receivingcompleted.
Transmit/Receive Indication
M1129
Receiving time out
M1127
M1142
M1143
M1144*
M1145*
M1146*
M1147*
2-36
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
MODRD/MODWR/MODRW data received error Off
Off
MODRD/MODWR/MODRW command error
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
VFD-A command data received error

ASCII/RTU mode selections (use with MODRD
/ MODWR / MODRW) (it is Off when in ASCII
mode and it is On when in RTU)
Ouput start switch of accel/decel pulse output
function of adjustable slope
Acceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output
Target attained frequency flag of accel/decel
pulse output function of adjustable slope
Deceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
STX/ETX selection
MODRD/RDST/MODRW, M1131=On when
M1131
data convert to HEX
Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output
M1133*
switch (On is start)
Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output. On
M1134*
is continuous output switch
M1135* Output pulse numbers attained flag
M1141
Off
Off
Off
M1130
M1140
Off
Factory
setting
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
M
Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Factory
setting

Complete function flag of accel/decel pulse
output function of adjustable slope
Stop counting temporality flag of accel/decel
M1149*
pulse output function of adjustable slope
Declare DHSZ command used for multi-group
M1150
settings comparison mode
Finish executing multi-group settings
M1151
comparison mode
Declare DHSZ command used to be frequency
M1152
control mode
M1153 Finish executing frequency control mode
Start designated deceleration function flag of
M1154* accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable
slope
M1148*
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1161
8/16 bits mode (it is On when in 8 bits mode)
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1167
HKY input is 16 bits mode
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1168
SMOV working mode indication
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1170* Start executing single step
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1171* Execute single step
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1172* 2-phase pulse output switch (on is start)
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1173* On is continuous output switch
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1174* Output pulse number attained flag
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1178* VR0 potentiometer starts
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1179* VR1 potentiometer starts
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1196
System used
M1197
System used
M1198
System used
M1199
System used
M1200
C200 counting mode (on: count down)
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1201
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1202
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1203
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1204
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1205
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1206
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1207
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1208
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1209
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1210
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1211
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1212
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1213
Off
R/W
NO
Off
2-37
2 DVP-PLC Function
M1214
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off
R/W
NO
M1215
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1216
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1217
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1218
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1219
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1220
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1221
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1222
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1223
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1224
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1225
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1226
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1227
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1228
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1229
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1230
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1231
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1232
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1233
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1234
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1235
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1236
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1237
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1238
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1239
C239 counter mode setting (on: count down)
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1240
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1241
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1242
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1243
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1244
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1246
C246 counter monitor (on: count down)
Off
NO
Off
M1247
Off
NO
Off
M1248
Off
NO
Off
M1249
Off
NO
Off
M1251
Off
NO
Off
M1252
Off
NO
Off
M1253
Off
NO
Off
Special
M
2-38
Function
Factory
setting
Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
M
Function
M1254
M1256
System used
M1258
Swap Y0 and Y1 pulse output signal
M1259
Swap Y2 and Y3 pulse output signal
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off
R
NO
-
Factory
setting
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1264
Let X5 be the reset input signal of all

Off
high-speed counter
DHSCR command High-speed comparison
Off
flag
Off
HHSC0 Start function enable
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1265
HHSC0 Reset function enable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1266
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1267
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1268
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1269
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1270
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1271
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1272
HHSC0 Start control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1273
HHSC0 Reset control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1274
HHSC1 Start control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1275
HHSC1 Reset control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1276
HHSC2 Start control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1277
HHSC2 Reset control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1278
HHSC3 Start control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1279
HHSC3 Reset control
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1280
I00 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1281
I10 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1282
I20 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1283
I30 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1284
I40 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1285
I50 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1286
I6 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1287
I7 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1288
I8 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1289
I010 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1290
I020 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1291
I030 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1292
I040 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1293
I050 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1294
I060 flag disable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1260
M1261
2-39
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
M
M1303
Function
Swap high and low byte
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off Off
Off
R/W
NO
Factory
setting
Off
M1304* X input point can decide to be On-Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1305
Factory setting
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1312
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1313
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1314
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1315
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1316
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1317
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1320
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1321
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1322
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1323
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1324
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1325
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1328
C235 Start/Reset function enable
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1329
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1330
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1331
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1332
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1333
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1334
Stop CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output temporarily
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1335
Stop CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output temporarily
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1336
CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse send flag
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1337
CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse send flag
Off
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1338
Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) offset pulse flag
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1339
Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) offset pulse flag
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1340
M1341
M1342
M1343
To have interrupt (I110) after finishing sending

CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse
To have interrupt (I120) after finishing sending
CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse
To have interrupt (I130) at the same time that
sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse
To have interrupt (I140) at the same time that
sending CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse
M1344
Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) compensation pulse flag
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1345
Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) compensation pulse flag
Off
Off
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1350* PLC LINK start flag
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1351* Start PLC LINK automatically or by manual
Off
R/W
NO
Off
M1360* PLC LINK ID 1 exists
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
2-40
2 DVP-PLC Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off
R
NO
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1376* PLC LINK ID 1 acts
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1392* PLC LINK ID 1 ERROR
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Special
M
Function
Factory
setting
Off
2-41
2 DVP-PLC Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off
R
NO
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1408* PLC LINK ID 1 read completed
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off

Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off

Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off

Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
M1424* PLC LINK ID 1 write completed
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off

Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Off
NO
Off
Special
M
2-42
Function
Factory
setting
Off
2 DVP-PLC Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute Latched
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Off
R
NO
Off
Special
M
Function
Special
D
Function
D1000* Watchdog timer (WDT) value (Unit: 1ms)
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EX
EH
Attribute
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
200
R/W
DVP model number+memory capacity / type (user

can read PLC program version from this register.
For example, D1001 = H XX27 means version

D1001
2.7. When reading from HPP it will display
Knnnnn and you can convert it to hexadecimal
number by pressing <H> key.

D1002* Program capacity
Factory
setting
Off
NO
Off
Latched
Factory
setting
NO
200
NO
NO
Sum of program memory (sum of the PLC internal

D1003 program memory. User can identify the content of
PLC control program by this register)

D1004* Check code for grammar
NO
NO
D1005 System used
D1008* STEP address when WDT timer is ON
NO
D1010* Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
NO
D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
NO
D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
NO
R/W
NO
0~32,767(unit: 0.1ms) addition type of high-speed

connection timer

D1018* PI (Low byte)
H0FDB H0FDB H0FDB
R/W
NO
H0FDB
D1019* PI(High byte)
H4049` H4049` H4049`
R/W
NO
H4049`
D1015*
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X0~X7 input filter (unit: ms)

EH: X0~X17 input filter (unit: ms)
ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X10~X17 input delay

D1021* setting (unit: ms)
EH: X20~X377 input filter (unit: ms)
D1020*
D1022
Double frequency selection for AB phase counter

of ES/EX/SS and EP/SA models
D1024 System used flag
10
R/W
NO
10
10
R/W
NO
10
R/W
NO
D1025* Communication error code
NO
D1028 Index register E0
R/W
NO
D1029 Index register F0
R/W
NO
D1030 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (Low word)
NO
D1031 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (High word)
NO
D1032 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (Low word)
NO
D1033 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (High word)
NO
D1035* Set the number of X input point of RUN/STOP
R/W
NO
D1037 HKY command scan time setting, unit: 1ms
R/W
YES
500
When PLC MPU is slave, the setting of data

response delay time. Time unit is 0.1ms.
R/W
NO
D1038*
2-43
2 DVP-PLC Function
D1039* Constant scan time (ms)
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
0
R/W
D1040 On state number 1 of STEP point S
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
D1049 On number of alarm point
NO
D1050
PLC will automatically convert the ASCII data

saved in D1070~D1085 to HEX.
D1055
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Special
D
Function
Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0

(CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)
D1057*
(CH1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1(CH1)
D1058*
(CH2)
D1059*
(CH3)
D1056*
Latched
Factory
setting
NO
D1067* Algorithm error code
NO
D1068* Lock the algorithm error address
NO
NO
NO
NO
R/W
Yes
1600
R/W
Yes
1600
2000
R/W
Yes
2000
D1069
D1070
D1085
D1089
D1099
D1101*
Step number of errors associated with flags

M1065~M1067
When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication
command receives feedback signals from
receiver. The signals will be saved in the registers
D1070~D1085. User can use the contents saved
in the registers to check the feedback data.
When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication
command is executed, the transmitting signals will
be stored in the registers D1089~D1099. User
can use the contents saved in registers to check
the feedback data.

Start address of file register
D1102* Copy numbers of file register

Set start D number for file register to store (the
D1103*
number should be large than 2000)
Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output Y0
D1104*
(corresponds to device D)
Average of EX series analog input channel 0 (CH
D1110*
0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0)
D1111*
1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 1 (CH1)
2-44
R/W
NO
NO
NO
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
D1112*
D1113*
D1116*
D1117*
D1118*
Function
2)
3)
EX series analog output channel 0 (CH 0) and
EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0)
EX series analog output channel 1 (CH 1) and
EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0)
For EX model only. It is the filter wave time setting
between the A/D conversions, and with the default
setting as 0 and the unit as 1ms, all will be
regarded as 5ms if D1118<=5.
D1119 System used

D1120 RS-485 communication protocol
PLC communication address (the address that
save PLC communication address, it is latched)
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Latched
Factory
setting
NO
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
H86
H86

R/W
Yes
D1122 Residual words of transmitting data
NO
D1123 Residual words of receiving data
NO
D1124 Start character definition (STX)
H3A
R/W
NO
H3A
D1125 First ending character definition (EXT1)
H0D
R/W
NO
H0D
D1126 Second ending character definition (EXT2)
H0A
R/W
NO
H0A
D1129 RS-485 time-out setting (ms)
R/W
NO
D1130 MODBUS return error code record
NO
D1133* Special high-speed pulse output register (D) index
R/W
NO
D1137* Address of operator error occurs
NO
NO
NO
D1121
Connection number of BCD module expansion

unit (the maximum is two units)
Special expansion module number, maximum is 8

D1140*
units
D1139*
D1141 System used
D1142 Input points (X) of expansion unit
NO
D1143 Output points (Y) of expansion unit
NO
R/W
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output of

adjustable slope (corresponds to component D)
D1145* Connection number of KEY module expansion unit
D1144*
D1146*
Connection number of DISP module expansion

unit
D1148 System used
Memory card type:

0: no card, 1: RS-232, TS-01, RS-422, 4:
D1149 potentiometer switch, 5: DIP switch, 6: transitor
output card, 7: high-speed pulse output card, 8:
2AD card, 9: 2DA card
Table count register in multi-group setting

D1150
comparison mode
D1151 Table count register in frequency control mode
NO
D1152 The change value of high word of DHSZ D
NO
D1153 The change value of low word of DHSZ D
NO
2-45
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Recommended Interval of accelerated time

D1154* (10~32767 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of 200
adjustable slope
Recommended Interval of decelerated time (-1~
D1155* -32700 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of -1000
adjustable slope
D1156
Special D that indicated by RTMU command
0
(K0~K9)
D1165
0
D1170* PC value when executing single step
D1172* 2-phase pulse output frequency (12Hz~20KHz)
D1173* 2-phase pulse output mode selection (K1and K2)
Latched
Factory
setting
R/W
NO
200
R/W
NO
-1000
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
D1178* VR0 value
NO
D1179* VR1 value
NO
D1182 Pointer register E1
R/W
NO
D1183 Pointer register F1
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
Target number
16-bit)
Target number
D1175*
16-bit)
Present output
D1176*
16-bit)
Present output
D1177*
16-bit)
D1174*
for 2-phase pulse outputs (low

for 2-phase pulse outputs (high
number of 2-phase pulse (low
number of 2-phase pulse (high
D1196 System used
D1197 System used
D1198 System used
D1199 System used
D1200* Start address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched
R/W
Yes
D1201* End address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched
R/W
Yes
999
Start address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay

D1202*
latched
R/W
Yes
2000
2-46
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
D1203*
Function
End address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay
latched
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Latched
Factory
setting
R/W
Yes
4095
D1204* Start latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199
R/W
Yes
HFFFF
D1205* End latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199
R/W
Yes
HFFFF
D1206* Start latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239
R/W
Yes
HFFFF
D1207* End latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239
R/W
Yes
HFFFF
D1208* Start latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199
R/W
Yes
D1209* End latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199
R/W
Yes
199
R/W
Yes
R/W
Yes
234
R/W
Yes
235
R/W
Yes
255
D1214* Start latched address of step point (S0~S1023)
R/W
Yes
D1215* End latched address of step point (S0~S1023)
R/W
Yes
D1216* Start latched address of register D0~D999
R/W
Yes
200
D1217* End latched address of register D0~D999
R/W
Yes
999
D1218* Start latched address of register D2000~D9999
R/W
Yes
2000
D1219* End latched address of register D2000~D9999
R/W
Yes
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
NO
NO
D1313* Real time clock (RTC) second 00~59
R/W
NO
D1314* Real time clock (RTC) minute 00~59
R/W
NO
D1315* Real time clock (RTC) hour 00~23
R/W
NO
D1316* Real time clock (RTC) day 01~31
R/W
NO
Start latched address of 32-bit counter

C200~C234
End latched address of 32-bit counter
D1211*
C200~C234
Start latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter
D1212*
C235~C255
End latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter
D1213*
C235~C255
D1210*
D1220
D1221
D1225
D1226
D1227
D1228
D1256
D1295
D1296
D1311
The first group of pulse output phase 00: 1-phase

(Y0 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase
The second group of pulse output phase 00:1phase (Y2 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase
The first group of the count setting of counter
(HHSC0). It is the count mode of C241, C246,
C251.
The second group of the count setting of counter
(HHSC1).. It is the count mode of C242, C247,
C252.
The third group of the count setting of counter
C253.
The forth group of the count setting of counter
C254.
MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. The
characters that sent during executing is saved in
D1256~D1295. User can check according to the
content of these registers.
MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. PLC
system will convert ASCII in the content of the
register that user indicates to HEX and save it in
D1296 D1311.
2-47
2 DVP-PLC Function
D1317* Real time clock (RTC) month 01~12
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
0
R/W
D1318* Real time clock (RTC) week 1~7
R/W
NO
D1319* Real time clock (RTC) year 0099
R/W
NO
D1320* The 1st special expansion module ID
NO
D1321* The 2nd special expansion module ID
NO
D1322* The 3rd special expansion module ID
NO
D1323* The 4th special expansion module ID
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
D1328 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (Low word)
R/W
NO
D1329 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (High word)
R/W
NO
D1330 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (Low word)
R/W
NO
D1331 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (High word)
R/W
NO
D1332 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (Low word)
NO
D1333 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (High word)
NO
D1334 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (Low word)
NO
D1335 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (High word)
NO
D1336 Present value of CH0 pulse (Low word) Y0, Y1
NO
D1337 Present value of CH0 pulse (High word) Y0, Y1
NO
D1338 Present value of CH1 pulse (Low word) Y2, Y3
NO
D1339 Present value of CH1 pulse (High word) Y2, Y3
NO
D1340 The 1st step acceleration frequency
200
R/W
Yes
200
Yes
H04D0
Yes
R/W
Yes
100
Special
D
D1341
Function
Maximum output frequency (Low word) (it is fixed

to 200KHz)
H04D0
Maximum output frequency (High word) (it is fixed

3
to 200KHz)
100
D1343 Acceleration /Deceleration time
D1342
Latched
Factory
setting
NO
D1344
CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (Low

word)
R/W
NO
D1345
CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (High

word)
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
R/W
NO
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
D1357* Communication address that read by PLC LINK

ID 3
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (Low

word)
CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (High
D1347
word)
Communication address that read by PLC LINK
D1355*
ID 1
Communication address that read by PLC LINK
D1356*
ID 2
D1346
2-48
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Latched
Factory
setting
ID 3
D1358*
Communication
ID 4
Communication
ID 5
Communication
ID 6
Communication
ID 7
Communication
ID 8
Communication
ID 9
Communication
ID 10
Communication
ID 11
Communication
ID 12
Communication
ID 13
Communication
ID 14
Communication
ID 15
Communication
ID 16
address that read by PLC LINK
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
H1064
R/W
NO
H1064
D1375* The first KEY module X coordinate
NO
D1376* The first KEY module Y coordinate
NO
D1377* The first KEY module button number
NO
D1378* The second KEY module X coordinate
NO
D1379* The second KEY module Y coordinate
NO
D1380* The second KEY module button number
NO
D1381* The first BCD module (Low byte)
NO
D1382* The first BCD module (High byte)
NO
D1383* The second BCD module (Low byte)
NO
D1384* The second BCD module (High byte)
NO
D1385* The first DISP module (Low byte)
HFFFF
R/W
NO
D1386* The first DISP module (High byte)
HFFFF
R/W
NO
D1387* The decimal setting of first DISP module
R/W
NO
D1388* The second DISP module (High byte)
HFFFF
R/W
NO
D1389* The second DISP module (Low byte)
HFFFF
R/W
NO
D1390* The decimal setting of second DISP module
R/W
NO
D1391* The third DISP module (High byte)
HFFFF
R/W
NO
D1392* The third DISP module (Low byte)
HFFFF
R/W
NO
D1393* The decimal setting of third DISP module
R/W
NO
D1359*
D1360*
D1361*
D1362*
D1363*
D1364*
D1365*
D1366*
D1367*
D1368*
D1369*
D1370*

2-49
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
D1415*
Function
Communication
ID 1
Communication
ID 2
Communication
ID 3
Communication
ID 4
Communication
ID 5
Communication
ID 6
Communication
ID 7
Communication
ID 8
Communication
ID 9
Communication
ID 10
Communication
ID 11
Communication
ID 12
Communication
ID 13
Communication
ID 14
Communication
ID 15
Communication
ID 16
address that wrote by PLC LINK
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Latched
Factory
setting
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
H10C8
R/W
NO
H10C8
D1431* PLC LINK times
R/W
NO
D1432* PLC LINK counts
R/W
NO
D1433* PLC LINK units
R/W
NO
D1434* Read items of PLC LINK ID 1
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
D1416*
D1417*
D1418*
D1419*
D1420*
D1421*
D1422*
D1423*
D1424*
D1425*
D1426*
D1427*
D1428*
D1429*
D1430*
2-50

2 DVP-PLC Function
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
16
R/W
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
D1450* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 1
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
16
R/W
NO
16
ID 1 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for

ID 1 reads is in D1355. The range is D100-D115
of ID 1 PLC.
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
ID 3 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for

ID 3 writes is in D1417. The range is D200-D215
of ID 3 PLC.
R/W
NO

of ID 4 PLC.
NO
R/W
NO
NO
Special
D
D1480*
D1495*
D1496*
D1511*
D1512*
D1527*
D1528*
D1543*
Function

of ID 1 PLC.
of ID 2 PLC.
of ID 2 PLC.
D1544* ID 3 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for

D1559* of ID 3 PLC.
D1560*
D1575*
D1576*
D1591*
D1592*
D1607*
D1608*
D1623*

of ID 4 PLC.
of ID 5 PLC.
Latched
Factory
setting
NO
16
2-51
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
D1624*
D1639*
D1640*
D1655*
D1656*
D1671*
D1672*
D1687*
D1688*
D1703*
D1704*
D1719*
D1720*
D1735*
D1736*
Function

of ID 5 PLC.
of ID 6 PLC.
of ID 6 PLC.
of ID 7 PLC.
of ID 7 PLC.
of ID 8 PLC.
of ID 8 PLC.
D1751* of ID 9 PLC.
D1752* ID 9 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for
D1767* of ID 9 PLC.
D1768* ID 10 LINK PLC reads. Communication address
for ID 10 reads is in D1364. The range is
D1783* D100-D115 of ID 10 PLC.

D1784* ID 10 LINK PLC writes. Communication address
for ID 10 writes is in D1424. The range is
D1799* D200-D215 of ID 10 PLC.

D1815* D100-D115 of ID 11 PLC.


D1831* D200-D215 of ID 11 PLC.

D1847* D100-D115 of ID 12 PLC.

D1863* D200-D215 of ID 12 PLC.

D1879* D100-D115 of ID 13 PLC.

D1895* D200-D215 of ID 13 PLC.

D1911* D100-D115 of ID 14 PLC.
ID 14 LINK PLC writes. Communication address
D1912*
2-52
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Latched
Factory
setting
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
D
D1927*
D1928*
D1943*
D1944*
D1959*
D1960*
D1975*
D1976*
D1991*
ES
Off STOP RUN
EP
EH
Attribute
EX
SA
On RUN STOP
SS
Function
Latched
Factory
setting
D200-D215 of ID 14 PLC.
ID 15 LINK PLC reads. Communication address
D100-D115 of ID 15 PLC.
D200-D215 of ID 15 PLC.
ID 16 LINK PLC reads. Communication address
D100-D115 of ID 16 PLC.
D200-D215 of ID 16 PLC.
NO
R/W
NO
NO
R/W
NO
2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions

PLC
Operation
Flag
1.
M1000: M1000 is On contact during runing, i.e. a normally open contact a. Using M1000 to
drive indicated lamp during running, you can know that PLC is in RUN state. M1000
is always on when PLC is RUN.
M1000~M1003
M1000
Y0
M1000 is On contact
during operation
2.
PLC is running
always ON
M1001: M1001 is Off contact during running, i.e. a normally close contact b. M1001 is
always Off when PLC is RUN.
3.
M1002: M1002 will be ON at the first scan when PLC starts RUN and then is Off. M1002 can
be regarded as scan initial pulse and pulse width is a scan time. It can be used to
initial, i.e. start positive pulse (it is ON once it is RUN).
4.
M1003: It is Off at the first scan when PLC is RUN and then is ON later, i.e. start negative
pulse (it is Off once it is RUN).
PLC RUN
M1000
M1001
M1002
M1003
scan time
2-53
2 DVP-PLC Function
Monitor
Timer
1.
2.
D1000
Monitor timer is used to moitor PLC scan time. When scan time exceeds the setting time of
moitor timer, RED ERROR LED will be light and all outputs will be Off.
The initial value of monitor timer is 200ms. You can use command MOV to change the
setting of monitor timer in the program when program is long or calculation is complicated.
Following example is set moinitor timer to 300ms.
M1002
0
MOV
K300
D1000
Primary pulse
3.
The maximum setting for monitor timer is 32,767ms. But please notice that if monitor timer
settings is too large, the detected time of calculation abnormal will be delay. Therefore, if it is
not the complicated calculateion makes scan time exceeds 200ms, it is better to set monitor
timer around 200ms.
4.
Please monitor D1010~D1012 to check if scan time exceeds D1000 setting when
calculation is complicated or PLC MPU connects too many special module to cause scan
time too long. In this situation, besides modify D1000 setting, you can also use WDT
command (API 07) in PLC program. When CPU excutes WDT command, internal monitor
timer will be clear to 0 to make scan time not exceed monitor timer setting.
It is different program capacity for different series:
Program
Capacity
1. ES, EX, SS series: 3792 Steps

2. EP, SA series: 7920 Steps
D1002
Grammar
Check
3. EH series: 15872 Steps

1.
If there is grammar error, PLC ERROR LED will blinking and special relay M1004=On.
2.
Time to check PLC grammar: When power is from OffOn. Other time:
M1004
Writing program into PLC by WPLSoft or HPP
D1004, D1137
Using On-line Programming function by EH series and WPLSoft

3.
It will happen with illegal operand (device) or grammar error. You can get the fault by
checking special register D1004 with fault code information. Fault address is saved in data
register D1137 (if it is general circuit error, D1137 will be invalid).
4.
Refer to chapter 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC device number for each device usage range.
5.
Refer to chapter 2.12 Troubleshooting and Fault Information for checking grammar.
Scan Time-out 1.
Timer
2.
M1008, D1008
2-54
When scan time-out during executing, PLC ERROR LED will light and M1008=On.
Using WPLSoft or HPP to monitor D1008 which saves timeout STEP address as WDT timer
is ON.
2 DVP-PLC Function
Scan Time
Monitor
The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are saved in
D1010~D1012.
1. D1010: the present scan time.
D1010~D1012
2. D1011: the minimum scan time.

3. D1012: the maximum scan time.
Internal Clock 1.
Pulse
There are four following clock pulses in PLC. Once PLC is power on, these four clock pulse
will act automatically.
10 ms
M1011~M1014
100 Hz
M1011 (10 ms)

100 ms
M1012 (100 ms)
10 Hz
1 sec
1 Hz
M1013 (1 sec)
1 min
M1014 (60 sec)
2.
When PLC is STOP, clock pulse will also act. The start timing of clock pulse and RUN are
not synchronized.
High-speed
Timer
1.
The steps for using special M and special D directly:

Only valid when PLC is RUN.
When M1015=On, it will start high-speed timer D1015 once PLC finish executing END
M1015, D1015
command of that scan period. The minimum unit of D1015 is 100us.

The range of D1015 is 0~32,767. When it counts to 32,767, it will start from 0.
When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.
2.
There is high-speed timer command HST for EH series, refer command API 196 HST for
detail.
3.
Example:
When X10 is On, set M1015=On to start high-speed timer and record in D1015.
When X10=Off, set M1015=Off to close high-speed timer.
X10
M1015
2-55
2 DVP-PLC Function
Real
Time
Clock
1.
The relative command special M and special D.

Device
M1016, M1017
M1016
M1076
name
Year display of real
time clock
D1313~D1319
Fuunction
Off: show the 2 right most bits
On: show the (2 right most bits + 2000)
When OffOn, it is triggered to adjust
M1017
30 seconds
adjustment
When it is during 0~29 seconds, minute wont change

and second will be reset to 0.
When it is during 30~59 seconds, it will add 1 to
minute and reset second to 0.
M1076
2.
Real time clock

malfunction
It will be ON when setting exceeds range or battery

has run down.
D1313
Second
0~59
D1314
Minute
0~59
D1315
Hour
0~23
D1316
Day
1~31
D1317
Month
1~12
D1318
Week
1~7
D1319
Year
0~99(2 right-most bit)
If real time clock setting is error, time will reset to Jan. 1, 2000. 00:00 Saturday when PLC is
power on again.
3.
Adjust method of perpetual clock:

It can use specific command TWR to adjust for EP/EH mode built-in real time clock.
Refer to API 167 TWR for detail.
Using peripherial WPLSoft and digital setting display DU-01 to set.
(PI)
D1018, D1019
1.
value (PI),
2.
2-56
It uses 32-bit data register which is combined with D1019 and D1018 to save floating point
Floating point value = H 40490FDB
2 DVP-PLC Function
Response time 1.
adjustment of
input terminal
M1019
2.
Digital filter circuit is built-in input terminals X0~X17 can set response time of receive pulse
from input terminal by the content of D1020 and D1021. Unit is ms.
When PLC is from Off On, the content of D1020 and D1021 will become to 10
automatically.
D1020, D1021
Terminal
X0
response time
0ms
1ms
0
1
setting by D1020
(default is 10)
X17
10ms
15ms
3.
10
input reflash
15
state
memory
When setting X0~X17 response time to 0ms to execute following program, the faster
response time in input terminla will be 50s due to input terminal connects to RC filter circuit
in series.
M1000
MOV
K0
D1020
normally ON contact
4.
It is not necessary to adjust response time when using high-speed counter, interrupt insert
or fast pulse catch (M1056~M1059) in program.
5.
Execution
Completed
Flag
It is the same to use command REFF (API 51) or change the content of D1020 and D1021.
Execution Completed Flag:

1.
API 52 MTR, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 77 PR:
M1029=On for a scan period once the command finish executing.
M1029, M1030
2.
API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR:

For EP/SA/ES/EX/SS MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 pulse finishes output and
M1030 will be On after Y1 pulse completes output. When commands PLSY and PLSR
are Off, M1029 and M1030 will be Off.
For EH MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 and Y1 pulses complete output and M1030
will be On after Y2 and Y3 pulse complete output. When commands PLSY, PLSR are
Off, M1029 or M1030 will be Off.
It is needed to clear by user after executing M1029 and M1030.
3.
API 63 INCD: M1029 will be On for a scan period when designated group finish comparison.
2-57
2 DVP-PLC Function
4.
API 67 RAMP, API 69 SORT:

M1029= On after completing execution, M1029 is needed to clear by user.
If this command is Off, M1029 will be Off.
5.
API 155 DABSR, API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 158 DRVA:
M1029=On when the first output group Y0 and Y1 pulses complete sending and
M1030=On when the second output group Y2 and Y3 pulses complete sending.
M1029 or M1030 will be Off when execute this command in the next time and it will be
On after completing execution.
Communication Error code when communication error:

Error Code
01: illegal command.
D1025
02: illegal equipment address.

03: request data exceeds range.
07: checksum error
Clear
Command
1.
M1031 (clear unlatched area) , M1032 (clear latched area)

Device
M1031
M1031, M1032
Clear unlatched
The component that will be cleared

The contact state of Y, general M, general S
T contact for general and time coil
C contact for general, time coil reset coil
area
D present register for general

T present register for general
C present register for general
M1032
Clear latched area
The contact state of M and S for latched

Accumulative timer T contact and time coil
Latched C and hig-speed counter C contact, count coil
Present register D for latched
Present register of accumulative timer T
Latched C and present register of high-speed counter C
Output Latched
in STOP mode
M1033
2-58
When M1003 is On, the On/Off state of output will be held once PLC is from RUN to STOP. If
output contact load of PLC is heater, heaters state will be held as PLC is from RUN to STOP
and RUN after program modification.
2 DVP-PLC Function
When M1034 is drove to be On, all output Y will be Off.
All Output Y
are inhibited
M1034
M1034
RUN/STOP
Switch
1.
all outputs inhibited
For EH series, when M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X0~X17 to be RUN/STOP
switch by the content of D1035 (0~17).
M1035, D1035 2.
For EP/SA series, When M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X7 to be RUN/STOP
switch.
For ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series, data response delay time can be set when PLC MPU is to be
Communication
Response Delay
Slave in RS-485 communication. Unit is 0.1ms.
D1038
Constant Scan 1.
Time
When M1039 is On, program scan time is determined by D1039. When program finishes
executing, it will execute the next scan as constant scan time attained. If D1039 is less than
program scan time, it will scan by program scan time.
M1039, D1039
M1000
M1039
normally ON
contact
MOV P
Constant scan time

K20
D1039
Scan time is fixed to 20ms

2.
The relative commands of scan time are RAMP(API 67), HKY(API 71), SEGL(API 74),
ARWS(API 75) and PR(API 77). They should be used with constant scan time or constant
time insert interrupt.
3.
Especial for command HKY(API 71), scan time should be set to 20ms and above when it is
used 44 matrix to be 16 keys to operate.
4.
Scan time D1010~D1012 display also include constant scan time.
2-59
2 DVP-PLC Function
Analog
Function
D1056~D1059
1.
For EX MPU, analog input channel resolution 10 bits (10V or 20mA)
2.
For EX MPU, analog output channel resolution 8 bits (0~10V or 0~20mA)
3.
It is analog digital converter filter time setting for EX series. The factory setting is 0 and unit
D1110~D1113
D1116~D1118
Algorithm
Error Flag
is 1ms. If D1118 5, it will be regarded as 5ms.

4.
Resolution of EP/EH analog input AD card: 12 bits (10V or 20mA)
5.
Resolution of EP/EH analog input DA card: 12 bits (0~10Vor 0~20mA)
1.
Device
Function
D1056
Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0)

and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0)
D1057
Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1)

D1058
D1059
D1110
Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH 0)

D1111

D1112
D1113
D1116
EX MPU analog output channel 0 (CH 0), EP/EH MPU DA

card channel 0 (CH0)
D1117
EX MPU analog output channel 1 (CH 1), EP/EH MPU DA

card channel 1 (CH1)
D1118
EX series analog input filter setting (ms)
Algorithm error flag:

Component
M1067~M1068
D1067~D1068
2.
Explanation
STOPRUN
RUNSTOP
M1067
Algorithm error flag
none
clear
latched
M1068
Algorithm error lock flag
none
unchanged
latched
D1067
Algorithm error code
none
clear
latched
D1068
STEP value of algorithm error
none
unchanged
latched
Error code explanation:

D1067 error code
2-60
Latched
Function
0E18
BCD conversion error
0E19
Divisor is 0
0E1A
Usage exceeds limit (include E and F)
0E1B
It is negative number after doing radical
0E1C
FROM/TO communication error
2 DVP-PLC Function
File
Register
1.
For EP/EH series, When PLC is power on or from STOP to RUN, it will check start file
register function from M1101, the start number of file register from D1101 (file registers for
EP/SA series: K0~K1,599; for EH series: K0~K9,999), read item number of file register from
M1101
D1102(read items of file registers for EP/SA series: K0~K1,600; for EH series: K0~K8,000),
D1101~D1103
D1103(file registers for save and read, start number of designated data register D (for
EP/SA series: K2,000~K4,999, for EH series: K2,000~K9,999) to determine to send file
register to designated data register automatically or not).
2.
1.
DIP Switch
Function Card
M1104~M1111
2.
Please refer to commands API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW explantion.
When PLC is RUN with DIP switch card, 8 DIP switches correspond to M1104~M1111
separately.
Please refer to command API 109 SWRD for detail.
When PLC is RUN with transistor output card, M1112 and M1113 correspond to 2 points
Transistor
Output Card
transistors output TR1 and TR2 separately.
M1112, M1113
Pulse Output
with
Acceleration/
Deceleration
1.
The definition of special D and special M which are used by pulse output with acceleration/
deceleration:
M1115~M1119
Device
D1104
M1115
M1116
M1117
M1118
M1119
D1104
2.
Function
Start switch for accel/decel pulse output
Flag that is used in acceleration
Target frequency attained flag
Flag that is used in deceleration
Complete function flag
Using parameter index (correspond to D component)
Corresponding table for parameter (frequency range is 25Hz~10KHz)

index
3.
Function
+0
Start frequency (SF)
+1
Gap frequency (GF)
+2
Target frequency (TF)
+3
Total number of pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)
+4
Total number of pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32-bit)
+5
Output pulse number in acceleration area (lower 16-bit of 32-bit)
+6
Output pulse number in deceleration area (upper 16-bit of 32-bit)
(TP)
(AP)
It doesnt need to use command, it just need to fill parameter chart and set M1115 to start.
This function can use Y0 output only, the timing is as following.
2-61
2 DVP-PLC Function
Acceleration/Deceleration step number

= (TF-SF)/GF
GF
Output pulse number for each step GP=

AP/(Acceleration or Deceleration step number)
Frequency
GP
TF
SF
AP
4.
AP
Pulse number
AP is pulse number of
acceleration/deceleration
Note:
This function should be executed under the following conditions all exist. Once a condition
doesnt exist, this function cant execute.

Start frequency must be less than target frequency.
Gap frequency must be less than (target frequency start frequency)
Total number of pulse number must be greater than (accel/decel pulse number *2)
Start frequency and target frequency: the minimum is 25Hz and the maximum is
10KHz.
Accel/decel pulse number must be more than accel/decel step number
When M1115 is from On to Off, M1119 will be cleared and M1116, M1117 and M1118 aren
unchanged. When PLC is from STOP RUN or from RUN STOP, M1115~M1119 will be
cleared to Off. And D1104 will be cleared to 0 only when it is from Off On.
If the function acceleration/deceleration pulse output and command PLSY Y0 output
exist at the same time, it will execute one action which starts Y0 output first.
5.
How to calculate action time of each section

If start frequency is set to 1KHz, gap frequency is set to 1KHz, target frequency is set to
5KHz, total pulse number is 100 and accel/decel pulse number is 40, timing chart of
accel/decel area is in the following.
2-62
2 DVP-PLC Function
Frequency (Hz)
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Time (sec)
t1
t2
t3 t4
You can get accel/decel step = (5K 1K) / 1K = 4 and output number of each pulse is
40 / 4 = 10. Therefore, you can get t1 = (1 / 1K) * 10 = 10ms, t2 = (1 / 2K) * 10 = 5ms, t3
= (1 / 3K) * 10 = 3.33ms and t4 = (1 / 4K) * 10 = 2.5ms from the following figure.
Example: Forward/Reverse accel/decel step motor control
M1002
MOV K500 D1104 Using D500-D506 to be parameter address

MOV K1000 D500 1KHz start frequency
MOV K100 D501 100Hz gap frequency
MOV K10000 D502 10KHz target frequency
DMOV K80000 D503
80000 pulses output
DMOV K10000 D505 10000 pulses in acceleration/deceleration section

SET
M1115
When PLC is RUN, it will save each parameter setting into the register that designated
by D1104.
When M1115=On, acceleration/deceleration pulse starts to output.
M1116=On during acceleration, M1117=On when speed attained, M1118=On in
deceleration and M1119=On after finishing executing.
M1115 wont be reset automatically and it needs to be cleared by user.
Actual pulse output curve is in the following:
2-63
2 DVP-PLC Function
Frequency (Hz)
10K
1K
10000
Special
High-speed
pulse output
1.
90000
100000
Pulse
number
For EP series, the definition of special D and special M for special high-speed pulse (50KHz)
output function:
M1133~M1135
Device
Function
D1133
M1133
Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start executing)
M1134
On is continuous output switch
M1135
Output pulse number attained flag
D1133
Index for special high-speed pulse output register (D)
2.
Corresponding table for D1133 parameter

Index
Function
+0
Special high-speed pulse output frequency (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)
+1
Special high-speed pulse output frequency (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)
+2
Special high-speed pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32 bits)
+3
Special high-speed pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32 bits)
+4
+5
3.
Display present special high-speed pulse output number (lower

16-bit of 32 bits)
Display present special high-speed pulse output number (upper
16-bit of 32 bits)
Function explanation:
Output frequency and output numbers above can be modified when M1133=On and
M1135=Off. It wont affect present output pulse once output frequency or output target number
is changed. Present output pulse number will be displayed once a scan time update. It will be
cleared to 0 when M1133 is from Off On and it will keep that last output number when M1133
is from On Off.
2-64
2 DVP-PLC Function
4.
Note:
This special high-speed pulse output function can use special Y1 output point in RUN. It
can exist with PLSY Y1 at the same time and PLSY (Y0) wont be affected. If command PLSY
(Y1) is executed prior to this function, this function cant be used and vice versa. When
executing this function, general Y1 output will be invalid and outputs point of Y0 and Y2~Y7
can be used.
The difference between this function and command PLSY is higher than output frequency.
The maximum output can up to 50KHz.
Extension
Connected
Detection
D1139, D1140
D1142, D1143
D1145, D1146
1.
D1139: connection number of BCD expansion module, the maximum is 2 connections to use
with KEY expansion module.
2.
D1140: special expansion module (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC, RT, HC, PU) numbers, the
maximum is 8.
3.
D1142: Digital expansion input X point number.
4.
D1143: Digital expansion input Y point number.
5.
D1145: connection number of KEY expansion module, the maximum is 2connects to use
with BCD expansion module.
6.
D1146: connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the maximum is 3

connections.
BCD Module
1. For EH series, special D and special M definition of BCD module:

Device
D1139
D1381~D1384
D1139
Function
connection number indication of BCD expansion module, the
maximum is 2 connections to use with KEY expansion module
D1381
Low byte of first BCD module
D1382
High byte of first BCD module
D1383
Low byte of second BCD module
D1384
High byte of second BCD module
2. Explanation:
PLC will update BCD module to read out BCD module value by each scan.
Special D above will be updated automatically when PLC is RUN.
The maximum number for a MPU is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY modules, a KEY
module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units.
2-65
2 DVP-PLC Function
3. BCD module external wiring terminal:
DIP Switch
W8
W4
W2
W1
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
4. BCD module wiring example:

D7
D6
D5
D0
DIP switch group
W8
W4
W2
W1
KEY Module
it needs to connect a diode in

series (1N4148 is recommended)
1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M of KEY module:

Device
D1145
D1375~D1380
2-66
D1145
Function
Connection number indication of KEY expansion module, the
maximum is 2 connections to use with BCD expansion module
D1375
X coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)
D1376
Y coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8)
D1377
Button number of the first KEY module (1~64)
D1378
X coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)
D1379
Y coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8)
D1380
Button number of the second KEY module (1~64)
2 DVP-PLC Function
2. Explanation:
KEY module uses scan method to read data to PLC, it will just care the first button once
there are two more keys are pressed at the same time.
The maximum number for a MPU to connect is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY
modules, a KEY module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units.
KEY module will be updated in each scan when PLC is RUN.
Calculated method of button number is: H+(V-1)*8. For coordinate (5,1) button, its
number is 5.
3. KEY module external wiring terminal:
Matrix Keypad
V1
V2
H1H2
4. KEY module wiring example:

Button coordinate(x,y)
(D1375, D1376)
(1,1)
(D1378, D1379)
V1
Button number
D1377(D1380)
(1,1)
H1
(2,1)
V1
(1,2)
(1,3)
V3
25
33
V5
(1,6)
V7
V8
26
34
(2,6)
41
(1,7)
43
50
57
36
44
(4,7)
51
(3,8)
58
H2
52
(4,8)
59
H3
60
H4
39
46
53
47
54
61
H5
40
(8,6)
(7,7)
(6,8)
32
(8,5)
(7,6)
(6,7)
(5,8)
31
38
45
24
(8,4)
(7,5)
(6,6)
(5,7)
23
30
37
16
(8,3)
(7,4)
(6,5)
(5,6)
15
22
29
8
(8,2)
(7,3)
(6,4)
(5,5)
(4,6)
(3,7)
(2,8)
H1
35
42
49
28
14
21
(8,1)
(7,2)
(6,3)
(5,4)
(4,5)
(3,6)
(2,7)
(1,8)
27
13
20
(7,1)
(6,2)
(5,3)
(4,4)
(3,5)
12
19
(6,1)
(5,2)
(4,3)
(3,4)
(2,5)
11
18
(5,1)
(4,2)
(3,3)
(2,4)
(1,5)
10
17
(4,1)
(3,2)
(2,3)
(1,4)
V4
V6
2
(2,2)
V2
(3,1)
48
(8,7)
55
(7,8)
62
H6
56
(8,8)
63
H7
64
H8
2-67
2 DVP-PLC Function
DISP Module
1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M definition of DISP module (7-segment
display):
D1146
Device
Function
D1385~D1393
Connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the
D1146
maximum is 3 connections.
D1385
Low byte of first DISP module
D1386
High byte of first DISP module
D1387
The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the first DISP module
D1388
Low byte of the second DISP module
D1389
High byte of the second DISP module
D1390
The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the second DISP module
D1391
Low byte of the third DISP module
D1392
High byte of the third DISP module
D1393
The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the third DISP module
2. Explanation:
It needs to use common cathode 7-segment display.
The maximum DISP module expansion units that a PLC can connect are 3 DISP
module expansion units and each DISP module expansion unit has 8 7-segment
displays.
Each 7-segment display uses 4-BITS to display.
Dot setting: there are 8 7-segment displays on a 7-segment display expansion unit.
There is a dot in each 7-segment display and each dot setting can be filled in 1~8 to
display the dot of DISP1~DISP8. If the setting is out of range, no dot of 7-segment
display will light.
Pre-zero: this function is used to decide if it needs to display 0. It will check from the
left-most bit and display 0 after non-zero bit. For example: if the values of
DISP8~DISP1 are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and the 0 of DISP8 wont be displayed.
First DISP
BIT
D1385
b12~b15
D1386
b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3
b12~b15
D1387
b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b15~b8 b7~b0
DISP number DISP4 DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 DISP8 DISP7 DISP6 DISP5
The value of
STOP->RUN
2-68
Prezero
dot
2 DVP-PLC Function
3. DISP module external wiring terminal:
cathode 7-segment display (8-bit)

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
dot
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
4. Example of DISP module wiring:

Common cathode 7-segment display circuit: the device from BCD to Common cathode
7-segment display.
Power Input
1.
using external +24VDC to be driven

power of display module.
Short
circuit
2.
Using internal +24VDC to be driven

power of display module.
P
additional DC
24VDC
24VDC
24V
OV
OV
Common cathode 7-segment display connection:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
dot
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
2-69
2 DVP-PLC Function
Adjustable Acceleration/
Deceleration Pulse
Output Function
Explanation
1.
For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of adjustable accel/decel pulse
output function:
Device
M1144~M1149,
M1154
D1032, D1033
D1144, D1154
D1155
2.
Function
M1144
Start switch of accel/decel pulse output
M1145
Flag that is used in acceleration
M1146
Target frequency attained flag
M1147
Flag that is used in deceleration
M1148
Completed function flag
M1149
stop counting temporarily flag
M1154
Start designated deceleration gap time flag and frequency flag
D1032
Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers
D1033
Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers
D1144
Using parameter index (correspond to D component)
D1154
Recommended value of designated deceleration gap time (10~32767 ms)
D1155
Recommended value of designated acceleration gap frequency (-1~ - 32700 Hz)
Corresponding table of parameter D1144

Index
+0
Total segment number (n) (the maximum number is 10)
+1
Present execution segment (read only)
+2
Start frequency of first segment (SF1)
+3
Interval time of first segment (GT1)
+4
Interval frequency of first segment (GF1)
+5
Target frequency of first segment (TF1)
+6
Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse
+7
Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse
+8
Start frequency of second segment (SF2)
+9
Interval time of second segment (GT2)
+10
Interval frequency of second segment (GF2)
+11
Target frequency of second segment (TF2)
+12
Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse
+13
Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse
2-70
Function
+n*6+2
Start frequency of nth segment (SFn)
+n*6+3
Interval time of nth segment (GTn)
+n*6+4
Interval frequency of nth segment (GFn)
+n*6+5
Target frequency of nth segment (TFn)
+n*6+6
Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse
+n*6+7
Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse
2 DVP-PLC Function
3.
Function Explanation:
This function can only be used for Y1 output point and the timing will be as follows. After
filling parameter table, set M1144 to start (it should be used in RUN mode)
GF
GF
Frequency(Hz)
GT
TF2
GT
SF3
SF2
TF3
TF1
SF4
TF4
SF1
Time(ms)
1st section
3rd section
pulse number 2nd section pulse number 4th section
pulse number
pulse number
(SE1)
(SE3)
(SE4)
(SE2)
4.
Usage rule and restriction:

The minimum frequency of start frequency and target frequency should be equal to or
greater than 200Hz. If it is less than 200Hz, it means finish executing or not to execute.
The maximum frequency of start frequency of target frequency is 32700Hz. It will
execute in 32700Hz as it is greater than 32700Hz.
The interval time range is 1~32767ms and its unit is ms.
The interval frequency range in acceleration segment is 1Hz~32700Hz and in
deceleration segment is -1~-32700Hz. If it is set to 0Hz, the executed segment cant be
up to target frequency, but it will tansfer to execute next segment after reaching target
number.
Target number of segment pulse output should be greater than ((GF*GT/1000)*
((TF-SF)/GF). Refer to example 1 for detail. Once Target number of segment pulse
output isnt greater than ((GF*GT/1000)* ((TF-SF)/GF), this function cant be used. The
improve method is to add interval time or add target number of pulse output.
If there is Y1 output designated by high-speed command in RUN mode, Y1 output
command will be started as high priority.
2-71
2 DVP-PLC Function
After starting to execute M1144, if M1148 outputs without attaining completed function
flag and M1144 is closed, this function will start deceleration function. If designated
acceleration function flag M1154 is Off, it will reduce 200Hz per 200ms and stop output
pulse till output frequency is less than 200Hz and set M1147 to deceleration flag. But if
designated deceleration flag M1154 is On, it will be executed by interval time and
frequency that defined by user. And interval time cant be less than or equal to 0 (if it is
less than or equal to 0, factory setting will be set to 200ms). Interval frequency cant be
greater than or equal to 0 (factory setting will be set to -1KHz when it is equal to 0 and
factory setting will be added negative sign automatically when it is greater than 0.)
When M1148 attains completed function flag and M1144 is closed, this function wont
start deceleration function and it will clear M1148 flag. Once M1144 is closed, it will
clear M1149 flag.
The execution segment of this function will execute by total segment number. The
maximum segment is 10 segments.
The acceleration/deceleration of this function will execute by start frequency of the
next segment, i.e. when target frequency of execution segment is less than start
frequency of the next segment, the next segment is acceleration and the target
frequency of the next segment must be greater than start frequency of the next
segment. When target frequency of execution segment is greater than the next
segment frequency, the next segment is deceleration, therefore, target frequency of
the next segment must be less than start frequency of the next segment. If user cant
set it by this way, we cant ensure that you can get correct output pulse.
When STOP RUN, M1144~M1149 will be cleared to Off. When RUN STOP, M1144
will be cleared and M1145~M1149 wont be cleared. D1144 will be cleared to 0 when it
is from Off On and unchanged in other case.
The usage parameter range of EP/SA series is D0~D999 and D2000~D4999. It wont
execute this command and close M1144 if parameter is out of range (includes all
usage segment parameter).
5.
Example 1: calculate output number of acceleration/deceleration of each segment and

target frequency
If setting start frequency of segment to 200Hz, segment interval time to 100ms, segment
gap frequency to 100Hz, segment target frequency to 500Hz and target number of segment
pulse is 1000 pulses. The calculation will be in the following:
Output pulse number at start acceleration/deceleration is 200*100/1000 = 20 pulses
Output pulse number of the first acceleration interval is 300*100/1000 = 30 pulses
Output pulse number of the second acceleration interval is 400*100/1000 = 40 pulses
Output pulse number of target frequency is 1000 (40+30+20) = 910 pulses
(NOTE: it is recommended to set this number to be greater than 10)
2-72
2 DVP-PLC Function
Output time of target frequency is 1 / 500 * 910 = 1820 ms
Total time of this segment is 1820 + 3*100 = 2120 ms
6.
Example 2: simple acceleration/deceleration pulse output program of a segment

acceleration and a segment deceleration
M1002
MOV K200
MOV
K2
D200
MOV K250 D202

MOV K500 D203
MOV K250 D204
MOV
D205
D206
MOV K750 D208

MOV K500 D209
MOV K-250 D210
MOV K250 D211
K200 D212
M0
END
7.
Example 3: pulse output program of a segment acceleration/deceleration with direction
2-73
2 DVP-PLC Function
Y7=OFF
TF1
SF2
TF2
X0=ON
SF1
Position
Zero point
SF1
TF2
SF2
TF1
Y7=On
Explanation:
Acceleration/deceleration setting is as example 2.
Figure above is the example of position movement. When X0 contact is On, it will start
to move and it will stop when X0 contact is Off. (Y7 is for direction setting)
Program is shown in the following.
M1002
RST
M0
RST
M1
SET
M0
ALT
M1
X0
X0
M0
M1
Y7
M1
SET
M1
M1148
RST
M0
X0
RST
END
8.
Example 4: apply acceleration and deceleration of a segment to zero point return program.
Relative flag timing chart is shown in the following.
2-74
2 DVP-PLC Function
Acceleration for
returning to zero point
Deceleration for
Stop returning to zero point
X0
M1144
M1148
Stop pulse output

M1149
The relation between frequency and position are shown in the following.
Frequency(Hz)
zero point
Position
Acceleration for
Deceleration for
Number setting of acceleration/deceleration, frequency and pulse are shown in the

following. (correspond to component D)
Started number of D
+ index
Settings
+0
+2
250(Hz)
+3
100(ms)
+4
500(Hz)
+5
10000(Hz)
+6, +7
10(pulse)
+8
9750(Hz)
+9
50(ms)
+10
-500(Hz)
+11
250(Hz)
+12, +13
30000(pulse)
Program is shown in the following: (it assumes contact X7 to be start reset trigger switch)
2-75
2 DVP-PLC Function
X7
SET
SET
X0
RST
X0
SET
RST
END
Explanation:
After contact X7 is triggered, M1144 will set to start acceleration and set M1149 not to
count pulse number. And it will send 10 pulses once deceleration switch X0 is
triggered and then enter deceleration segment.
To set M1148 to end pulse output by manual and close this function once X0 is closed.
Note: This example is just an application method that user should adjust parameters settings
used in acceleration/deceleration segment according to actual machine characteristics
and limitation.
Single Step
Execution
Function
1.
The definition of special D and special M of EH series single step execution function
Device
M1170, M1171
D1170
2.
Function explanation
M1170
Start flag of single step function
M1171
Single step execution flag
D1170
STEP number of present PLC execution command
Execution time: this flag is valid when PLC is at RUN mode.
Action Steps:
A.
Start M1170 to enter single step execution mode. PLC will stay at specific
command which the STEP is saved in D1170 and execute that command one
time.
B.
When Forcing M1171 to be On, PLC will execute the next command and stop at
the next command, at the same time, PLC will force M1171 to be Off. D1170 will
display present STEP value.
2-76
2 DVP-PLC Function
3.
Note:
Those commands that will be affected by scan time will be incorrect due to single STEP
execution. Example: when HKY command is executed, it needs 8 scan time to get a valid input
value of a button. Thus, single step execution will have faults.
Some commands like Pulse input/output, high-speed comparison command, wont be
affected by single STEP due to hardware start.
2-phase Pulse
Output Function
1.
For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of 2-phase output function:
Device
M1172~M1174
D1172~D1177
2.
Function Explanation
M1172
2-phase pulse output switch
M1173
On is continuous output switch
M1174
Output pulse number attained flag
D1172
2-phase output frequency (12Hz~20KHz)
D1173
2-phase output mode selection (k1and k2)
D1174
Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number
D1175
Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number
D1176
Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number
D1177
Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number
Output frequency = 1/T as shown in the figure below. There are two output modes, k1 and
k2, k1 means A phase gets ahead of B phase and k2 means B phase gets ahead of A phase.
Output number calculation adds 1 once there is a phase difference, such as figure below, there
are 8 output pulses. When output numbers attains, M1174 will be On and if you want to clear
M1174, you should close M1172.
Y0(A)
Y1(B)
2-77
2 DVP-PLC Function
Output frequency, output target number and mode selection can be modified when
M1172=On and M1174=Off. The modification of output frequency and output target number
wont affect present output pulse number but mode selection modification will clear present
output pulse number to 0. Present output pulse number will be updated once scan time
updates and it will clear to 0 when M1172 is from Stop Run, and keep that last output number
when M1172 is from Run Stop.
3.
Note:
This function just can be used at RUN mode and can exist in program with PLSY
command. But if command PLSY is executed first, this function cant be used, and vice versa.
1.
VR
Potentiometer
For EH/EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of built-in 2 points VR
potentiometer function:
M1178~M1179
Device
D1178~D1179
M1178
M1179
D1178
D1179
2.
Function
Start potentiometer VR0
VR0 value
VR1 value
Function explanation:
This function only can be used at RUN mode. When M1178=On, the variational value of
VR 0 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1178. When M1179=On, the variational value
of VR 1 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1179.
MODEM
Connection
Function
3.
Please refer to command API 85 VRRD for detail.
1.
System connection
PC
DVP-EP/EH series MPU
MODEM
M1184~M1188
telecommunication
network
MODEM
DVP-F232 interface
WPLSoft is executing
2.
EP/EH series special M definition for MODEM connection:

Device
M1184 Start-up MODEM

Start-up MODEM
initialization
M1186 Fail to initial MODEM
M1187 Succeed to initial MODEM
Display if MODEM is
M1188
connected or not
M1185
Remark
When M1184=On, following actions
are valid.
This flag will be Off after finishing
initialization.
When M1185=On, M1186=Off.
When M1185=On, M1187=Off.
On means in connection
NOTE: special M is always valid no matter PLC is RUN or STOP.
2-78
2 DVP-PLC Function
3.
Operation: (Please operate by following steps)

(a)
Setting M1184=On on PLC side (start-up MODEM)
(b)
STEP 2: Setting M1185=On (start-up PLCs MODEM initialization)
(c)
STEP 3: Check the result of MODEM initialization: M1186=On means succeed to

initial. M1187=On means fail to initial.
(d)
STEP 4: After initialing successful, WPL software can be ready for connection on
remote PC side. WPL connection method: setting -> modem connection (you need to
install modems driver first) -> to get dial connection dialog box and then fill in dial
information as following.
4.
Caution:
(a)
It must use with RS-232 card when connecting MODEM on PLC side. If not, above
special M are invalid.
(b)
You must set M1185=On to initial MODEM after MODEM start-up (M1184=On). If not,
it cant start-up MODEM auto dial function on PLC side.
(c)
MODEM will enter auto dial mode after initialization.
(d)
MODEM will enter to ready for dial mode on PLC side after remote PC stops
connection. If user turn MODEM power off now, it should need to initial at the next time
when turning on MODEM.
(e)
MODEM connection baud rate on PLC side is fixed to 9600bps and cant be modified.
Besides, MODEM speed must be 9600bps and faster.
(f)
Power Loss
Latched Range
Setting
1.
The initial format that used to MODEM on PLC side are ATZ and ATS0=1.
For EH/EP/SA series to set latched range. The latched range will be from start address
number to end address number.
D1200~D1219
2.
Please refer to chapter 2.1 for detail.
Input Point X
can force to be
ON/OFF
1.
For EP/SA series, When M1304=On, input point X (X0-X17) of MPU can force to be On-Off
M1304
by using peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.

2.
For EH series, When M1304=On, input point X of MPU can force to be On-Off by using
peripheral WPLSoft and HPP.
2-79
2 DVP-PLC Function
Special
Extension
Module ID
For EH series, it will display expansion module ID in D1320~ D1327 by order when
connecting to special expansion module.
Special expansion module ID of EH series:
D1320~D1327
Expansion Module
Name
DVPEH04AD
DVP04DA-H
DVPEH04PT
DVPEH04TC
DVPEH06XA
DVPEH06RT
Easy PLC
Link
M1350-M1352
M1360-M1439
D1355-D1370
D1415-D1465
D1480-D1991
1.
Expansion Module ID
H0400
H0401
H0402
H0403
H0604
H0405
Expansion Module
Name
DVPEH01PU
DVPEH01HC
DVPEH02HC
DVPEH01DT
DVPEH02DT
Expansion Module ID
H0110
H0120
H0220
H0130
H0230
Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID1ID8:
MASTER PLC
SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID SLAVE ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write read Write
out
in
out
in
out
in out in
out
in
out
in
out
in
out
in
D1480 D1496 D1512 D1528 D1544 D1560 D1576 D1592 D1608 D1624 D1640 D1656 D1672 D1688 D1704 D1720
Item
number
Item
Item
Item
number number number
Item
Item
Item
Item
number number number number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Device Communication Address

M1360
M1361
If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC

M1362
M1363
M1364
M1365
M1366
M1367
Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC

M1376
M1377
M1378
M1379
M1380
M1381
M1382
M1383
M1397
M1398
M1399
Read/write error flag

M1392
M1393
M1394
M1395
M1396
Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1408
M1409
M1410
M1411
M1412
M1413
M1414
M1415
Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1424
M1425
M1426
M1427
M1428
M1429
M1430
M1431

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
out
in
out
in
out
in out in
out
in
out
in
out
in
out
in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215
D100 D200
D115 D215
Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).

Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).
2-80
2 DVP-PLC Function
2.
Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID9ID16:
MASTER PLC
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
out
in
out
in
out
in out in
out
in
out
in
out
in
out
in
Item
number
Item
Item
Item
number number number
Item
Item
Item
Item
number number number number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Item
number
Device Communication Address

M1368
M1369
If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC

M1370
M1371
M1372
M1373
M1374
M1375
Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC

M1384
M1385
M1386
M1387
M1388
M1389
M1390
M1391
M1405
M1406
M1407
Read/write error flag

M1400
M1401
M1402
M1403
M1404
Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1416
M1417
M1418
M1419
M1420
M1421
M1422
M1423
Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically)
M1432
M1433
M1434
M1435
M1436
M1437
M1438
M1439

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
out
in
out
in
out
in out in
out
in
out
in
out
in
out
in
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215
D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200 D100 D200
D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215 D115 D215
Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100).

Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200).
3.
Explanation:
The basic communication protocol for EASY PLC LINK is MODBUS
When connecting to RS-485, the baud rate for all slave peripheral and communication
format should be the same as master PLC, such as set D1120 for PLC. When EP MPU
is used to be slave, only ASCII mode can be used. When EH MPU is used to be slave,
ASCII mode and RTU mode can be used.
All communication format used to connect to PLC should be the same (set D1120 for
PLC) and it supports ASCII and RTU mode.
2-81
2 DVP-PLC Function
The maximum slave PLCs for a master PLC to connect is 16 slave PLCs.
The ID of slave PLC should be fixed to 1~16 and each slave ID cant be repeated.
RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 can be used in one-to-one connection. When slave PLC
uses RS-232, only ASCII mode can be used and communicatioin format is (7, E, 1).
One to multiple connection can connect to RS-485 in series
4.
Operation:
Setting Master PLC ID by D1121 and slave ID first. ID cant be repeated.
Setting read/write items of slave (the maximum is 16 items). (refer to special D for
detail)
Setting device communication address to read/write to slave. (refer to Special D
explanation above for special D setting. Factory setting of communication address for
reading is H1064 (D100) and writing is H10C8 (D200).
Setting PLC LINK automatically (M1351)
Setting PLC LINK manually (M1352)
Start MASTER PLC LINK (M1350)
5.
Master PLC action explanation:

Slave ID detection: When M1350=On, Master PLC is started and then detect slave
number to record number in D1433.
You can see if there is slave PLC by M1360-M1375 which save slave ID 1-16
separately. On means exist.
If detection of slave PLC number is 0, M1350 will be Off and stop Link at the same
time. PLC will only detect slave PLC number only at start that M1350=On.
Read/write of master and slave PLC: After finishing detecting slave, master PLC will
read/write to each slave. The slave that master can do read/write is slave ID got after
detecting slave ID. Once slave PLC is added after detecting, master cant do read/write
to it till the next detection.
Master PLC will read first and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D100.
After reading, PLC will write and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D200.
Master PLC will read/write to slave PLC in order, i.e. it will read/write to the next slave
after finishing a slave.
6.
Automatic/ Manual model explanation:

Automatic mode: it should set M1351 to Off. Master PLC will read/write to slave till
M1350 is Off.
2-82
2 DVP-PLC Function
Manual mode: It needs to set times of read to D1431. One time means finish all Slave
read/write. When PLC starts Link, D1432 will start to count times of
Link. When D1431 = D1432, PLC will stop Link and force M1351 to be
Off at the same time. If M1351 is forced to be On, PLC will start to link
according to D1431 value automatically.
Caution:
1.
Automation mode M1351 and manual mode M1352 cant be On at the same
time.
2.
For EH modes, it need to clear M1350 first befor switching auto/manual

mode. For EP modes, it is unnecessary.
3.
Please clear M1350 first before switching automation/manual mode.
4.
Communication time-out can be set by D1129. The setting range is from 300
to 3000. When it is out of range, it will be regarded as 300 when it is less
than 300 and regarded as 3000 when it is larger than 3000. Besides, this
setting is valid when it is set before linking.
5.
PLC LINK function is only valid when baud rate is larger than 1200 bps.
When baud rate is less than 9600 bps, please set communication time-out to
more than 1 second.
6.
It wont communicate when write/read item is 0.
7.
It doesnt allow 32-bit counter read/write in.
2-83
2 DVP-PLC Function
2.12 Fault Code Information
If the PLC ERROR LED is flashing or special relay M1004=On after writing program in PLC, the problem may be
an invalid operand or error grammar. You can get fault code saved in special register D1004 to check in following
table to get error message and error address is saved in D1137. (D1137 will be invalid if it is general loop error)
Please refer to chapter 2.1 for each model usage range.
Fault Code
0001
0002
0003
0102
Description
Operand bit device S exceeds the usage
range
Label P exceeds the usage range or
duplicated
Operand KnSm exceeds the usage range
Interrupt pointer I exceeds the usage
range or duplicated
Fault Code
0F06
SFTR misuse operand
0F07
SFTL misuse operand
0F08
REF misuse operand
1000
ZRST misuse operand
C403
An unrecognized command code is being

used
Loop error
LD / LDI continuously use more than 9
times
MPS continuously use more than 9 times
C404
FOR-NEXT exceeds 6 levels
0202
Command MC exceeds the usage range
C400
0302
Command MCR exceeds the usage range

Operand bit device X exceeds the usage
range
Operand KnXm exceeds the usage range
Operand bit device Y exceeds the usage
range
C401
0401
0403
0501
0503
C402
Operand KnYm exceeds the usage range
C405
Operand bit device T exceeds the usage

range
Operand word device T register usage
exceeds limit
Operand bit device M exceeds the usage
range
C407
0803
Operand KnMm exceeds the usage range
C409
0D01
0D02
0D03
0D04
0D05
0D06
0D07
0D08
DECO misuse operand

ENCO misuse operand
DHSCS misuse operand
DHSCR misuse operand
PLSY misuse operand
PWM misuse operand
FROM/TO misuse operand
PID misuse operand
0E01
Operand bit device C exceeds the usage

range
0601
0604
0801
0E04
0E05
0E18
0E19
0E1A
0E1B
0E1C
0F04
0F05
2-84
Operand word device C register usage

exceeds limit
DCNT misuse operand CXXX
BCD conversion error
Division error (divisor=0)
Component exceeds usage range (include
E and F error)
It is negative number after radical
expression
FROM/TO communication error
Operand word device D register usage
exceeds limit
DCNT misuse operand DXXX
Description
C408
C40A
C40B
C40C
C40D
C40E
C41C
C41D
C41E
STL/RET used between FOR-NEXT

SRET/IRET used between FOR-NEXT
MC/MCR used between FOR-NEXT
END / FEND used between FOR-NEXT
STL continuously use more than 9 times
Use command MC/MCR in STL
Use I/P in STL
Use STL/RET in subroutine
Use STL/RET in interrupt program
Use MC/MCR in subroutine
Use MC/MCR in interrupt program
MC/MCR doesnt start from N0 or
discontinuously
MC/MCR corresponding value N is
different
Use I/P incorrectly
IRET doesnt follow by the last FEND
command
SRET doesnt follow by the last FEND
command
The number of input/output points of I/O
expansion unit exceeds usage range
Special expansion module exceeds usage
range
Hardware setting of special expansion
module error
C41F
Data write in memory failure
C4FF
Invalid command (no this command)
C4EE
No END command in program
3 Basic Commands
3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command
Basic Commands
Command
Code
Function
Execution speed (us)
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
STEP
Page
LD
Load contact A
X, Y, M, S, T, C
5.6
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-3
LDI
Load contact B
X, Y, M, S, T, C
5.68
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-3
AND
Series connection with A contact
X, Y, M, S, T, C
4.8
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-3
ANI
Series connection with B contact
X, Y, M, S, T, C
4.88
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-4
OR
Parallel connection with A contact
X, Y, M, S, T, C
4.8
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-4
ORI
Parallel connection with B contact
X, Y, M, S, T, C
4.88
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-5
ANB
Series connects the circuit block
None
4.4
0.24
1~3
3-5
ORB
Parallel connects the circuit block
None
4.4
0.24
1~3
3-5
MPS
Save the operation result
None
4.64
0.24
1~3
3-6
MRD
Read the operation result (the

pointer not moving)
None
0.24
3-6
MPP
Read the result
None
4.4
0.24
3-6
STEP
Page
Output commands
Command
Code
Function
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
OUT
Drive coil
Y, S, M
6.4
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-7
SET
Action latched (ON)
Y, S, M
5.04
0.24(0.56)
1~3
3-7
RST
Clear the contacts or the registers
Y, M, S, T, C, D,
E, F
7.6
0.24(0.56)
3-7
STEP
Page
Timers, Counters
API
Command
Code
Function
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
96
TMR
16-bit timer
T-K or T-D
9.6
25
3-8
97
CNT
16-bit counter
C-K or C-D16 bits
12.8
30
3-8
97
DCNT
32-bit counter
C-K or C-D32 bits
14.32
50
3-9
STEP
Page
Main control commands

Command
Code
MC
MCR
Function
Operands

ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH
Connect the common series connection contacts N0~N7
5.6
20
3-10
Disconnect the common series connection

contacts
5.76
15
3-10
N0~N7
3-1
3 Basic Commands
Rising-edge/falling-edge detection commands of contact
Command
Code
API
Function
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
STEP Page
90
LDP
Rising-edge detection operation starts
S, X, Y, M, T, C
8.16
0.56(0.88)
3-11
91
LDF
Falling-edge detection operation starts
S, X, Y, M, T, C
8.32
0.56(0.88)
3-11
92
ANDP
Rising-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C
7.68
0.56(0.88)
3-11
93
ANDF
Falling-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C
7.76
0.56(0.88)
3-12
94
ORP
Rising-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C
7.68
0.56(0.88)
3-12
95
ORF
Falling-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C
7.76
0.56(0.88)
3-13
Rising-edge/falling-edge output commands

API
Command
Code
Function
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
STEP
Page
89
PLS
Rising-edge output
Y, M
9.92
0.56(0.88)
3-13
99
PLF
Falling-edge output
Y, M
10.16
0.56(0.88)
3-13
STEP
Page
3-14
STEP
Page
End command
Command Code
Function
Program end
END
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
7.44
0.24
none
Other commands
API
98
Command
Code
Function
Operands
ES/EX/SS/EP/SA
EH
NOP
No function
none
3.52
0.16
3-14
INV
Inverting operation
none
3.92
0.24
3-15
Pointer
3-15
Interrupt pointer
P0~P255
I
3-15
Step ladder commands

Command
Code
Function
Operands
STEP
Page
STL
Step transition ladder start command
4-1
RET
Step transition ladder return command
none
4-1
Note: The value wrote in () in the column of execution speed of EH series is the execution speed of specific
operand M1536~M4095.
3-2
3 Basic Commands
3.2 Basic Commands Explanations
Command
LD
Operand
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Load A contact
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A
Command
Explanation
contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present
contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative
Program
Example
register.
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1
Y1
Command
LDI
Operand
Command Code:
Command code explanation:
LD
AND
OUT
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact A of X1 in
series
Drive Y1 coil
X0
X1
Y1
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Load B contact
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B
Command
Explanation
contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present
contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative
register.
Program
Example
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1
Y1
Command
AND
Operand
Command Code:
LDI
AND
OUT
Load contact B of X0
Connect to contact A of X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
X0
X1
Y1
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Series connection-a contact

X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
3-3
3 Basic Commands
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Program
Example
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X1
X0
Y1
Command
ANI
Operand
LDI
AND
OUT
X1
X0
Y1

Connect to contact A of X0 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Series connection-b contact

X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first,
and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the
contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Program
Example
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X1
LD
ANI
OUT
X0
Y1
Command
OR
Operand
Command
Explanation
X1
X0
Y1

Connect to contact B of X0 in
series
Drive Y1 coil
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Parallel connection-a contact

X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,
thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Program
Example
X0
Y1
X1
3-4
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
LD
OR
OUT
X0
X1
Y1

parallel
Drive Y1 coil
3 Basic Commands
Command
ORI
Operand
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Parallel connection-b contact

X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the
Command
Explanation
command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and
then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts,
thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register.
Program
Example
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
LD
ORI
OUT
Y1
X1
Command
ANB
Functions
Program
Example
none
To perform the AND calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0 ANB X1
X2
Y1
X3
Block A Block B
Command
ORB
LD
ORI
LDI
OR
ANB
OUT
Functions
X0
X2
X1
X3
Y1

parallel
parallel
Connect circuit block in series
Drive Y1 coil
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
Operand
Command
Explanation
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
Operand
Command
Explanation
X0
X1
Y1

parallel
Drive Y1 coil
None
To perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results and
contents of the accumulative register.
3-5
3 Basic Commands
Program
Example
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1 Block A
Y1
X2
X3
ORB
Block B
Command
MPS
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result
operation pointer pulses 1)
Functions
None
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of
operation result doesnt move)
Functions
Program
Example
None
To retrieve the previous reserved logic calculation result from the operation result and
save it into the accumulative register. (the pointer of result operation minus 1)
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
MPS
X1
Y1
X2
MRD
M0
Y2
MPP
END
3-6
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Reads, then clears the operation result
Operand
Command
Explanation
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS
EP
EH
Reads the operation result
Command
MPP
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
None
Operand
Command
Explanation
Y1
Store the operation result
Command
MRD
X0
X1
X2
X3
Functions
Operand
Command
Explanation
LD
ANI
LDI
AND
ORB
OUT

series
series
Connect circuit block in parallel
Drive Y1 coil
LD
MPS
AND
OUT
MRD
AND
OUT
MPP
OUT
END
X0
X1
Y1
X2
M0

Save to stack
series
Drive M0 coil
Read from stack
Drive Y2 coil
Program end
Y2
3 Basic Commands
Command
OUT
Operand
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Output coil
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Command
Explanation
Motion of coil contact:

OUT command
Operation
result
Program
Example
Contact
Coil
FALSE
OFF
Non-continuity
B contact (normally
close)
Continuity
TRUE
ON
Continuity
Non-continuity
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1
Operand
LDI
AND
OUT
Y1
Command
SET
A contact (normally open)

series
Drive Y1 coil
X0
X1
Y1
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
LatchON
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be ON, which will keep
Command
Explanation
ON whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set
the device to OFF.
Program
Example
X0
Y0
SET
Command
RST
Operand
Y1
LD
ANI
SET
Functions
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
X0
Y0
Y1
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Clear the contact or the register

X0~X377
Command code
explanation:
Connect to contact B
of Y0 in series
Y1 latch (ON)
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999 E, F
3-7
3 Basic Commands
Command
Explanation
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Device
S, Y, M
T, C
D, E, F
Status
Coil and contact will be set to OFF.
Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and
contact will be set to OFF.
The content value will be set to 0.
If the RST command is not executed, status of specific device will not be changed.
Program
Example
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
RST
LD
RST
Y5
X0
Y5
Command code
explanation:
Clear contact Y5
Command
TMR
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
16-bit timer
T-K
T0~T255, K0~K32,767
T-D
T0~T255, D0~D9,999
Operand
Command
Explanation
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to
count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the
contact will be as following:
Program
Example
NO(Normally Open) contact

NC(Normally Closed) contact
Ladder Diagram:
X0
TMR
T5
K1000
Open collector
Close collector
Command code
Command Code:
explanation:
LD
X0
TMR
T5 K1000
T5 timer
Setting is K1000
Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand T usage.
Footnote
Command
CNT
Functions
16-bit counter
C-K
C0~C199, K0~K32,767
C-D
C0~C199, D0~D9,999
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Operand
3-8
3 Basic Commands
Command
Explanation
When the CNT command is executed from OFF ON, which means that the counter
coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counters value; when the counter
achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact
is as follows:
NO(Normally Open) contact
NC(Normally Closed) contact
Continuity
Non-continuity
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the conatcts and the counting
values will be un unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use
the RST command.
Program
Example
Ladder Diagram:
X0
CNT
Command
DCNT
Command Code:
C20
K100
LD
CNT
X0
C20 K100
Functions
32-bit counter
C-K
C200~C254K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647
C-D
C200~C254, D0~D9,999
Command code
explanation:
C20 counter
Setting is K100
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Operand
Command
Explanation
DCNT is the startup command for the 32-bit high-speed counter that is utilized
especially in counters C232 to C255.
For general addition/subtraction counter C200~C234, the present value will count up
(add 1) or count down (subtract 1) when command DCNT is from OffOn.
When specific high-speed counter pulse input of high-speed addition/subtraction
counters C235~C254 is from OffOn, it will execute counting. If counter trigger input
keeps being On or Off, the counter value will be unchanged. See chapter 2.7 timer
number and function for high-speed pulse input terminals (X0~X17) and counting
(count up (add 1) and count down (subtract 1)).
When DCNT command is OFF, the counter will stop counting, but the counting values
will not be cleared. Users can use RST C2XX command to remove the counting values
and the contacts. High-speed addition/subtraction counters C235~C254 can use
Program
Example
external specific input point to remove the counting values and the contacts.
Command Code:
Command code
LadderDiagram:
M0
LD
M0
explanation:
C254 K1000 Load contact A of
K1000 DCNT
DCNT
C254
M0 and C254
LD M0
counter
Setting is K1000
DCNT C254 K1000
3-9
3 Basic Commands
Command
MC / MCR
Operand
Command
Explanation
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Master control Start/Reset command
N0~N7
MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described
as follows:
The counting value is set back to zero, the coil
and the contact are both turned OFF
The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the
contact stay at their present condition
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the
contact stay at their present condition
Timer
Accumulative timer
Counter
Coils driven up by the OUT
command
Devices driven up by the SET
and RST commands
Application commands
All turned OFF

Stay at present condition
All of them are not acted
MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control
program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command.
Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure,
with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer
Program
Example
to the following:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
MC
N0
X1
Y0
X2
MC
N1
X3
Y1
MCR
N1
MCR
N0
MC
N0
X10
X11
Y10
MCR
3-10
N0
Command Code Explanation

LD
X0
Load A contact of X0
Enable N0 common series
MC
N0
connection contact
LD
X1
OUT
Y0
Drive Y0 coil
:
LD
X2
MC
N1
connection contact
LD
X3
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
:
Disable N1 common series
MCR
N1
connection contact
:
MCR
N0
connection contact
:
LD
X10
MC
N0
connection contact
LD
X11
OUT
Y10
Drive Y10 coil
:
MCR
N0
connection contact
3 Basic Commands
Command
LDP
Operand
Functions
Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Command code:
Ladder Diagram:
Start X0 rising-edge
detection
Y1
Series connection A contact
of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand usage.
X0
Footnote
LDP
AND
OUT
X1
X0
X1
Y1
If specific rising-edge contact state is On before PLC is power on, rising-dedge contact
will be True after PLC is power on.
Command
LDF
Operand
Functions
Falling-edge detection operation
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
D0~D9,999
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is
different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the
detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register.
Command code:
Ladder Diagram:
Command code
explanation:
LDF
X0
X0
X1
AND
X1
Start X0 falling-edge
Y1
OUT
Y1
detection
Series connection A
contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Command
Functions
ANDP
Series connection command for the riding-edge detection operation
Operand
C0~C255
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
3-11
3 Basic Commands
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts rising-edge detection.
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
X0
Command code
explanation:
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X1
Y1
LD
ANDP
OUT
X0
X1
Y1
X1 rising-edge detection in
series connection
Drive Y1 coil
Command
Functions
ANDF
Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
Operand
X0~X377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling-edge detection.
Ladder Diagram:
X0
X1
Y1
Command Code:
LD
ANDF
OUT
X1 falling-edge detection in
series connection
Drive Y1 coil
X0
X1
Y1
Command
Functions
ORP
Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation
Operand
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contacts rising-edge
detection.
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
Y1
X1
3-12
D0~D9,999
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
Y0~Y377
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
LD
ORP
OUT
X0
X1
Y1
Command code
explanation:
X1 rising-edge detection in
parallel connection
Drive Y1 coil
3 Basic Commands
Command
Functions
ORF
Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation
Operand
X0~X377
M0~M4,095
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
LD
ORF
OUT
Y1
D0~D9,999
X0
X1
Y1
Command code
explanation:
X1 falling-edge detection in
parallel connection
Drive Y1 coil
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Rising-edge output
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
When X0=OFFON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
C0~C255
detection.
Command
Operand
T0~T255
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contacts falling-edge
X1
PLS
S0~S1,023
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
Y0~Y377
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time.
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
PLS
M0
SET
Y0
LD
PLS
LD
SET
M0
X0
M0
M0
Y0
Timing Diagram:
Command code
explanation:
M0 rising-edge output
Load the contact A of
M0
Y0 latched (ON)
X0
a scan time
M0
Y0
Command
PLF
Operand
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Falling-edge output
X0~X377
Y0~Y377
M0~M4,095
S0~S1,023
T0~T255
C0~C255
D0~D9,999
3-13
3 Basic Commands
When X0= ONOFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
X0
PLF
M0
SET
Y0
LD
PLF
LD
SET
M0
X0
M0
M0
Y0
Timing Diagram:
Command code
explanation:
M0 falling-edge output
Load the contact A of
M0
Y0 latched (ON)
X0
a scan time
M0
Y0
Command
END
Functions
Program End
Operand
Command
Explanation
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
None
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command
program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return
to address 0 to scan again.
Command
NOP
Functions
No operation
Operand
Command
Explanation
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
none
This is a no-operation command and has no effect on the previous operation. NOP is
used in the following cases: To delete a command without changing the number of
steps. (Overwrite with NOP)
Program
Example
Ladder Diagram:
Command Code:
Command NOP will be omitted

when ladder diagram displays.
X0
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
X0
NOP
3-14
LD
NOP
OUT
Command code
explanation:
Load B contact of X0
No operation
Y1
3 Basic Commands
Command
Functions
INV
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Inverting Operation
Operand
None
Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result.
Command
Explanation
Y1
Command
Functions
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Pointer
Operand
P0~P255
Pointers are used with the jump commands (CJ, CALL) in two different ways as follows.
Command
Explanation
But a number cannot be used repeatedly.

Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
Program
Example
X0
CJ
X1
P10
Y1
Command
Command Code: Command code

explanation:
LD
X0
INV
Inverting the operation
OUT
Y1
result
Drive Y1 coil
Ladder Diagram:
X0
Program
Example
P10
LD
CJ
:
P10
LD
OUT
Functions
Interrupt Pointers (I)
Operand
Command
Explanation
X0
P10
X1
Y1
Command code
explanation:
Jump from command CJ
to P10
Pointer P10
Load a contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
I00, I10, I20, I30, I40, I50, I6, I7, I8

I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I110, I120, I130, I140
Interrupt programs should begin with interrupt pointer Iand ends with
application command to be as interrupt end and return. It must use with application
commands API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, API 05 DI.
3-15
3 Basic Commands
Program
Example
Command Code:
Ladder Diagram:
EI
X1
Y1
interrupt
Service
program
pointer
range for inserting

program interrupt
DI
FEND
X2
I 001
Y2
IRET
Footnote
program interrupt insert

into subroutine
EI
LD
OUT
:
DI
:
FEND
I001
LD
OUT
:
IRET
Command
code explanation:
Interrupt Enable
X1 Load A contact of X1
Y1 Drive Y1 coil
Interrupt Disable
Program end
Insert point
X2 Load A contact of X2
Y2 Drive Y2 coil
Interrupt and return
The number of interrupt pointer I of ES / EX / SS series:

There are four external interrupts (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2) and (I301, X3).
The number of interrupt pointer I of EP series:
1. There are 6 external interrupt points: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3),
(I401, X4) and (I501, X5). (1 means interrupt in rising-edge, 0 means interrupt
in falling-edge)
2. There are two time interrupt points: I6, I7. (10~99ms)
3. There are six high-speed counter attained interrupt points: I010 (use with C235,
C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254), I020(use with C236), I030 (use
with C237, C242), I040(use with C238), I050(use with C239), I060 (use with C240).
(use with command API 53 DHSCS to produce interrupt signal)
The number of interrupt pointer I of EH series:
1. There are six interrupt points of external interrupt: (I00, X0), (I10, X1), (I20,
X2), (I30, X3), (I40, X4), (I50, X5). (1 means interrupt in rising-edge, 0
means interrupt in falling-edge)
2. There are three time interrupt points: I6, I7, I8. (10~99ms)
3. There are six points of high-speed counter attained interrupt: I010, I020, I030, I040,
I050, I060. (use with API 53 DHSCS command to produce interrupt signal)
4. Pulse wave output interrupts I110, I120 (they are triggered at the end of pulse wave.
I130, I140 (they are triggered at the beginning of first pulse wave).
3-16
4 Step Ladder Commands

4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET]
Common
STL
Function
Operand
Step Transition Ladder Start Command
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
S0~S1023
The step ladder command, STL Sn, has constituted the stepping point, and when the
Command
Explanation
STL command showed up in the program, it implies that the program is now at the step
ladder diagram condition that is controlled by the step procedure. The step ladder
command RET represents the end of the step ladder diagram (from S0~S9) that is to
return to the BUS command. The SFC diagram is represented through the step ladder
diagram composed of STL/RET. The number of step point S cant be repeated.
Common
Function
Operand
RET
Step Transition Ladder Return Command
None
Adaptive model
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET
Command
Explanation
command indicates the end of the step procedure. Maximum is 10 step procedures
(S0~S9) for a PLC program and it should have RET command at the end of each step
Program
Example
procedure.
Ladder Diagram:
SFC:
M1002
S0
S
ZRST
S0
SET
S0
SET
S20
X0
S20
S
S30
Y1
S40
S
Y2
X0
Y0
S30
Y1
X2
X2
SET
S0
X1
X1
S30
S
M1002
S20
Y0
SET
S127
S40
S40
Y2
X3
X3
S0
RET
S0
END
4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)

In automatic control field, it often needs to cooperate with electric control and mechanical control to reach the
goal. SFC can be divided into several serial STEP (i.e. several phases). Each STEP should finish its actions. It
usually has transition to transfer from each step to the next step. That is the design concept of Sequential Function
Chart to have transition to end the action of the previous step and start the action of the next step (the previous step
will be clear at this time).
4-1

Features:
1. You dont need to do SFC design for constant state step. PLC will execute the
action of interlock and double output between each state. It is only needed do
SFC:
simple SFC design for each state and make machine works.
S0
2. The action is easy to understand and easy to adjust initial PLC start-up, detect
X0
and maintain.
S21
3. SFC edition theory is made by IEC1131-3. It is figure edition mode and the
X1
structure looks like flow chart. Each PLC internal step relay S is used to be step
X2
S22
point and also equal to each step of flow chart. After finishing present step, it
S24
X3
will transfer to the next step, i.e. next step point S, by setting condition. By
repeating this way, it can reach the result that user needs.
4. Explanation of right side SFC figure: each step has its own transition condition
X4
to move from one step to the next step. In this figure, primary step point S0 will
S24
move to step point S21 once this transition condition X0 is established, and
X5
S21 can move to S22 or S24 by transition condition X1 or X2 and S25 will
S25
move to S0 to finish a whole procedure once transition condition X6 is
X6
established. By this way, it can circulate control with repeat again and again.
S0
It is used for ladder step mode. This figure means internal edition program is a general step
ladder diagram not step ladder program.
It is for primary step point. This double-frame is used for SFC primary step point and the usage
devices are S0~S9.
It is used for general step point and the usage devices are S10~S1023.
It is JUMP step point that used to move from step point to another which is not next to it. (it can
be used to disconnected jump up or jump down in the same program procedure, return to
primary step point or jump between different program procedure.
It is the transition condition of step point that used to move between each step point.
It is alternative divergence that used for a step point to move to different corresponding step
point by different transition condition.
It is alternative convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step
point according to transition condition.
It is simultaneous divergence that used for a step point move to two step points and above by the
same transition condition.
It is simultaneous convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step
point with the same transition condition when the condition is established at the same time.
4.3
Step Ladder Command Explanation

STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This
command helps the program designer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will
be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we could switch our procedure diagram from the left
diagram to the right PLC structure diagram.
4-2

At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET command indicates the end of
the step procedure. Several step procedures could be written in to the same program, just make sure to write in the
RET command at the end of the step procedure. There is no limitation to the usage of the RET command, and this
command should match up with the usage of the step points (S0~S9).
If the RET command is not written in at the end of the step procedure, this error will be detected by the editing
device.
M1002
primary pulse
S0
S21
S22
M1002
SET
S0
S0
S
SET
S21
S21
S
SET
S22
S22
S
SET
S23
S23
S
S0
S23
RET
1. Step Ladder Action:

The step ladder is made up of numerous step points; each step point represents one control procedure action,
and each step point needs to execute following three missions:
A. drive output coil
B. specific transition condition
C. designate what step point is to be appointed to take over the control power of the present step point
Example:
S10
S
S10
S
Y0
SET
Y1
X0
SET
S20
S
Y0
S20
Y10
X1
When X0=ON,
S20=On,
S10=Off.
SET
Y1
SET
S20
X0
S20
S
Y10
X1
SET
S30
SET
S30
Explanation:
When S10=ON, Y0 and Y1 are ON. When X0=ON, S20=ON and Y10 is ON, too.
And when S10 is OFF, Y0 will be OFF, but Y1 is ON. (Since Y1 uses the SET command, it will keep in ON status)
2.
Step ladder timing: when state contact Sn is On, circuit will be activated and circuit wont be activated when
state contact Sn is Off. (Above action will be executed after delaying a scan time)
3.
The repeated usage of the output coil:
4-3

S10
S
1. Output coils of the same number could be used in different

step points.
2. Such as right diagram, there is the same output device
Y0 in the different state. No matter S10 or S20 is On, Y0
will be On.
3. Y0 will be close during the transition from S10 to S20 and
output Y0 after S20 is On. Thus in this case, Y0 will be
On no matter S10 or S20 is On.
4. For general ladder diagrams, repeated usages of the
output coils should be avoided. Output coil number used
in step point should be avoided to use after returning to
general ladder diagram.
4.
Y0
SET
Y1
SET
S20
X0
S20
S
Y0
X1
SET
S30
Repeated usage of the timer:

Same as general output points, the timer could be used
repeatedly for different step points. (this is one feature of step
ladder diagram, but for general ladder diagrams, repeated
usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil
number used in step point should be avoided to use after
S20
TMR
T1
K10
TMR
T2
K20
TMR
T1
K30
X1
S30
X2
returning to general ladder diagram.)

Note: as right diagram, ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series timer only
S40
used repeatedly in disconnected step point.
5.
Transfer of the step point:

SET Sn and OUT Sn commands are both used to start (or to transfer to) another step point, and the occasions to
use these commands could be different: when the controlling power is transferred to another step point, the status of
the original step point S and the action of the output point would all be erased. Due to that numerous step control
procedures could exist at the same program simultaneously (take S0~S9 as the starting and ending points to lead the
step ladder diagram), the transfer of steps could thus be on the same step procedure or could be transferred to
different step procedures. And thus, the transfer commands, SET Sn and OUT Sn, of the step point might vary
somewhat in usage; please refer to the following explanations:
SET Sn
Within the same procedure,

it is used to drive up the next
status step point, and after
the status is transferred,
outputs of previous action
S10
Y10
X0
S12
SET
S12
Y11
X1
SET
When executing ET S12?

status step point moves from
S12 to S10 and clear S10 and
all outputs (Y10).
S14
status points will be clear.

OUT Sn
Within the same procedure, transfer of the simultaneous convergence point and different procedures
are used to drive up separate step points, and after the status is transferred, outputs of previous action
status points will be clear.
4-4

SFC diagram:
Within the same

procedure, it is used to
OUT
Ladder diagram:
S0
S0
S
Drive jump step point
S21
S
Using OUT S24
S21
return to primary step

point.
X2
S24
X2
Within the same
S23
S
procedure, it is used for

the step points to jump
S24
up or down between
S24
S
S25
S
OUT
S25
disconnected step point.
X7
return to primary step point

Using OUT S0
X7
S0
S25 uses OUT to return

to primary step point S0
At different procedures, it
is used to drive up
RET
SFC figure:
OUT
separate step points.
ladder diagram:
OUT
S0
S21
S21
S
S41
X2
OUT
S23
Drive separate
step point
S0
S
S1
Using OUT S42

X2
S23
S
S42
S1
S
RET
S42
S43
S42
S
S0 and S1 two different step procedures

S23 return to primary step point
S0 by using OUT
step procedure
inducted by S0
step procedure
inducted by S1
S43
S
RET
S43 return to primary step point

S1 by using OUT
6.
Notice of Driving Output Points:

As in the following left diagram, after the LD or LDI command is written in the second line of BUS beyond the step
point, output coil cant be connected from BUS directly. There will be error when compiling. It is needed to modify to
following middle and left diagram to correct diagram.
BUS
Sn
S
Y0
M0
Sn
S
Y0
Y1
Y2
7.
Sn
S
Y2
M0
modify position
Y1
or
Y0
M0
M1000
Y1
Y2
normally open contact

in RUN mode
Usage restrictions for partial commands:

Program of every step point is identical to the general ladder diagram, and every kind of series and parallel
connection circuits or application commands could all be utilized, however, part of the commands are under certain
restrictions, please refer to the following descriptions:
4-5

Basic commands that are to be used within the step point
Basic command
Step point
LD/LDI/LDP/LDF
AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF
OR/ORI/ORP/ORF
INV/OUT/SET/RST
ANB/ORB
MPS/MRD/MPP
MC/MCR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Primary step point/ General step point

Diverging step point/ General output
Converging step point Step point transfer
MC/MCR commands are not to be used within the step point.

The STL command could not be used in general sub-programs and the interruption service sub-program.
Use of the CJ command is not prohibited within the STL command, however, it will complicate the action and
should thus be avoided.
MPS/MRD/MPP command position:
Step Ladder Diagram:
LD X0
Sn
S
X0
MPS
X1
Y1
X2
BUS
M0
MRD
X3
Y2
MPP
8.
Command code:
Explanation:
STL
LD
MPS
AND
OUT
MRD
AND
OUT
MPP
AND
OUT
The BUS of step point cant use
Sn
X0
X1
Y1
commands MPS / MRD / MPP

directly. It needs to use command
LD
or
LDI
before
using
commands MPS / MRD / MPP.

X2
M0
X3
Y2
Other Notice:
For general, commands (SET S or OUT S) that used to transfer to next state are better to use after finishing
all relative outputs and actions.

In the following figure, they are the same after executing by PLC. If there are many conditions or actions in S10, it
is recommended to execute SET S20 after modifying from left figure to right figure and finishing all relative outputs
and actions. In this way, the procedure is clear and easy to maintain.
S10
S
S10
S
Y0
SET
Y1
S20
SET
Y1
S20
S
4-6
Y2
Y0
S20
S
S20
Y2

It is needed to add RET command after finishing step
ladder program and RET command is also needed to add
S20
S
X1
S0
after STL as shown in right figure.
RET
S20
S
X1
S0
RET
4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder Program

1. The step point up front in SFC is called the primary step point, S0~S9. Utilize the primary step point to be the start
of the procedure, and use the RET command as the end to construct a complete procedure.
2. If the STL command is not in use, S could be served as general auxiliary relay.
3. The number for the step point, S, could not be used repeatedly.
4. Categories of procedures:
Single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program (the alternative diverge and converge, the simultaneous
diverge and converge arent included)
Complicated single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program and it includes alternative diverge,
alternative converge procedures, Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.
Combination procedure: there are numerous single procedures in a program and maximum is 10 (S0~S9)
procedures.
5. Procedure separation: it is allowed to write in numerous procedures within one step ladder diagram
There are two single procedures S0 and S1 at the right
OUT
diagram; procedure of the program is to write in S0 ~S30 first,

and then S1~S43.
Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one
S0
OUT
S21
specified step point on other procedures.
S41
OUT
Once the condition below S21 at the right diagram is held, it
S1
S42
could jump to the specified S42 step point on the S1 procedure;

this motion is called the separate step point.
S30
S43
6. Restrictions on the diverging procedure: (See following examples)

A. Up to 8 diverging step points could be used within a diverging procedure.
B. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural diverging or simultaneous converging procedures.
C. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.
7.
Reset of the step point and the output prohibition:

A. Use the ZRST command to Reset a section f step points to be OFF.
4-7

B. Use the output Y prohibition of PLC (M1034=ON).
8. Retaining step point:
When PLC encountered power failure, the retaining step point will memorize the ON/OFF status, and go on
with the execution before the power failure after the power is turned back on. S0~S127 are currently the retaining
step points.
9. Special auxiliary relay and special register: refer to chapter 4.6 IST command for detail.
Device
4.5
Description
M1040
Step transition inhibits. When M1040 is On, all movement of step point are inhibited.
M1041
Step transition start. Flag for IST command.
M1042
Start pulse. Flag for IST command.
M1043
Origin reset completed. Flag for IST command.
M1044
Origin condition. Flag for IST command.
M1045
All outputs clear inhibit. Flag for IST command.
M1046
STL state setting. Once there is a step point On, M1046 is On.
M1047
STL monitor enable
D1040
ON state number 1 of step point S
D1041
D1042
D1043
D1044
D1045
D1046
D1047
Categories of Procedures
A. Single procedure: the basic step action is single procedure control action.
The first step point of step ladder diagram is called primary step point and the number is S0~S9. Those step points
after primary step point are called general step point and the number are S10~S1023. S10~S19 will be used as origin
reset step points once use command IST.
A-1 Single Procedure without Divergence and Convergence
After finishing a procedure, transferring control power of step point to primary step point.
4-8

Step Ladder Diagram
M1002
SFC diagram
ZRST
S0
S127
M1002
S0
S0
S
SET
S0
SET
S20
X0
X0
S20
Y0
X1
S20
S
Y0
S30
X1
SET
S30
S
S30
Y1
S40
S
S40
Y2
S50
S
S40
S50
Y2
S50
Y3
X4
S60
X3
SET
X2
X3
X2
SET
Y1
Y4
X5
S0
Y3
X4
SET
S60
S
S60
Y4
X5
S0
RET
END
4-9

A-2 JUMP Procedure
1.
Transfer control power of step
2.
Transfer control power of step
point to upper certain step
point to step point of other
point.
procedure.
OUT
OUT
S0
S21
OUT
S0
OUT
S21
S41
OUT
S42
S1
S41
S42
S43
S43
A-3 Reset Procedure

At the right diagram, S50 will Reset itself and end the
S0
procedure when condition is held.
S21
RST
S50
B. Complicated single procedure: it includes alternative diverge, alternative converge procedures,

Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures.
B-1 Structure of simultaneous divergence
The situation that transfers to many states when present condition is held is called structure of simultaneous
divergence as shown in following. When X0=On, S20 will transfer to S21, S22, S23 and S24 at the same time.
Ladder diagram of simultaneous divergence:
4-10

X0
S20
S
SET
S21
SET
S22
SET
S23
SET
S24
SFC diagram of simultaneous divergence:
S20
S22
S21
S23
S24
B-2 Structure of the alternative divergence

The situation that transfers to individual state when individual condition of present state is held is called structure of
alternative divergence as shown in following. S20 will transfer to S30 when X0=On, S20 will transfer to S31 when
X1=On and S20 will transfer to S32 when X2=On.
Ladder diagram of alternative divergence:
S20
S
X0
SET
S30
SET
S31
SET
S32
X1
X2
SFC diagram of alternative divergence:
S20
X0
S30
X1
S31
X2
S32
B-3 Structure of the simultaneous convergence

The situation that transfers to next state when continuous states are held at the same time is called simultaneous
convergence.
4-11

Ladder diagram of simultaneous convergence:
S40
S41
S
S
X2
S42
S
SET
S50
SFC diagram of simultaneous convergence:
S40
S41
S42
X2
S50
B-4 Structure of the alternative convergence

The following ladder diagram is alternative convergence. That means it will transfer to S60 once one of S30, S40 and
S50 is held.
Ladder diagram of alternative convergence:
S30 X0
S
S40
S
X1
S50
S
X2
SET
S60
SET
S60
SET
S60
SFC diagram of alternative convergence:

S30
X0
S40
X1
S50
X2
S60
4-12

Example of the alternative divergence and alternative convergence procedures
M1002
S1
S
ZRST
S0
SET
S1
SET
S20
S127
M1002
S1
X0
X0
S20
S
S20
Y0
X1
X1
SET
S30
SET
S31
SET
S32
Y3
TMR
S32
Y5
X10
S41
Y4
S42
Y6
X11
T1
K10
T1
S60
X3
S31
S
S31
X6
S50
S40
Y2
SET
Y2
X3
Y1
X7
X5
S40
X2
S40
S
Y1
X2
X7
SET
X4
S30
X4
S30
S
Y0
Y7
X12
S50
S1
Y3
X5
SET
S41
S
S41
Y4
X6
SET
S32
S
S50
Y5
X10
SET
S42
S
S42
Y6
X11
S50
S
SET
S50
TMR
T1
SET
S60
K10
T1
S60
S
Y7
X12
S1
RET
END
4-13

Example of the simultaneous divergence and simultaneous convergence procedures
M1002
ZRST
S0
S127
M1002
S3
S3
S
SET
S3
SET
S20
X0
X0
S20
S
S20
X1
Y0
S30
X1
S30
S
SET
S30
SET
S31
SET
S32
Y3
S32
Y5
S42
Y6
X4
Y2
S41
TMR
T1
Y4
X5
S50
K10
T1
S60
S40
Y7
X6
Y2
S31
S
S31
X3
S40
X2
S40
S
Y1
X2
Y1
SET
Y0
S3
Y3
X3
SET
S41
S
S41
Y4
S32
S
Y5
X4
SET
S42
S
S40
S
S42
Y6
S41
S
S50
S
S42
S
X5
SET
S50
TMR
T1
K10
SET
S60
T1
S60
S
Y7
X6
S3
RET
END
4-14

Example of the simultaneous divergence and alternative convergence procedures
M1002
S4
S
S127
M1002
ZRST
S0
SET
S4
X0
SET
S20
X1
S4
S20
X0
S20
S
S30
Y0
Y1
X2
X1
S30
S
Y0
SET
S30
SET
S31
SET
S32
S31
Y3
X4
S40
Y2
X3
S41
Y4
X5
S50
TMR
S32
Y5
S42
Y6
X6
X7
T1
K10
T1
S60
Y7
Y1
X2
SET
S40
S
S4
S40
Y2
X3
SET
S31
S
S50
Y3
X4
SET
S41
S
S41
Y4
X5
SET
S32
S
S50
Y5
X6
SET
S42
S
S42
Y6
X7
S50
S
SET
S50
TMR
T1
SET
S60
K10
T1
S60
S
Y7
X6
S4
RET
END
4-15

Combination example 1: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence
and convergence)
S51
S
M1002
S0
S
ZRST
S0
SET
S0
S127
SET
S61
S
S60
S
Y0
X0
SET
S20
S
S20
Y1
SET
S0
S32
S
SET
S31
SET
S32
SET
S41
S
Y2
SET
S52
S
S40
SET
S52
SET
S53
Y11
X13
SET
Y5
S62
S
S63
S
X7
SET
S50
SET
S51
S62
Y15
Y12
X14
SET
Y7
S63
S
S62
S
X11
SET
Y6
S40
Y3
S60
S
S41
X10
X5
SET
Y4
X6
X4
S50
S
S70
Y17
S30
X3
S40
S
SET
X17
X2
S31
S
S61
Y14
S61 X15
S
S70
S
X1
S30
S
Y10
X12
S60
Y13
S63
Y16
S63 X16
S
S0
RET
END
M1002
S0
Y0
S20
Y1
X0
X1
X2
S30
Y2
X4
S31
X3
Y3
X5
S40
S32
Y4
X6
Y5
S41
X7
Y6
X10
S50
Y7
X11
S51
Y10
X12
S60
Y13
X15
S70
X17
S61
S52
Y11
X13
Y14
S53
Y12
X14
S62
Y15
S63
Y16
X16
Y17
S0
S0
4-16

Combination example 2: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence
and convergence)
M1002
S0
S
ZRST
S0
SET
S0
SET
S30
M1002
S127
S0
X0
X0
S30
S
S30
Y0
X1
X1
SET
S31
SET
S32
X1
Y2
S32
Y1
S31
X1
S31
S
Y0
X3
X2
Y1
S33
X2
SET
S32
S
S33
Y3
X4
Y2
X3
SET
S33
S
S34
S33
X5
Y3
SET
S34
SET
S36
S36
Y6
S37
Y7
X6
S35
X4
S34
S
Y4
Y5
X7
S0
Y4
X5
SET
S35
S
S35
Y5
S36
S
Y6
X6
SET
S37
S
S35
S
S37
Y7
S37
S
X7
S0
RET
END
Restrictions on the divergence procedure:

1. Up to 8 divergence step points could be used in a divergence procedure. In following diagram, maximum
divergence step points after step point S20 are 8 (S30 - S37).
2. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural divergence or simultaneous convergence procedures. In
following diagram, 4 step points after step point S40, 7 step points after step point S41 and 5 step points after step
3.
point S42. In this procedure, maximum is 16 loops.

Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures.
M1002
S0
X0
S20
Y0
X2
X1
S30
Y1
X11
S40
X4
X3
Y2
S31
X12
X13
OUT
S20
Y11
X20
S32
X5
S32
Y3
Y4
X15
X14
S34
X6
Y5
X15
S50
Y14
S51
Y15
X33
S70
Y32
S41
S0
S71
S52
Y16
X34
Y33
S72
Y34
S80
Y41
OUT
S53
S20
Y17
S54
Y20
S55
Y21
S74
X46
Y42
S56
S42
Y22
S57
Y23
X24
OUT S58
S20
X37
Y13
X25
Y24
X26
S59
Y25
S60
X41
X40
RST
S58
Y36
Y10
X17
X23
X36
Y35
X45
S81
SET
S37
Y7
RST
S36
Y12
X35
X51
X10
S36
X16
X22
S73
X44
X7
Y6
SET
X21
X32
S35
X15
S75
X47
SET
S0
Y37
X27
Y26
S61
X30
Y27
X31
S62
Y30
S63
Y31
X42
X43
S76
Y40
X50
OUT
S42
X52
S0
SET
S0
4-17

4.6 IST command
API
60
S
D1
D2
Bit devices
Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F

Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.

The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and
D2D1.
IST command only can be used one time in program.
Refer to each model specification for usage range.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH
Manual/Auto Control
IST
16-bit command (7 STEPS)

Continuous
IST
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1040~M1047.
Refer to following for detail.
: The starting input number of specific operation mode.

number for the specific status step point under the auto mode.
: The smallest
: The greatest
number for the specific status step point under the auto mode.
The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step
ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient
auto control command.
Program
Example
1
M1000
IST
X10
S20
S60
X10: Individual operation (Manual operation)

X14: Continuous operation
X11: Zero point return
X15: Zero point return start switch
X12: Step operation
X16: Start switch
X13: One cycle operation
X17: Stop switch
When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited
S0: Manual operation/initial state step point
M1041: Movement start
S1: Zero point return/initial state step point
M1042: Status pulse
S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
M1047: STL monitor enable

When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step
point of this state cant be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9 step
points, S0 initiates manual operation, S1 initiates zero point return operation and S2
initiates auto operation. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three initial state
step points first written in program.
When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return wont have any actions
once one of S10~S19 is On.
When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation wont have any actions
once one of
4-18
between
to
is On or M1043=On

Program
Example
2
Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command):

Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and
moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control.
Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,
lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order.
I/O Device:
Left-limit X1
Upper-limit X4
Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3
(big balls)
(small balls)
Y0
Y3
Y2
Y1
Upper-limit X5
Big/small
sensor X0
Big
Small
Control panel
Power start
Auto start X16
Zero return X15
Auto stop X17
Power stop
Raise
Shift
Collect
balls robot arm to right
X20
X22
X24
Shift
Release Lower
balls robot arm to left
X21
X23
X25
Step X12
Zero return X11
Manual
operation X10
One cycle
operation X13
Continuous
operation X14
Big/small sensor X0.

The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3
(small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5.
Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and
collect balls Y4.
START circuit:
X0
X1 Y4
M1044
M1000
IST
X10
S20
S80
4-19

Manual operation mode:
S0
S
X20
SET
Y4
Collect balls
RST
Y4
Release balls
X21
X22 Y1
Y0
Raise robot arm
Y1
Lower robot arm
Y2
Shift to right
Y3
Shift to left
RST
Y4
Release balls
RST
Y1
Stop lowering robot arm
Condition interlock
X23 Y0
X24 X4 Y3
X25 X4 Y2
Condition interlock
Raise robot arm to the
upper-limit (X4 is ON)
Zero point return mode:

SFC figure:
S1
X15
S10
X4
S11
X1
S12
4-20

Y0
RST
Y2
Stop shifting to right

Shift to left and shift to
the left-limit (X1 is On)
Y3
SET
M1043
RST
S12
Start zero return completed flag

Zero return operation completed

Ladder Diagram:
S1 X15
S
S10
S
SET
S10
Enter zero return operation mode
RST
Y4
Release balls
RST
Y1

Y0
X4
S11
S
SET
S11
RST
Y2
S12

Y3
X1
SET
S12
S
SET
M1043
RST
S12
Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):

SFC figure:
S2
M1041
M1044
S20
Y1
X5
X0
X5
X0
S30
T0
S32
Y4
TMR
T0
S40
K30
X2
T1
X4
S42
Y2
X2
SET
Y4
TMR
T1
K30
Y0
S41
Y0
S31
X4
SET
X3
Y2
X3
S50
Y1
X5
S60
T2
S80
Y4
TMR
T2
K30
Y0
S70
X4
RST
X1
Y3
X1
S2
4-21

Ladder Diagram:
S2 M1041 M1044
S
S20
S
SET
S20
Y1
Enter auto operation mode

Lower robot arm
X5 X0
SET
S30
SET
S40
SET
Y4
Collect balls
TMR
T0
K30
SET
S31
X5 X0
S30
S
T0
S31
S

Y0
X4
SET
S32
S
S32
X2
Shift to right
Y2
X2
S40
S
SET
S50
SET
Y4
Collect balls
TMR
T1
K30
SET
S41
T1
S41
S

Y0
X4
SET
S42
S
S42
X3
Y2
Shift to right
X3
SET
S50
S
S50
Y1
Lower robot arm
X5
S60
S
SET
S60
RST
Y4
Release balls
TMR
T2
K30
SET
S70
T2
S70
S

Y0
X4
SET
S80
S
X1
Y3
X1
S80
S2
RET
END
4-22
5 Application Commands
5.1 Summary of Parameters
Rotation and Displacement
Four Fundamental Operations of

Arithmetic
Transmission
Comparison
Loop Control
Classification
API
Mnemonic Codes
P
Command
16 bits
32 bits
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CJ
CALL
SRET
IRET
EI
DI
FEND
WDT
FOR
NEXT
CMP
ZCP
MOV
SMOV
CML
BMOV
FMOV
XCH
BCD
BIN
ADD
DCMP
DZCP
DMOV
DCML
DFMOV
DXCH
DBCD
DBIN
DADD
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
21
SUB
DSUB
22
MUL
DMUL
23
24
25
DIV
INC
DEC
DDIV
DINC
DDEC
3
3
3
26
WAND
DAND
27
WOR
DOR
28
WXOR
DXOR
29
30
31
NEG
ROR
ROL
DNEG
DROR
DROL
3
3
3
32
RCR
DRCR
33
RCL
DRCL
34
SFTR
35
SFTL
36
37
38
39
WSFR
WSFL
SFWR
SFRD
3
3
3
3
40
ZRST
41
DECO
Function
Conditional jump
Call subroutine
Subroutine return
Interrupt return
Enable interrupts
Disable interrupts
First end
Watchdog timer refresh
Start of FOR-NEXT loop
End of FOR-NEXT loop
Compare
Zone compare
Data Move
Shift move
Compliment
Block move
Fill move
Data exchange
Convert BIN data into BCD
Convert BCD data into BIN
Perform the addition of BIN data
Perform the subtraction of BIN
data
Perform the multiplication of BIN
data
Perform the division of BIN data
Perform the addition of 1
Perform the subtraction of 1
Perform the logical product
(AND) operation
Perform the logical sum (OR)
operation
Perform the exclusive logical add
(XOR) operation
Negation
Rotate to the right
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right with the carry
flag attached
Rotate to the left with the carry
flag attached
Shift the data of device specified
to the right
to the left
Shift the register to the right
Shift the register to the left
Shift register write
Shift register read
Resets a range of device
specified
8 256 bits decoder
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH 16-bit 32-bit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
7
9
5
11
5
7
7
5
5
5
7
13
17
9
13
9
9
9
13
6-1
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-11
6-12
6-14
6-14
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-29
13
6-30
13
6-31
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
3
13
5
5
6-32
6-34
6-34
13
6-35
13
6-36
13
6-37
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
9
9
6-38
6-41
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
9
7
7
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-53
5-1
Serial I/O
External I/O Display
Convenience Command
High Speed Processing
Data Operation
Classification
5-2
API
Mnemonic Codes
P
Command
16 bits
32 bits
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
ENCO
SUM
BON
MEAN
ANS
ANR
SQR
DSUM
DBON
DMEAN
DSQR
3
3
3
3
3
3
49
FLT
DFLT
50
REF
51
REFF
52
MTR
53
DHSCS
54
DHSCR
55
DHSZ
56
57
58
SPD
PLSY
PWM
DPLSY
59
PLSR
DPLSR
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
IST
SER
ABSD
INCD
TTMR
STMR
ALT
RAMP
SORT
TKY
HKY
DSW
SEGD
SEGL
ARWS
ASC
PR
FROM
TO
RS
DSER
DABSD
DTKY
DHKY
DFROM
DTO
3
3
81
PRUN
DPRUN
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
ASCII
HEX
CCD
VRRD
VRSC
ABS
PID
DABS
DPID
3
3
3
3
3
3
Function
256 8 bits encoder

Sum of ON bits
Check specified bit status
Mean value
Alarm device output
Alarm device reset
Square root of BIN
Convert BIN integer to binary
floating point
I/O refresh
Refresh and adjust the response
time of input filter
Input matrix
High speed counter comparison
SET
RESET
Zone comparison (High-speed
counter)
Speed detection
Pulse output
Pulse width modulation output
Pulse wave output with
acceleration/deceleration speed
Manual/Auto control
Search a data stack
Absolute drum sequencer
Increment drum sequencer
Teaching timer
Special timer
On/Off alternate command
Ramp signal
Data sort
10-key keypad input
16-key keypad input
Digital Switch input
Decode the 7-step display panel
7-step display scan output
Arrow keypad input
ASCII code conversion
Print
Read special module CR data
Special module CR data write in
Serial data communication
Octal number system
transmission
Convert HEX to ASCII
Convert ASCII to HEX
Check code
Potentiometer read
Potentiometer scale
Absolute value
PID calculation
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH 16-bit 32-bit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
5
7
7
7
1
5
9
13
13
6-54
6-56
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-60
6-61
7-1
7-2
7-3
13
7-6
13
7-15
17
7-17
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
13
7-24
7-25
7-30
17
7-31
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
9
9
9
5
7
3
9
11
7
9
9
5
7
9
11
5
9
9
9
17
17
13
17
17
17
7-36
7-42
7-43
7-44
7-46
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-52
7-54
7-56
7-58
7-60
7-61
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-69
7-69
7-74
7-87
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
5
5
3
9
7-88
7-92
7-95
7-97
7-99
7-100
7-100
Floating Operation
Communication command of
Delta AC Motor Drives
Basic Command
Classification
API
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
32 bits
P
Command
89
90
91
PLS
LDP
LDF
92
ANDP
93
ANDF
94
ORP
95
ORF
96
97
98
99
100
101
TMR
CNT
DCNT
INV
PLF
MODRD
MODWR
102 FWD
103 REV
104 STOP
105 RDST
106 RSTEF
107 LRC
108 CRC
109 SWRD
110
DECMP
3
3
3
3
111
DEZCP
116
117
DRAD
DDEG
3
3
118
DEBCD
119
DEBIN
120
121
DEADD
DESUB
3
3
122
DEMUL
123
DEDIV
124
DEXP
125
DLN
126
DLOG
127
DESQR
Function
Rising-edge output
Series connection command for
the rising-edge detection
operation
the falling-edge detection
operation
Parallel connection command for
operation
operation
Timer
Counter
Inverting operation
Falling-edge output
MODBUS data Read
MODBUS data write in
VFD-A series drive forward
command
VFD-A series drive reverse
command
VFD-A series drive stop
command
VFD-A series drive status read
VFD-A series drive abnormal
reset
LRC error check
CRC error check
Digital switch read
Binary floating point comparison
Binary floating point zone
comparison
Degree
Radian
Radian
Degree
Convert binary floating point to
decimal floating point
Convert decimal floating point to
binary floating point
Binary floating point addition
Binary floating point subtraction
Binary floating point
multiplication
Binary floating point division
Perform exponent operation of
Perform natural logarithm
operation of binary floating point
Perform logarithm operation of
Square root of binary floating
point
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH 16-bit 32-bit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3-13
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
1
3
7
7
3-8
3-8
3-15
3-13
8-1
8-5
8-8
8-9
8-9
8-11
8-13
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
3
13
8-13
8-15
8-18
8-19
17
8-20
3
3
3
3
9
9
8-21
8-21
8-23
8-23
3
3
3
3
3
3
13
13
8-24
8-25
13
8-26
13
8-27
8-28
8-29
13
8-30
8-31
5-3
Classification
API
Floating Operation
Additional Command
Positioning
Control
Perpetual
Calendar
Gray
Code
32 bits
P
Command
DPOW
129 INT
DINT
130
DSIN
131
DCOS
132
DTAN
133
DASIN
134
DACOS
135
DATAN
136
DSINH
137
DCOSH
138
DTANH
128
5-4
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
Function
Perform power operation of

BIN integer
Sine operation of binary floating
point
Cosine operation of binary
floating point
Tangent operation of binary
floating point
Arcsine operation of binary
floating point
Arccosine operation of binary
floating point
Arctangent operation of binary
floating point
Hyperbolic sine operation of
Hyperbolic cosine operation of
Hyperbolic tangent operation of
General pulse width modulation
output
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH 16-bit 32-bit
13
8-32
8-33
8-34
8-36
8-37
8-39
8-40
8-41
8-42
8-42
8-43
8-44
8-45
144 GPWM
145 FTC
Fuzzy temperature control
3
3
3
Swap high/low byte

Data backup MEMORY read
Data backup MEMORY write in
MODBUS data read/write in
Input pulse width detection
Start to measure the execution
time of I interrupt
End to measure the execution
time of I interrupt
Random value
ABS current value read
Zero point return
Variable speed pulse output
Drive to increment
Drive to absolute
Time compare
Time zone compare
Time addition
Time subtraction
Time data read
Time data write in
Hour meter
Convert BIN to Gray code
Convert Gray code to BIN
Matrix AND
Matrix OR
Matrix XOR
Matrix NOR
Matrix inverse
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
11
5
5
13
13
8-48
8-49
8-50
9-1
9-11
9-11
9-12
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
7
9
7
9
9
11
9
7
7
3
3
7
5
5
9
9
9
9
7
13
17
13
17
17
13
9
9
9-13
9-14
9-18
9-21
9-22
9-26
9-35
9-36
9-37
9-38
9-40
9-42
9-44
9-44
9-45
9-47
9-49
9-50
9-51
9-52
147
148
149
150
151
SWAP
DSWAP
MEMR
DMEMR
MEMW DMEMW
MODRW
PWD
152 RTMU
153 RTMD
DABSR
DZRN
DPLSV
DDRVI
DDRVA
DHOUR
DGRY
DGBIN
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
166
167
169
170
171
180
181
182
183
184
RAND
ABSR
ZRN
PLSV
DRVI
DRVA
TCMP
TZCP
TADD
TSUB
TRD
TWR
HOUR
GRY
GBIN
MAND
MOR
MXOR
MNOR
MINV
Contact Type Compare Command
Contact Type Logic Operation
High-level
Command
Matrix Handling
Classification
API
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
185
186
187
188
189
190
196
MCMP
MBRD
MBWR
MBS
MBR
MBC
HST
32 bits
P
Command
DHST
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
197 PLST
DPLST
198 PLSK
DPLSK
199 PLSA
DPLSA
215 LD&
DLD&
216 LD|
DLD|
217 LD^
DLD^
218 AND&
DAND&
219 AND|
DAND|
220 AND^
DAND^
221 OR&
DOR&
222 OR|
DOR|
223 OR^
DOR^
224 LD=
DLD=
225 LD>
DLD>
226 LD<
DLD<
228 LD<>
DLD<>
229 LD<=
DLD<=
230 LD>=
DLD>=
232 AND=
DAND=
233 AND>
DAND>
234 AND<
DAND<
236 AND<>
DAND<>
237 AND<=
DAND<=
238 AND>=
DAND>=
240 OR=
DOR=
Function
Matrix compare
Matrix bit read
Matrix bit write
Matrix bit shift
Matrix bit rotate
Matrix bit state count
High speed counter
Multi-frequency variable pulse
output
Multi-frequency fixed pulse
output
Multi-step pulse slope output
Comparison contact is ON when
S1 & S2 is true
S1 | S2 is true
S1 ^ S2 is true
S1 & S2 is true
S1 | S2 is true
S1 ^ S2 is true
S1 & S2 is true
S1 | S2 is true
S1 ^ S2 is true
S1 = S2 is true
S1 > S2 is true
S1 < S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 = S2 is true
S1 > S2 is true
S1 < S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 = S2 is true
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH 16-bit 32-bit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
7
7
7
7
7
3
9-52
9-54
9-55
9-56
9-58
9-59
9-60
6-8
6-9
11
11
6-10
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-6
5-5
Classification
API
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
32 bits
P
Command
241 OR>
DOR>
242 OR<
DOR<
244 OR<>
DOR<>
245 OR<=
DOR<=
246 OR>=
DOR>=
Function

S1 > S2 is true
S1 < S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH 16-bit 32-bit
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-6
Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.
Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models dont possess pulse execution command (P command).
5-6
5.2 Application Command Structure
Many commands may be divided into an command and a operand as follows:
Command
: Indicates the executive functions of the command
Operand
: Indicates the device that calculates the operand
A command usually allows one step to be used and an operand usually allows two or four steps to be used
based on the command is a 16-bit or 32-bit command.
Explanation of the format of application command:
2
API
DECO P
41
Bit device
15
14
13
Y M S
8 to 256 bit Encoder
Word device
K
C D E
Applicable models
ES/EX/SS
8
Continuous
Pulse
DECO execution
DECOP
execution
9
32-bit command
EP EH
n
12
Note: When D is a bit device, n=1~8

When D is a word device, n=1~4
11
Flag: None
10
Please refer the general specifications of each series

models to see the usage range of each device.
API number for application command

Upper row indicates 16-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available
in 16-bit command.
Lower row indicates 32-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available
in 32-bit command. A D is added to the head of the mnemonic code to indicate 32-bit command. (For
example: API 12 DMOV)
The mnemonic code of application command
A symbol in the upper row indicates the command is generally applied by using pulse
execution command.
A P in the lower row indicates the command is used with the pulse execution command. (For
example: API 12 MOVP)
The operand format of application command
The description of application command function
Applicable models of DVP series PLC
The step numbers occupied by the command in 16-bit operation, the name of continuous execution
command and pulse executive command
The step numbers occupied by the command in 32-bit operation, the name of continuous execution
command and pulse execution command
The related flag of the application command
A symbol is the device can use index register.
Note
A symbol is given to device which can be used for this operand
Device name
Device type
5-7
Application Commands Input
Some application commands are only combined by command codes API, but most of them are combined by
command codes API and several operands.
The application commands of DVP-Series PLC are controlled by command codes API 00 to API 246. Each
command code has its own meaning, for example, API 12 stands for MOV (move data). When using ladder
diagram editor to input programs, you will need to type in the command MOV. If using the HPP to input the
program, we will have to enter the API command codes. Each application command has its unique operand.
X0
MOV K10
command
D10
operand
operand to the appointed
This command is to move the value of
operand.
Source operand: if there is more than 1 source operand, then we use

Destination operand: if there is more than one operand, then we use
,
,
to display.
. to display.
If the operand may only be represented as a constant K, H or register then we will use
to display.
The Length of Operand (16-bit or 32-bit command)

The length of operand can be divided into two groups: 16-bit and 32-bit to process different length data.
A D before a command separates 32-bit from 16-bit commands.
16-bit MOV command
When X0=On, K10 has been sent to D10.
X0
MOV K10
D10
32-bit DMOV command

When X1=On, Data of (D11, D10) have been
X1
D10
D20
sent to (D21, D20)
Continuous execution command and Pulse execution command

The execution type of command can be divided into two types: continuous execution command and pulse
execution command. Due to the execution time is shorter when the commands have not been executived,
please use the pulse execution command as far as possible to reduce the scan cycle of programming. A P to
be added directly after the command, which is pulse execution commands. Most used commands usually
5-8
use pulse execution commands for application, for example, INC, DEC and MOV etc. related commands.
Therefore, pulse execution commands are identified by the symbol on the right top of the command.
Pulse execution command
When X0 goes from OFFON, the MOVP command
X0
D10
D12
will be executed one time and command cannot be

re-executed again in the scan of program scan. This
is called pulse execution command.
Continuous execution command

When
X1
MOV D10
D12
X1=ON,
the
MOV
command
can
be
re-executed again in every scan of program. This is

called continuous execution command.
The above figures show that when X0, X1=OFF, the command will not be executed and the contents of
the destination operand D will retmain unchanged.
The Assigned Devices of Operands
1. Bit device such as X, Y, M, S can be combined together and are defined as the WORD device. In
application commands, the bit device can serve as the word device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS) to store the
numeric values to operate.
2. Data register D, Timer T, Counter C and Index Register E, F are all assigned devices of operands.
3. A data register is usually a 16-bit register and it is also a register D. Hence, assigning a 32-bit register also
means assigning two register D with continuous numbers.
4. If the operand of 32-bit command assign D0, the 32-bit data register which is combined by D1 and D0 will
be occupied. D1 is the upper 16-bit and D0 is the lower 16-bit. The using rule of timer T and 16-bit
Counter(C0~C199) is the same.
5. When the 32-bit counter(C200~C255) is used as Data register, one point indicates 32-bit length. Only the
operand of 32-bit command can be assigned, the operand of 16-bit command can not be assigned.
Operand Data format
1. X, Y, M, S are only be single point ON/OFF, these are defined as a bit device.
2. However, 16-bit (or 32-bit) device T, C, D, E, F are data registers and are defined as Word device.
3. We also can add Kn in front of X, Y, M and S to be defined as word device, whereas n=1 means 4-bit. So
16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0
means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.
5-9
When X0=On, move the contents of M0 to M7 to D10
X0
MOV
K2M0
D10
segments 0 to 7, and segments 8 to 15 are set to 0.
Specified Number of Digits

16-bit command
32-bit command
Specified Number of Digits (16-bit command):
Specified Number of Digits (32-bit command):
K-32,768~K+32,767
K-2,147,483,648~K+2,147,483,647
16-bit command: (K1~K4)
32-bit command: (K1~K8)
K1 (4 points)
0~15
K1 (4 points)
0~15
K2 (8 points)
0~255
K2 (8 points)
0~255
K3 (12 points)
0~4,095
K3 (12 points)
0~4,095
K4 (16 points)
-32,768~+32,767
K4 (16 points)
0~65,535
K5 (20 points)
0~1,048,575
K6 (24 points)
0~167,772,165
K7 (28 points)
0~268,435,455
K8 (32 points)
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Flags
1. General Flags
For the operation result of application commands, there are following flags of DVP series PLC:
Example :
M1020 : Zero flag
M1022 : Carry flag
M1021 : Borrow flag
M1029 : Command execution completed flag

When executing the command, all flags will be turned to ON or OFF by the operation result of
application commands. However, when the command has not been executed, the ON/OFF state of
the flags will remain. Therefore, please notice that the above flags may not only be in connection with
specified commands but also many commands.
The program example of command execution completed flag , i.e. M1029
When the conditional contact is ON, the digital switch input command (DSW) will specify 4 output
points with 0.1 second frequency and circulate in order automatically to read the values of DSW.
During the intermediate period of operation, if the conditional contact is OFF, the DSW command is
suspended and the above-mentioned command will be re-executed from the beginning of the
program cycle.When the conditional contact is ON again, please refer the circuit below if you desire
to stop the interrupt.
5-10
X0
SET
When X0=ON, DSW command is activated.
M0
M0
DSW X10
Y10
D0
K0
M1029
RST
When X0=OFF, wait for the program cycle of

DSW command being completed, after
M1029=ON, then M0 will be OFF.
M0
2. Error Operation Flags

If the combination of the application command is error and/or the assigned devices of operands are out of
range, errors will occur and the error flags and numbers in the following table will be shown during the
excution of the application commands.
M1067
When error operations occur, M1067=On, D1067 will show the error number and D1069 will
D1067
show the error address.
D1069
If other errors occur, the contents of D1067 and D1069 will be refreshed. (when the error is
resetd, M1067=Off)
M1068
When error operations occur, M1068=On, D1068 will show the error address.
D1068
If other errors occur, the contents of D1068 will not be refreshed, M1068 must use RST
command to reset to OFF, otherwise the error will remain.
3. Flags for Extending Functions

Some application commands can extend the functions by using some special flags.
Example: command RS can switch transmission mode 8-bit and 16-bit by using M1161.
The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands:
Some commands can be used several times in the program, but some of them only can be used twice or even
once in the program. However, these commands can be modified by index register to extend more functions of
the commands in the operands.
1. Only can be used once in the program:
API 58 (PWM) (ES/EX/SS models)
API 74 (SEGL) (ES/EX/SS models)
API 60 (IST) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA/EH models)

API 88 (PID) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models)
2. Only can be used twice in the program:

API 57 (PLSY) (ES/EX/SS models)
API 74 (SEGL) (EH models)
API 59 (PLSR) (ES/EX/SS models)

API 77 (PR) (EP/SA/EH models)
3. Only can be used four times in the program:

API 169 (HOUR) (EP/SA models)
4. Only can be used eight times in the program:
API 64 (TTMR) (EP/SA models)
5-11
5. API 53 (DHSCS) and API 54 (DHSCR), these commands only can be executed simultaneously less than four
times in the program of DVP-ES/EX/SS models.
6. API 53 (DHSCS), API 54 (DHSCR), API 55(DHSZ) these commands only can be executed simultaneously
less than six times in the program of DVP-EP/SA models.
The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands Simultaneously:
There is no limited using time for executing the same command in the program. However, there are limited
using times for executing the commands simultaneously.
1.
API 52 (MTR), API 56 (SPD), API 62 (ABSD), API 63 (INCD), API 69 (SORT), API 70 (TKY), API 71
(HKY), API 72 (DSW) (EP models), API 74 (SEGL)(EP models), API 75 (ARWS), API 80 (RS), API 100
(MODRD), API 101 (MODWR), API 102 (FWD), API 103 (REV), API 104 (STOP), API 105 (RDST), API
106 (RSTEF), API 150 (MODRW), API 151 (PWD), these commands only can be executed simultaneously
once in the program.
2.
API 57 (PLSY), API 58 (PWM), API 59 (PLSR), API 72 (DSW) (EH models), these commands only can be
executed simultaneously twice in the program.
3.
API 169 (HOUR) (EH models) only can be executed four times in the program.
4.
API 64 (TTMR) (EH models) only can be executed eight times in the program.
5.
In the program of DVP EH models, there is no limited using time for hardware high speed counter related
commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the
commands simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one memory unit and DHSZ command will
use two memory units. When these commands are executed simultaneously, the total used memory units
can not exceed eight memory units. If exceeding eight memory units, system will totalize the used memory
units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will be ignored.
5.3 Handling of Numeric Values

Device such as X, Y, M, S are bit devices and there are only two state, ON and OFF. However, T, C, D, E,
F are data registers and are defined as word devices. Although bit device can only be single point
ON/OFF but it can be used as numeric value in the operands of application commands if adding the
specified bit device in front. The specified bit device is the specified number of digit and it would look
like Kn where n can be a number from the range of 0 to 8.
16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0
means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7.
5-12
valid data
M15
M14
M13 M12
M11 M10
M9
M8
M7
M6
M5
M4
M3
M2
M1
M0
clear to 0
D1
0
b15
b14
b13
low byte
transmit
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
equal to
D1
low byte
1
Transmit K1M0, K2M0, K3M0 to 16-bit registers and insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted.
Its the same as sending K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, K7M0 to 32-bit registers and the
insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted also.
The insufficient upper bit will be defined as 0 if the content of the operand assign K1 to K3 in 16-bit
operation or assign K4 to K7 in 32-bit operation. Therefore, it means the operation result is positive.
M0
BIN K2X4
D0
The BCD value combined by X4 to X13 will be converted to

D0 as BIN value.
The numbers of Bit device can specify freely. However, it is recommended to use 0 in the lowest digit
decimal place of X and Y devices (X0, X10, X20Y0, Y10, Y20). For M and S Series, it is recommended
to use the multiple 8 but the use of 0 is the most device efficient, like M0, M10, M20etc.
Assign Continuous Numbers
For example , like D date register, the continuous numbers of D are D0, D1, D2, D3, D4etc.
For the bit device, the continuous numbers are shown as follows:
K1X0
K1X4
K1X10
K1X14
K2Y0
K2Y10
K2Y20
Y2X30
K3M0
K3M12
K3M24
K3M36.
K4S0
K4S16
K4S32
K4S48.
The bit device numbers are all of the above. To avoiding errors, please do not skip over the continuous
numbers. Furthermore, if K4Y0 is used in 32-bit operation, the upper 16bit is defined as 0. Therefore, it is
recommended to use K8Y0 in 32bit operation.
Floating Point Operation
The internal operation of DVP series PLC usually is operated by BIN integer format. When performing integer
division operation, the decimal point will be discarded. For example: 40 3 = 13, remainder is 1 and the
decimal point will be discarded. But if use floating point operation, the decimal point can be given.
5-13
The application commands related to floating point operation are shown in the following table.
API 49 (FLT),
API 110 (D ECMP),
API 111 (D EZCP),
API 116 (D RAD),
API 117 (D DEG),
API 118 (D EBCD),
API 119 (D EBIN),
API 120 (D EADD),
API 121 (D ESUB),
API 122 (D EMUL),
API 123 (D EDIV),
API 124 (D EXP),
API 125 (D LN),
API 126 (D LOG),
API 127 (D ESQR),
API 128 (D POW)
API 129 (INT)
API 130 (D SIN)
API 131 (D COS)
API 132 (D TAN)
API 133 (D ASIN)
API 134 (D ACOS)
API 135 (D ATAN)
API 136 (D SINH)
API 137 (D COSH)
API 138 (D TANH)
Binary Floating Point
DVP PLC represents floating point number with 32-bit number by IEEE754 and the format is in the following:
8-bit
S
b 31
23-bit
mantissa
exponent
b0
Sign bit
0: positive
1: negative
Equation ( 1) 2 E B 1.M ; B = 127

S
Therefore, the range of 32-bit floating is from 2-126 to 2+128, i.e. from 1.175510-38 to 3.402810+38.
Example 1: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23
Step 1: convert 23 to binary number: 23.0=10111
Step 2: Normalizing the binary: 10111=1.0111 24, 0111 is mantissa and 4 is an exponent.
Step 3: get exponent: E-B=4 E-127=4 E=131=100000112
Step 4: We can now combine the sign, exponent, and normalized mantissa into the binary IEEE short real
representation.
0 10000011 011100000000000000000002=41B8000016
Example 2: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23
The conversion steps are the same as decimal number 23. Only need to modify sign bit from 0 to 1 to get value
1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016
DVP PLC also uses two registers with continuous number to store binary floating point. The following is the example
that uses register (D1, D0) to store binary floating point.
D1(b15~b0)
7
2
E7
2
E6
2
E5
b31 b30 b29 b28
2
E1
D0(b15~b0)
0
-1
-2
-3
-17
-18
-19
-20
-21
-22
-23
2
2
2
2
E0 A22 A21 A20
2
A6
2
A5
2
A4
2
A3
2
A2
2
A1
2
A0
b24 b23 b22 b21 b20
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
8 bits of exponent
E0~E7=0 or 1
23 bits of constant
A0~A22=0 or 1
sign bit (0: positive 1:negative)

When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0.
5-14
Decimal Floating Point
The binary floating point is not accepted by most people. Therefore, binary floating point format can be converted
to decimal floating point format for people to perform the operation of decimal numbers. However, the DVP series
PLC use binary floating point to perform the operation of decimal numbers.
Decimal floating point is stored in the register with 2 continuous numbers. The register with small number stores
constant and the register with larger number stores exponent.
For example, using register (D1, D0) to store a decimal floating point.
Decimal floating point = [constant D0] X 10 [exponent D1 ]
constant D0 = 1,000~9,999
exponent D1 = - 41~+35
the most significant bit of (D1, D0) is symbol bit.
Besides, constant 100 doesnt exist in D0 due to 100 will be shown with 1,00010-1.
The range of decimal number is from 117510-41 to 340210+38.
Decimal floating point can be used in the following commands.
The conversion command for Binary floating point
The conversion command for Decimal floating point
Decimal floating point (D EBCD)

Binary floating point (D EBIN)
Zero flag (M1020), Borrow flag (M1021) and carry flag (M1022)
The flags that corresponds to the floating command are:
Zero flag: when the result is 0, M1020=On.
Borrow flag: when the result is least than the minimum unit, M1021=On
Carry flag: when the absolute value of result exceeds usage range, M1022=On
5.4 Index register E, F

The index register is 16-bit register. There are 2 devices for ES/EX/SS models (E and F), 8 devices for EP
models (E0~E3, F0~F3) and 16 devices for EH models (E0~E7, F0~F7).
E and F are also 16-bit register just the same as general
register. It can be wrote/read freely.
16-bit
E0
16-bit
If using a 32-bit register, you should specify E. In this
F0
condition, F will be covered by E and cannot be used

anymore; otherwise the contents of E will become incorrect.
32-bit
(When PLC start-up, it is commended to use MOVP
E0
F0
upper bit
lower bit
command to clear the contents of F and reset it to 0)

When using 32-bit index register, the combination of E, F are
as follows. (E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2)(E7, F7).
5-15
As the left figure shown, the contents of operand will change
MOV K20E0 D10F0 according to the contents of E, F. and we name this kind of
modification as Index.
E0=8
F0=14
For example, E0=8 and K20E0 all represent constant
20+8=28 10+14=24
K28
D24
transmit
K28(20+8). If the contact is ON, constant K28 will be

transmitted to register D24.
Devices can use Index register to modify in ES/EX/SS Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D.
Devices can use Index register to modify in EP Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
Devices can use Index register to modify in EH Series are: P, I, X, Y, M, S, K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D
The above device can use index register E, F to modify. However, index register E, F cannot modify itself,
either Kn. (K4M0E0 is available, K0E0M0 is not available). In each application command, if the symbol is
added in the table of operand, it means the device can use index register E, F to modify.
Index register E, F can be used to modify P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D these devices under
certain condition. Two devices, E or F can be specified when using 16-bit register. If using index register E, F to
modify constant K, H in 32-bit command, only one device, E can be specified.
When constant (K,H) is used to be index function in WPLSoft command mode, it needs to use symbol
@.
Example: MOV K10@E0 D0F0
The program example of index:
T0 can use index register F0 to shorten the program and

display the 7 present value of T0~T9 on the external 7-step
The digit switch input X3~X0,

which be selected by Timer T
display panel.
M1000
BIN K1X0
DVP - PLC
(X3~X0)BCD
F0
(F0)BIN
BCD T0F0 K4Y0

(T0F0)BIN
(Y17~Y0)BCD
When F0=0~9, T0F0=T0~T9.
The 7-step display output Y17~Y0, which be

used to display the present value of Timer T
There are limited using times of some commands. If using the index register E, F to modify, the final result can
be the same as the operation result of using the same command repeatedly.
5-16
5.5 Index for Commands
Sort by Characters
Classification A P I
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
ABS
ABSD
ABSR
ADD
ALT
DABS
DABSD
DABSR
DADD
218 AND&
DAND&
220 AND^
DAND^
219 AND|
DAND|
234 AND<
DAND<
87
62
155
20
66
237 AND<= DAND<=
236 AND<> DAND<>
232 AND=
DAND=
233 AND>
DAND>
238 AND>= DAND>=
93 ANDF
92 ANDP
ANR
ANS
ARWS
ASC
ASCII
47
46
75
76
82
32 bits
P
Command
133
DASIN
134
DACOS
135
DATAN
DBCD
DBIN
DBON
DCML
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
18
19
15
44
01
84
00
14
BCD
BIN
BMOV
BON
CALL
CCD
CJ
CML
Function
Absolute value
Absolute drum sequencer
ABS current value read
Perform the addition of BIN data
On/Off alternate command
S1 & S2 is true
S1 ^ S2 is true
S1 | S2 is true
S1 < S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 = S2 is true
S1 > S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
operation
operation
Alarm device reset
Alarm device output
Arrow keyboard input
ASCII code conversion
Convert HEX to ASCII
Arcsine operation of binary
floating point
Arccosine operation of binary
floating point
Arctangent operation of binary
floating point
Convert BIN data into BCD
Convert BCD data into BIN
Block move
Determine the ON bits
Call subroutine
Check code
Conditional jump
Compliment
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH
16-bit 32-bit
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
7
7
3
5
17
13
13
7-100
7-43
9-14
6-29
7-49
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
10-5
3-12
3-11
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
7
9
11
7
6-58
6-58
7-65
7-66
7-88
8-39
8-40
8-41
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
7
7
3
7
3
5
9
9
13
6-26
6-27
6-23
6-56
6-5
7-95
6-1
6-22
5-17
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
10 CMP
97 CNT
DCMP
DCNT
131
DCOS
137
DCOSH
DDEC
DDEG
DDIV
DDRVA
DDRVI
DEADD
3
3
3
3
108
25
41
117
05
23
159
158
72
120
CRC
DEC
DECO
DI
DIV
DRVA
DRVI
DSW
118
DEBCD
119
DEBIN
110
123
04 EI
DECMP
DEDIV
3
3
122
DEMUL
42 ENCO
5-18
Function
Compare
Counter
Cosine operation of binary
floating point
Hyperbolic cosine operation of
CRC error check
Perform the subtraction of 1
8 256 bits decode
Radian Degree
Disable interrupts
Perform the division of BIN data
Data backup MEMORY write in
Drive to increment
Digital Switch input
Binary floating point addition
decimal floating point
Convert decimal floating point to
Binary floating point comparison
Binary floating point division
Enable interrupts
Binary floating point
multiplication
256 8 bits encode
Square root of binary floating
point
Binary floating point subtraction
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH
16-bit 32-bit
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
4
13
6
6-17
3-8
8-36
8-42
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
7
1
7
9
9
9
13
17
17
13
8-15
6-34
6-53
8-21
6-7
6-32
9-26
9-22
7-58
8-24
8-23
8-23
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
13
13
8-19
8-27
6-7
13
8-26
6-54
8-31
13
8-25
127
DESQR
121
DESUB
124
DEXP

perform exponent operation
8-28
111
DEZCP
Binary floating point zone

comparison
17
8-20
First end
6-11
06 FEND
32 bits
P
Command
6-61
Convert BIN integer to binary

floating point
Multiple devices movement
Start of FOR-NEXT loop
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
3
13
6-24
6-14
Read special module CR data
17
7-69
49 FLT
DFLT
16 FMOV
08 FOR
DFMOV
78 FROM
DFROM
102 FWD
VFD-A series drive forward

command
8-8
145 FTC
Fuzzy temperature control
8-45
144 GPWM
8-44
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
5
5
7
9
9
9
17
9-45
9-44
7-92
7-56
171
170
83
71
GBIN
GRY
HEX
HKY
DGBIN
DGRY
DHKY
3
3
3
General pulse width modulation

output
Convert Gray code to BIN
Convert BIN to Gray code
16-key keyboard input
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
32 bits
169 HOUR
DHOUR
54
DHSCR
53
DHSCS
196 HST
DHST
55
DHSZ
24 INC
63 INCD
DINC
129 INT
DINT
98 INV
03 IRET
60 IST
215 LD&
DLD&
217 LD^
DLD^
216 LD|
DLD|
226 LD<
DLD<
229 LD<=
DLD<=
228 LD<>
DLD<>
224 LD=
DLD=
225 LD>
DLD>
230 LD>=
DLD>=
91 LDF
90 LDP
P
Command
Function
Hour meter
RESET
SET
High speed counter
Zone comparison (High-speed
counter)
Perform the addition of 1
Increment drum sequencer
BIN integer
Inverting operation
Interrupt return
Manual/Auto control
S1 & S2 is true
S1 ^ S2 is true
S1 | S2 is true
S1 < S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 = S2 is true
S1 > S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH
16-bit 32-bit
13
9-44
13
7-15
13
7-6
9-60
17
7-17
3
3
3
3
3
9
6-34
7-44
8-33
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
7
3-15
6-7
7-36
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3-11
3-11
125
DLN

perform natural logarithm
operation
8-29
126
DLOG

perform logarithm operation
13
8-30
DMEAN
DMEMR
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
LRC error check

Matrix AND
Matrix bit state count
Matrix bit rotate
Matrix bit read
Matrix bit shift
Matrix bit write
Matrix compare
Mean value
Data backup MEMORY read
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
9
7
7
7
7
7
9
7
7
13
13
8-13
9-47
9-59
9-58
9-54
9-56
9-55
9-52
6-57
8-49
107
180
190
189
186
188
187
185
45
148
LRC
MAND
MBC
MBR
MBRD
MBS
MBWR
MCMP
MEAN
MEMR
5-19
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
149
184
183
100
150
101
181
12
52
32 bits
MEMW DMEMW
MINV
MNOR
MODRD
MODRW
MODWR
MOR
MOV
DMOV
MTR
P
Command
3
3
3
3
3
22 MUL
DMUL
182 MXOR
29 NEG
09 NEXT
DNEG
3
3
221 OR&
DOR&
223 OR^
DOR^
222 OR|
DOR|
242 OR<
DOR<
245 OR<=
DOR<=
244 OR<>
DOR<>
240 OR=
DOR=
241 OR>
DOR>
246 OR>=
DOR>=
95 ORF
94 ORP
88 PID
99 PLF
89 PLS
Applicable models
STEPS
Page
ES
EP
EH
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
9
7
11
7
9
5
9
13
8-50
9-52
9-51
8-1
9-1
8-5
9-49
6-19
7-3
13
6-31
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
3
1
9-50
6-38
6-14
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-6
10-6

3
operation
3-13
3-12
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
3
3
7-100
3-13
3-13
MEMORY write in
Matrix inverse
Matrix NOR
MODBUS data Read
MODBUS data read/write in
MODBUS data write in
Matrix OR
Data Move
Input matrix
Perform the multiplication of BIN
data
Matrix XOR
Negation
S1 & S2 is true
S1 ^ S2 is true
S1 | S2 is true
S1 < S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 S2 is true
S1 = S2 is true
S1 > S2 is true
S1 S2 is true

operation
PID calculation
Falling-edge output
Rising-edge output
16-bit 32-bit
59 PLSR
DPLSR
Pulse wave output with

acceleration/deceleration speed
17
7-31
157 PLSV
57 PLSY
DPLSV
DPLSY
Variable speed pulse output

Pulse output
3
3
7
7
13
13
9-21
7-25
128
DPOW

perform power operation
13
8-32
7-67
7-87
77 PR
81 PRUN
5-20
Function
DPRUN
Print
Octal number system
transmission
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
32 bits
151 PWD
P
Command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
STEPS
Page
16-bit 32-bit
Input pulse width detection
9-11
58 PWM
116
67 RAMP
154 RAND
DRAD
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
9
7-30
8-21
7-50
9-13
33 RCL
DRCL
6-44
32 RCR
DRCR
Pulse width modulation output

Degree Radian
Ramp signal
Random value
Rotate to the left with the carry
flag attached
Rotate to the right with the carry
flag attached
6-43
105 RDST
VFD-A series drive status read
8-11
50 REF
I/O refresh
7-1
51 REFF
Refresh and adjust the response
time of input filter
7-2
103 REV
8-9
31 ROL
30 ROR
DROL
DROR
3
3
VFD-A series drive reverse

command
Rotate to the left
Rotate to the right
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
6-42
6-41
Serial data communication
9
9
8-13
9-12
9-11
Function
80 RS
VFD-A series drive abnormal

reset
End to measure the execution
time of I interrupt
Start to measure the execution
time of I interrupt
7-74
106 RSTEF
153 RTMD
152 RTMU
73 SEGD
Decode the 7-step display panel
7-60
74 SEGL
61 SER
39 SFRD
DSER
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
9
7
17
7-61
7-42
6-50
35 SFTL
6-46
34 SFTR
6-45
38 SFWR
7-step display scan output

Search a data stack
Shift register read
to the left
to the right
Shift register write
Sine operation of binary floating
point
Hyperbolic sine operation of
Shift move
Data sort
Speed detection
Square root of BIN
Subroutine return
Special timer
VFD-A series drive stop
command
Perform the subtraction of BIN
data
6-49
8-34
8-42
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
11
11
7
5
1
7
6-20
7-52
7-24
6-60
6-5
7-48
8-9
13
6-30
Sum of ON bits
6-56
130
DSIN
136
DSINH
SMOV
SORT
SPD
SQR
SRET
STMR
DSQR
104 STOP
21 SUB
DSUB
43 SUM
DSUM
13
69
56
48
02
65
5-21
Mnemonic Codes
16 bits
32 bits
147 SWAP
109 SWRD
DSWAP
162 TADD
X
Z
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
STEPS
Page
16-bit 32-bit
Swap high/low byte

Digital switch read
3
3
3
3
3
3
8-48
8-18
Real time clock data addition
9-37
8-37
8-43
DTAN
138
DTANH
Tangent operation of binary

floating point
Hyperbolic tangent operation of
Time compare
11
9-35
DTKY
DTO
3
3
10-key keyboard input

Timer
Special module CR data write in
Time data read
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
4
9
3
13
17
7-54
3-8
7-69
9-40
163 TSUB
Time subtraction
9-38
TTMR
TWR
TZCP
VRRD
VRSC
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
3
9
5
5
7-46
9-42
9-36
7-97
7-99
26 WAND
DAND
13
6-35
Teaching timer
Time data write in
Time zone compare
Potentiometer read
Potentiometer scale
Perform the logical product
(AND) operation
Watchdog timer refresh
Perform the logical sum (OR)
operation
Shift the register to the left
Shift the register to the right
Perform the exclusive logical add
(XOR) operation
Data exchange
Zone compare
Zero point return
Resets a range of device
specified
6-12
13
6-36
3
3
3
3
9
9
6-48
6-47
13
6-37
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
9
9
9
17
17
6-25
6-18
9-18
6-51
70
96
79
166
64
167
161
85
86
TKY
TMR
TO
TRD
07 WDT
W
Function
3
3
132
160 TCMP
T
P
Command
27 WOR
DOR
37 WSFL
36 WSFR
3
3
28 WXOR
DXOR
17 XCH
11 ZCP
156 ZRN
DXCH
DZCP
DZRN
3
3
40 ZRST
Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series.
Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models dont possess pulse execution command (P command).
5-22
6 Application Commands API 00-49

API
00
CJ
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: Operand S can assign P
P can be modified by Index register E, F
ES Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P63
EP / EH Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P255
ES series models do not support the pulse execution
command (CJP)
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
Conditional Jump
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
CJ
CJP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: The destination pointer of conditional jump

CJ command can be used in the following conditions:
1. In order to shorten the program scan time when user do not want to execute some
unnecessary parts of PLC program.
2. In double or dual coils designation.
When the program that pointer P indicats is before CJ command, please note that the
error of WDT exceeding time. If PLC stop running, please use carefully.
CJ command can assign the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ command and
CALL command cannot assign the same pointer P, otherwise the error will occur.
The explanation of each device when executing the CJ command:
1. Y, M, S remains its previous state before the condition jump occurs.
2. The timer 10ms, 100ms that execute the counting will stop.
3. The timer T192~T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the
output contact will execute normally.
4. The high-speed counter that executes the counting will continue and the output
contact will execute normally.
5. The general counter will stop.
6. If the reset command of the accumulative type timer is activated before the condition
jump is activated, the device will be still in the reset state when condition jump is
executing.
7. The general application commands will not be executed.
8. The executing application commands, i.e. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, API 55
DHSZ, API 56 SPD, API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA, will continue executing.
6-1

Program
Example
1
When X0=On, the program will skip from address 0 to N (label P1) automatically and
keep on executing. But the area between address 0 and N will be skipped and will not
be executed.
When X0=Off, as usual, the program will keep on executing from address 0. CJ
command will not be executed.
X0
(CJ command)
P***
CJ
P1
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
P1 N
Program
Example
2
There are five situations that the CJ command can be executed between the
commands MC and MCR.
1. Out of MC~MCR.
2. Valid in the loop P1 in the following chart.
3. In the same level N, inside of MC~MC .
4. Inside of MC, out of MCR.
5. Jump from this MC~MCR to another MC~MCR. (1)
(1)
This function is only provided in V4.9 (included) or higher version of ES series

models and EP/EH series models.
The execution explanations of V4.7(included) or lower version of ES series models:

CJ command is used between MC and MCR command but It is only used in the range
out of MC~MCR or in the same level N inside the MC~MCR. CJ command can not be used to
jump from this range of MC~MCR to another range of MC~MCR, otherwise the error will
occur. CJ command can execute correctly in the above-mentioned condition 1 and 3 but the
error will occur if it is not used in other conditions.
X0
MC
N0
CJ
P0
CJ
P1
MC
N1
X2
X3
X1
M1000
Y1
P1
MCR
N1
M1000
P0
Y0
MCR
6-2
N0

Program
Example
3
The states of each device are shown in the following:

Device
Y, M, S
10ms, 100ms
Timer
(ES/EP/EH)
1ms, 10ms,
100ms Timer (for
accumulative)
EP/EH
C0~C234
Application
command
The contact The contact state

The output coil state during CJ
state before CJ
during CJ
execution
execution
execution
M1, M2, M3
M1, M2, M3
Y1 (note1), M20, S1 Off
Off
OfftOn
M1, M2, M3
M1, M2, M3
Y1 (note1), M20, S1 On
On
OntOff
M4 Off
M4 OfftOn
M4 On
M4 OntOff
M6 Off
M6 OfftOn
Timer (T240) is not activated
M6 On
M6 OntOff
All accumulative timers will stop

but latched once executing
command CJ. When M0 is from
OntOff, T240 will be
unchanged.
M7, X10 Off
M10 On/Off
trigger
Timer does not count
M7 Off, X10
On/Off trigger
M10 On/Off
trigger
The interrupt of counter latched.

Keep on counting after M0 is off.
M11 Off
M11 OfftOn
Application commands wont be

executed.
M11 OntOff
Do not execute the skipped

application command but API
53~59, API 157~159 keep
executing.
M11 On
Timer is not activated

The interrupt of timer latched.
Keep on counting after M0 is off.
Note 1: Y1 is dual output. When M0 is Off, it is controlled by M1. when M0 is On, it is

controlled by M12.
Note 2: When timer that subroutine used (T192~T199, for EP/EH) executes CJ command, it
will keep counting. After timer attains, output contact of timer will be On.
Note 3: When high-speed counters (C235~C255) execute CJ command, it will kekep counting
and output point will also continue act.
6-3

Y1 is double or dual coil designation. When M0=Off, it is controlled by M1. When M0=On,
it is controlled by M12.
M0
CJ
P0
M1
Y1
M2
M20
M17
CJ
P0
M3
S1
M4
K10
TMR
T0
RST
T127
TMR
T127
RST
C0
CNT
C0
K20
MOV
K3
D0
CJ
P63
M5
M6
K1000
M7
M1
M11
M0
P0
M12
Y1
M13
P63
RST
T127
RST
C0
RST
D0
END
6-4

API
01
Applicable models
CALL
Call Subroutine
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: Operand S can assign P.
P can be modified by Index register E, F.
ES Series models: operand S can assign P0~P63.
EP / EH Series models: operand S can assign P0~P255.
ES Series models do not support the pulse execution
command (CALLP).
Command
Explanation
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
CALL
CALLP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: The desinition pointer of call subrountine.

Program continues in the subroutine after the FEND command.
Subroutine pointers of CALL command and the pointers of CJ command are not
allowed to coincide.
If only using CALL command, it can call subrountine of the same pointer number with
no limit of times.
Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL command. (If entering
the six level, the subroutine wont be executed.)
API
02
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Subroutine Return
SRET
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: No operand
The command driven by contact is not necessary.

Continuous
SRET
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
Indicates the end of subroutine program.

The subroutine will return to main program by SRET after the termination of subroutine
and execute the sequence program located at the next step to the CALL command.
Program
Example
1
When X0 = ON, then start CALL command, jump to P2 and run subroutine. When run
SRET command, it will jump back to address 24 and keep running.
6-5

P***
X0
CALL
20
24
X1
call subroutine P***
P2
Y1
FEND
P2
Y0
Subroutine P2
Y0
subroutine
SRET
subroutine return
When X10 is the rising-edge triggered CALL P10 command that goes from Off to On,
Program
Example
2
jump to P10 and run subroutine.

When X11 is On, execute CALL P11, jump to P11 and run subroutine.
When X14 is On, execute CALL P14, jump to P14 and run subroutine. When run SRET
command, it will jump back to the last P*** subroutine and keep running.
Run SRET command in the P10 subroutine and return to the main program.
X0
INC
D0
P12
X2
Y0
CALL
INC
P10
D1
X13
Main
Program
X2
Y1
FEND
INC
INC
D10
subroutine
D40
Y12
P11
X14
subroutine
D11
X2
CALL
P14
INC
D41
subroutine
Y13
SRET
SRET
X2
INC
D31
INC
P13
Y5
P11
INC
SRET
Y4
X2
P13
X2
X11
CALL
CALL
Y11
X2
P10
D30
Y10
X10
X0
INC
D20
P14
Y6
X2
INC
D50
Y14
subroutine
X12
CALL
P12
subroutine
X2
INC
D21
SRET
END
Y7
SRET
6-6

API
03
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Interrupt Return
IRET
Bit devices
Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C
Note: No operand
E F

Continuous
IRET
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
IRET denotes the interrupt of subroutine program.

Terminate the processing of interrupt program and return to the main program by IRET
command. Execute the original program to produce the next interrupt command.
API
04
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: No operand
The pulse width of interrupt signal should be higher than 200us.
Please refer to the footnote of DI command to see the range of
numbers of each model.
API
05
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Enable Interrupts
EI

Continuous
EI
execution
32-bit command
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: No operand
Flag: M1050~M1059, M1280~M1294

(Please refer to the footnote of DI
command)
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Disable Interrupts
DI

Continuous
DI
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
EI command enables interrupt subroutine to be processed in the program, e.g. External

interrupt, Time interrupt, High-speed counter interrupt.
In the program, using interrupt subroutine between EI and DI command is allowed.
However, it is not allowed to use DI command if there is no disable interrupt period
during the program.
6-7

Even in the interrupt allowed range when interrupting special the auxiliary relay M1050
to M1059 in ES / EP series models and M1280 to M1294 in EH series models, the
corresponding interrupting request will not be activated.
Interrupting cursor ( I ) must be used after the FEND command.
Other interrupts are not allowed to occur during executing the interrupt routine
program.
When most interrupts occur, priority is given to the interrupt occuring first. If the
interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt with the lower pointer number will be
given the higher priority.
Any interrupt request occuring between DI and EI commands cannot be executed
immediately. The request will be memorized and execute the subroutine in the enabling
range of the interrupt.
When using the interrupt pointer, please do not repeatly use the high-speed counter
driven by the same X input contact.
When the interrupt routine program is running and the I/O is immediately activated, the
state of I/O can be refreshed by writing REF command in the program.
Program
Example
During the PLC operation, the program scans the commands between EI and DI, if X1
or X2 are ON, the subroutine A or B will be interruptted. When IRET is reached, the
main program will resume.
X0
EI
Y1
DI
Enabled interrupt
Disabled interrupt
EI
FEND
I 101
Y0
Enabled interrupt
Interrupt subroutine A
IRET
I 201
Y0
Interrupt subroutine B
IRET
6-8

Interrupt pointer I numbers of ES series models:
Footnote
1.
External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3) 4 points.
2.
Time interrupts: I6, 1 point (10~99, time base=1ms) (support for

V5.7)
3.
Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) (support for

V5.7)
Interrupt pointer I numbers of EP series models:

1.
External interrupts: (I001, X0), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4),
(I501, X5) 6 points.
2.
Time interrupts: I6, I7 2 points. (1~99ms, time base=1ms)
3.
High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53
DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)
4.
Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)
5.
The order of interrupt point I: high-speed counter interrupt, external interrupt,

time interrupt and communication interrupt for specific characters received.
Interrupt pointer I Number of EH series models:

1. External interrupts: (I00, X0), (I10, X1), (I20, X2), (I30, X3), (I40, X4),
(I50, X5) 6 points. (0 indicates the interrupt of falling-edge, 1 indicates
the interrupt of rising-edge)
2. Time interrupts: I6, I7, 2 points. (1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8
1 point. (1~99ms, time base=0.1ms)
3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53
DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs)
4. The interrupt, start and end of pulse output interrupt should be used with API 57
PLSY command. I130, I140 are triggered at the beginning of the pulse output by
the start-arranged flag of pulse output command M1342, M1343. Then, M1340,
M1341 will trigger I110, I120 at the end of pulse output command to interrupt the
executing program and jump to the assigned interrupt subroutine to execute .
5. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150)
6. The order of the interrupt pointer I : External interrupts, time interrupts, high-speed
counter interrupts, and pulse output interrupts.
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of ES series models:
Flag
M1050
M1051
M1052
M1053
Function
External interrupt, I 001 masked
6-9

Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EP series models:
Flag
M1050
M1051
M1052
M1053
M1054
M1055
M1056
M1057
M1059
Function
Time interrupt, I6 masked
Time interrupt, I7 masked
High-speed counter interrupt, I010~I040 masked
Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EH series models:

Flag
M1280
M1281
M1282
M1283
M1284
M1285
M1286
M1287
M1288
M1289
M1290
M1291
M1292
M1293
M1294
M1295
M1296
M1297
M1298
M1299
M1340
M1341
M1342
M1343
6-10
Function
External interrupt, I00masked
Time interrupt, I60masked
High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked
Pulse output interrupt insert I110 masked
After CH0 pulse is transmitted, I110 interrupt occur
After CH1 pulse is transmitted, I120 interrupt occur
CH0 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I130 interrupt occur simultaneously
CH1 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I140 interrupt occur simultaneously

API
06
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
First End
FEND
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: No operand

Continuous
FEND
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
This command denotes the end of the main routine program. It has the same function
as END command during PLC operation.
CALL must follow right after FEND command and add SRET command at the end of
the subroutine. Interrupt commands also have to follow after FEND command and add
IRET command at the end of the service program.
If using several FEND commands, please place the subroutine and interrupt service
programs between the last FEND and END command.
After CALL command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND
command before SRET command is executed.
After FOR command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND
command before NEXT command is executed.
CJ Command
ProgramFlow
The program flow

when X0=off,
X1=off
The program flow when X0=On

program jumps to P0
0
main
program
X0
CJ
P0
CALL
P63
X1
main
program
P0
P63
I301
main
program
command CALL
subroutine
interrupt
subroutine
6-11

CALLCommand
ProgramFlow
The program flow

when X0=off,
X1=off
The program flow

when X0=Off,
X1=On.
main
program
X0
CJ
P0
CALL
P63
X1
main
program
P0
P63
I301
API
07
main
program
command CALL
subroutine
interrupt
subroutine
Applicable models
WDT
Watchdog Timer Refresh
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: No operand
command (WDTP).
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
WDT
WDTP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
6-12

Command
Explanation
WDT (Watch Dog Timer) is used to monitor the PLC operation in the DVP series PLC
system.
The WDT command can be used to reset the Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scanning
time (from step 0 to END or FEND command) is more than 200ms, the ERROR LED will
flash. The user will have to turn the PLC off and then back ON to clear the fault. PLC will
determine the status of RUN/STOP according to RUN/STOP switch. If there is no
RUN/STOP switch, PLC will return to STOP automatically.
When to use WDT:
When error occur in PLC system.
When the executing time of the program is too long to cause the scanning time to
exceed the content value of D1000. It can be modified by using the following two
methods.
Use WDT command
Program
Example
STEP0
WDT
END(FEND)
t2
T1
Use the set value of D1000 (default is 200ms) to change the watchdog time.
If the program scanning time is over 300ms, users can divide the program into 2 parts.
Insert the Watchdog Timer in between, so both programs scanning time will be less
than 200ms.
300ms program
END
Dividing the program to two parts

so that both parts?scan time are
less than 200ms.
150ms program
X0
WDT
Watchdog timer reset
150ms program
END
6-13

API
08
Applicable models
Start of FOR-NEXT Loop
FOR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C
S
Note: The contact execution command is not necessary
ES
EP

Continuous
FOR
execution
32-bit command
EH
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
API
09
: The number of repeats for the nested loop
Applicable models
NEXT
Bit devices
Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
Note: No operand
ES
EP

Continuous
NEXT
execution
32-bit command
EH
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
FOR and NEXT commands are used when n nested loops are needed.
N may be within the range of K1 to K32767. If the range NK1, N will always be K1.
When it is not desired to execute the FOR to NEXT commands, use the CJ command.
Error will occur in the following conditions:
NEXT command is before FOR command.
With FOR command, without NEXT command.
There is a NEXT command after the FEND or END command.
The numbers of FOR to NEXT commands are different.
The FOR to NEXT loop can be nested for five levels but please notice that if there are
too many loops, the PLC scanning time will increase and it may cause the watchdog
timer to be activated and result in error. User can use WDT command to modify.
6-14

Program
Example
1
After loop A operate 3 times, the program after the NEXT command will resume. For
every completed cycle of loop A, loop B will completely executed for 4 times, therefore,
the total number of times that loop B operate will be 3 412 times.
FOR
K3
FOR
K4
B
NEXT
NEXT
Program
Example
2
Program which executes the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is off. It does not
execute the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is on and CJ command jump to P6.
X7
CJ
P6
MOV
K0
FOR
K3
MOV
D0
INC
D0
M0
M0
D0
D1
MEXT
P6
X10
Y10
6-15

When the FOR to NEXT command are not executed, CJ command can be used to
Program
Example
3
jump. When the most internal loop of FOR to NEXT, X1 will be ON and CJ command
will jump to P0 and not be executed.
X0
TMR
T0
FOR
K4X100
INC
D0
FOR
K2
INC
D1
FOR
K3
INC
D2
FOR
K4
K10
X0
X0
X0
X0
WDT
INC
D3
CJ
P0
FOR
K5
INC
D4
X1
X0
NEXT
P0
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END
6-16

API
10 D
CMP
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Compare
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S1
S2
D
Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.
command (CMPP, DCMPP).
Command
Explanation
: First comparison value

Continuous
Pulse
CMP
CMPP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DCMP
DCMPP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Second comparison value
Comparison result.
The contents of the comparison source
and
are compared and
denotes the compare result.

Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two
values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit
command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.
Program
Example
If
is set to Y0, then Y0, Y1, Y2 will work as the program example as below.
When X10=On, CMP command is driven and one of Y0, Y1, Y2 is On. When X10=Off,
CMP command is not driven and Y0, Y1, Y2 remain in the previous status.
The comparison result of , , commands can be got by the parallel connection of
Y0~Y2.
X10
CMP
K10
D10
Y0
Y0
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
Y1
Y2
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
If K10<D10, Y2= On
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.
X10
X10
RST
M0
RST
M1
RST
M2
ZRST
M0
M2
6-17

API
11
ZCP
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Zone Compare
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T

Continuous
Pulse
ZCP
ZCPP
execution
execution
D E F
S1
S2
S
D

Continuous
Pulse
DZCP
DZCPP
execution
execution
Flag: None
Note: If operand S1, S2, S use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command.
Operand S1 should be less than Operand S2.
command (ZCPP, DZCPP).
Command
Explanation
: First comparison value (Minimum)

(Maximum)
: Comparison value
is compared with its limits
: Second comparison value
: Comparison result.
and
and
denotes the compare
result.
When
, set
as the limit to compare.
Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two
values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit
command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value.
Program
Example
If
is set to M0, then M0, M1, M2 will work as the program example as below.
When X0=On, ZCP command is driven and one of M0, M1, M2 is On. When X0=Off,
ZCP command is not driven and M0, M1, M2 remain in the previous status.
X0
ZCP
K10
K100
C10
M0
M0
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
M1
M2
If K10 <
= C10 <
= K100, M1 = On
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result.

X0
X0
6-18
RST
M0
RST
M1
RST
M2
ZRST
M0
M2

API
12
MOV
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Data Move
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F
S
D
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
command (MOVP, DMOVP)
Command
Explanation
: Data source

Continuous
Pulse
MOV
MOVP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DMOV
DMOVP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Data move destination

is moved to
When the MOV command is driven, the data of
change. If the MOV command is not driven, the content of
without any
remain unchanged.
If the calculation result is a 32-bit output, (i.e. the application MUL) and the data of a
32-bit high-speed counter, users will have to use DMOV command.
Program
Example
MOV command is used in 16-bit command to move data.

When X0=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X0=On, the data of K10 is
moved to D10 data register.
When X1=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X1=On, the data of T0 is
moved to D10 data register.
DMOV command is used in 32-bit command to move data
When X2=Off, the content of (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) remain unchanged. If X2=On,
the data of (D21, D20) is moved to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile, the data of C235
is moved to (D41, D40) data register.
X0
MOV
K10
D0
X1
MOV
T0
D10
DMOV
D20
D30
DMOV
C235
D40
X2
6-19

API
13
SMOV
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shift Move
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D
E F
S
m1
m2
D
n
32-bit command
Flag: M1168 (mode setting operation

of SMOV)
When M1168=On, BIN mode.
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=1~ 4

The usage range of operand m2: m2=1~ m1
The usage range of operand n: n=m2 ~ 4
: Data movementsource
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
SMOV
SMOVP
execution
execution
When M1168=Off, BCD mode.
: Source position of the first digit to be moved
: Number of source digits to be moved
: Data destination of movement
: Destination position for the first digit

This command can arrange or combine the data.
Program
Example
1
When M1168=Off, X0=On, assign the content of the two digits from the 4th digit
(thousands place digital) of D10 (decimal number) and move the assigned data to the
two digits from the 2nd digit (hundreds' place digits) of D20 (decimal number). Then, the
content of 103 and 100 of D20 remain unchaged after SMOV command is executed.
When BCD number is higher than 9,999 or be negative (outside range of 0 to 9,999), an
operation error will occur in PLC. Then, the command will not be executed and M1067,
M1068 will be On, D1067 record error code 0E18 (hexidecimal number).
M1001
M1168
X0
SMOV
D10
K4
K2
D20
K3
D10(BIN 16bit)
Auto conversion
10
10
10
10
No variation
No variation
10
10
10
10
D10(BCD 4 digits)
Shift move
D20(BCD 4 digits)
Auto conversion
Program
Example
2
6-20
D20(BIN 16bit)
If D10=H1234D20=H5678 before executing, D10 wont change and D20=H5128 after
finishing execution.
When M1168=On, if use SMOV command, the D10 and D20 do not move data in BCD
format. However the data is moved as a 4 digit BIN number.

M1000
M1168
X0
SMOV
Digit 4
K4
D10
Digit 3
Digit 2
K2
D20
K3
Digit 1
D10(BIN 16bit)
Shift move
D20(BIN 16bit)
Digit 4
No variation
Program
Example
3
Digit 3
Digit 2
Digit 1
No variation
Digit switch connected to the interrupted number inputs can use SMOV command to
combine.
Move the right second digit switch to the right second digit of D2 and move the left first
digit switch to the right first digit of D1.
Use SMOV command to move the first digit to the third digit of D2 and combine these
two digit switches into one group.
10
6
8
10
10
8
8
X13~X10
X27~X20
PLC
M1001
M1168
M1000
BIN K2X20
D2
(X20~X27)BCD
D2(BIN)
2 digits
BIN
K1X10
D1
(X10~X13)BCD
1 digit
D1(BIN)
SMOV
D1
K1
K1
D2
K3
6-21

API
14
CML
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Compliment
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
CML
CMLVP
execution
execution
S
D
command.
command (CMLP, DCMLP)
: Transfer data source
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
DCML
DCMLP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Transfer destination device
Counter phase the contents of
(01, 10) and have the contents transferred to
. If the content is Constant K, this Constant K will be converted to the BIN value
automatically.
This command can be used during the counter-phase output.
Program
Example
1
When X10=ON, contents of D1, b0~b3, will be counter transferred to K1Y0.
X10
CML
K1Y0
D1
b 15
D1
b3
b2
b1
b0
Symbol bit (0=positive, 1=negative)
No variation
Program
Example
2
Transfer the
counter-phase data
The left loop shown below can be displayed as the right program example by using CML
command.
X000
M0
X001
X002
X003
M1
M2
M3
M1000
CML K1X0 K1M0

X000
X001
X002
X003
6-22
M0
Normal on contact
M1
M2
M3
API
15
BMOV
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Block Move
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
BMOV
BMOVP
execution
execution
S
D
n
32-bit command
Note: The usage range of operand n=1~ 512

ES series models do not support the pulse execution command
(BMOVP).
Command
Explanation
: Head source device
Flag: None
: Head destination device
: Block of multiple
data
This command is used to move an assigned block of multiple data to a new destination.
Move the contents of the
register, with this
the registers within the
-assigned numbers, to the
-assigned number. If the
register obtained from counting

register within the
-assigned points exceed the usage range of this
device, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved.
Program
Example
1
When X10=On, move the contents of the four registers D0~D3 to their corresponding
registers D20~D23.
X10
D20
D0
D1
K4
D20
D21
D22
D23
D2
D3
Program
Example
2
If move the specified bit device, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, the digit numbers of
n=4
and
should be the same and this also means the number of n should be the same.
ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.
M1000
D0
D20
K4
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
M8
M9
Y10
Y11
M10
M11
Y12
Y13
6-23

The BMOV command has built the automatic movement as the program example below
Program
Example
3
and
to prevent overwriting errors from occurring when the specified numbers of

coincide.
When
>
, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 123
When
<
, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 321.

<
But, be sure to avoid the specified number being continuous when
in
ES series models. Otherwise, the execution result will be the same value. For
example, when the BMOV command is processed in the order as 321, the
content value of D11 to D13 will all be the content value of D10.
X10
BMOV
D20
D19
1
2
3
D20
D21
K3
D22
X11
BMOV
D10
D11
3
2
1
D10
D11
K3
D12
API
16
FMOV
Bit devices
X Y M S
D21
D11
D13
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Fill Move
D19
D20
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command (7 STEPS)
Continuous
Pulse
FMOV
FMOVP
execution
execution
S
D
n
Continuous
Pulse
DFMOV
DFMOVP
command.
execution
execution
The usage range of operand n:
Flag: None
n=1~ 512(16-bit command), n=1~ 256 (32-bit command)
command (FMOVP, DFMOVP)
Command
Explanation
: Source device
: Head destination device
: A quantity of multiple
devices
The data stored in the source device
destination device. Move the contents of
is moved to every device within the range of

to the
register obtained from counting the registers within the
register, with this

-assigned numbers. If the
-assigned devices exceed the usage range, only those that are within the enabled
range will be moved.
ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices.
6-24

When X0=ON, move Constant K10 to the continuous five registers (D10~D14) starting
Program
Example
from D10.
X10
K10
FMOV
K10
API
17
XCH
K5
K10
D10
K10
D11
K10
D12
K10
D13
K10
D14
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
D1
D2
Note: If operand D1, D2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
command (XCHP, DXCHP).
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
1
n=5
Data Exchange
Bit devices
X Y M S
D10
: First exchange data

Exchange the contents of

Continuous
Pulse
XCH
XCHP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DXCH
DXCHP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Second exchange data

and
with each other.
This command is usually pulse execution (XCHP).

When X0=OffOn, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
X0
XCHP
D20
D40
Before
execution
After
execution
D20
120
40
D20
D40
40
120
D40
6-25

When X0=OffOn, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other.
X0
D100 D200
Program
Example
2
After
execution
Before
execution
D100
D100
D101
40
20
D200
D101
D200
D201
20
40
D201
In 16-bit command, when the devices specified by
Footnote
and
are the same and
M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that specified devices will exchange.
In 32-bit command, when the devices specified by
and
are the same and
M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that 32-bit devices will exchange.
When X0=On and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of D100, D0101 will
exchange.
Before
execution
After
execution
D100L
20
D100L
D100H
20
D100H
D101L
40
D101L
D101H
40
D101H
X0
M1303
DXCHP
API
18
BCD
D100
Converts BIN Data into BCD
Bit devices
X Y M S
D100
Word devices
S
D
command.
command (BCDP, DBCDP)
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
BCD
BCDP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DBCD
DBCDP
execution
execution
Flag: M1067 (operation error)
M1068 (operation error)
D1067 (error code)
Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) of the source device

result to the device
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
into BCD and transfers the
If the BCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 9999, an operation error occurs,
the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E18
(hexadecimal number).
6-26

If the DBCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 99,999,999, an operation error
occurs, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E18
(hexadecimal number).
The operation value of four fundamental operations (+, , , ), INC and DEC command
in PLC are executed in BIN format. This command can be used to output BIN format
data in BCD format value directly to a seven segment display.
When X0=ON, the binary data D10 is converted into BCD number, and stored at K4Y0
Program
Example
(Y0~Y3).
X0
BCD
D10
K1Y0
When D10=001E (Hex)=0030 (decimal number), the execution result will be

Y0~Y3=0000(BIN).
API
19
BIN
Converts BCD Data into BIN
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C
E F
S
D
command.
ES series models do not support pulse execution
command (BINP, DBINP)
Command
Explanation
: Data source

Continuous
Pulse
BIN
BINP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DBIN
DBINP
execution
execution
Flag: M1067 (operation error)
M1068 (operation error)
D1067 (error code)
: Converted result
Converts BCD data (0 to 9,999) of the source device

result to the device
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
into BIN and transfers the
The enabled range of source device

If the content of source device
: BCD (0 to 9,999), DBCD (0 to 99,999,999)

is not BCD value (each digit of
which is
indicated as HEX being outside the range of 0 to 9), an operation error will occur, the
error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code 0E18.
Constant K and H is automatically converted into the BIN data. There is no necessity for
constant to use this command.
Program
Example
When X0=ON, the BCD data K1X0 is converted to BIN data, and stored the result at
D10.
X0
BIN
K1X0
D10
6-27

The application explanation of BCD and BIN command:
Footnote
The BIN command is used to covert the source data into BIN data and store in the
PLC when PLC read a BCD format digit switch from external equipment.
The BCD command is used to convert the stored data into BCD data and transmit it
to the 7-segment display when PLC display the stored data on a BCD format
7-segment display from external equipment.
When X0=On, convert K4X0(BCD data) into BIN data and transmit it to D100. Then,
convert BIN data of D100 into BCD data and transmit it to K4Y20.
X0
10
10
10
BIN
K4X0
D100
BCD
D100
K4Y20
10
4 digit BCD format switch
2
8
X17
X0
4 digit BCD value
use the BIN command to

store BIN value into D100
use the BCD command to
convert the BIN value in D100
convert to be 4 digit BCD value
Y37
Y20
4 digit BCD format

7-segment display
6-28

API
20
ADD
Perform the Addition of BIN Data
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
(ADDP, DADDP).
: Augend
Command
Explanation
: Addend
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
ADD
ADDP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DADD
DADDP
execution
execution
Flag: M1020 (Zero flag)
M1021 (Borrow flag)
M1022 (Carry flag)
: Addition result
. Performs the addition on BIN data
, and stores the addition result into the device
and the BIN data
The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculation are algebraically processed, i.e. 3 + (-9) = -6.
Flag changes of binary addition
16-bit command:
If the operation result is 0, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds -32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
32-bit command:
1. If the operation result is 0, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.
2. If the operation result exceeds -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
3. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
Program
Example
1
16-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend D0 and addend D10 is combined
and the total is stored in the result device D20.
X0
ADD
D0
D10
D20
(D0) + (D10) = (D20)
Program
Example
2
32-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the augend (D31, D30) and addend (D41, D40)
is combined and the total is stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the
lower 16-bit data, and D31, D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data)
X10
DADD
D30
D40
D50
(D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)
6-29

Flag operations:
16-bit command: Zero flag
Footnote
-2B -1B 0B -32,768
-1B 0B 1
the most significant bit

becomes ? ?(negative)
Borrow flag
32-bit command: Zero flag
API
21
SUB

becomes ? ?(positive)
Zero flag
-1B 0B 1

becomes ? ?(negative)
2,147,483,647B 0B 1B 2

becomes ? ?(positive)
Word devices
S1
S2
D
16-bit command.
(SUBP, DSUBP).
: Minuend
Command
Explanation
Carry flag
Carry flag
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Perform the Subtraction of BIN

Data
Bit devices
X Y M S
32,767B 0B 1B 2
Zero flag
-2B -1B 0B -2,147,483,648
Borrow flag
Zero flag
Zero flag
: Subtrahend

Continuous
Pulse
SUB
SUBP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DSUB
DSUBP
execution
execution
M1021 (Borrow flag)
M1022 (Carry flag)
Please refer to the command
explanation of ADD command
: Subtraction result
. Performs the subtraction of BIN data
, and stores the subtraction result into the device
and the BIN data
The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates
negative. All calculation are algebraically processed.
Flag changes of binary subtraction
.
.
.
6-30
16-bit command:
If the operation result exceeds 32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.
32-bit command:
If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.
If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON.

The flag operations of SUB command please refer to the flag operations of ADD
command on the previous page.
16-bit command:
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend D10 is subtracted from the data
Program
Example
1
contained within the minuend D0 and the result of this calculation is stored in the result
device D20.
X0
SUB
D0
D10
D20
(D0) (D10) = (D20)

32-bit command:
Program
Example
2
When X0 is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend (D41, D40) is subtracted from
the data contained within the minuend (D31, D30) and the result of this calculation is
stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31,
D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data)
X10
DSUB
D30
D40
D50
(D31, D30) (D41, D40) = (D51, D50)
API
22
MUL
Perform the Multiplication of BIN Applicable models

ES
EP
EH
Data
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices.
In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices.
ES series models do not support the pulse execution Command
(MULP, DMULP).
: Multiplicand
Command
Explanation
: Multiplier

Continuous
Pulse
MUL
MULP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DMUL
DMULP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Multiplication result
. Performs the Multiplication of BIN data
, and stores the multiplication result into the device

attention to the polarity display of the operation result of
and the BIN data

. Please pay careful
and
in the
16-bit and 32-bit command.

16-bit command:
6-31

+1
b15................ b00
b15................ b00
X
b15 is a symbol bit
b31............ b16 b15............. b00
b15 is a symbol bit
b15=0,S 1 is a positive value
b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
b15=1,S 1 is a negative value b15=1,S 2 is a negative value b31=1,S 2 is a negative value
When
is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 and produce a 16-bit result. Then, the flag
M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E19.
32-bit command:
+1
+1
b31.. b16 b15.. b00
+3
b31.. b16 b15.. b00
+1
b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00
X
b31 is a symbol bit
+2
b63 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1 )
b31 is a symbol bit
b31=0,S 1 (S 1 +1) are positive value b31=0,S 2 (S 2 +1) are positive value
b63=0, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are positive value
b31=1,S 1 (S 1 +1) are negative value b31=1,S 2 (S 2 +1) are negative value
b63=1, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are negative value
When
is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. The
destination device is used to store low 32-bit data only.

16-bit command:
A 16-bit data source, D10 is multiplied by another 16-bit data source, D0 and the total is a
32-bit result, D20. The upper 16-bit data is stored in D21 and the lower one is stored in
D20. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most significant bit. OFF
indicates the value of positive 0 and ON indicates the value of negative 1.
X0
Program
Example
MUL
D0
D10
D20
MUL
D0
D10
K8M0
(D0) (D10) = (D21, D20)

16-bit 16-bit = 32-bit
API
23
DIV
Perform the Division of BIN Data
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous
devices.
In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous
devices.
Command (ADDP, DADDP).
6-32
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DIV
DIVP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DDIV
DDIVP
execution
execution
Flag: None

: Dividend
Command
Explanation
: Divisor
: Quotient and Remainder
. Performs the division of BIN data
, and stores the result into the device

polarity display of the operation result of
and the BIN data
. Please pay careful attention to the

,
and
in the 16-bit and 32-bit
command.
This command is not executed when the divisor is 0. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will
be On and D1067 record error code 0E19.
16-bit command:
Quotient
Remainder
+1
is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 to produce a 16-bit result and occupies 2
When
continuous groups. In regards to the operation result, the quotient and remainder are
stored.
32-bit command:
Quotient
+1
+1
+1
Remainder
+3
+2
is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. In regards to
When
the operation result, only the quotient is stored.
Program
Example
When X0 is ON, the primary source D0 (divisor) is divided by the second source D10
(dividend). The quotient is specified to be stored in D20 and the remainder is specified to
be stored in D21. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most
significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive and ON indicates the value of
negative.
X0
DIV
D0
D10
D20
DIV
D0
D10
K4Y0
6-33

API
24
INC
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Perform the Addition of 1
Word devices
D
Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available 16-bit
command.
(INCP, DINCP).

Continuous
Pulse
INC
INCP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DINC
DINCP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Destination device
Command
Explanation
If the command is not the pulse execution command, 1 is added to the value of
destination device
on every execution of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).

In 16-bit command, when +32,767 is reached, 1 is added and it will write a value
of 32,768 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when +2,147,483,647 is
reached, 1 is added and it will write a value of -2,147,483,648 to the destination device.
Flag M1020~M1022 wont be influenced by the operation result of this command.
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the addition of 1.
Program
Example
API
25
DEC
X0
INCP
Word devices
D
Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
ES series models do not support pulse the execution
(DECP, DDECP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Perform the Subtraction of 1
Bit devices
X Y M S
D0

Continuous
Pulse
DEC
DECP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DDEC
DDECP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Destination device
If the command is not the pulse execution command, 1 is subtracted to the value of
destination device
on every execution of the command.
This command is usually pulse execution (INCP, DINCP).

In 16-bit command, when 32,768 is reached, 1 is subtracted and it will write a value of
+32,767 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when -2,147,483,648 is reached,
1 is subtracted and it will write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination device.
6-34

Flag M1020~M1022 wont be influenced by the operation result of this command.
When X0 is ON, the content of D0 will perform the subtraction of 1.
X0
Program
Example
API W
26
AND
DECP
Perform the Logical Product Applicable models

ES
EP
EH
(AND) Operation
Bit devices
X Y M S
D0
Word devices
S1
S2
D
16-bit command.
(WANDP, DANDP)
: First data source device
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
WAND
WANDP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DAND
DANDP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Second data source device
: Operation result
Performs the logical product of the data source device
operation result into the device
and
, and stores the
General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is 0,
then the operation result is also 0.
Program
Example
1
When X0 is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the
operation result of the logical WAND command is stored in the device D4.
X0
WAND
Before
execution
After
execution
D0
D2
D4
b15
b00
D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
WAND
D2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D4 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
6-35

When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed
Program
Example
2
and the operation result of the logical DAND command is stored in the device (D41,
D40).
X1
DAND
D10
D20
D40
b31
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Before
execution
D11 D10
b15
b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
DAND
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D21 D20
After
execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
D41 D40
API W
27
OR
Perform the Logical Sum (OR) Applicable models

ES
EP
EH
Operation
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
16-bit command.
(WORP, DORP)
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
WOR
WORP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DOR
DORP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Operation result
Performs the logical sum of the data source device
operation result into the device
and
, and stores the
General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is 1,
then the operation result is also 1.
Program
Example
1
operation result of the logical WOR command is stored in the device D4.
X0
WOR
Before
execution
D0
D2
D4
b15
b00
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
WOR
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution
6-36
D4 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

Program
Example
2
and the operation result of the logical DOR command is stored in the device (D41, D40).
X1
DOR
D10
D20
D40
b
b31
b15
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
DOR
D11 D10
Before
execution
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
D21 D20
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
After
execution
D41 D40
API W
28
XOR
Perform the Exclusive Logical Applicable models

ES
EP
EH
Add (XOR) Operation
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
WXOR
WXORP
execution
execution
S1
S2
D

Continuous
Pulse
DXOR
DXORP
execution
execution
Flag: None

16-bit command.
(WXORP, DXORP).
Command
Explanation
Operation result
Performs the exclusive logical add of the data source device
stores the operation result into the device
and
, and
General operation rule: If both of the bit contained within the two data source devices are
the same, then the operation result is 0. But if both of the bit contained within the two
data source devices are different, then the operation result is 1.
Program
Example
1
operation result of the logical WXOR command is stored in the device D4.
X0
WXOR
Before
execution
D0
D2
D4
b15
b00
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
WOR
D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
execution
D4 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
6-37

Program
Example
2
Before
execution
and the operation result of the logical DXOR command is stored in the device (D41,
D40).
X1
DXOR
D10
D20
D40
b15
b0
b
b31
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
D11 D10
DXOR
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
D21 D20
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
After
execution
D41 D40
API
29 D
NEG
Negation
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
D
Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
ES series models do not support pulse execution (NEGP,
DNEGP).
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
NEG
NEGP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DNEG
DNEGP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Once the command is executed, the specified device,
, will be served as
the complement of 2.
This command can convert the negative BIN value to the positive number, and that is, to
get its absolute value.
This command is usually pulse execution (NEGP, DNEGP).
Program
Example
1
Program
Example
2
When X goes from OFF ON, every bit of the D10 contents will be countered (01,
10) and be added with 1, and will then be saved in the original register, D10.
X0
NEGP
D10
Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value:

1. When the 15th bit of D0 is 1, M0 is ON. (D0 is a negative value).
2. When M0 is ON, the absolute value of D0 can be obtained using the NEG command.
M1000
BON
M0
D0
K15
Normal ON contact
M0
NEGP
6-38
D0

Program
Example
3
Obtaining the absolute value by the result of the subtraction

1. When D0>D2, M0=ON.
2. When D0=D2, M1=ON.
3. When D0<D2, M2=ON.
4. Then D4 can be obtained and it will be a positive value.
X0
CMP
D0
D2
M0
SUB
D0
D2
D4
SUB
D2
D0
D4
M0
M1
M2
6-39

Footnote
Indication of the negative value and absolute value

The content of the most significant bit of the register indicates the positive and
negative value. It is a positive value when the content is 0 and it is a negative
value when the content is 1.
If it is a negative value, the absolute value can be obtained by using the NEG
command (API 29).
(D0=2)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0=1)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0=0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(D0=-1)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(D0=-2)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
(D0=-3)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
(D0=-4)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
(D0=-5)
(D0)+1=1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0)+1=2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0)+1=3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
(D0)+1=4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
(D0)+1=5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
(D0=-32,765)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
(D0)+1=32,765
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
(D0=-32,766)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
(D0)+1=32,766
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
(D0=-32,767)
(D0)+1=32,767
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
(D0=-32,768)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(D0)+1=32,768
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Max. absolute value is 32,767
6-40

API
30
ROR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
n
command.
If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4
(16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid.
Essential condition: 1n16 (16-bit), 1n32 (32-bit)
ES series models do not support pulse execution (RORP,
DRORP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Rotate to the Right

Continuous
Pulse
ROR
RORP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DROR
DRORP
execution
execution
Flag: M1022 (Carry flag)
: Rotation device (destination device)

The bit pattern of device
: Bit places of one time rotation
is rotated
bit places to the right on every
operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (RORP, DRORP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the right, as
Program
Example
shown in the diagram, and b3 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the
carry flag (CY) M1022.
X0
RORP
D10
K4
Rotate to the right

upper bit
lower bit
Carry
flag
D10 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
upper bit
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
lower bit
D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
*
Carry
flag
6-41

API
31 D
ROL
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
n
command.
ES series models do not support pulse execution (ROLP,
DROLP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Rotate to the Left


Continuous
Pulse
ROL
ROLP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DROL
DROLP
execution
execution
: Bit places of one time rotation
is rotated
bit places to the left on every
operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (ROLP, DROLP).
Program
Example
When X0 goes from OFF ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the left, as
shown in the diagram, and b12 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the
carry flag (CY) M1022.
X0
D10
K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit
lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Carry
flag
upper bit
1
Carry
flag
6-42
D10
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
lower bit
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
D10

API
32 D
RCR
Rotate to the Right with the Carry

flag
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
n
command.
If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit)
and K8 (32-bit) are valid.
ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCRP,
DRCRP).
Command
Explanation

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
RCR
RCRP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DRCR
DRCRP
execution
execution
: Bit places after one time rotation
with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated
bit places to the right on every operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (RCRP, DRCRP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry
Program
Example
flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the right, as shown in the diagram, and b3 that
located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the
original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b12.
X0
D10
K4
Rotate to the right

lower bit
upper bit
D10 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
1
Carry
flag
16 bits
D10
After one rotation

to the right
upper bit
lower bit
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
0
Carry
flag
6-43

API
33 D
RCL
Rotate to the Left with the Carry

flag Attached
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
E F
D
n
command.
ES series models do not support pulse execution (RCLP,
DRCLP).
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
RCL
RCLP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DRCL
DRCLP
execution
execution
FlagM1022 (Carry flag)

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
: Bit places after one time rotation
with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated
bit places to the left on every operation of the command.

This command is usually pulse execution (RCLP, DRCLP).
When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry
Program
Example
flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the left, as shown in the diagram, and b12 that
located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the
original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b3.
X0
RCLP D10
K4
Rotate to the left

upper bit
lower bit
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit
lower bit
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D10
Carry
flag
6-44

API
34
SFTR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
n1
n2
Note: Essential condition: 1n11024, 1 n2n1
In ES series models: 1n2n1512
ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTRP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shifts the Data of Device

Specified to the Right

Continuous
Pulse
SFTR
SFTRP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Starting number of shift device (source device)

specified shift device (destination device)
: Starting number of
: Specified bit stack of data length
: Bit places after one time shift

Shifts
data bits of device
begin with
to the right by
bits.
bits, which
, are shifted to the right.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFTRP).

When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will shift 4 bits to the right.
Program
Example
Please refer to the following

M3~M0
carry
M7~M4
M3~M0
M11~M8
M7~M4
M15~M12
M11~M8
X3~X0
steps to perform SFTR command of one time scan.
M15~M12 complete
X0
SFTR
X0
M0
K16
K4
4 bits in a group shift to the right

X3
X2
X1
X0
5
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
M9
M8
M7
M6
M5
M4
M3
M2
M1
carry
M0
6-45

API
35
SFTL
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shifts the Data of Device

Specified to the Left
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
S
D
n1
n2

Continuous
Pulse
SFTL
SFTLP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Note: Essential condition: 1n11024, 1 n2n1

In ES series models: 1n2n1512
Flag: None

ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFTLP).
Command
Explanation
: Bits after one time shift

Shifts
data bits of device
begin with
to the left by
bits.
bits, which
, are shifted to the left.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFTLP).

When X0 is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will rotate 4 bits to the left.
Program
Example
steps to perform SFTL command of one time scan.
M15~M12
carry
M11~M8
M15~M12
M7~M4
M11~M8
M3~M0
M7~M4
X3~X0
M3~M0 complete
X0
SFTR
X0
M0
K16
K4
4 bits in a group shift to the left
carry
X2
X1
X0
M3
M2
M1
M0
5
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11
6-46
X3
M10
M9
M8
M7
M6
M5
M4

API
36
WSFR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shift the Register to the Right
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
S
D
n1
n2
Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the specified device must be equal, for
example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other
kind is T, C, D.
When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the Kn value must be equal.
Essential condition: 1n1512, 1 n2n1
ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFR,
WSFRP).

Continuous
Pulse
WSFR
WSFRP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Command
Explanation
Flag: None
: Words after one time shift

Shifts
data words of device
which begin with
to the right by
words.
words,
, are shifted to the right.
This command is usually pulse execution (WSFRP).

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift
Program
Example
1
area and shift 4 register to the right.

steps to perform WSFR command of one times.
D23~D20 carry
D27~D24 D23~D20
D31~D28 D27~D24
D35~D32 D31~D28
D13 ~D10 D35~D32 complete
X0
WSFRP D10
D13
D12
D11
D35
D34
D33 D32
D20
K16
K4
4 registers in one group shift to the right
D10
5
D31
D30 D29
D28
D27 D26
D25
D24 D23
D22
D21 D20
Carry
6-47

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the word register data of Y10~Y27 are paralleled a
Program
Example
2
shift area and shift 2 digits to the right.

steps to perform WSFR command of one time shift.
Y17~Y10 carry
Y27~Y20 Y17~Y10
X27~X20 Y27~Y20 complete
When using Kn device, the specified value must be equal
X0
WSFRP K1X20 K1Y10
K4
K2
X27
X26
X25
X24
X23
X22
X21
Y27
Y26
Y25
Y24
Y23
Y22
Y21 Y20
2 digits shift to the right
X20
3
Y17
Y16
Y15
Y14 Y13
Y12
Y11 Y10
API
37
WSFL
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
n1
n2
Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the specified device must be equal, for
example, one kind is the KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS and the other
kind is T, C, D.
When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D
(destination) the Kn value must be equal.
Essential condition: 1n1512, 1 n2n1
ES series models do not support pulse execution (WSFL,
WSFLP)
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shift the Register to the Left

Continuous
Pulse
WSFL
WSFLP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None

shift device (destination device)
Carry
: Starting number of specified
: Words after
one time shift

Shifts
begin with
data words of device
to the left by
words.
words, which
, are shifted to the left.
This command is usually pulse execution (WSFLP).
6-48

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift area
Program
Example
and shift 4 register to the right.

steps to perform WSFL command of one time shift.
D35~D32 carry
D31~D28 D35~D32
D27~D24 D31~D28
D23~D20 D27~D24
D13~D10 D23~D20 complete
X0
WSFLP D10
D20
K16
K4
D13
D12
D11
D24 D23
D22
D21 D20
4 registers in one group shift to the left
D10
5
Carry D35
D34
D33 D32
API
38
SFWR
D31 D30 D29
D27 D26
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
E F
S
D
n
Note: Essential condition: 2n512
ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFWR,
SFWRP).
Command
Explanation
D25
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shift Register Write
Bit devices
X Y M S
D28

Continuous
Pulse
SFWR
SFWRP
execution
execution
32-bit command
: Source device which the data is written in
: Head address device
Data length
is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the destination device
is
the head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device
as the pointer and add 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this
command. The contents of the devices specified by
specified by the pointer
pointer
are written into the position
of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the
exceed the value n-1, the insertion into the First-in/First-OUT stack will
stop and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON.

This command is usually pulse execution (SFWRP).
First, reset the content of D0 to 0. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the content of D0
Program
Example
becomes 1 when the content of D20 is created and built in D1. After changing the
content of D20, X0 is executed to goes from OFF to ON again, then the content of D0
becomes 2 when the content of D20 is created and built in D2.
6-49

~ steps to perform SFWR command.
The content of D20 is created and built in D1.

The content of D0 becomes 1.
X10
RST
D0
SFWRP
D20
reset the content of D0 to 0 (zero) previously
X0
D0
-K10
n = 10 points
D20
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D0 =
D3
D2
D1
D0
pointer
This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute
Footnote
API
39
SFRD
the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
n
Note: Essential condition: 2n512
ES series models do not support pulse execution (SFRD,
SFRDP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Shift Register Read
: Head address device

Pulse
Continuous
SFRDP
SFRD
execution
execution
32-bit command
: destination device
: Data length
is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the source device
is the
head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device
as the pointer and subtract 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this
command. The contents of the devices specified by
are written into the position
specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the pointer
are equal to 0 (zero), the First-in/First-OUT stack will be empty and the carry flag
M1022 will be turned ON.
This command is usually pulse execution (SFRDP).
6-50

When X1 goes from OFF to ON, D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right and the
Program
Example
content of D0 is substracted by 1 when the content of D1 is read and moved to D21.

steps to perform SFRD command.
The content of D1 is read and moved to D21.

D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right.
The content of D0 is substracted by 1.
X0
D0
SFRDP
K10
D21
n = 10 points
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D21
D0
pointer
data read
This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute
Footnote
API
40
ZRST
the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack.
Resets a Range of Device Specified
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E
D1
D2
Note: Essential condition: D1 must be less than or equal to () D2.
Operand D1 and D2 must be in the same category.
ES series models do not support pulse execution command
(ZRSTP).
Command
Explanation
: First destination device
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
ZRST
ZRSTP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Second destination device
For ES series models, standard and High speed counters cannot be mixed.
For EH/EP series models, standard and High speed counters can be mixed use.
When
>
, then only device
is reset.
This command is usually pulse execution (ZRSTP).
6-51

Program
Example
When X0 is ON, M300 to M399 (auxiliary relays) will be reset to OFF.

When X1 is ON, C0 to C127 (16-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and
contact and coil will be reset to OFF)
When X10 is ON, T0 to T127 (timer) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and
coil will be reset to OFF)
When X2 is ON, the status of S0 to S127 will be reset to OFF.
When X3 is ON, the data of D0 to D100 (data register) will be reset to 0.
When X4 is ON, C235 to C254 (32-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and
contact and coil will be reset to OFF)
X0
ZRST
M300
M399
X1
ZRST
C0
C127
ZRST
T0
T127
ZRST
S0
S127
ZRST
D0
D100
ZRST
C235
C254
X10
X2
X3
X4
The RST command can be independently used in the bit device, i.e. Y, M, S and in
Footnote
word device, i.e. T, C, D.

API 16 FMOV command can also be used to transmit the data of K0 to word device,
i.e. T, C, D or to bit register, i.e. KnY, KnM, KnS, just as RST command.
X0
RST
M0
6-52
RST
T0
RST
Y0
FMOV
K0
D10
K5

API
41
DECO
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
8 256 Bits Decoder
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
S
D
n
Note: When operand D is bit device, n=1~8
When operand D is word device, n=1~4
(DECOP).
: Decode source device
Command
Explanation

Continuous
Pulse
DECO
DECOP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Destination device for storing the encode result
: Decode data length

Decodes the data of lower n bit of source device
bit at device
and stores the result of 2 n
This command is usually pulse execution (DECOP).
Program
Example
1
is used in case of a bit device, 0<n8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error
will occur.
When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points. (Must notice the range
of the stored device after decoding. Please do not use repeatly.)
When X10 goes from Off On, the data of X0~X2 will be decoded to M100~M107.
If data source is 1+2=3, M103 at the third position from M100 turns ON and is set to 1.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been
decoded is still action.
X10
DECOP
7
0
6
0
5
0
X0
M100
X2
X1
X0
4
0
3
3
1
2
0
K3
1
0
0
0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100
6-53

is used in case of a bit device, 0<n4, but if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error will
Program
Example
2
occur.
When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points.
When X10 goes from Off On, the data in D10 (b2 to b0) will be decoded and stored
at D20 (b7 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b8) will be all set to 0.
Decodes three lower bits in D10 and stores at eight lower bits in D20 (one bit will be 1)
and the content of eight upper bits are all 0.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been
decoded is still action.
X10
DECOP
D10
D20
D10
b15
0
K3
b0
1
2 1
When 3 is specified
at b2 to b0 of D10
all be 0 (zero)
0
b15
42
ENCO
When 3 is specified as effective

bits, 8 points are occupied.
Word devices
S
D
n
Note: When operand S is bit device, n=1~8
When operand S is word device, n=1~4
(ENCOP).
Command
Explanation
result after decoding
b0
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
256 8 Bits Encoder
Bit devices
X Y M S
D20
b3 at the third position from

b0 turns ON and is set to 1
API
: Encode source device

Continuous
Pulse
ENCO
ENCOP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Destination device for storing encode data
: Encode data length

Encodes the data of lower 2 n bit in source device
device
and stores the result at
If the source device
is a multiple bit and its value is 1, processing is performed
for the last bit position.

This command is usually pulse execution (ENCOP).
6-54

Program
Example
1
is used in case of a bit device, 0<n8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error
will occur.
When X0 goes from Off On, the data of 2 3 (M0 to M7) will be decoded and stored
at three lower bits of D0 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D0 (b15 to b3) will be all set to
0.
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in
remain unchanged.
X0
K3
D0
ENCOP M0
When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.

M07
M06
M05
M04
M03
M02
M01
M00
0
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
all be 0 (zero)
0 0
b15
4 2 1
0
D0
result after encoding

1
b0
Which point, counting from M0, is ON and stored in BIN.
Program
Example
2
is used in case of a word device, 0<n4. But if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error
will occur.
When X0 goes from Off On, the data of 2 3 (b0 to b7) in D10 will be decoded and
stored at three lower bits (b2 to b0) at D20. The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b3) will be
all set to 0. (b8 to b15 in D10 is not available)
After the execution is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in
remain unchanged.
X0
K3
D20
ENCOP D10
Data inactivated
b0
0
D10
b15
0
6
0
5
0
4
1
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
all be 0 (zero)
0
b15
D20
result after encoding
b0
When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied.
6-55

API
43
Applicable models
SUM
Sum of ON Bits
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
ES
Word devices
Continuous
SUM
SUMP
execution
EP
EH
Pulse
execution
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in

16-bit command.
Continuous
Pulse
DSUM
DSUMP
execution
execution
command (SUMP, DSUMP).
: Source device
Command
Explanation
: Destination device for storing counted number
If the contents of these 16 bits are all 0, the Zero flag, M1020=ON.
will occupy two registers when using in 32-bit command.
When X10 is ON, all the bits that with 1 as its content within D0 will be counted and
have this counted number stored in D2.
X10
D2
SUM
D0
Program
Example
API
44 D
BON
0 0
D0
Word devices
S
D
n
Note: If operand S uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit
command.
Essential condition: n=0~15 (16-bit), n=0~31 (32-bit)
(BONP, DBONP).
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
6-56
Check Specified Bit Status
Bit devices
X Y M S
: Source device
3
D2
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
16-bit command (7 STEP)

Continuous
Pulse
BON
BONP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DBON
DBONP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Result device for storing determined bit
Specified determined bit

When X0 is ON, and if the 15th bit of D0 is 1, M0 is ON. But if the 15th bit of D0 is 0,
M0 is OFF.
Once X0 is switched to OFF, M0 will stay at its previous ON/OFF status.

X0
BON
b15
0 0
0 0
D0
b0
0 M0=Off
b15
1 0
0 0
D0
b0
0 M0=On
API
45 D
MEAN
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Mean Value
Bit devices
Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
S
D
n
K15
M0
D0
F 16-bit command (7 STEPS)

Continuous
Pulse
MEAN
MEANP
execution
execution

Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in
Continuous
Pulse
DMEAN
DMEANP
16-bit command.
execution
execution
Essential condition: n=1~64
Flag: None
command (MEANP, DMEANP).
Command
Explanation
: Starting device for taking mean value

the mean value
: Destination device for storing
: Device number for taking mean value
Add the contents of
registers specified by
, and have the sum divided by
to take a mean value. To save this mean value in the designated
If there is remainder in this calculation, ignore the remainder.

If the specified device number exceeds the normal usable range, only those that within
the range could be processed.
If the value of
is out of the stated range (1~64), an operation error will be
generated.
Program
Example
When X10 is ON, add up the contents of the three registers starting from D0 (specified
by this command), and divide the sum by three to take the mean vlaue. Then store this
mean value in the specified device D10 and ignore the remainder.
X10
MEAN
(D0+D1+D2)/D3
D0
K100
D1
K113
D2
K125
D0
D10
K3
D10
K112
D10
reminder = 3, be ignored
6-57

API
46
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Alarm Device Output
ANS
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
m
D
Note: Operand S available range: for EP series: T0~T191
for EH series: T0~T199.
Operand m available range: K0~K32,767, in units of 100 ms
Operand D available range: S900~S1023
(ANS).
: A timer which detect alarm
Command
Explanation

Continuous
ANS
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1048 (Alarm point is activated)

M1049 (Monitor is valid)
: Time setting
: Alarm device
ANS command is used to drive the output alarm device.

If alarm device S999=On when X3 is On for more than 5 seconds, S999 will keep
being On afterward even X3=Off later. (but T10 will be reset to Off, present value=0)
X3
Program
Example
API
47
ANR
ANS
T10
K50
S999
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Alarm Device Reset
Bit devices
Word devices
Note: No operand
command (ANR, ANRP).

Continuous
Pulse
ANR
ANRP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
ANR command is used to reset alarm device.

When several alarm devices are ON, the lower number of alarm device will be reset.
This command is usually pulse execution (ANRP).
When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON more than 2 seconds, the alarm device
S910 is ON. Then even if X10 and X11 are changed to OFF, the alarm device S910
will still remain ON. (But T10 will reset to OFF, present value is 0.)
When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON less than 2 seconds, the present value of
T10 is reset to 0.
6-58

When X3 goes from Off On,
for EP series, the activated alarm device S896~S1023 will be reset.
for EH series, the activated alarm device S899~S1023 will be reset.
When X3 goes from Off On again, the second lower alarm device will be reset.
X10
X11
ANS
T10
K20
S910
X3
ANRP
Flag:
Footnote
1. M1048 (Alarm device is activated): When M1049 is driven to be ON, if any one alarm
device of S899~S1023 (in EP series)/ S899~S1023 (in EH series) outputs, M1048 is
ON.
2. M1049(Monitor is valid): When M1049 is driven to be ON, D1049 will automatically
display the lowest number during the execution of this command.
Application of alarm device:
I/O devices arrangement:
X0: forward switch, X1: backward switch, X2: front location switch, X3: back location
switch, X4: alarm device reset button, Y0: forward, Y1: forward, Y2: alarm indicator,
S910: forward alarm device, S920: backward alarm
M1000
M1049
Y0
Y1
X0
X2
ANS
T0
K100
S910
ANS
T1
K200
S920
X3
X2
Y0
Y0
X1
X3
Y1
Y1
M1048
Y2
X4
ANRP
6-59

1.
2.
3.
4.
When M1049=On, M1048, D1049 is valid.

If Y0=ON more than 10 seconds and not reach the front location X2, S910=ON.
If Y1=ON more than 20 seconds and not reach the back location X3, S920=ON.
When backward switch X1=ON, backward device Y1=ON and the signal reach
the back location switch X3, Y1 is switched to be OFF.
If there is a driven alarm device, alarm indicator Y2=ON.
The alarm device which have been activated will be reset one by one, each time
the reset button X4 of alarm device is ON during the execution of this command.
The lower activated alarm device is reset on every execution of this command.
5.
6.
API
48
SQR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
S
D
Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
(SQR, SQRP, DSQR, DSQRP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Square Root of BIN
: Source device

Continuous
Pulse
SQR
DSQR
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
SQRP
DSQRP
execution
execution
M1021 (Borrow flag)
M1067 (Operation error)
: Destination device which store the result
This command performs a square root operation on source device

the result at the destination device
and stores
only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a

negative value will result in an operation error this command will not be
executed.The error flag M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code
0E1B (hexadecimal).
The operation result of
is calculated as the integer only, decimal is ignored. If
there is decimal ignored, the Borrow flag M1021=ON.

When operation result of
Program
Example
When X10=On, the content of D0 will be stored in D12 after the operation of square
root.
X10
SQR
D0
6-60
is 0, the Zero flag M1020=On.
D0
D12
D12

API
49
FLT
Convert BIN Integer to Binary

Floating Point
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range.
command (FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP).
Command
Explanation
: Source device
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
FLT
DFLT
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
FLTP
DFLTP
execution
execution
Flag: M1081 (FLT command function
exchange)
: Destination device which store the converted result
When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating
point. At this time,
and
source device of 16-bit command FLT occupies 1 register
Destination device occupies 2 registers.
If absoluted value of conversion result is larger than max. floating value, carry flag
M1022=On.
If absoluted value of conversion result is less than min. floating value, carry flag
M1021=On.
If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On.
When M1081 is ON, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN
integer. (ignore the decimal) At this time,
occupies 2 registers and
source device of 16-bit command FLT
Destination device occupies 1 register. The action is
the same as command INT.

If conversion result exceeds BIN integer range of
(16-bit is -32,768~32,767 and
32-bit is -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647), it wil be represented with max. value or min.

value. Then carry flag will be set to M1022=On.
If the decimal of conversion result is ignored, borrow flag M1021=On.
After conversion,
Program
Example
1
is saved by 16 bits.
When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating
point.
When X10 is ON, D0 (BIN integer) is converted to D13, D12 (binary floating point).
When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (BIN integer) are converted to D21, D20 (binary floating
point).
If D0=K10, X10 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after conversioin will be H41200000
and it will be saved in 32-bit register D12(D13).
If 32-bit register D0(D1)=K100,000, X11 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after
conversioin will be H4735000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D20(D21).
6-61

M1002
RST
M1081
FLT
D0
D12
DFLT
D0
D20
X10
X11
Program
Example
2
When M1081 is On, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN
integer. (ignore the decimal)
When X10 is ON, D0 and D1(binary floating point) are converted to D12 (BIN integer).
If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The execution result will be
D12=K32,767, M1022=On due to the value exceeds max. value of 16-bit register D12.
When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (binary floating point) are converted to D21, D20 (BIN
integer). If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The result will be saved
in 32-bit register D20(D21).
M1002
SET
M1081
X10
FLT
D0
D12
DFLT
D0
D20
X11
Program
Example
3
Please use this application command to complete the following operation.

K61.5
(D10)
(X7~X0)
16 bit BIN 2 bit BCD
(D101,D100) (D200) BIN (D301,D300)

3
(D21,D20)
7
8
(D31,D30)
decimal floating point (for monitor)
(D41,D40)
32 bit integer
(D203,D202)
(D401,D400)
6-62

M1000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLT
D10
D100
BIN
K2X0 D200
FLT
D200 D202
DEDIV K615
K10
D300
DEDIV D100 D202 D400

DEMUL D400 D300
DEBCD D20
D30
D20
D40
DINT
D20
1.
Covert D10 (BIN integer) to D101, D100 (binary floating point).
2.
Covert the value of X7~X0 (BCD value) to D200 (BIN value).
3.
Covert D200 (BIN integer) to D203, D202 (binary floating point).
4.
Save the result of K615 K10 to D301, D300 (binary floating point).
5.
The division of binary floating point:

Save the result of of (D101, D100) (D203, D202) to D401, D400 (binary floating
point).
6.
The multiplication of binary floating point:

Save the result of (D401, D400) (D301, D300) to D21, D20 (binary floating point).
7.
Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to decimal floating point (D31, D30).
8.
Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to BIN integer (D41, D40).
6-63

API
50
REF
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
D
n
Note: Operand D should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30
etc., so it should be X0, X10, Y0, Y10 etc., please refer to
the command explanation.
Essential condition: n=8~256, and should be a multiple of 8,
i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32etc.
(REFP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
I/O Refresh Immediately
: Starting device of I/O refresh

Continuous
Pulse
REF
REFP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Refreshed I/O number
The state of all PLC inputs and outputs will be refreshed after scanning to END. The
state of inputs is read from external inputs to save in inputs memory. The output
terminals send outputs memory to output device after END command. Therefore, this
command can be used during algorithm process when need to input/output the newest
data.
The state of all inputs and outputs may change immediately after they are scanned.
If the user does not want to wait for the next scan time, the REF command may be
used.
should always be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc., so it should be X0,
X10, Y0, Y10 etc.
should always be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32etc.
and its available range is 8~256. If the value of
is out of the stated range
(8~256) or not a multiple of 8, an operation error will be generated. The usage range
may be different by various models, please refer to the footnote for detail.
Program
Example
1
When X0 = ON, PLC will read the state of X0~X7 input points immediately and
refreshed. There is no input delay occurs.
X0
REF
X0
K16
7-1

When X0 = ON, the output signal Y0~Y7 (8 points) are sent to output terminal
Program
Example
2
immediately and refreshed. It desnt need to output till END command.

X0
REF
Y0
K8
For ES and EP series models, the input and output points processed by this command
Footnote
API
51
REFF
are the I/O points of MPU: X0~X17, Y0~Y17 and n=K8 or K16.
Refresh and Adjust the Response

Time of Input Filter
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
n
Note: None
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
REFF
REFFP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
: Response time setting, in units of ms.

PLC is provided with the input filter to prevent the noises or interferences. The input
filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC are digital filters and using REFF
command can adjust the response time of the input filters. Command
will set in
D1020 and D1021 directly and adjust reaction time of X0~X7 and X10~X17
separately.
The operation rules when the input filters of X0~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC adjust
the response time:
When the power of PLC turns from Off to On or execute to END command,
response time is decided by the content value of D1020 and D1021.
During the program, the setting value can be moved to D1020 and D1021by using
MOV command.
The response time can be changed by using REFF command in the execution of
the program. At this time, the response time specified by REFF command will be
moved into D1020, D1021and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.
7-2

Program
Example
When the power of PLC turns from Off to On, the

response time of X0~X17 inputs is decided by the
content value of D1020 and D1021.
X20
REFF
K5
X0
Y1
When X20=On, REFF K5 command is executed,
X20
REFF
respone time is changed to 5 ms and and it will
K20
X1
be adjusted again in the next scan.
Y2
When X20=Off, the REFF command will not be

executed, the response time is changed to 20ms
and it will be adjusted again in the next scan.
END
When using the interrupt parameters, or high-speed counter, or SPD command (API
Footnote
56), the response time of corresponding input terminals wont delay and its action has
no ralation with this command.
API
52
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D1
D2
n
Note: Operand S should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30
etc., so it should be X0, X10 etc. and occupies 8
continuous devices.
Operand D1 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30
etc., so it should be Y0, Y10 etc. and occupies n
continuous devices
Operand D2 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30
etc., so it should be Y0, M0, S0 etc.
Essential condition: n=2~8
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Input Matrix
MTR
: Head address of input matrix

Corresponding head address of matrix scan

Continuous
MTR
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1029 Execution completed

flag
: Head address of output matrix
: Number of banks for the matrix
is the head address that specify all inputs of the matrix. Once the input is
specified, a selection of 8 continuous input devices is called as input matrix.
is the head address of transister output Y of the matrix.
7-3

This command allows a selection of 8 continuous input devices (head address
to be used multiple (
) times. Each input has more than one and different
signal being processed. Each set of 8 input signals are grouped into a bank and
there are
from
number of banks. Each bank is selected by the quantity of outputs

, used to achieve the matrix are equal to the number of banks
result is stored in a matrix-table which starts at corresponding head address
. The
.
The maximum inputs can achieve 64 inputs (8 inputs 8 banks).

When this command is used on an interrupt format, processing each bank of inputs
every 25msec. This would result in an 8 bank matrix, i.e. 64 inputs (8 inputs 8 banks)
being read in 200msec. Hence, this command is not available for the input signal
which its On/Off speed is over than 200ms.
It is recommended to use special auxiliary relay M1000, normally open contact.
After the completion of performing MTR command, the command execution completed
flag M1029 is turned ON and this flag is automatically reset when the MTR command
is turned OFF.
This command can only be used ONCE.
Program
Example
When X0=On, MTR command starts to execute. The external 2 banks, total 16
devices are read by order and the result are stored in the internal relay M10~M17,
M20~M27.
M1000
MTR
X40
Y40
M10
K2
The figure below is an example wiring diagram for the operation of MTR command.
The external 2 banks consist of X40~47 and Y40~41 and total 16 devices correspond
to the internal relay M10~M17, M20~M27 are used with MTR command. For a general
precaution to aid successful operation, diodes should be placed after each input
devices. These diodes should have a rating of 0.1A, 50V.
7-4

Diode
0.1A/50V
M20
Input devices
M21
X41
M10
M22
X42
M11
M23
X43
M12
M24
X44
M13
M25
X45
M14
M26
X46
M15
M27
X47
M16
M17
COM X40
X41
X42
X43
X44
X45
X46
X47
COM Y40
Y41
Y42
Y43
Y44
Y45
Y46
Y47
When output Y40 is ON, only those inputs in the first bank are read. These result are
stored in auxiliary coils M10~M17. The second step involves Y40 going OFF and Y41
coming ON and this time only inputs in the second bank are read. These results are
stored in M20~M27.
Read input signal in the first bank
Y40
Read input signal in the second bank
Y41
4
25ms
Processing time of each bank is about 25ms
7-5

API
53
High-speed Counter Comparison

SET
HSCS
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,
C246~C249, C251~C254 or available high-speed
counters, please refer to the footnote for details.
The usage range of operand D: I010 to I060 can be set,
also can use index register E, F to modify.
There is no 16-bit command for API 53, only 32-bit
command DHSCS is available.
In ES and EP series models, operand S2 and D cannot use
index register E, F to modify.
Command
Explanation
: Compare value
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
DHSCS
execution
Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the
footnote for details.
M1289~M1294. High-speed
counter interrupt disabled
flags in EH series models.
Refer to the program example
3 below.
: Numver of high-speed counter
: Compare
result
All high-speed counters use an interrupt process, therefore, all compare result devices
are updated immediately.
HSCS command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter
against a selected comapre value
changes to a value equal to
. When the counters currrent value
, the device specified as
the compare result is unequal, the status of device

If the devices specified as the device
is set ON. Even if
will still be ON.
are Y0~Y17, when the compare value
and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will
immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17, and other Y devices will be affected
by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output, not being affected by
the scan cycle.
Program
Example
1
After PLC perform the RUN command, if M0=On, DHSCS command starts to operate.
Y10 will ON immediately when C235s present value stepped from 99100 or 101
100 and be ON constantly.
M1000
DCNT
C235
K1000
M0
DHSCS
7-6
K100
C235
Y10
On immediately

Program
Example
2
Difference between Y output of DHSCS command and general Y output:

When C249s value stepped from 99100 and 101100, Y10 output of DHSCS
command immediately output to the external output by using interrupt process so it
is irrelevant to the program scan time. However, there will still be a delay due to the
output of module relay (10ms) or transistor (10us).
When the present value of high-speed timer C249 changes from 99 to 100, C249
will be activated, and Y17 will be ON after END command due to the program scan
time.
M1000
DCNT
C249
K100
DHSCS
K100
C249
SET
Y17
Y10
ON immediately
C249
Program
Example
3
High-speed counter interrupt:

ES series models do not support high-speed counter interrupt function.
The limit when EP series models using high-speed counter interrupt
When using DHSCS command to specify I interrupt, the specified high-speed
counter can not be use in other DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ command. If using it, it
will result in error.
The interrupt pointers I010 to I060 can be used as D operand of DHSCS command
and this enables the interrupt routine to be executed when the value of the
specified high-speed counter reaches the value in DHSCS command.
In EP series models, there are six high-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030,
I040, I050, I060 6 points can be used. I010 is used with C235, C241, C244, C246,
C247, C249, C251, C252, C254. I020 is used with C236; I030 is used with C237,
C242; I040 is used with C238; I050 is used with C239 and I060 is used with C240.
When the present value of C251 changes from 99100and 101100, the
program will jump to the interrupt pointer I010 to execute the interrupt routine.
7-7

M1000
DCNT
C251
K1000
DHSCS
K100
C251
I010
FEND
M1000
I010
Y1
IRET
END
In EP series models, M1059 is high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag.

In EH series models, M1289~M1294 are high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag, I010
to I060 masked. For example, when M1294 is On, Interrupt pointer I060 masked.
Interrupt pointer
I Number
I010
I020
I030
interrupt inhibit
flag
M1289
M1290
M1291
Interrupt pointer
I Number
I040
I050
I060
interrupt inhibit flag

M1292
M1293
M1294
The ouput contact of high-speed counter and the compare output of DHSCS (API 53)
command, DHSCR (API 54) command and DHSZ(API 55) command are all activated
Footnote
when there are counted inputs. If using data operation command, such as DADD,
DMOVetc. commands to change the present value of high-speed counter equal to
the setting value, there is comparsion will be set or output because there is no counted
inputs.
High-speed counter provided in ES series models: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.
Type
Input
X0
X1
X2
X3
U:
D:
1-phase 1 input
1-phase 2 inputs
2-phase inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
U/D
U/D
R
U/D
U/D
U/D
R
U/D
Increasing input
Decreasing input
U/D
R
A:
B:
U
D
A phase input
B phase input
U
D
R
U
D
R
S
A
B
S:
R:
A
B
R
A
B
R
S
Start input
Reset input
1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up
to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or
equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will
be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is
almost 7KHz.
2. In ES series models, DHSCS and DHSCR command can not be used more than 4
times.
7-8

High-speed counter provided in EP series models:
1-phase high-speed counter: total counting frequency is 30 KHz.
Type
Input
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
U:
D:
1-phase 2
inputs
1-phase 1 input
2-phase inputs
C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254
U/D
U/D
R
U/D
U/D
U/D
R
U/D
R
U/D
U
D
U
D
R
U
D
R
S
A
B
A
B
R
A
B
R
S
U/D
U/D
Increasing input
A:
A phase input
S:
Start input
Decreasing input
B:
B phase input
R:
Reset input
1. Input point X0 and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up
to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or
equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will
be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is
almost 7KHz.
2. Input X5 has two functions.
When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter.
When M1260=On, X5 is the global reset of C235~C239.
3. In EP series models, DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ command can not be used more
than 6 times.
High-speed counter provided in EH series models:
1. Program interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter, C235~C240: general counting
frequency is up to 10KHz, maximum total counting frequency is 20 KHz.
2. DVP-EH series has four Hardware high-speed counter (hereinafter referred to as
HHSC), HHSC0~3 and available device number for HHSC0~3 are C241~ C254.
Pulse output frequency of each group can reach 250 KHz.
Available device number for HHSC0: C241, C246, C251
Each HHSC can only be specified one time for one device number. Use
DCNT command to specify the HHSC.
Available counter modes of each HHSC:

1). 1-phase 1 input, also called as Pulse/Direction mode
2). 1-phase 2 inputs, also called as CW/CCW mode.
3). 2-phase 2 inputs, also called as AB phase mode.
7-9

3. Please refer to the following table for the available high-speed counters:
Counter
Type
Program interrupt type

1-phase high-speed counter
Type
1-phase 1 input
Hardware high-speed counter

1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs
Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247
X0 U/D
U/D
U
X1
U/D
D
X2
U/D
R
R
X3
U/D
S
S
X4
U/D
U/D
U
X5
U/D
D
X6
R
R
X7
S
S
X10
U/D
X11
X12
R
X13
S
X14
U/D
X15
X16
R
X17
S
U:
D:
2-phase input
C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254
A
B
R
S
A
B
R
S
U
D
R
S
A
B
R
S
U
D
R
S
A
B
R
S
Increasing input
A:
A phase input
S:
Start input
Decreasing input
B:
B phase input
R:
Reset input
4. In the program of DVP EH series models, there is no limited using time for
hardware high-speed counter related commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and
DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands
simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one group setting and DHSZ
command will use two groups settings. When these commands are executed
simultaneously, the total used groups settings can not exceed eight groups
settings. If exceeding eight groups settings, system will totalize the used memory
units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will
be ignored.
5. System structure of hardware high-speed counter:
7-10

X0
X4
X10
X14
Current value
of counter
U/D
Counting pulse
U
A
HHSC0
HHSC1

X1
X5
X11
X15
Comparison value
reached setting
Comparator
HHSC2
Counting pulse
B
HHSC3
DHSCS occupies one group setting value

DHSCR occupies one group setting value

D1225
D1226
D1227
D1228
Setting value:0~3 respectively

represent Mode 1~4
(1~4 frequency mode )
Counting
up/down flag
Counting mode
selection
HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 U/D mode setting flag
HHSC0 M1246
M1251
C241
M1241
HHSC1 M1247
M1252
HHSC2 M1248
M1253
C242
M1242
C243
M1243
C244
M1244
HHSC3 M1249

X2
X6
X12
X16
M1264
M1266
M1268
M1270
M1272
M1274
M1276
M1278
AND
OR
M1254
Comparison value DHSCZ occupies two groups setting value

reached output
High speed
comparison
command
Comparison value
reached operation
DHSCS
SET/RESET
DHSCR
I 010 ~ I 060 interrupt

counting value reset
DHSCZ
Reset signal R
Interrupt inhibit flag

I 010 M1289
I 020 M1290

X3
X7
X13
X17
M1265
M1267
M1269
M1271
M1273
M1275
M1277
M1279
AND
OR
Start signal S
I 030 M1291
I 040 M1292
I 050 M1293
I 060 M1294
6. HHSC0~3 all have reset and start signal of external input. Reset signal (R) can be
set by M1272/M1274/M1276/M1278 (belong to HHSC0 ~3) and start signal can be
set by M1273/M1275/M1277/M1279 (belong to HHSC0 ~3). When using
high-speed counter, if do not use the external signal input of R and S, you can set
M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270 and M1265/M1267/M1269 /M1271 as TRUE. Close
the operation of the input signal and the corresponding external inputs can be used
as general inputs. Please refer to the above example figure for usage.
7. Select counter modes
High-speed conter of ES / EP series is 2-phase 2 inputs counter mode and set by
special device D1022 with four double frequency modes. The content value of
register D1022 is loaded at the first scan time when PLC controller switch from
Stop to Run status. (Only V5.5 and above of DVP-ES series MPU support this
function)
Device No.
D1022
D1022=K1
D1022=K2
D1022=K4
Use counting method of counter to set
double frequency
Select (normal frequency) mode
Select (double frequency) mode
Select (4 times frequency) mode
7-11

Double frequency mode:
Counter
mode
Signal Diagram
1
(normal frequency)
2
(double frequency)
2-phase 2 inputs
A-phase
B-phase
Counting up
Counting down
A-phase
B-phase
Counting up
Counting down
(four times frequency)
A-phase
B-phase
Counting up
Counting down
According to the different type of counter modes, HHSC 0~3 of EH series models can set
normal, double, thriple and four times these four frequency modes by using special
device D1225 to D1228:
Counter mode
Setting value
Type
of special D
0
(normal
frequency)
1-phase
1 input
1
(double
frequency)
0
(normal
frequency)
1-phase
2 inputs
1
(double
frequency)
7-12
Signal Diagram
Counting up(+1)
Counting down(-1)
U/D
U/D FLAG
U/D
U/D FLAG
U
D
U
D

Counter mode
Setting value
Type
of special D
0
(normal
frequency)
1
(double
frequency)
2-phase
2 inputs
2
(triple
frequency)
3
(four times
frequency)
Signal Diagram
Counting up(+1)
Counting down(-1)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
U/D FLAG are special M device, M1241~M1244 and each indicates the setting flag of
C241~C244 counting up and down.
Related flags and special register of high-speed counter:
Flag
M1150
M1151
M1152
M1153
M1235 ~ M1244
M1246 ~ M1249
M1251 ~ M1254
M1260
M1261
M1264
Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting
value compare mode
DHSZ command multi groups setting value compare mode
execution completed
Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control
mode
Frequency control mode execution completed
Specify counting direction of C235 ~ C244 high-speed counter
When M12=Off, C2 counting up
When M12=On, C2 counting down
Monitor counting direction of C246~C249, C251~C254
high-speed counter
When C2 counting up, M12=Off.
C2 counting down, M12=On.
X5 is the reset input signal of all high-speed counters
High-speed compare flag of DHSCR command
HHSC0 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact
disable
7-13
Flag
M1265
M1266
M1267
M1268
M1269
M1270
M1271
M1272
M1273
M1274
M1275
M1276
M1277
M1278
M1279
M1289
M1290
M1291
M1292
M1293
M1294
M1312
M1313
M1314
M1315
M1316
M1317
M1320
M1321
M1322
M1323
M1324
M1325
M1328
M1329
M1330
M1331
M1332
M1333
7-14
HHSC0 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disable
HHSC1 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable
HHSC0 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact
HHSC0 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact
C235 Start input control
C235 Reset input control
Special
register
D1022
D1150
D1151
D1152
(lower-bit)
D1153
(upper-bit)
D1225
D1226
D1227
D1228
D1225 ~
D1228
API
54
Double frequency selection of AB phase counter in ES/EP series models

DHSZ command for table counting register of multi-group setting
comparison mode
DHSZ command for table counting register of frequency control mode
DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence
from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152.
First counter counting method setting, C241, C246, C251 counter mode
Second counter counting method setting, C242, C247, C252 counter mode
Third counter counting method setting, C243, C248, C253 counter mode
Forth counter counting method setting, C244, C249, C254 counter mode
Counter mode of Hardware high-speed counter, HHSC0~HHSC3 of EH
series model
When setting value is 0, it is normal frequency counter mode.
When setting value is 1, it is double frequency counter mode.
When setting value is 2, it is triple frequency counter mode.
When setting value is 3, it is four times frequency counter mode.
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,
C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of
API 53 DHSCS command for details.
Operand D uses the same counter as S2 operand.
command DHSCR is available.
In ES and EP series models, D operand cannot use C
device.
In ES and EP series models, S2, D operand cannot use
index register E, F to modify.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
32-bit High-speed Counter

Comparison Reset
HSCR
Bit devices
X Y M S
: Compare value
16-bit command
32-bit command (13STEPS)

Continuous
DHSCR
execution
footnote of API 53 DHSCS
command for details.
M1261. High-speed counter
external reset mode selection.
ES and EP series models
doesnt support. Refer to the
footnote for details.
: Numver of high-speed counter
: Compare
result
HSCR command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter
against a selected comapre value
changes to a value equal to
, the device specified as
compare result is unequal, the status of device
. When the counters currrent value

is set Off. Even if the
will still be Off.
7-15

If the devices specified as the device
are Y0~Y17, when the compare value
and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will
immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17 (specified Y output will be reset),
and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are
immediate output, not being affected by the scan cycle.
Program
Example
1
When M0=On and C251s present value stepped from 99100 or 101100, Y10 will
be set Off.
When C251s present value change from 199 to 200, the contact C251 will be On and
force Y0=On, but there will still be a program scan time delay output.
Y10 is status immediately reset device when specified counter reach. It also can be
used to specify the same number high-speed counter. Please refer to the program
example 2.
M1000
DCNT
C251
K200
DHSCR
K100
C251
SET
Y0
M0
Y10
C251
Program
Example
2
When specifing the same number high-speed counter, the current value of high-speed
counter C251 will change from 999 1000 or 1001 1000 and C251 contact will be
reset to Off.
M1000
DCNT
C251
K200
DHSCR K1000
C251
C251
1000
200
it doesnaffect by scan time
output
C251 contact
affect by scan time

Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for the high-speed counters
Footnote
and their usage range provided in each series models.

For EH series, M1261 is used to specify the external reset mode of high-speed
counter. Some high-speed counters provide input points for external reset. When
these input points being On, the corresponding current value of high-speed counter
will all be reset to 0 and the output contacts will turn Off. Therefore, user must use flag
M1261 to specify the external reset mode of high-speed counter and force the external
output being executed.
7-16

The function limit of M1261: Only can be used in hardware high-speed counters
C241~C254.
The followings are the using example:
The input point of external reset of C251 is X2.
If Y10=On.
When M1261=Off, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact
turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, there is no counter input
and the compared result does not output. Therefore, Y10=On will remain
unchaged.
When M1261=On, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact
turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, although there is no
counter input, but compared result will still output. Therefore, the content of Y10
will be reset.
M1000
DCNT
C251
K1000
DHSCR
K0
C251
Y10
X10
M1261
API
55
Zone Comparison (High-speed

Counter)
HSZ
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
S
D
Note: Operand S1 should be equal to or smaller than operand S2
(S1 S2)
Operand S2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244,
C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API
53 DHSCS command for details.
There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command
DHSZ is available.
In EP series models, operand D cannot use index register E,
F to modify.
Command
Explanation
16-bit command
: Number of high-speed counter
should be equal to or smaller than

Continuous
DHSZ
execution
footnote of API 53 DHSCS
command.
M1150, M1151. DHSZ command
execute multi devices comparison
mode. Refer to the program 3 below.
EP series models do not support
these flags.
M1152, M1153 DHSZ command has
been used as frequency control
mode. Refer to the program 4 below.
EP series models do not support
these flags.
: Lower-limit value of zone comparison

comparison
Applicable models
ES
EP EH
: Upper-limit value of zone

: compared result
(S1 S2).
Output operation wont be affected by the scan time.

All outputs and zone comparison all use interrupt operation.
7-17

Program
Example
1
The specified device is Y0, then Y0~Y2 will be occupied automatically.

When DHSZ command has been executed and high-speed counter C246 is counting,
if the upper- and lower limit value is reached, one of Y0~Y2 will be On.
M1000
DCNT
C246 K20000
DHSZ
K1500
K2000
C246
Y0
Y0
When current value of C246 < K1500, Y0On
Y1
When K1500 < current value of C246 < K2000, Y1=On
Y2
When current value of C246 > K2000, Y2=On
When using DHSZ command to control and stop high/low speed, C251 is AB phase
Program
Example
2
high-speed counter. There will be comparison value output of DHSZ command only
when counting pulse is stored in C251. Therefore, even the counting current value is
0, Y10 will not be On.
When X10=On, DHSZ command force Y10=On when counting current value
K2,000. In order to improve this problem, use DZCPP command to compare C251
against and K2,000 when the program RUN at the beginning. When counting current
value K2,000, Y10=On and DZCPP command is Pulse execution command.
Command DZCPP only can be executed ONCE in program and Y10 will be still be On.
When drive contact X10=Off, Y10~Y12 will be reset to Off.
X20
RST
C251
ZRST
Y10
Y12
DCNT
C251
K10000
DZCPP
K2000
K2400
C251
Y10
DHSZ
K2000
K2400
C251
Y10
M1000
X10
7-18

Timing diagram
Speed of variable
speed rotational
equipment
0
X10
high speed
forward
Y10
low speed
forward
Y11
Stop
Y12
current value of
C251 counter
2000
2400
0
When using the multi groups setting value comparison mode of DHSZ command, if
Program
Example
3
of DHSZ command is specified as special auxiliary relay M1150, it can execte a

current value of high-speed counter and has the function which can compare and
output multi groups setting value.
Under this mode,
is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can
be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified
by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed.
is
defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80
and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been
executed, it is disabled to change this value.
is defined as the number of
high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254.
is defined as mode setting. It
only can be M1150 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1150,
then
will be disabled.
The comparison table of high-speed counter consists of the head number of register
specified by
and bank numbers (groups number) specified by
Please input the setting value of each register before the command being executed.
When current value of C251 high-speed counter specified by
is equal to the
setting value of (D1, D0), output Y specified by D2 will be reset to Off (D3=K0) or On
(D3=K1) and latched. All of output Y use interrupt operation.
7-19

When the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value of the first groups in the
comparison table, D1150=K1. If the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value
of the second groups, D1150=K2. Then the comparison will continute to execute in the
above described order. After the comparison operation of all groups are completed,
M1151=On for one scan cycle and D1150 will be reset to 0, then jump back to the first
groups to execute.
When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be
interruptted and the content of table counting register D1150 will be reset to 0. But the
ON/OFF state is unchanged at that time.
When this command command has been executed and first scan to END command,
all setting value inside of the diagram are valid.
This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series
models, this function does not provided.
This function of this command only can be used in hard ware high-speed counter
C241~C254.
X10
DHSZ
D0
Comparison table
32-bit comparison data
High word
Low word
D1 (K0)
D0 (K100)
D5 (K0)
D4 (K200)
D9 (K0)
D8 (K300)
D13 (K0)
D12 (K400)
K4
C251
Number of output
Y
D2 (K10)
D6 (K11)
D10 (K10)
D14 (K11)
K10:Y10
K11:Y11
M1150
On/Off
indication
D3
(K1)
D7
(K1)
D11 (K0)
D15 (K0)
K0:Off
K1:On
Table counting
register D1150
0
1
2
3
01230
Cyclic scan
C251
current value
400
300
200
100
Y10
Y11
M1151
D1050
7-20
3
0

Flag
M1150
M1151
Special register
D1150
Program
Example
4
Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting
value compare mode
For DHSZ command, Multi groups setting value compare mode
execution completed
For DHSZ command, Table index of DHSZ Y output
Frequency control operation (Combined DHSZ and DPLSY command): When

of DHSZ command is special auxiliary relay M1152, it can execte a current value of
high-speed counter and has the function which can control pulse output frequency of
DPLSY command.
Under this mode,
is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can
be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified
by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed.
is
defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80
and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been
executed, it is disabled to change this value.
is defined as the number of
high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254.
is defined as mode setting. It
only can be M1152 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1152,
then
will be disabled.
This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series
models, this function does not provided. For EH series models, it only can be used in
hardware high-speed counters C241~C254. Please input the setting value of each
register before the command being executed.
When the current value of C251 specified by
is within the range between the
upper- and lower-limit of (D1, D0), the setting value of (D3, D2) will be converted to
pulse output frequency of DPLSY command. Then, the second groups in the
comparison table will continue to execute. After the comparison operation of all groups
are completed, M1153=On for one scan cycle and D1151 will be reset to 0, then jump
back to the first groups to execute.
If desiring to stop the execution at the last group, Please set the content of the last
group as KO.
When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be
interruptted and the content of table counting register D1151 will be reset to 0.
7-21

X10
DHSZ
D0
PLS
M0
DPLSY
D1152
K5
C251
K0
Y0
M1152
M0
Comparison table
32-bit comparison data
High word
Low word
D1 (K0)
D0 (K100)
Pulse output frequency

0~250KHz
D3, D2
(K5,000)
Table counting
register D1151
0
D5
(K0)
D4
(K200)
D7, D6
(K10,000)
D9
(K0)
D8
(K300)
D11, D10
(K15,000)
D13 (K0)
D12 (K400)
D15, D14
(K6,000)
D17 (K0)
D16 (K0)
D19, D18
(K0)
4
01234
Cyclic scan
C251 500
current value
400
300
200
pulse output frequency
100
0
(Hz)
15000
10000
5000
0
M1153
D1051

Flag
M1152
M1153
Special register
D1151
D1152 (low word)
D1153 (high word)
D1336 (low word)
D1337 (high word)
7-22
Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control
mode
For DHSZ command, frequency control mode execution
completed
Table index changed by DHSZ D value
DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read
in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in
D1153 and D1152.
Pulse numbers of DPLSY command output

The completed program is shown below:
X10
DMOVP K5000
D2
DMOVP K10000
D6
DMOVP K15000
D10
DMOVP
K6000
D14
DMOVP
K0
D18
DMOVP
K100
D0
DMOVP
K200
D4
DMOVP
K300
D8
DMOVP
K400
D12
DMOVP
K0
D16
DHSZ
D0
K5
C251
PLS
M0
DPLSY
D1152
K0
Y0
M1152
M0
frequency
pulse output
number
Please do not change the setting value in this comparison table during the execution
of DHSZ command.
When the program has been executed to END command, the specified data will be
operated shown as the above example program. Therefore, DPLSY command should
be executed after the execution of DHSZ command.
7-23

API
56
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Speed Detection
SPD
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F

Continuous
SPD
execution
S1
S2
D
32-bit command
Note: The usage of Operand S1: In ES and EP series models,

operand S1 only can be specified as X1~X2. In EH series
models, operand S1 only can be specified as X0~X3.
Command
Explanation
: External pulse input
Flag: M1100. SPD command sampling

one time flag
: Pulse reveived time(ms)
: Detection
result
: Specify the input of external pulse
Pulse inputs of each series models
ES series models
Models
(V5.7 and above) and EP series models
Available
X1, X2
inputs
EH series models
X0~X3
Count the number of pulse received at the inputs specified by

specified by
(unit is ms) and store te result in the register specified by
occupies 5 registers,
pulse,
during the time
+3,
+1,
indicate the detection value of previous
+2 indicate the present accumulated count value of pulse and
+4 indicates the remaining count time, the max. can be 32767ms.

Measured pulse frequency:
Pulse speed of each series models
ES series models
(V5.7 and above) and EP series models
Max. measured X1(30KHz), X2(10KHz)
frequency
Total frequency is less than 30KHz
Models
EH series models
X0/X1 (250KHz)
X2/X3 (10KHz)
When using this command in EH series models, the pulse frequency of external input
X0~X3 and the frequency of hardware high-speed counter are the same and both of
them all can reach 250KHz.
This command is mainly used to obtain a proportional value of rotation speed. The
result
and rotation speed are in proportion. The following equation can used to
obtain the rotation speed of motor.

N:
Rotation speed
60(D0)
N=
10 3 (rpm )
The number of pulses per rotation of rotation
n:
nt
equipment
t:
Detection time specified by
(ms)
If one of X0~X3 is specified, the specified device can not be used as the pulse input of
high-speed counter or external interrupt signal.
7-24

When SPD command has been executed and M1100 (SPD command sampling one
time flag)=On, SPD command will execute sampling one time. SPD command will
collect data one time when the movement of M1100 turning from Off to On, then stop.
If desiring to continue the collection, be sure to turn M1100 Off and execute SPD
command again.
When X7=On, D2 will count the high-speed pulse input from X1. After 1,000ms, it will
Program
Example
stop counting automatically and store the result in D0.

After 1000ms counting completed, the content of D2 will be reset to 0. When X7 turns
On again, D2 will recount.
X7
SPD
X1
K1000
D0
X7
X1
D2: current
value
D0: detection
value
D2: content
value
1000ms
1000ms
1000
D4: content
value
D4:remaining time (ms)
In ES series models (V5.7 and above), if X1 or X2 is used in SPD command, then the
Footnote
API
57
related high-speed counters or external interrupts I101, I201 can not be used.
Pulse Output
PLSY
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to
the command explanation for details.
In ES series models, PLSR command can be used twice but
the output cannot be repeat.
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
PLSY
execution

Continuous
DPLSY
execution
footnote.
7-25

Command
Explanation
: Pulse output frequency
: Pulse output number
: Pulse output
device (Please use the transistor output as output module)

specified as the pulse output frequency
Output frequency range of each series models
Models
ES series models
Output
1~10,000Hz
frequency range
EP series
models
EH series
1~32,000Hz
1~200,000Hz
specified as the pluse output number. 16-bit command: 1~32,767. 32-bit

command: 2,147,483,647.
Numbers of continuous pulses of each series models
ES series models and EP series
models
Specified method of M1010Y0 ON
continuous pulses M1023Y1 ON
Models
EH series models (TR

models)
Designated pulse output
number is set to K0
If designated pulse output number is set to 0 (zero) in EH series models, it means

that unlimit numbers of pulses will continuously output. M1010(Y0) or M1023(Y1)
should be On when unlimt numbers of pulse continuously output .
specified as the pulse output device. In EH series models, only Y0 and Y2 can
be specified. In EP/ES series models, only Y0 and Y1 can be specified.
When PLSY command has been executed, a specified quantity of pulses
be output through pulse output device
will
at the specified pulse output frequency
.
When using PLSY command in progam, the outputs of PLSY command, API 58 PWM
command and API 59 PLSR command cannot be the same.
In EP/ES series models, after Y0 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,
after Y1 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command is
Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.
In EH series models, Y0 and Y1 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On,
after Y2, Y3 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command
is Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off.
The execution completed flag M1029, M1030 should be clear by user after the
execution of the command has been completed.
When command PLSY has been executed, Y start to output pulse. At this time, the
output will not be affected if
is changed. If desiring to change pulse output
number, stop command PLSY, then change the pulse number.

can be changed when command PLSY has been executed. It can change the
effective time.
is changed when the program is executed to the executed
command PLSY.
The ratio of Off TIME and On TIME of the pulse output is 1:1.
7-26

The actual output pulse numbers are stored in special registers D1336~D1339 when
the program is executed to the command PLSY. Refer to the footnote for details.
The special register D and M which are allowed to be changed during the execution of
the command. Refer to the footnote for details.
Program
Example
When X0=On, the pulse of 1KHz for 200 times is generated from output Y0, after the
pulse has been completed, M1029=On trigger Y10=On.
When X0=Off, pulse output Y0 immediately stop. When X0 turns On again, the first
pulse start to output.
X0
PLSY
K1000
K200
Y0
M1029
Y100
0.5ms
Output Y0
200
1ms
Footnote
Flags description:
M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
automatically turn Off.
In EP/ES series MPU, when M1010=On, Y0 can output limitless continuous
pulses. When M1010=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y0 are decided by
.
M1023: In EP/ES series MPU, when M1023=On, Y1 can output limitless continuous
pulses. When M1023=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y1 are decided by
.
M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete.
In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete.
M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete.
M1078: In EP/ES series, Y0 pulse output stop.
M1079: In EP/ES series, Y1 pulse output stop.
M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange.
M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange.
M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop.
M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop.
M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag.
M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag.
M1338: In EH series MPU, CH0 offset pulse start flag.
M1339: In EH series MPU, CH1 offset pulse start flag.
M1340: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I110) occur after CH0 pulse output complete.
M1341: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I120) occur after CH1 pulse output complete.
In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I130) occur simultaneously when CH0 pulse
M1342:
transmit.
In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I140) occur simultaneously when CH1 pulse
M1343:
transmit.
M1344: In EH series MPU, CH0 compensation pulse start flag.
M1345: In EH series MPU, CH1 compensation pulse start flag.
7-27

Special registers description of EP series MPU:
D1030:
Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (LOW WORD).
D1031:
Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (HIGH WORD).
D1032:
Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (LOW WORD).
D1033:
Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (HIGH WORD).
Special registers description of EH series MPU:
D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits
of D1220, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y0 output
2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B
3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A
4. K3: Y1 output
D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two
bits of D1221, other bits are invalid.
1. K0: Y2 output
4. K3: Y3 output
D1328: CH0 offset pulse number (Low word)
D1329: CH0 offset pulse number (High word)
D1330: CH1 offset pulse number (Low word)
D1331: CH1 offset pulse number (High word)
D1332: CH0 remaining pulse number (Low word)
D1333: CH0 remaining pulse number (High word)
D1334: CH1 remaining pulse number (Low word)
D1335: CH1 remaining pulse number (High word)
D1336: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (LOW WORD).
D1337: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (HIGH WORD).
D1338: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(LOW WORD).
D1339: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(Y2,Y3)(HIGH WORD).
D1344: CH0 compensation pulse number (Low word)
D1345: CH0 compensation pulse number (High word)
D1346: CH1 compensation pulse number (Low word)
D1347: CH1 compensation pulse number (High word)
When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to
output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning
cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
The explanation of PLSY pulse output command and related devices of EH series
MPU:
Operand
Explanation
16-bit
Range
32-bit
Definition
7-28
Explanation of PLSY command

S1
S2
Frequency setting
Pulse quantity
0~32,767Hz
0~32,767
D
Output device
Y0~Y3
0~200KHz
0~2,147,483,647
K0: No output
Kn: Specified
frequency output
K0: Continuous pulse

Refer to the
output
setting of D1220,
Kn: Specified pulse output D1221

Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special D)
Initial
Data
Content
Attribute
Device No.
value
format
The phase setting of the first output pulse
D1220
16-bit R/W
K0
group
The phase setting of the second output
D1221
16-bit R/W
K0
pulse group
The offset pulse number of the first pulse
D1328 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
group
D1329 High word
The offset pulse number of the first pulse
D1330 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
group
D1331 High word
D1332 Low word
The remaining pulse number of the first
32-bit R/W
K0
pulse group
D1333 High word
The remaining pulse number of the second
D1334 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
pulse group
D1335 High word
The current value of the first pulse group
D1336 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
(The accumulated value of pulse output
D1337 High word
numbers)
The current value of the second pulse
D1338 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
group (The accumulated value of pulse
D1339 High word
output numbers)
D1341 Low word
32-bit R/W
K200000 Max. output frequency
D1342 High word
The compensation pulse number of the
D1344 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
first pulse group
D1345 High word
The compensation pulse number of the
D1346 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
second pulse group
D1347 High word
Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special M)
Related
Device
Attribute
Content
setting device
No.
M1010
R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously
M1029
End indication flag of the first pulse group
M1030
End indication flag of the second pulse group
M1334
R/W
Pulse output stop of the first pulse group
M1335
R/W
Pulse output stop of the second pulse group
M1336
Output indication flag of the first pulse group
M1337
Output indication flag of the second pulse group
M1338
R/W
OFFSET start flag of the first pulse group
D1328, D1329
M1339
R/W
OFFSET start flag of the second pulse group
D1330, D1331
M1340
R/W
M1341
R/W
M1342
R/W
M1343
R/W
M1344
R/W
Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output

I110
complete.
I120
complete.
I130
complete.
I140
complete.
Compensation start flag of the first pulse group
D1344, D1345
M1345
R/W
Compensation start flag of the second pulse group
M1347
R/W
Auto interrupt reset flag of the first pulse group
M1348
R/W
Auto interrupt reset flag of the second pulse group
D1346, D1347
7-29

API
58
Pulse Width Modulation Output
PWM
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer
to the command explanation.
The content value of operand S1 should be smaller than the
content value of S2.
In ES / EP series models, command PWM only can be used
ONCE in program.
Command
Explanation
: Pulse output width
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
PWM
execution
32-bit command

footnote.
: Pulse output cycle
: Pulse output device
(Please use transistor output as the output module)

is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.
is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms,
is specified as pulse output device. In EH series MPU,
can be specified
as Y0, Y2. In EP/ES series models,

can be specified as Y1.
Modulated pulse output of each series models
Models
ES/EX series models and EP series models
PWM output
EH series models
Y1
Y0, Y2
PWM command can be used TWICE in the program of EH series models. PWM
command can be used ONCE in the program of EP/ES series models.
The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR command
while PWM command is used in program.
When PWM command has been executed, the pulse output width
output cycle
If
is output through pulse output device
>
, an operation error will occur, M1067 =On. When
no pulse output from the pulse output device. When
and pulse
is 0, there is
, the pulse output
device will be always On.

,
Program
Example
can be changed during the execution of PWM command.
When X0=On, Y1 output the following pulse. When X0=Off, output Y1 will also turn
Off.
X0
PWM
K1000
K200
Y1
t=1000ms
Output Y1
T=2000ms
7-30

Footnote
Flags description:
M1010:
In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
M1067:
In EH series MPU, when operand is error, M1067=On.
M1070:
In EP/ES series MPU, When PWM command output Y1, the pulse unit will
exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100s, when M1070=Off, the
pulse unit is 1ms.
In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command
output Y0, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is
100s, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
M1071:
In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command
output Y2, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1071=On, the pulse unit is
100s, when M1071=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms.
M1258:
M1259:
M1334:
M1335:
M1336:
M1337:
In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange.

In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange.
In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop.
In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop.
In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag.
In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag.
Explanation of PWM command and the related device of EH series models.
Functions of
EH series MPU
API
59
Device
No.
M1010
M1070
M1071
M1258
M1259
M1334
M1335
M1336
M1344
Related setting
device
Attribute
Two pulse output groups simultaneously

Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse time unit exchange
Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse time unit exchange
Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse output signal exchange
Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse output signal exchange
Output indication flag of the second pulse group D1344, D1345
Pulse Wave Output with

Acceleration/Deceleration Speed
PLSR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Data
Format
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
Word devices
S1
S2
S3
D
Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer
to the command explanation.
In ES series models, PLSR command can be used TWICE
in program but the output can not be the same.
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
PLSR
execution

Continuous
DPLSR
execution
Flag: M1029, M1030. Execution
Completed flag.
7-31

Command
Explanation
: Maximum speed (HZ)
: Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS)
: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms)
: Pulse output device (Please use
transistor output as output module)

: the maximum frequency (Hz) of output pulse. Settings: In 16-bit command: 10
to 32,767 Hz. In 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000 Hz. The maximum speed is deemed
to be the multiples of 10, if not, the first unit will be discarded automatically. 1/10 of the
maximum speed is the one time variation of the accel/decel speed. Note that the
condition meets the acceleration requirement of the step motor and would not result in
the step motor crash..
: Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS). Settings: In 16-bit command:
110~32,767 (PLS). In 32-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647(PLS). If the setting is
below 110, the pulse cannot output normally.
: Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms). Settings: below 5,000ms. The accel time
and the decel time have to be the same and cannot be set without one another.
1. The accel/decel time has to be over 10 times the maximum scan time (contents of
D1012). If the setting is below 10 times, the slope of the accel/decel speed will be
inaccurate.
2. Minimum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following
equation.
90000
If the setting is smaller than the result of the above-mentioned equation, the
acceleration/deceleration time will be greater, and if the setting is smaller than the
9000/
, the result value of 9000/
will be treated as its regular setting.
3. Maximum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following
equation.
818
4. Number of the accel/decel speed variation steps is fixed to be 10. If the input
acceleration/deceleration time is greater than the maximum setting, the maximum
setting will be treated as its regular setting. If the setting is smaller than the
minimum setting, the minimum setting will be treated as its regular setting.
7-32

PLSR command is the pulse output command with the accel/decel speed function.
The acceleration is conducted when the pulse wave goes from the static status to
reaching its targeted speed, and getting faster when the targeted speed is to be
reached. The pulse wave will stop its output once the targeted distance is reached.
When PLSR command has been executed, after set the maximum frequency
quantity of total pulse numbers and accel/decel time
,a
, then output them through
pulse output device
. The output frequency is first raised up in 1/10 of the
maximum frequency
/10 and the time of each output frequency is fixed as 1/9 of
.
Even user change
or
when PLSR command has been executed,
the output will not be affected.

After the pulse numbers of the first output pulse group (Y0, Y1) set by
has been
completely output, M1029=On. After the pulse numbers of the second output pulse
group (Y0, Y1) set by
has been completely output, , M1030=On. When the
command PLSR is activated again, M1029 or M1030 will turn to 0, then turn to 1 after
the PLSR command has been completed.
The output pulse of the first output group (Y0, Y1) and the cueent value of he second
output group (Y2, Y3) are stored in the special regisers D1336~D1339.
During the acceleration of each step, the pulse numbers (each frequency x time) may
not all be integer, but the output operation of PLC is conducted in whole integer
number. Therefore, the time of each interval may not be the same and has some
deviation. The offset is determined by the frequency value and the discarding decimal
point value. In order to ensure the output pulse numbers are correct, PLC will fill the
insufficiency pulse numbers to the last interval.
Program
Example
When X0=On, the maximum frequency of command PLSR is 1,000Hz. The quantity of
total pulse numbers D10, accel/decel time is 3,000ms and pulses output from output
Y0. The pulses are output and the output frequency is 1,000/10 Hz every time. The
time of output pulse of each frequency is fixed as 3,000/9.
When X10 is OFF, output will be interrupted, and when turned ON again, counting of
the pulse will be counted from 0.
X0
PLSR
K1000
D10
K3000
Y0
7-33

Outputs: Y0 or Y2
Pulse speed(Hz)
The time interval of the

one time pulse output
is 1/9 of
Targeted speed: 10~200,000Hz
1010
9
8
7
Output pulses7
6
4
3
10-step
variations
The max. speed of the

one time speed variation
is 1/10 of
10-step
variations
5
4
3
16-bit command:110~32,767PLS
32-bit command:110~2,147,483,647PLS
2
1
2
1
Accel time
Decel time
below 5000ms
below 5000ms
Time(Sec)
The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM command
Footnote
while PLSR command is used in program.

Explanation of the command and related devices in EH series MPU
X0
Functions of
EH series MPU
PLSR
K1000
D10
K3000
Y0
The speed range for the pulse of this command is 10~200,000Hz. And if the settings
for the high speed and the accel/decel time exceed this range, use the allowable
setting within this range for operation.
Command Explanation
S2
S3
Accel/Decel
Explanation Max. frequency
Total pulse quantity
Time
16-bit 10~32,767Hz
110~32,767
Range
1~5000ms
32-bit 10~200KHz
110~2,147,483,647
K0: Continuous pulse
Flag:
K0: No output
output
Definition
M1067
Kn: Specified
Kn: Specified pulse
M1068
frequency output
output
Operand
S1
D
Output device
Y0~Y3
Refer to the
setting of
D1220, D1221
Frequency F
Maximum speed: 10~200,000Hz
Total output pulses

F0
Start
frequency
16-bit command: 110~32,767PLS

16-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647PLS
Accel time
1~5000ms
7-34
Decel time
1~5000ms

Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special D)
Data
Initial
Content
Device No.
forma Attribute
value
t
The phase setting of the first output
D1220
16-bit R/W
K0
pulse group
The phase setting of the second
D1221
16-bit R/W
K0
output pulse group
The current value of the first pulse
D1336 Low word
32-bit R/W
K0
group (The accumulated value of
D1337 High word
pulse output numbers)
The current value of the second
D1338 Low word
pulse group (The accumulated value
32-bit R/W
K0
D1339 High word
of pulse output numbers)
D1340
16-bit R/W
K200 Start frequency
D1341 Low word
32-bit R/W
K200000 Max. output frequency
D1342 High word
Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special M)
Device
Attribute
No.
Related
setting device
Content
M1010
R/W
Two pulse output groups simultaneously
M1029
End indication flag of the first pulse group
M1030
End indication flag of the second pulse group
M1334
R/W
M1335
R/W
M1336
M1337
Output indication flag of the second pulse group
M1067
R/W
M1068
Program execution error flag

Execution error latch
D1068
In EH series models, if the acceleration/deceleration time cannot reach the maximum

acceleration frequency, the acceleration/deceleration time and maximum frequency
will be adjusted automatically. The related functions are listed as follows:
Step 1: First, use the following equations to obtain the result of (1), (2) and (3) to adjust
acceleration time.
F0 = D1340 if F0 + 60 > S1 or F0 = 0 F0 =
S3 <
S3
(30 S 2 )
(30 F0 + 29 S1 )
S1
..(1)
60
..(2)
600000
..(3)
F0
Step 2: Calculates the interval of the acceleration of each step, FG by using the following
equation. The interval of each step are the same: FG =
S1
..(4)
59
7-35

Step 3: Calculates the max. output pulse numbers of acceleration/ deceleration
time: PG =
S2
2 (5)
2
Step 4: Set the following variables.

Fi: The frequency of each acceleration/deceleration interval, i = 1~59,
F1 = F0 + FG ,
Fi = Fi 1 + FG (6)
TG: The acceleration/deceleration time of each acceleration/deceleration

interval TG =
S3
59
(7)
Step 5: Entering the result of (5), (6), (7) to the following equation can get the result as
59
follows:
F T
i =0
PG .. (8)
Step 6: In the equation of (8), if the value of the calculation result has been greater than the
PG value before item 59 has been calculated.
In EH series models, the commands that are related to acceleration and deceleration
all can use the above equations.
The parameters of command PLSR must be input before the command has been
executed.
All acceleration and deceleration commands are with brake function. When the PLC
acceleration is executed but the switch contact is Off suddenly, the brake function is
activated and PLC will decelerate in the same slope of acceleration speed.
Frequency F
Origin acceleration path

Brake path
S1
F0
Time T
API
60
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D1
D2
Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices.
The usage range of operand D1 and D2 is S20~S899 and
D2D1.
IST command only can be used one time in program.
7-36
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Manual/Auto Control
IST

Continuous
IST
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1040~M1047.

Command
Explanation
: The starting input number of the designated operation mode.

smallest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode.
: The
: The
greatest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode.
The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step
ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient
auto control command.
Program
Example
1
M1000
IST
X10
S20
S60
X10: Individual operation (Manual operation)

X11: Zero point return
X12: Step operation
X13: One cycle operation
When the IST command is executed, the following
X14: Continuous operation

X15: Zero point return start switch
X16: Start switch
X17: Stop switch
special auxiliary relay will switch
automatically.
M1040: Movement inhibited
S0: Manual operation/initial state step point
M1041: Movement start
S1: Zero point return/initial state step point
M1042: Status pulse
S2: Auto operation/initial state step point
M1047: STL monitor enable

When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step
point of this state cant be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9
step points, S0 initiates manual operation, S1 initiates zero point return operation
and S2 initiates auto operation. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three
initial state step points first written in program.
When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return wont have any
actions once one of S10~S19 is On.
When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation wont have any actions
once one of
Program
Example
2
between
to
is On or M1043=On
Example: the Robot arm control (use IST command):

Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and
moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control.
Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right,
lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order.
I/O Device:
Left-limit X1
Upper-limit X4
Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3
(big balls)
(small balls)
Y0
Y3
Y2
Y1
Upper-limit X5
Big/small
sensor X0
Big
Small
7-37

Control panel
Power start
Auto start X16
Zero return X15
Auto stop X17
Power stop
Raise
Shift
Collect
balls robot arm to right
X20
X22
X24
Step X12
Shift
Release Lower
balls robot arm to left
X21
X23
One cycle
operation X13
Zero return X11
Continuous
operation X14
Manual
operation X10
X25
Big/small sensor X0.

The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3
(small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5.
Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and
collect balls Y4.
START circuit:
X0
X1 Y4
M1044
M1000
IST
X10
Manual operation mode:

X20
S0
S
S20
S80
SET
Y4
Collect balls
RST
Y4
Release balls
X21
X22 Y1
Y0
Raise robot arm

Condition interlock
X23 Y0
X24 X4 Y3
X25 X4 Y2
Y1
Lower robot arm
Y2
Shift to right
Y3
Shift to left
Condition interlock
Zero point return mode:

SFC figure:
S1
X15
S10
X4
S11
X1
S12
7-38
RST
Y4
Release balls
RST
Y1

Y0
RST
Y2

Y3
SET
M1043
RST
S12


Ladder Diagram:
S1 X15
S
S10
S
SET
S10
Enter zero return operation mode
RST
Y4
Release balls
RST
Y1

Y0
X4
S11
S
SET
S11
RST
Y2
S12

Y3
X1
SET
S12
S
SET
M1043
RST

S12
Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes):

SFC figure:
S2
M1041
M1044
S20
Y1
X5
X0
X5
X0
S30
T0
S31
X4
S32
SET
Y4
TMR
T0
S40
K30
Y0
X2
T1
S42
Y2
X2
Y4
TMR
T1
K30
Y0
S41
X4
SET
X3
Y2
X3
S50
Y1
X5
S60
T2
S80
Y4
TMR
T2
K30
Y0
S70
X4
RST
X1
Y3
X1
S2
7-39

Ladder Diagram:
S2 M1041 M1044
S
S20
S
SET
S20
Y1
Enter auto operation mode

Lower robot arm
X5 X0
SET
S30
SET
S40
SET
Y4
Collect balls
TMR
T0
K30
SET
S31
X5 X0
S30
S
T0
S31
S

Y0
X4
SET
S32
S
S32
X2
Shift to right
Y2
X2
S40
S
SET
S50
SET
Y4
Collect balls
TMR
T1
K30
SET
S41
T1
S41
S

Y0
X4
SET
S42
S
S42
X3
Y2
Shift to right
X3
SET
S50
S
S50
Y1
Lower robot arm
X5
S60
S
SET
S60
RST
Y4
Release balls
TMR
T2
K30
SET
S70
T2
S70
S

Y0
X4
SET
S80
S
X1
Y3
X1
S80
S2
RET
END
7-40

Footnote
Flag explanation:
M1040: step point movement inhibited. When M1040=ON, all movements of the step point
are inhibited.
1. Manual operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON.
2. Zero point return mode/one cycle operation mode: During the time of pressing
STOP button and pressing START button again, M1040 will keep being ON.
3. Step operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON, and will only be OFF when the
START button is pressed.
4. Continuous operation mode: When PLC goes from STOPRUN, M1040 keeps
being ON, and will be OFF when the START button is pressed.
M1041: Step point movement start: the special auxiliary relay that reflects the movement of
the primary step point (S2) to the next step point.
1. Manual operation mode/Zero point return mode: M1041 keeps being OFF.
2. Step operation mode/One cycle operation mode: M1041 will only be OFF when
the START button is pressed.
3. Continuous operation mode: Keeps being ON when the START button is pressed,
and keeps being OFF when the STOP button is pressed.
M1042: START pulse: Only one pulse will be sent out when the button is pressed.
M1043: Zero point return complete: Once M1043 =ON is driven, it means that the RESET
motion has been executed.
M1044: Conditions of the origin: Under the continuous operation mode, conditions of the
origin, M1044, have to be driven to ON to execute the motion of initial step point (S2)
moving to the next step point.
M1045: All output reset inhibit.
If executing conditions: A. from manual control S0 to zero point return S1
B. from auto operation S2 to manual operation S0
C. from auto operation S2 to zero point return S1
1. When M1045=Off and one of S of D1~D2 is ON, step point of SET Y output and
actions will be cleared to Off.
2. When M1045 =On, SET Y output will be reserved and step point during action will
be cleared to Off.
3. If executing from zero point return S1 to manual operation S0, no matter
M1045=On or M1045=Off, SET Y output will be reserved and step point action will
be cleared to Off.
M1046: Setting STL state to On: If one of step point S is On, M1046=On. After M1047 forces
to be On, M1046 will be On once one of S is On. Besides, 8 points numbers before S
is on will be recorded in D1040~D1047.
M1047: STL monitor enabled. When IST command starts executing, M1047 will be forced to
be On and it will be forced to On for each scan time once IST command is still On.
This flag is used to monitor all S.
D1040~D1047: ON state number 1-8 of step point S.
7-41

API
61
SER
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Search a Data Stack

Word devices
S1
S2
D
N
Note: If operand S2 uses with device F, it is only available in
16-bit command.
The usage of operand n: n=1~256 (16-bit command),
n=1~128 (32-bit command)

Continuous
SER
execution

Continuous
DSER
execution
Flag: None
: Starting device of data stack for multiple devices comparison
Command
Explanation
data for comparison
: Value
: Starting device for storing compared result
: Data
stack length for comparison

specify the numbers of compared registers and
specify the compared
numbers. The specified data is compared against the data specified by

compared result is stored in several registers specified by
When using 32-bit command to designate registers,
and the
.
,
and
specify 32-bit register.

When X0=On, the data stack consist of D10~D19 are compared against D0 and the
Program
Example
result is stored in D50~D54. If the equal value does not exist, the content of D50~D52
will all be 0.
The data is compared in algebra formate. (-102)
The largest value of all compared data will be record in D53 and the samllest value of
all compared data will be record in D54. When the numbers of largest value and
smallest are more than one, only the numbers of largest value will be recorded.
X0
SER
D10
D0
D50
K10
Content value Compared data Data number
7-42
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
88
100
110
150
100
300
100
5
100
500
D0=K100
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Result
Equal
Equal
Equal
Smallest
Equal
Largest

Content value
D50
D51
D52
D53
D54
API
62
4
1
8
7
9
Explanation
The total data numbers of equal value
The number of the first equal value
The number of the last equal value
The number of the smallest value
The number of the largest value
Applicable models
Absolute Drum Sequencer
ABSD
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
n
Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4
should be specified in 16-bit command and K8 should be
specified in 32-bit command.
The usage range of n: n=1~64
Command
Explanation
EP

Continuous
ABSD
execution
Continuous
DABSD
execution
Flag: None
: Starting device of the compared data table

Starting number of compared result
ES
: Number of counter
EH
: Groups of multi-step comparison
The ABSD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in

absolute cam control.
of DABSD command can specify high-speed counter. However, when the
current value of high-speed counter is compared against the setting value, the result
can not output immediately because it is influenced by the scan time. If immediate
output is desired, please use the DHSZ command, the specific comparison command
for high-speed counter.
Program
Example
Before executing the ABSD command, use MOV command to write each setting value
into D100~D107 in advance. The content of the even number D is the lower-limit value
and the content of the odd number D is the upper-limt value.
When X0=On, the current value of counter C10 is compared against the upper- and
lower-limit value of D100~D107 four groups. The compared result is showed in
M10~M13.
When X10=Off, the origin On/Off state of M10~M13 will not be changed.
X10
C10
ABSD
D100
RST
C10
CNT
C10
C10
M10
K4
X11
X11
K400
7-43

M10~ M13 will be On when the current value of C10 is equal to or higher than the
lower-limit value and equal to or lower than the upper-limit value.
Lower-limit value
Upper-limit value Current value of C10
Output
D100= 40
D101=100
50C10100
M10=On
D102=120
D103=210
120C10210
M11=On
D104=140
D105= 170
140C10170
M12=On
D106=150
D107=390
150C10390
M13=On
When the lower-limit value is higher than the upper-limit value, if the current value of
C10 is higher than the lower-limit value and lower than the upper-limit value
(C10>140), M12=On.
Lower-limit value
Upper-limit value Current value of C10
Output
D100= 40
D101=100
50C10100
M10=On
D102=120
D103=210
120C10210
M11=On
D104=140
D105= 60
60C10140
M12=Off
D106=150
D107=390
150C10390
M13=On
40
100
M0
120
210
M1
60
140
M2
150
390
M3
0
API
63
Word devices
S1
S2
D
N
Note: When operand S1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4
should be specified.
In 16-bit command, operand S2 should be C0~C198 and will
occupy 2 continuous counters.
The usage range of operand n: n=1~64
7-44
400
Increment Drum Sequencer
INCD
Bit devices
X Y M S
200
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
16-bit command ( 9 STEPS)

Continuous
INCD
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1029 execution completed flag

Command
Explanation
: Starting device of the compared data table

Starting number of compared result
: Number of counter
: Groups of multi-step comparison
The INCD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in relative
cam control.
The current value of
is compared against the setting value of
current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of

and be compared again. The return times will be stored in
When the comparison of
. Once the
will be reset to 0
+1.
groups data has been completed, the execution
completed falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.
Program
Example
Before executing the INCD command, use MOV command to write each setting value
into D100~D104 in advance. D100=15, ,D101=30, D102=10, D103=40, D104=25.
The current value of counter C10 is compared against the setting value of
D100~D104. Once the current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of
C10 will be reset to 0 and be compared again.
The return times will be stored in C11.
When the content of C11 increase 1, M10~M14 will also change in response. Please
refer to the following timing diagram.
When the comparison of 5 groups data has been completed, the execution completed
falg M1029 will On one scan cycle.
When X0 turns from On to Off, C10 and C11 will all bereset to 0 and M10~M14 all turn
Off. When X0 turns On again, this command will be executed again from the
beginning.
X0
M1013
CNT
C10
K100
INCD
D100
C10
M10
K5
X0
40
30
C10
Current value
15
C11
Current value 0
25
10
30
15
15
4
0 1 0
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M1029
7-45

API
64
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
n
Note: Operand D will occupy 2 continuous devices.
The usage range of operand n: n=0~2
It only can use TTMR command eight times in program.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Teaching Timer
TTMR

Continuous
TTMR
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Device number for storing the On duration of the button switch
: Multiple
setting
The On duration of external button switch is measured and stored in the number of
+1, the measured unit is 100ms periods. The content of
multiplied by
and stored in
measured unit of
measured unit of
+1 in seconds is
When multiple setting n=0, the measured unit of
Program
Example
1
is in seconds. When n=1, the
is 100ms periods (is multiplied by 10). When n=2,
the
is 10ms periods (is multiplied by 100).
The time that the button switch X0 is pushed (On duration of X0) will be stored in D1, n
is used to specify the multiple of the time and the total bit time is stored in D0. Then the
button switch can be used to adjust the setting value of timer.
When X0 turns Off, the content of D1 will be reset to 0 but the content of D0 is
unchanged.
X0
TTMR
D0
K0
X0
D1
D1
D0
D0
T
pushed time (sec)
T
pushed time (sec)
If On duration of X0 is T seconds, the relation between D0, D1 and n are shown as the
table below.
n
7-46
D0
D1(unit: 100 ms)
K0 (unit: s)
1T
D1=D010
K1 (unit: 100 ms)
10T
D1=D0
K2 (unit: 10 ms)
100T
D1=D0/10

Program
Example
2
Using TTMR command to write 10 groups setting time.

Write the setting value into D100~D109 in advance.
The measured unit of the following timers T0~T9 is 0.1 second and the measured unit
of the alternate is 1 second.
Connect one bit digital switch to X0~X3 and use BIN command to convert the setting
value of digital switch to BIN value and store in E.
The On duration (in sec) of X10 is stored in D100.
M0 is the pulse of one time scan cycle generated when the alternate timer button is
released.
Use the setting number of digital switch as the pointers of index register, and then
transmit the content of D100 to D200E (D200~D209).
M10
TMR
T0
D100
M11
TMR
T1
D101
TMR
T9
D109
BIN
K1X0
TTMR
D200
K0
PLF
M0
MOV
D100
M19
M1000
X10
X10
M0
D200E
For EP series models, it can only use TTMR command eight times in program. If used
Footnote
in subroutine or interrupt subroutine, it only can use ONCE.

For EH series models, the maximum TTMR command groups it can only use at the
same time is eight groups.
7-47

API
65
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
M
D
Note: The operand S: EP series models can use T0~T191, EH
series models can use T0~T199
The usage range of operand m: m=1~32767
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Special Timer
STMR
: Number of timer

Continuous
STMR
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Setting value of timer, unit is 100ms
: Starting
device of output device

STMR command is a command which provides Off-delay, one shot and flash loop.
The number of timer specified by STMR command can not be reapeat.
Program
Example
When X10=On, the settting value of the timer T0 specified by STMR command is 5
seconds.
Y0 is the contact of Off-delay: When X10 turns from Off to On, Y0= On. When X10
turns On to Off and delay 5 seconds, Y0=Off.
When X10 turns from On to Off, Y1= On output one time for 5 seconds.
When X10 turns from Off to On, Y2=On output one time for 5 seconds.
When X10 turns from Off to On, Y3= On after delay 5 seconds. When X10 turns from
On to Off, Y3=Off after delay 5 seconds.
X10
STMR
T0
K50
Y0
X10
Y0
5 sec
5 sec
Y1
5 sec
5 sec
Y2
Y3
7-48
5 sec
5 sec

Add a b contact of Y3 after the drive contact X10, ans then Y1, Y2 can be used as the
output of flash loop. When X10 turns Off, Y0, Y1 and Y3 will be Off and the content of
T10 will be reset to 0.
X10
Y3
STMR
T10
K50
Y0
X10
Y1
Y2
API
66
ALT
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
ON/OFF Alternate
Bit devices
X Y M S
5 sec 5 sec
Word devices
D
(ALTP).

Continuous
ALT
ALTP
execution
32-bit command
Pulse
execution
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
1
: Dentisation device
This command is usually pulse execution command (ALTP).
When X0 turns from Off to On for the first time, Y0=ON. When X0 turns from Off to On
for the second time, Y0=OFF.
X0
ALTP
Y0
X0
Y0
7-49

Program
Example
2
The ALT command is a command, which use one switch to control start and stop mode.
In the beginning, M0=Off, so Y0=On, Y1=Off. When X10 is activated for the first time,
M0=ON, Y1=ON and Y0=OFF. When X10 is activated for the second time, M0=OFF,
Y0=ON, Y1=OFF.
X10
ALT
M0
M0
Y0
M0
Y1
Program
Example
3
Output Y will flash. When X10= On, T0 will generate a pulse every two seconds and
output Y0 will be switching between On and Off mode depending on the pulse of T0.
X10
T0
TMR
T0
K20
T0
ALTP
API
67
Word devices
S1
S2
D
N
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~32767
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Ramp Signal
RAMP
Bit devices
X Y M S
Y0
: Start setting of ramp signal

value of ramp signal

Continuous
RAMP
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1026 Starting mode (Please

refer to the footnote)
M1029 Execution completed flag
: End setting of ramp signal
: Current
: Scan times
This command is used to get a ramp signal. A ramp signal has a strong connection
with linear and scan time. Therefore, must fix the scan time before using this RAMP
command.
Write the start setting value of ramp signal to D10 and end setting value of ramp signal
to D11 in advance. When X0 is On, the setting value is forwarding from D10 to D11
(setting value in D10 will be increased) and the proceeding time (n= 100 times scans)
is stored in D12.
7-50

The scan time can be fixed if set M1039=On in the program previously. Then, using
MOV command to write the setting value of the fixed scan time into special register
D1039. Take the above program as an example, if the setting value is 30ms and
n=K100, the time between D10 and D11 is 3 second (D3: 30ms100).
During the execution of this command, when starting signal X10 turns Off, this
command will stop the operation. When X10 turns On again, the content value of D12
will be reset to 0(zero) and calculated again.
After the execution of this command has been completed, M1029= On and
the
content value of D12 will be reset to the setting value of D10.

Using this command with analog signal output can execute the operation of Sort
Start/Stop.
If start PLC from STOP to RUN when X10= On, please reset the content value of D12
to 0(zero) in the beginning of the program. (If D12 is a latched area.)
X10
RAMP
D10
D11
D11
D12
D10
K100
D12
D12
D11
D10
?times scans
D10<D11
?times scans
D10> D11
The scan times is stored in D13

On/Off condition of starting mode flag M1026 and the change of the content value in
Footnote
D12 are shown below:
M1026=ON
X10
Starting signal
M1029
X10
Starting signal
D11
D11
D10
M1026=OFF
D12
D10
D12
M1029
7-51

API
69
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Data Sort
SORT
Word devices
S
m1
m2
D
n

Continuous
SORT
execution
32-bit command
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1 =1~32

The usage range of operand m2: m2 =1~6
The usage range of operand n: n=1~ m2
Command
Explanation
Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
: Starting device of source data table

numbers of each data
: Sort data grops
: Column
: Starting device for storing sort data
: Reference
value of sort data

The resulting sorted data is stored in the m1 m2 registers counted from the starting
device specified by
. Therefore, if the device
and
specify the same
register, the resulting sorted data will be the same as the content of source device
.
An ideal most right number of the head number specified by
is 0.
The data sort will be completed after the SORT command being processed m1 times.
Once the SORT command has been completed, the Flag M1029= On.
Program
Example
7-52
When X0 is On, it starts to sort specified data. After the data sort is completed,
M1029= On. During the execution of the SORT command, do not change the sort
data. If user want to re-sort the data, be sure to turn X0 from Off to On again.
X0
SORT
D0
K5
K5
D50
D100

Example table of data sort
Data numbers: m2
Data Column
Column
Data numbers: m1
Row
Students
No.
Chinese
English
Mathematics
Physis and
Chemistry
D01
D590
D1075 D1566
D2079
D12
D655
D1165 D1654
D2163
D23
D780
D1298 D1789
D2290
D34
D870
D1360 D1899
D2350
D45
D995
D1479 D1975
D2469
Sort data table when D100=K3.
Column
Data numbers: m1
Row
1
Students
No.
Data numbers: m2
Data Column
2
3
Chinese
English
5
Physis and
Mathematics
Chemistry
D504
D5570 D6060 D6599
D7050
D512
D5655 D6165 D6654
D7163
D521
D5790 D6275 D6766
D7279
D535
D5895 D6379 D6875
D7369
D543
D5980 D6498 D6989
D7490
Sort data table when D100=K5.

Data numbers: m2
Column
Data numbers: m1
Row
1
Students
No.
Data Column
3
Chinese
English
5
Physis and
Mathematics
Chemistry
D504
D5570 D6060 D6599
D7050
D512
D5655 D6165 D6654
D7163
D525
D5795 D6279 D6775
D7269
D531
D5890 D6375 D6866
D7379
D543
D5980 D6498 D6989
D7490
7-53

API
70
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
10-Key Keyboard Input
TKY
Word devices

Continuous
TKY
execution
S
D1
D2

Continuous
DTKY
execution
Flag: None
Note: Operand S occupies 10 continuous devices

Operand D2 occupies 10 continuous devices
: Head input device
Command
Explanation
: Destination device for storing key input value
: Key input signal

This command can specify ten external input devices from
and these ten
external input devices is identified as decimal value of 0 to 9. These ten external input
devices are connected to ten keys respectively. When one of the ten keys is pressed,
the value of decimal numbers from 0 to 9,999 (max. 4 digits in 16-bit command) or from
0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits in 32-bit command) can be inputted and stored in
destination device
. The device
is used to store the condition of that key
has been pressed.
Program
Example
Using this command can specify ten input terminals from X0 to connect to ten keys
which number is from 0 to 9. When X20=On, the command is executed and it will store
the BIN value which is inputted by keys into D0 and M10~M19 is used to store the
condition of that key has been pressed.
X20
TKY
X0
D0
0V
+24V
S/S
M10
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
PLC
0
number key
BCD value one digit number BCD code
overflow
10
10
10
10
BCD value
BIN value
7-54
D0

As the time chart shown below, the four keys are connected to X5, X3, X0, X1 of
number keyboard. After pressing the four keys in that order of 1234 and the number
5,301 will be entered into D0. The max. number which can be entered in D0 is 9,999 i.e.
4 digits. If the entered number exceeds the above allowable range, the highest digits will
overflow.
After X2 is pressed, M12=On untill other keys are pressed. The situation of other press
keys are the same.
When any key of X0~X11 is pressed, one device of M10~M19 will be On.
If any key is pressed, M20=On.
When the drive contact X20 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M10~M20
all turns Off.
X0
l
m
X1
X3
X5
k
j
M10
M11
M13
M15
Key output
signal
M20
7-55

API
71
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D1
D2
D3
: Head scan input device

Continuous
HKY
execution

Continuous
DHKY
execution
M1167 HKY input mode switch
Please refer to the footnote

Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
16-Key Keyboard Input
HKY
: Head scan output device
device for storing key input value
: Destination
: Key input signal
This command can create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous

external input devices from
and 4 continuous external output devices from
by matrix scan. The key input value will be stored in
and
is used to
store the condition of that key has been pressed.

When this command is executed every time, the execution completed flag M1029 will
be On for the duration of that key pressed (one scan cycle).
If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is
effective.
When HKY command is used in 16-bit command,
can store numbers from 0 to
9,999 (max. 4 digits). When DHKY command is used in 32-bit command,
can
store numbers from 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits). If the entered number exceeds the
above allowable range, the highest digits will overflow.
Program
Example
Using this command to create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous

external input devices X10~X13 and 4 continuous external output devices Y10~Y13.
When X4=On, the command is executed and it will store the BIN value which is
inputted by keys into D0 and M0~M7 is used to store the condition of that key has been
pressed.
X4
HKY
7-56
X10
Y10
D0
M0

Number input:
0
10
10
number key
one digit number BCD code
BCD value
overflow
10
10
BCD value
BIN value
D0
Function key input:

When press A key, M0=On and latch. Next, press D key and then M0=Off, M3=On
and latch.
If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is
effective.
M5
M4
M3
M2
M1
M0
Key output signal:

When any key of A to Fis pressed, M6=On one time.
When any key of 0 to 9 is pressed, M7=Onone time.
When the drive contact X4 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M0~M7 all
turns Off.
External wiring:
C
COM
X10
X11
X12
X13
COM
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
PLC( Transistor output )
7-57

Footnote
When this command is executed, 8 times scan cycles is required to read the input
value of keys sucessfully. If the scan cycle is too long or too short, it may cause the key
to input incorrectly. Therefore, user can use the following command to avoid it.
When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not response in time and can not
read the key input correctly. At this time, user can fix the scan time to avoid it.
When the cycle is too long, the response of key may become slow. User can avoid
this by writing this command in a time interrupt subroutine and executing this
command in the fix time.
The function of flag M1167:
When M1167=On, HKY command can input hexadecimal value of 0~F.
When M1167=Off, A~F of HKY command are used as function keys.
API
72
Digital Switch Input
DSW
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D1
D2
n
: Head input device

storing the setting value

Continuous
DSW
execution
32-bit command
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~2

Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag
: Head output device
: Destination device for
: Number of digits
This command is used to read one or two groups of 4 digits switch through 4 or 8
continuous external input devices from
and 4 continuous external devices from
and store the setting value in destination device

one group of digital switches is read. When
. When
is 1, only
is 2, two groups of digital switches
are read.
Program
Example
The first group of switches consists of X20~X23 and Y20~Y23. The second group of
switches consists of X24~X27 and Y20~Y23. When X10=On, the command starts to
execute. The setting value of the first group of switches are read and converted to BIN
value and stored in D20. The setting value of the second group of switches are read
and converted to BIN value and stored in D21.
X10
DSW
X20
Y20
D20
7-58
K2

When X10=On, Y20~Y23 will be On and scan in circles automatically. After the
completion of each circle scan, execution completed falg M1029=ON is a scan period
after a circle scan.
Outputs Y20~Y23 please use transistor output. Besides, please make sure that every
1, 2, 4, 8 terminal should connect a diode (0.1A/50V) to the inputs of PLC in serial as
shown in the example below.
X10
operation start
0.1s
0.1s
Y20
Y21
0.1s
0.1s
interrupt
Y22
0.1s
Y23
0.1s
execution com pleted
M1029
Wiring diagram of digital switch
BCD digital
switches
10
10
10
10
should connect
a diode (1N4148)
in serial
0V
+24V
S/S
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
The second group
The first group
PLC
C
Y20
Y21
0
10
Y22
1
10
Y23
2
10
10
7-59

When the scan terminals are relay outputs, the following program technique is used
Footnote
with this command to operate successfully:

When X10=On, DSW command is executed. When X10 turns Off, M10 will be On
until the scan terminals of DSW command complete one output scan cycle. Then,
M10 will turn Off.
If the drive contact X10 use button switch, every time when X10 is pushed, M10,
the scan terminals specified by DSW command, will be reset to Off after the
completion of one output scan cycle. Then, the command will stop executing, the
data of digital switch will be read completely and the scan terminals will be activated
while the button switch is pushed. Therefore, even relay output is used in this
situation, the relay can be used for long because the operation of relay is not
frequent.
X10
SET
M10
DSW
X20
RST
M10
M10
Y20
D20
K2
M1029
API
73
SEGD
Decode the 7-segment Display

Panel
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
(SEGDP)
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
: Source device for decoding
ES
EP EH

Continuous
Pulse
SEGD
SEGDP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Output device after decoding
When X10=On, contents (0~F: 16 bits) of the lower 4 bits (b0~b3) of D10 will be
decoded as readable in the 7-segment display panel for output. The decoding results
will be stored in Y10~Y17.
X10
SEGD
D10
7-60
Applicable models
K2Y10

Decoding Chart of the 7-segment Display Panel:
API
74
Status of Every Step
Bit
Composition
Combi- of the 7-Step
nation Display Panel
16
bits
Data
Displayed
0000
ON
ON
ON
ON
0001
OFF ON
ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
0010
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
0011
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
0100
OFF ON
ON
OFF OFF
ON
ON
0101
ON
OFF ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
0110
ON
OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0111
ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF
ON
OFF
1000
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1001
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
1010
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
1011
OFF OFF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1100
ON
OFF ON
ON
ON
OFF
1101
OFF ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
1110
ON
OFF OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
1111
ON
OFF OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Applicable models
7-segment Display Scan Output
SEGL
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
n
Note: The usage range of operand n: n=0~7. Please refer to
the footnote.
In EH series models, SEGL command can only be used
twice.
Command
Explanation

Continuous
SEGL
execution
32-bit command
EP
EH
: Display source device of 7-segment display

7-segment display scan output
ES
: Start device of
: Polarity setting of output signal and scan
signal
8 or 12 continuous external output points that start from this command
can be
regarded as display and scan signal output of 1 or 2 groups of 4 digits of 7-segment

display. 7-segment display module has function to convert input BCD code to
7-segment display and has control signal to latch or not.
7-61
will decide the numbers of groups of 4 digits of 7-segment display and also
indicate the polaritys of PLC output terminal and 7-segment display input terminal.
The points number of 7-segment display output command that a group of 4 digits use
is 8 points and 2 groups of 4 digits use are 12 points.
Scan output terminal will circulate in sequence when this command executes. The
drive contact will be changed from Off to On and scan output execute again.
Program
Example
When X10=ON, command will start to execute. 7-segment display scan loop is
composed of Y10~Y17. The value of D10 will be converted to BCD code and send to
the first group of 7-segment display to display. The value of D11 will be converted to
BCD code and send to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If any value
of D10 or D11 is greater than 9999, operation error will occur.
X10
SEGL
D10
Y10
K4
When X10=ON, Y14~Y17 will scan in circles automatically. Each circle scan needs 12
scan time. M1029=ON is a scan period after a circle scan.
4 digits of a group, n=0~3.
After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in
parallet, they should connect to Y10~Y13 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number
connects to Y14~Y17 of PLC individually.
When X10=ON, the content of D10 will be transmitted to 7-segment display to
display in sequently according to Y14~Y17 circulates in sequence
4 digits of 2 groups, n=4~7.
After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in
parallet, they should connect to Y20~Y23 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number
and the first group share Y14~Y17 of PLC.
The content of D10 will be transmitted to the first group of 7-segment display and
the content of D11 will be transmitted to the second group of 7-segment display to
display. If D10=K1234 and D11=K4321, the first group will display and
the second group will display will display 1.
7-segment display scan output wiring
COM Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
10
10
10
COM Y14
10
1
2
4
8
10
Y16
1
10
Y17
2
10
COM Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
10
V+
The first group
7-62
10
Y15
10
10
10
1
2
4
8
V+
The second group

The V4.9 and above of ES series provide this command (SEGL).
Footnote
Version 4.9 of ES series only provide a group of 4 digits of 7-segment display and use
8 points to output. SEGL command only can be used once in the program and the
usage range of operand n is 0 to 3.
Scan time must be longer than 10ms while this command is executed. If scan time is
shorter than 10ms, please use fixed scan time function to fix scan time on 10ms.
Please use suitable 7-segment display for the transistor that PLC uses to output.
Settings of n: it is used to set the polarity of transistor output loop. It can be set to
positive polarity or negative polarity. What 7-segment display it connects is a group of
4 digits or two groups of 4 digits.
PLC transistor output is NPN type and it is open collect output. When wiring,
output should connect a step up resistor to VCC (less than 30VDC). Therefore,
when output point Y is On, output will be low potential.
VCC
step up resistor
Y drive
Y
signal output
On
PLC
Output loop of PNP transistor: when inner signal is 1, it will output high potential.
This logic is called positive polarity.
+24V
positive
On
HIGH
Logic 1
Step down
resistor
PLC
7-63

Positive logic (Negative polarity) output of BCD code
BCD value
Y output (BCDcode)
Signal output
b3
b2
b1
b0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Negative logic (Positive polarity) output of BCD code

BCD value
Y output (BCDcode)
Signal output
b3
b2
b1
b0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Display scan (latch) signal

Positive logic (Negative polarity)
output
Output control
Y output (Latch)
signal
1
0
Negative logic (Positive polarity)

output
Output control
Y output (Latch)
signal
0
1
Parameter n settings:
groups number of
7-segment display
A group
Y of BCD code outputs
Display scan latch signal

n
Two groups
: Positive logic (Negative polarity) output

: Negative logic (Positive polarity) output
The combination of output polarity of PLC transistor and input polaity of 7-segment
display can be set by settings of n.
7-64

API
75
Applicable models
Arrow Keyboard Input
ARWS
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
ES

Continuous
ARWS
execution
S
D1
D2
n
32-bit command
Program
Example
: Start device of key input
EH
Flag: None
Refer to each model specification for
usage range.
Output point that designated by this
command should use transistor to
output.
When using this command, please fix
scan time or put this command into time
interrupt subroutine (I6~I8) to
execute.

The usage range of operand n: n=0~3 (Refer to API 74 SEGL
footnote). ARWS command only can be used once in the
program.
In EP series models, operand D2 do not provide index
register E, F to modify and it only can be specified as a
multiple of 10, e.g. Y0, Y10etc.
Command
Explanation
EP
: Display device on 7-segment display
: Scan output start device of 7-segment display
: Polarity setting of output
signal and scan signal

When the command is executed, X20 is defined as the down key, X21 is defined as
the up key, X22 is defined as the right key and X23 is defined as the left key. These
keys are used to edit and display the external setting value. The setting value is stored
in D20 and its setting range is from 0 to 9,999.
When X10=On, 103 is a effective setting digit number. If pressing left key, the effective
setting digit number will be displayed and jump by the direction from 103100101
102103100.
If pressing the right key, the effective setting digit number will be displayed and jump
by the direction from 103102101100103102. Meanwhile, the digit position
LED connected from Y24 to Y27 will also be Onto indicate the effective setting digit
number.
If pressing the up key to increase , the effective number will change from 012
8901. If pressing the down key, the effective number will change from 098
109, meanwhile, the changed value will be displayed on the 7-segment
display.
X10
ARWS
X20
D20
Y20
K0
7-65

Increase digit value
Y24
Digit
position
Y25
Y26
10
Y20
Y21
Y22
Y23
10
10
10
1
2
4
8
76
X23
move
to
the right
decrease digit value

The 4 switches is used to move
digit position to the left or to the
right and increase or decrease
the setting value of the digits
Word devices
S
D
Note: Operand S is 8 alphanumeric character string inputted by
WPLSoft software from PC, or ASC II code inputted by
HPP02.
Command
Explanation
X22
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
ASCII Code Conversion
ASC
Bit devices
X Y M S
move
to
the left
X20
7-step display which displays

setting value (4 digits data)
API
X21
LED
Y27

Continuous
ASC
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1161 8/16 mode exchange
: The alphanumeric character which can be converted to its ASC II code
The destination device for storing ASC II code.

The alphanumeric character can be used to display error message directly if connect
7-segment display when using this command.
Program
Example
When X0=On, A~H is converted to ASCII code and stored in D0~D3.

X0
ASC
ABC D EFGH
D0
b15
42H (B)
D0
b0
41H (A)
D1
44H (D)
43H (C)
D2
46H (F)
45H (E)
D3
48H (H)
47H (G)
high byte
low byte
When M1161=On, the ASCII code converted from every character will occupy lower
8-bit (b7~b0) of one register. The high byte will be invalid and its content is filled as 0.
This also means that one register only can be used to store one character.
7-66

b15
b0
D0
00 H
41H (A)
D1
D2
00 H
00 H
42H (B)
43H (C)
D3
D4
00 H
00 H
44H (D)
D5
D6
D7
00 H
00 H
46H (F)
00 H
48H (H)
45H (E)
47H (G)
high byte
API
77
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Print
PR
Bit devices
X Y M S
low byte
Word devices

Continuous
PR
execution
S
D
Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices.
PR command only can be used twice in the program.
In EP series models, operand D does not provide index
register E, F to modify.
Command
Explanation
32-bit command

M1027
: The device for storing ASCII code
: The external output device which
outputs ASC II code.

This command will output ASCII codes stored in 4 registers from
order of the output devices specified by
Program
Example
1
device in
First, using API 76 ASC command convert A~H to ASCII code and store them in
D0~D3. Then, using this command output them in the order of A~H.
When M1027=Off, X10 turns from Off to On, the command is executed, Y10(low byte)
to Y17(high byte) is specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan
signal and Y21 is specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed.
This mode can execute 8 character string output operation.
If X10 turns from Off to On while the command being executed, the data output will be
interrupt. When X10 is On once more, the data will be sent again.
X10
PR
D0
Y10
7-67

X10 start signal
A B C D
Y10~Y17 data
H
T : scan time (ms)
T T T
Y20 scan singal
Y21 being executed
PR command provide 8 serial string output operation. When M1027=Off, maximum 8
Program
Example
2
character string can be outputted in serial. When M1027=On, 1 to 16 character string

output operation can be executed.
When M1027=On, X10 turns from Off to On, Y10(low byte) to Y17(high byte) is
specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan signal and Y21 is
specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed. This mode can
execute 16 character string output operation.
If the character string 00H (NUL) has been sent, it means the end of the character
string and the operation of PR command wont be continous.
The drive contact X10 is always On but it will automatically stop after one time
operation of data output. However, if X0 is always On, M1029 wont be activated.
M1002
SET
M1027
X10
PR
D0
Y10
X10 start signal

Y10~Y17 data
first character
last character
T : scan time or
interrupt time
Y20 scan singal

Y21 being executed
M1029 execution
is completed
This command should only use transistor output.
Footnote
When using this command, please fix the scan time or execute this command in a time
7-68

API
78 D
FROM
Read Special Module CR Data
Bit devices
Word devices
X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
E F
m1
m2
D
n
: Number for special module

special module that will be read

Continuous
Pulse
FROM
FROMP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DFROM
DFROMP
execution
execution
Flag: When M1083=On, it allows to
insert interrupt during command
FROM/TO. Refer to following
explanation for detail.
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7

The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48
The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2)
For ES series, it doesnt support pulse execution
command (FROMP, DFROMP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
: Number of CR (Control Register) of

: Location to save reading data
: Data
number of reading one time

DVP PLC uses this command to read CR data of special module.
When
indicates bit operand, you can use K1~K4 for 16-bit command and
K5~K8 for 32-bit command.

Please refer to the following footnote to see the detail of the numbering rule of special
module.
To read the content of CR#29 of special module#0 to D0 of PLC and to read the
Program
Example
content of CR#30 of special module#0 to D1 of PLC. It can read 2 data at one time
(n=2).
The command will be executed when X0=ON. The command wont be executed when
X0=OFF and the content of previous reading data wont change.
X0
FROM
K0
K29
D0
K2
API
79 D
TO
Applicable models
EP
EH
Special Module CR Data Write in ES
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
m1
m2
S
n
Note: The usage range of operand m1: m1=0~7
The usage range of operand m2: m2=0~48
The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2)
For ES series, it doesnt support pulse execution command
(TOP, DTOP)

Continuous
Pulse
TO
TOP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DTO
DTOP
execution
execution
Flag:
M1083
FROM/TO
mode
exchange
7-69
Command
Explanation
: Number of special module

module that will be wrote in
: Number of CR (Control Register) of special

: Data to write in CR
: data number to write in
one time.
When
assigns bit operand, K1~K4 can be used for 16-bit command and K1~K8
can be used for 32-bit command.

DVP-series PLC uses this command to write data into CR of special module.
Program
Example
Using 32-bit command DTO, program will write D11 and D10 into CR#13 and CR#12 of
special module#0. It only writes a group of data at one time (n=1)
The command will be executed when X0=ON and it wont be executed when X0=OFF.
The data that wrote in previous wont have any change.
X0
DTO
K0
K12
D10
K1
Footnote
The rule of command operand:

m1: arrangement number of special module. The number of special module that
connects to PLC MPU. The numbering rule of special module from the near to the
distant of MPU is from 0 to 7. The maximum is 8 special modules and wont occupy
I/O point.
m2: the number of CR. Built-in 16-bit of 36 groups memory of special module is
called CR (Control Register). The number of CR uses decimal digits (#0~#35). All
running status and setting values of special module have included.
If using FROM/TO command, the unit of read/write of CR is one number for one time.
If using DFROM/DTO command, the unit of read/write of CR is two numbers in one
time.
Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit
CR #10
CR #9
Specified CR number
The number of transmission groups n. The meaning of n=2 of 16-bit command and
n=1 of 32-bit are the same.
Specified device Specified CR
Specified device Specified CR
D0
CR #5
D0
CR #5
D1
D2
CR #6
CR #7
D1
D2
CR #6
CR #7
D3
D4
CR #8
CR #9
D3
D4
CR #8
CR #9
D5
CR #10
D5
CR #10
16-bit command when n=6
32-bit command when n=3
In ES series models, flag M1083 is not provided. When FROM/TO command is executed,
all interrupts (including external or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All
interrupts will be executed after FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO
command also can be executed in the interrupt subroutine.
7-70

The function of the flag M1083 (FROM/TO mode exchange) provided in EP/EH series
models:
1. When M1083=Off, FROM/TO command is executed, all interrupts (including external
or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All interrupts will be executed after
FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO command also can be
executed in the interrupt subroutine.
2. When M1083=On, if a interrupt occurs while FROM/TO command has been
programmed, FROM/TO command will be interruptted to execute the interrupt.
However, FROM/TO command cannot be executed in the interrupt subroutine
Application program example of FROM/TO command:
Example 1: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting
OFFSET value of CH1 to 0V(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH1 to 2.5V(=K2000LSB).
M1002
TO
K0
K1
H0
K1
TO
K0
K33
H0
K1
TO
K0
K18
K0
K1
TO
K0
K24
K2000
K1
X0
1. Write H0 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH1 to mode 0 (voltage
input : -10V to +10V).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K0LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#18
and K2000LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#24.
Example 2: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400 LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to 18
mA(=K3600LSB).
M1002
TO
K0
K1
H18
K1
TO
K0
K33
H0
K1
TO
K0
K19
K400
K1
TO
K0
K25
K3600
K1
X0
7-71

1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH2 to mode 3 (current
input : -20mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4.
3. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, K400LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in
CR#19 and K3600LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#25.
Example 3: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 0mA(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to
10mA(=K1000LSB).
M1002
TO
K1
K1
H18
K1
TO
K1
K33
H0
K1
TO
K1
K22
K0
K1
TO
K1
K28
K1000
K1
X0
1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 3
(current input : 0mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.
Example 4: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting
OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to
18mA(=K3600LSB).
M1002
TO
K1
K1
H10
K1
TO
K1
K33
H0
K1
TO
K1
K23
K400
K1
TO
K1
K29
K3600
K1
X0
1. Write H10 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 2
(current input : +4mA to +20mA).
2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2.
7-72

Example 5: Program example when DVP-04AD and DVP-02DA module are used
together
M1000
LD=
H88
D0
FROM
K0
K0
D0
K1
TO
K0
K1
H3030
K1
TO
K0
K2
K32
K2
FROM
K0
K6
D20
K4
FROM
K1
K0
D0
K1
CMP
H49
D0
M0
INC
D100
ADD
D101
K5
D101
M1000
M1013
LD=
K4000
D100
RST
D100
LD=
K4000
D101
RST
D101
TO
K1
K1
H10
K1
TO
K1
K10
D100
K2
M1
M1
END
1.
Read the data of model type from expansion module K0 and distinguish if the data is
H88 (DVP-04AD model type).
2.
If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:
(CH1, CH3)= mode 0, (CH2, CH4)= mode 3.
3.
Set the mode of CR#2 and CR#3. The average times of CH1 and CH2 is K32.
4.
Read the input signal average value of CH1~CH4 (4 data) from CR#6~CR#9 and
store them in D20 to D23.
5.
Read the data of model type from expansion module K1 and distinguish if the data is
H49 (DVP-02DA model type).
6.
D100 will increase K1 and D101 will increase K5 every second.
7.
When value of D100 and D101 attain to K4000, they will be reset to 0.
8.
If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1:
CH1 mode to 0, CH2 mode to 2.
9.
Write output setting CR#10 and CR#11 to D100 and D101. Analog output will change
with D100 and D101 value.
7-73

API
80
Serial Data Communication
RS
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Continuous
RS
execution
S
m
D
n
32-bit command
Note: Operand m available range: m=0~256

Operand n available range: n=0~256
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Flag: M1120~M1131,
M1140~M1143, M1161
Please refer to the footnote.
: Start device of transmitting data

: Start device of receiving data
: Transmitting data group number

: receiving data group number
This command is a convenience command for MPU to use RS-485 to connect

communication interface in series. It stores words data in
and sets length
. It also can set to receive data register
If it doesnt need to transmit data,

to receive data,
source data register

and length
can be indicated to K0 and if it doesnt need
can be indicated to K0.
RS command can be used in the program unlimitedly, but you cant execute two or
more RS commands at the same time.
It is invalid to change transmitting data during executing RS command.
Use this RS command to transmit and receive data of PLC and external/peripheral
equipment (AC drive, etc.) when external/peripheral equipment has RS-485 serial
communication and communication format of this equipment is public.
If communication format of external/peripheral equipment corresponds with
communication format of MODBUS, DVP series PLC provides several convenience
communication commands, API 100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR and API 150
MODRW, for user to use. Please refer to individual command explanation for detail.
Please refer to following footnote for more information of special auxiliary relay
M1120~M1161 and special data register D1120~D1131 related to RS-485
communication command.
Program
Example
1
Writing data into the register that starts from D100 and set M1122 (send request flag)
to ON.
If RS command is executed when X10=ON, PLC will in the state of waiting for
transmitting and receiving data. It will start to transmit 10 continuous data that start
from D100. M1122 will be set to OFF at the end of transmitting (Please do not use
program to execute RST M1122). After 1ms, it will start to receive external 10 data and
store them into continuous registers that start from D120.
7-74

When receiving data complete, M1123 will be set to ON. (Program will set M1123 to
OFF when receiving data complete and in the state of waiting for transmitting and
receiving data. Please do use not PLC program to execute RST M1123 continuously.
M1002
MOV
Setting communication
H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
SET M1120 Communication

MOV
transmission
request
protocol latched
K100 D1129 time out 100ms
write transmitting data

in advance
pulse
SET M1122 sending request

X10
RS
receiving
completed
D100
K10
D120
K10
Process of receiving data
M1123
RST M1123
Program
Example
2
receiving completed
and flag reset
8-bit mode (M1161=ON) / 16-bit mode (M1161=OFF) switch:

8-bit mode:
Head code and tail code of PLC transmission data will be set by using M1126 and M1130
according to D1124~D1126. After setting, PLC will send head code and tail code that set
by user automatically when executing RS command.
When M1161=ON, the conversion mode will be 8-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high
byte and low byte. High byte will be ignored and low byte will be received and
transmitted.
M1000
M1161
X0
RS
D100
K4
D120
K7
Transmit data: (PLC external equipment)
STX
Head
code
D100L
D101L
D102L
D103L
EXT1
EXT2
source data register will start from Tail code Tail code
1
2
low byte of D100
length = 4
Receive data: (external equipment PLC)
7-75

D120L
D121L
D122L
D123L
D124L
D125L
D126L
receive data register will start from Tail code Tail code
1
2
low byte of D120
Head
code
length = 7
PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code
.
and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length

16-bit mode:
Head code and tail code of PLC transmitting data is set by using M1126 and M1130 with
D1124~D1126. After complete the setting, PLC will send head code and tail code set by
user automatically when executing RS command.
When M1161=OFF, the conversion mode will be 16-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high
byte and low byte for data transmitting and receiving.
M1001
M1161
X0
RS
D100
K4
D120
K7
Transmit data: (PLC external equipment)
STX
D100L
Head
code
D100L
D101L
D101L
EXT1
source data register will start from Tail code

1
low byte of D100
EXT2
Tail code
2
length = 4
Receive data: (external equipment PLC)
D120L
Head
code
D120H
D121L
D121H
D122L
D122H
receive data register will start from Tail code

1
low byte of D120
D123L
Tail code
2
length = 7
PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code
.
and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length
7-76

When PLC connects to VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=OFF), (16-bit
Program
Example
3
Mode, M1161=OFF), it will transmit data to read 6 continuous data that start from
VFD-B parameter address H2101.
M1002
MOV
H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
SET M1120 Communication
protocol latched
transmission
request
pulse
MOV K100 D1129
time out 100ms

in advance

X10
receiving
completed
RS
D100
K17
D120
K35
M1123
receiving completed
and flag reset
VFD-B, PLC transmitting: : 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF
RST M1123
PLC
VFD-B
PLC, PLC receiving: : 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 3B CR LF
PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages)

Register
DATA
D100 low byte :
3A H
STX
D100 high byte 0
30 H
ADR 1
ADR (1,0) is AC drive address
D101 low byte 1
31 H
ADR 0
D101 high byte 0
30 H
CMD 1
CMD (1,0) is command code
D102 low byte 3
33 H
CMD 0
D102 high byte 2
32 H
D103 low byte 1
31 H
Start data address
D103 high byte 0
30 H
D104 low byte 1
31 H
D104 high byte 0
30 H
D105 low byte 0
30 H
Number of data (count by word)
D105 high byte 0
30 H
D106 low byte 6
36 H
D106 high byte D
44 H
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK (0,1) is error check
code
D107 low byte 4
34 H
LRC CHK 0
D107 high byte CR
AH
END
D108 low byte LF
DH
PLC receiving data register (VFD-B response messages)
Register
DATA
D120 low byte :
3A H
STX
D120 high byte 0
30 H
ADR 1
D121 low byte 1
31 H
ADR 0
D121 high byte 0
30 H
CMD 1
D122 low byte 3
33 H
CMD 0
D122 high byte 0
30 H
Number of data (count by byte)
D123 low byte C
43 H
D123 high byte 0
30 H
Content of address 2101 H
D124 low byte 1
31 H
D124 high byte 0
30 H
7-77
Register
D125 low byte
D125 high byte
D126 low byte
D126 high byte
D127 low byte
D127 high byte
D128 low byte
D128 high byte
D129 low byte
D129 high byte
D130 low byte
D130 high byte
D131 low byte
D131 high byte
D132 low byte
D132 high byte
D133 low byte
D133 high byte
D134 low byte
D134 high byte
D135 low byte
D135 high byte
D136 low byte
D136 high byte
D137 low byte
0
1
7
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
6
0
0
0
0
3
B
CR
LF
DATA
30 H
31 H
37 H
36 H
36 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
33 H
36 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
33 H
42 H
AH
DH

LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0
END
When PLC connects to VFD-B AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,
Program
Example
4
M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-B parameter address
H2000.
M1002
MOV
H86
SET
M1120
MOV
transmission
request
pulse
D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication
protocol latched
K100 D1129
time out 100ms
SET
M1143 RTU Mode
SET
M1161 8 bits Mode

in advance
SET
M1122 sending request
X10
RS
D100
K8
D120
K8
receiving
completed
M1123
7-78
RST M1123 receiving completed

and flag reset

PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
Register
D100 low byte
D101 low byte
D102 low byte
D103 low byte
D104 low byte
D105 low byte
D106 low byte
D107 low byte
DATA
01 H
06 H
20 H
00 H
00 H
12 H
02 H
07 H
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
PLC receiving data register (response messages of VFD-B)

Register
D120 low byte
D121 low byte
D122 low byte
D123 low byte
D124 low byte
D125 low byte
D126 low byte
D127 low byte
DATA
01 H
06 H
20 H
00 H
00 H
12 H
02 H
07 H
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
7-79

RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST /
Footnote
RSTEF / MODRW commands relation flags:

Flag
Action
Communication protocol holding. It is used to hold communication

setting. PLC will reset communication protocol setting according to
special data register D1120 after first program scan. When second
program scan starts and RS command is executed, it will reset
User setting
M1120 communication protocol setting according to special data register
and clear
D1120. If communication protocol is fixed, M1120 can be set to
ON. At this time, communication protocol setting wont be reset as
RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF /
MODRW is executed even if D1120 setting is changed.
M1121
When it is off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication

System acts
information.
Sending request. Users need to set M1122 to ON by pulse

command when using RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV /
User setting
STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command to transmit and
and system
M1122
receive data. If above command starts to execute, PLC will
clears auto
transmit and receive data. M1122 will be reset after above
commands complete transmitting.
Receiving completed. M1123 will be set to ON after RS / MODRD /
System
MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW
auto setting
M1123 commands complete executing. User can process receiving data
and user
when M1123 is set to ON and reset M1123 to OFF when the
clear
process of receiving data is completed.
M1124
Receiving wait. When M1124 is set to ON, it means PLC is waiting

System acts
for receiving data.
Communication reset. When M1125 is set to ON, the

M1125 communication of PLC will be reset. After resetting, M1125 must
be reset to Off.
M1126
STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting

user/system definition and STX/ETX.
M1130
STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting

user/system definition and STX/ETX.
M1127
Communication command finishes transmitting and receiving. RS

command is not included.
Receiving time out. This flag will be activated if D1129 is set and
M1129 the process of receiving data is not completed within the setting
time. After resetting, M1129 should be reset to OFF.
User setting
and clear
System
auto setting
and user
clear
M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication

M1131
M1131=ON during MODRD / RDST / MODRW convert to HEX.

Otherwise M1131 will be OFF.
System acts
M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data received error

M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command error
M1142 VFD-A command data received error
M1143
ASCII / RTU mode selection, ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII

mode. (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW commands)
User setting
and clear
M1161 8/16-bit mode setting. ON is 8-bit mode and OFF is 16-bit mode
7-80

Special register related to RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD /
REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command:
Special register
D1038
For ES/EP models, data response delay time setting when PLC
MPU is slave. Time unit (0.1ms).
D1050~D1055
After executing MODRD/RDST command, PLC will convert ASCII

data of D1070~D1085 to HEX and store hexadecimal data to
D1050~D1055.
D1070~D1085
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command.

Executing this command will receive feedback (return) messages
from receiver. The messages will be stored at D1070~D1085. User
can check return data by viewing the content of the register.
D1089~D1099
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. The

transmitting message will be stored in D1089~D1099 when this
command is executed. Users can check if the command is correct
by the content of the register.
D1120
Please refer to the following table for RS-485 communication

protocol.
D1121
Communication address of PLC MPU when PLC MPU is slave.
D1122
Residual words of transmitting data.
D1123
Residual words of receiving data.
D1124
Start word definition (STX). Please refer to the table above.
D1125
First end word definition (ETX1). Please refer to the table above.
D1126
Second end word definition (ETX2). Please refer to the table above.
D1129
Communication time out is abnormal. Time unit (ms). It is used to

set time of time out. If the value of the time is 0, it means there is no
time out. PLC will set M1129 to be ON if receiving time of the first
word or between any two words is more than setting after executing
RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF /
MODRW commands to enter received mode when the value of the
time is more than 0. User can use M1129 to handle communication
time out but be sure to remember to reset M1129 after handling.
D1130
MODBUS return error code record.
D1256~D1295
PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command

MODRW. The characters transmitted by this command will be
stored in D1256~D1295 when this command is executed. User can
check if the command is correct by the content of the registers.
D1296~D1311
PLC will automatically convert ASCII data in the receiving register

specified by user to HEX, hexadecimal value.
7-81

D1120: RS-485 communication protocol. For the settings, please refer to following
table:
Content
Data length
b0
b1
b2
Parity bits
Stop bits
0001 (H1) :
0010 (H2) :
0011 (H3) :
0100 (H4) :
0101 (H5) :
0110 (H6) :
0111 (H7) :
1000 (H8) :
1001 (H9) :
1010 (HA) :
1011 (HB) :
1100 (HC) :
Start word
selection
First end word
selection
Second end word
selection
No definition
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
b9
b10
b15~b11
0
1
7
8
00 :
None
01 :
Odd
11 :
Even
1 bit
2 bit
110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600 (only in EH/EP series models)
115200 (only in EH/EP series models)
None
D1124
None
D1125
None
D1126
Start word and end word of control characters will be defined in the communication
format of peripheral equipment when using RS command. Start word and end word
can be set in D1124~D1125 by user or defined by machine/equipment. When using
M1126, M1130, D1124~D1125 to set start and end word, b8~b9 of D1120 of RS485
communication protocol should be set to 1. For the settings, please refer to the
following table:
M1130
0
D1124: user define

D1125: user define
D1126: user define
D1124: H 0002
D1125: H 0003
D1126: H 0000no setting
D1124: user define

D1125: user define
D1126: user define
D1124: H 003A:
D1125: H 000DCR
D1126: H 000ALF
M1126
Example for communication format setting:

Communication format: Baud rate
9600 7, N, 2
STX : :
ETX1 : CR
EXT2 : LF
You can get the communication format H788 via check with table and write into D1120.
7-82
b15
b0
D1120 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0
Don t care
M1002
MOV
H788 D1120
When using STX, EXT1 and EXT2 should pay attention to the On/Off relationship
between special auxiliary relay M1126 and M1130.
M1143: ASCII / RTU mode selection. ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode.
Take standard MODBUS format to explanation:
ASCII mode (M1143=Off):
STX
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
DATA (n-1)
.
Start word = : (3AH)

Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function code:
8-bit function code consists of 2 ASCII codes
Data content:
n 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
LRC check sum:

8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll code
End word:
END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
END Lo
Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters. For example: a
1-byte data 64 Hex shown as 64 in ASCII, consists of 6 (36Hex) and 4 (34Hex). The
table below identifies the usable hexadecimal characters and their associated ASCII
codes.
Character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Character
ASCII code
8
38H
9
39H
A
41H
B
42H
C
43H
D
44H
E
45H
F
46H
Start word (STX): : (3AH)

Communication address (Address):
0 0: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast)
0 1: toward the drive at the 01 address
0 F: toward the drive at the 15 address
1 0: toward the drive at the 16 addressand consequently, the Max. address
can be reached is 255 (F F).
Function code (Function):
0 3: read contents of many registers
0 6: write one WORD into the register
1 0: write contents of many registers
7-83

Data content:
The content of transmitting data send by user
LRC check:
LRC check is the added sum from Address to Data contents. For example, the 01H +
03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H.
End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 data contents that exist
successively within the register, as shown follows: the address of the start register is
2102H.
Inquiry message:
STX
:
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
2
0
0
0
2
D
7
CR
LF
Address
Function
Start address
Number of data
(count by word)
LRC Check
END
Response message:
STX
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of start address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
LRC Check
END
:
0
1
0
3
0
4
1
7
7
0
0
0
0
0
7
1
CR
LF
RTU mode (M1143=On):

START
Please refer to following explanation
Address
Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function
DATA (n-1)
.
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
Function code: 8-bit binary

Data content:
n 8-bit data
CRC check:
16-bit CRC consists of 2 8-bit binary
Please refer to following explanation
START:
ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms
EH series:
Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)
300
40
9600
2
7-84
600
21
19200
1200
10
38400
2400
57600
4800
115200

Communication Address (Address):
00 H: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast)
01 H: toward the drive at the 01 address
0F H: toward the drive at the 15 address
10 H: toward the drive at the 16 addressand consequently, the Max. address
can be reached is 255 (F F)
Function code (Function):
03 H: read contents of many registers
06 H: write one WORD into the register
01 H: write contents of many registers
Data content:
The content of transmitting data send by user
CRC check:
CRC check starts from Address and ends in Data content. Its calculation is as
follows:
Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC
register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from
step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC
register, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message
commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is
the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must
be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.
END:
ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms
EH series:
Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms)
300
40
9600
2
600
21
19200
1
1200
10
38400
1
2400
5
57600
1
4800
3
115200
1
7-85

For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 continuous data of the
register shown follows: the address of the start register is 2102H
Inquiry message:
Response message:
Address
01 H
Address
01 H
Function
03 H
Function
03 H
21 H
02 H
00 H
02 H
6F H
F7 H
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of data address
8102H
Content of data address
8103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
04 H
Start data address

Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
17 H
70 H
00 H
00 H
FE H
5C H
Timing chart of RS-485 communication program flag:
M1002
MOV
SET
transmission
request
pulse
MOV
H86
D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
Communication
M1120 protocol latched
K100 D1129
time out 100ms

in advance
SET
X10
RS
D100
K2
D120
K8
receiving
completed
M1123
7-86
RST M1123
receiving completed
and flag reset

Timing chart:
SET M1122 X0
RS command executes X10
Transmission ready M1121
Auto reset after transmitting data completed
Sending request M1122
User must reset in program
Receiving completed M1123

Receiving wait M1124
User will reset to the transmit

standby status in program
Communication reset M1125

MODRD/RDST/MODRW data
receiving and conversion M1127
completed
Transmitting and receiving M1128
It will be activated when receiving time out message
Receiving time out M1129

Receive time out
timer set by D1129
Stop to count time after

receiving data completed
Conversion data
Covert MODRD/RDST M1131

/MODRW to hexadecimal
Residual words of
transmitting data D1122
2
1
0
8
7
6
Residual words of
receiving data D1123
API
81 D
PRUN
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Octal Number System

Transmission
ASCII data converted to hexadecimal,

less than a scan period
Change
direction
immediately
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
Continuous
Pulse
PRUN
PRUNP
execution
execution
Note: X, Y, M of word device KnX, KnY, KnM should be a multiple

of 10, e.g. X10, M10, Y10.
Continuous
Pulse
When operand S is specified as KnX, operand D should be DPRUN execution DPRUNP execution
specified as KnM.
Flag: None
When operand S is specified as KnM, operand D should be
specified as KnY.
Command
Explanation
: Transmission source device

Transmit the the content of
to
: Transmission destination device

in octal number system format.
7-87

When X3=On, transmit the content of K4X10 to K4M10 in octal number system
Program
Example
1
format.
X3
PRUN
K4X10
K4M10
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
NO CHANGE
When X2=On, transmit the content of K4M10 to K4Y10 in octal number system format.
X2
PRUN K4M10 K4Y10
Program
Example
2
These two devices wonbe transmitted

M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
API
82
ASCI
Convert HEX into ASCII
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
n
Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256
(ASCIP)
Command
Explanation
: Start device of source data

Continuous
Pulse
ASCI
ASCIP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting
: Start device for storing converted result
: Converted digits
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, read
from the source devcie
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, read

from the source devcie
hexadecimal data characters
and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store
the result into high and low byte of device
hexadecimal data characters
and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store
the result into low byte of device
7-88
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
(high byte of device
are all set to 0).

Program
Example
1
When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode.

When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into
ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.
M1001
M1161
X0
ASCI
D10
D20
K4
Supposed condition:
(D10)
= 0123 H
0 = 30H
4 = 34H
8 = 38H
(D11)
= 4567 H
1 = 31H
5 = 35H
9 = 39H
(D12)
= 89AB H
2 = 32H
6 = 36H
A = 41H
(D13)
= CDEFH
3 = 33H
7 = 37H
B = 42H
When n is 4, the bit structure is:
D10=0123 H
0
30H
low byte
33H
high byte
0
low byte
31H
D21
high byte
1
D20
0
32H
D10 = H 0123
0 0 0 0 0 1
b15
0 0
0
b0
1
b0
1
b0
0
b0
0
D11 = H 4567
b15
0 1
1 0
1 0
Convert to
b15
0 0
D20
1 0 1
7
b15
0 0
D21
1 0 0
6
0 1
H 31
H 36
1
H 30
D22
1
3
H 37
1
b15
0 0
H 33
1 0
1 1
2
b0
1 0
H 32
7-89

When n = 1 to 16:
n
D
D20 low byte
D20 high byte
D21 low byte
D21 high byte
D22 low byte
D22 high byte
D23 low byte
D23 high byte
D24 low byte
D24 high byte
D25 low byte
D25 high byte
D26 low byte
D26 high byte
D27 low byte
D27 high byte
n
D
D20 low byte
D20 high byte
D21 low byte
D21 high byte
D22 low byte
D22 high byte
D23 low byte
D23 high byte
D24 low byte
D24 high byte
D25 low byte
D25 high byte
D26 low byte
D26 high byte
D27 low byte
D27 high byte
Program
Example
2
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
2
3
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
7
0
1
2
3
6
7
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
no
change
K9
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
E
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
C
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
no
change
When M 1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode.

When X0=On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into
ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20.
M1000
M1161
X0
ASCI
7-90
D10
D20
K4

Supposed condition:
(D10)
= 0123 H
0 = 30H
4 = 34H
8 = 38H
(D11)
= 4567 H
1 = 31H
5 = 35H
9 = 39H
(D12)
= 89AB H
2 = 32H
6 = 36H
A = 41H
(D13)
= CDEFH
3 = 33H
7 = 37H
B = 42H

D10=0123 H
0
ASCII code of D20=2 is 32H

0
ASCII code of D21=3 is 33H

0
D10 = H 0123
0 0 0 0 0 1
b15
0 0
0
b0
1
Convert to
b15
0 0
b15
0 0
D20
0 0
0 0
1 1 0 0
0
H 30
b0
0
D21
0 0
0 0
1 1
b0
1
b0
0
1
b15
0 0
b15
0 0
D22
0 0
0 0
H 31
1 1
H 32
D23
0
0 0
1 1
3
b0
1 1
H 33
7-91

When n = 1 to 16:
n
D
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
n
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
83
HEX
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
2
3
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
7
0
1
2
3
6
7
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
K9
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
E
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
C
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
no
change
Word devices
S
D
n
(HEXP).
Command
Explanation
7-92
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
K2
no
change
API
K1

Continuous
Pulse
HEX
HEXP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode

exchange
: Start device for storing converted result
: number of converted ASCII codes.

16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Convert
16-bit ASCII code of
(high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and
then transmit to
by
per 4-bit for one time. Number of converted ASCII codes is set
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode Convert 16-bit
ASCII code of
(high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and then
transmit to low byte of

byte of
Program
Example
1
. Number of converted ASCII codes is set by
. (high
are all 0)

When X0=On, read ASCII bytes of the register started from D20 and convert them to
hexadecimal characters. Then, store the converted data to four registers started from
D10. (The converted data is four characters converted as one segment of data)
M1001
M1161
X0
HEX
D20
D10
K4
Supposed condition:
ASCII code
D20 low byte

D20 high byte
D21 low byte
D21 high byte
D22 low byte
D22 high byte
D23 low byte
D23 high byte
H 43
H 44
H 45
H 46
H 38
H 39
H 41
H 42
HEX
conversion
C
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
ASCII code
D24 low byte

D24 high byte
D25 low byte
D25 high byte
D26 low byte
D26 high byte
D27 low byte
D27 high byte
H 34
H 35
H 36
H 37
H 30
H 31
H 32
H 33
HEX
conversion
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
D20
41H
D21
43H
D10
30H
C
1
42H
0
B
1
7-93

When n = 1 to 16:
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D13
D11
D10
***C H
***C H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
DEF8 H
***C H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
DEF8 H
EF89 H
F89A H
89AB H
9AB4 H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
DEF8 H
EF89 H
F89A H
89AB H
EF89 H
F89A H
89AB H
9AB4 H
AB45 H
B456 H
4567 H
AB45 H
B456 H
4567 H
5670 H
6701 H
7012 H
0123 H
The used
registers which
are not
specified are all
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Program
Example
2
D12
***C H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode.

M1000
M1161
X0
HEX
D20
D10
K4
Supposed condition:
ASCII code
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
H 43
H 44
H 45
H 46
H 38
H 39
H 41
H 42
HEX
conversion
C
D
E
F
8
9
A
B
ASCII code
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
H 34
H 35
H 36
H 37
H 30
H 31
H 32
H 33
HEX
conversion
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
When n is 2, the bit structure is
D20
3
D21
7-94
1
0
4
D10

When n = 1 to 16:
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
84
CCD
***C H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
D11
D10
***C H
***C H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
DEF8 H
***C H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
DEF8 H
EF89 H
F89A H
89AB H
9AB4 H
**CD H
*CDE H
CDEF H
DEF8 H
EF89 H
F89A H
89AB H
EF89 H
F89A H
89AB H
9AB4 H
AB45 H
B456 H
4567 H
AB45 H
B456 H
4567 H
5670 H
6701 H
7012 H
0123 H
Word devices
S
D
n
ES series models do not support this command (CCD,
CCDP)
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Check Code
Bit devices
X Y M S
D12
The used
registers which
are not
specified are all
0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
API
D13

Continuous
Pulse
CCD
CCDP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode

exchange
: Result device for storing check sum
: Number of data
This command is used to check sum of words to ensure the truth of transmission data
during communication.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Check the
sum of
words (8-bit in one byte) from the register specified by source devcie
and store the sum to the register specified by device

are stored in
while the parity bits
+1.
8-bit conversion mode : When M1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode. Check the sum
of
words (8-bit in one byte, only low byte are available) from the register
specified by source devcie
and store the sum to the register specified by device
while the parity bits are stored in
+1.
7-95

Program
Example
1

When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one
byte, n=6 means to specify D0~D2) and store the sum in the register specified by
D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.
M1000
M1161
X0
CCD
(S)
D0 low byte
D0 high byte
D1 low byte
D1 high byte
D2 low byte
D2 high byte
D100
D101
D0
D100
K6
Content of data(words)
K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
K867
0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0
1
0
0
1
1
Total
1
An even result is indicated

by the use of 0(zero)
An odd result is indicated
by the use of 1(one)
Program
Example
2
D100 0
D101 0
Parity

When X0=On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one
byte, n=10 means to specify D0~D4) and store the sum in the register specified by
D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101.
M1000
M1161
X0
CCD
(S)
D0 low byte
D1 low byte
D2 low byte
D3 low byte
D4 low byte
D5 low byte
D100
D101
D0
D100
Content of data(words)
K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
K867
0 0 0 1 0 0 0
K6
0
1
0
0
1
1
Total
1
An even result is indicated

by the use of 0(zero)
An odd result is indicated
by the use of 1(one)
7-96
D100 0
D101 0
Parity

API
85
VRRD
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
VRRD
VRRDP
execution
execution
S
D
Note: Operand S available range: n=0~7
ES series models do not support this command (VRRD,
VRRDP)
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Potentiometer Read
: Potentiometer number
32-bit command
Flag: M1178 and M1179.

Please refer to following footnote.
: Destination device for storing read
potentiometer
VRRD command is used to read the two potentiometers of PLC main processing unit
and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the six potentiometers of
function card and the number is No.2 to No.7. The read data will be converted as value
from 0 to 255 and stored in destination device
If regarding the potentiometer as the setting value of timer, the setting time of timer
can be changed by truning VR. If desiring to get the value more than 255, please
multiply
Program
Example
1
by some constant.
When X0=On, the potentiometer of No.0 of VR specified by VRRD command will be

converted to BIN value (0~255) in an 8-bit format and stored in D0 temporarily.
When X1=On, timer T0 regards the content of D0 as the setting value of timer and
starts to count time.
X0
VRRD
K0
D0
T0
D0
X1
TMR
Program
Example
2
Potentiometer read in order: S=K0 to K7 corresponding to the 8 potentiometers, No.0

to No.7. The following program example use E (E=0~7) to modify, K0E=K0 to K7.
The loop of timer convert the potentiometer scale 0~10 to 0~255. The time unit of T0
to T7 is 0.1 second, therefore, the setting value is 0 to 25.5 seconds.
7-97

M1000
RST
FOR
K8
VRRD
K 0E
INC
M1000
D100E
NEXT
X10
TMR
T0
D100
T1
D101
T0
Y000
X11
TMR
T7
Y007
END
Operation of FOR~NEXT command:
1. In FOR~NEXT command area, FOR command specify K8 indicates the loop
between FOR~NEXT command is executed 8 times repeatly. After 8 times of
execution, it will continue to execute.
2. Between FOR~NEXT command (INC E), the content of E will be 0, 1, 27 and
increased by 1(one). Therefore, 8 potentiometer scales will also show as VR0
D100, VR1D101, VR2D102VR7D107 in order and be read into the
specified register.
VR means VARIABLE RESISTOR SCALE.
Footnote
For EP/EH models, built-in 2 points VR potentiometer can be used with special D and
special M.
Device
M1178
M1179
D1178
D1179
7-98
Function
VR0 value
VR1value

API
86
VRSC
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S
D
Note: S operand available range: n=0~7
ES series models do not support this command (VRSC, VRSCP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Potentiometer Scale
: Potentiometer number

Continuous
Pulse
VRSC
VRSCP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Destination device for storing potentiometer
scale
VRRD command is used to read the potentiometer scale value of two potentiometers
on PLC main processing unit and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read
the potentiometer scale value of six potentiometers on function card and the number is
No.2 to No.7 (potentiometer scale value is from 0 to 10). The read data will be stored
in destination device
Program
Example
1
Program
Example
2
as an integer from the range 0 to 10.
When X0=On, the potentiometer scale value (0 to10) of No. 0 specified by VRSC
command is stored in device D10.
X0
VRSC
K0
D10
Regrad as digital switch: Correspond potentiometer scale 0 to 10. Only one contact is
On between M10 to M20. Using DECO command (API 41) can decode the
potentiometer scale into M0~M15.
When X0=On, store the potentiometer scale value (0 to 10) of specified No. 1
potentiometer to D1.
When X1=On, use DECO command (API 41) to decode the potentiometer scale into
M10~M25.
X0
VRSC
K1
D1
DECO
D1
M10
X1
K4
M10
On when volume scale is 0
M11
M20
7-99
API
87
ABS
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Absolute Value
Word devices
D
ES series models do not support this command (ABSP, DABSP).

Continuous
Pulse
ABS
ABSP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DABS
DABSP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Specified device for taking absolute value
Command
Explanation
When the command is executed, take the absolute value of the specified device,
.
This command is usually pulse execution (ABSP).
When X0 goes from OFFON, take the absolute value of the D0 contents.
X0
ABS
D0
Program
Example
API
88
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
S3
D
Note: Operand S3 uses 14 continuous devices
For the information of the PID usage times during the
program, please refer to the footnote.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
PID Calculation
PID
: Target value (SV)

Continuous
PID
execution
32-bit command
Continuous
DPID
execution
Flag: None
: Present measured value (PV)
: Parameter
: Output value (MV)

Specific command for PID calculation control. This scan will execute PID operation
when sampling time reaches. PID means Proportion, Integration and Differential. PID
control is widely applied on many applications of machine equipments, pneumatic
equipments and electric equipments.
7-100

: Target value (SV),
~
: Present measured value (PV), for 16-bit command:
+14, for 32-bit command:
+20: PID command will start to
execute after completing all parameters setting and the result will be stored in
Please give no latch register area for
content. (if you want to give
content a latch register, please reset latch to 0 when program runs.)
Program
Example
Please complete the parameter settings before executing PID command.

This command will be executed when X0=ON and the result will be stored in D150.
The command will not be executed when X0=OFF and the previous data wont have
any change.
X0
PID
Footnote
D0
D1
D100
D150
PID command is only available in V5.7 and above of ES series models and it is not
available for other version.
There is no time limit for using PID command but the register number specified by
cannot be repeated.
For 16-bit commands,
uses 15 registers. In above program, the parameter
setting area of PID command that
indicates are D100~D114. You should use
MOV command to transmit settings to the indication register to set before PID
command executes. If the registers that parameters indicate are latch area, please
use MOVP to execute transmitting.
Parameter table of 16-bit
Device No.
Function
Sampling time (TS)
(unit: 10ms)
:
Setting range
1~2,000
(unit: 10ms)
+1:
Propotional gain (KP)
0~30,000(%)
+2:
Integral gain (KI)
0~30,000(%)
+3:
+4:
Differential gain (KD)

Control method (Dir)
+5:
+6:
+7:
Explanation
If TS is less than one program scan
time, PID command will execute one
program scan time. If TS=0, PID
command wont be activated.
When setting exceeds 30,000,
setting will be regarded as 30,000.
0~30,000(%)
0: normal control
1: Forward control (E=SV-PV)
2: Inverse control (E=PV-SV)
The range that Error
For example: if the range of error
0~32,767
value (E) doesnt
value (E) is 5, output value MV of E
work
between 5~5 is 0.
For example: if upper bound is set
to 1000 and once output (MV) is
Upper bound of
-32,768~32,767 larger than 1000, it will output 1000.
saturated output (MV)
(upper bound should larger than
lower bound, i.e. S3+6 > S3+7.)
For example: if lower bound is set
Lower bound of
-32,768~32,767 to 1000, once output (MV) is less
saturated output (MV)
than 1000, it will output 1000.
7-101
Device No.
Function
Setting range
Explanation
For example: if upper bound is

set to 1000 and once output is
Upper bound of
larger than 1000, it will output
-32,768~32,767
saturated integration
1000 and doesnt integrate.
lower bound, i.e. S3+8 > S3+9.)
For example: if lower bound is set
+9:
to 1000, once output is less
Lower bound of
-32,768~32,767
saturated integration
than 1000, it will output 1000
and doesnt integrate.
For example: It is accumulated
+10, 11:
integration. It is usually for
Save accumulation
32-bit floating
reference but user can clear or
integral value
point range
modify by requirement. (needs to
temporality
modify by 32-bit floating point)
For example: It is present
+12:
Save previous PV
measured value and usually for
reference. But user can modify by

value temporality
requirement.
+13:
For system use, please dont use it.
+8:
+14:
When parameter setting is out of setting range, it will be set to upper bound or lower
bound. But if operation method is out of range, it will be set to 0.
PID commands can be used in interrupt subroutine, step point and CJ command.
Max. range of sampling error time TS is
- a scan time+1ms~+a scan time. If error
value has influence on output, please keep the scan time fixable or execute PID
command in interrupt subroutine of timer.
If the settings of sampling time TS a scan time, CPU will have error code K6740
(PID operation error). At this time, CPU will reset TS = a scan time to execute PID
operand. In this situation, please execute PID command in time interrupt subroutine
(I6~I8).
The present measured value (PV) must be a stable value before the execution of PID
command. If using input value of DVP-04AD / DVP-04XA / DVP-04PT / DVP-04TC
these modules to perform the PID calculation, please pay attention to the A/D
conversion time of the above-mentioned modules.
32-bit command
occupies 21 registers. If parameter setting area of PID
command that designated by
is D100~D120, it needs to use MOV command to
send setting to designated registers before executing PID command.
7-102

Parameter table of 32-bit
Device No.
Function
Setting range
Explanation
Sampling time (TS)

(unit: 10ms)
1~2,000
(unit: 10ms)
+1:
Propotion gain (KP)
0~30,000(%)
+2:
Integration gain (KI)
0~30,000(%)
+3:
+4:
Differential gain (KD) 0~30,000(%)

Control method (Dir) 0: normal control
1: Forward control (SVPV)
2: Inverse control (PVSV)
The range that
For example: if the range of
32-bit Error value (E) 0~2,147,483,647 error value (E) is 5, output value
doesnt work
MV of E between 5~5 is 0.
set to 1000 and once output
Upper bound of
-2,147,483,648~ (MV) is larger than 1000, it will
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647
output 1000. (upper bound
output (MV)
should larger than lower bound,
i.e. S3+7, 8 > S3+9, 10.)
For example: if lower bound is
Lower bound of
-2,147,483,648~ set to 1000, once output (MV)
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647
is less than 1000, it will
output (MV)
output 1000.
set to 1000 and once output is
Upper bound of
larger than 1000, it will output
-2,147,483,648~
1000 and doesnt integrate.
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647
integrator
lower bound, i.e. S3+11, 12 >
S3+13, 14.)
For example: if lower bound is
Lower bound of
-2,147,483,648~ set to 1000, once output is less
32-bit saturated
2,147,483,647
than 1000, it will output 1000
integrator
and doesnt integrate.
For example: It is accumulated
integration. It is usually for
32-bit temporary
32-bit floating
reference but user can clear or
accumulation integral
point range
modify by requirement. (needs
value
to modify by 32-bit floating
point)
For example: It is previous test
32-bit save previous
value and usually for reference.
PV temporality
But user can modify by
requirement.
+5, 6:
+7, 8:
+9, 10:
+11, 12:
+13, 14:
+15, 16:
+17, 18:
If TS is less than one program

scan time, PID command will
execute one program scan time.
If TS=0, PID command wont be
activated.
When setting exceeds 30,000,
setting will be regarded as
30,000.
+19:
For system uses, please dont use it.
+20:
Explanation of 32-bit
that capacity of
and 16-bit
+5 ~
are almost the same. The different is
+20.
7-103

This command executes PID calculation according to speed and differential type of
PID
Equations
measured value.
PID operation has three control methods: normal, forward and inverse controls. The
control method is set by
operation is set by
+4. Besides, the settings that have relation to PID

~
+5.
PID equations:
1
MV = K P * E (t ) + K I * E (t ) + K D * PV (t )S
S
Control Method
Forward control, normal
control
Inverse control
PID Equations
E (t ) = SV PV
E (t ) = PV SV
Besides, PV (t )S means the differential value of PV (t ) and

integral value of E (t ) .
E (t )
1
S
means the
You can know that this command is different from general PID command from above
equation. The difference is the change on differential usage. To avoid transient
differential value is too large when executing general PID command at the first time, this
command willl lower output (MV) value once the change of present measured value (PV)
is too large by monitoring differential value of present measured value (PV).
Symbols explanation:
MV
KP
Output value
Porprotional gain
E (t )
PV
: Present measured value
SV
: Target value
KD
: Differential gain
E (t ) = PV SV
PV (t )S
: Differential value of
KI
: Integral gain
E (t )
7-104
Error value. Forward control
1
S
: Integral value of
E (t ) = SV PV , Inverse control
PV (t )
E (t )

Control diagram:
In dotted-line is PID command

1/S
+
KI
+
KP
G(s)
KD
S
Note and suggestion:

1. When adjusting three major parameters, KP, KI and KD, please adjust KP first (set
by experience) and set 0 to KI and KD. When adjusting to control, adjust KI (order
from small to big) and KD (order from small to big). Refer to example 4 for adjusting.
If KP=100, it means 100%. When KP is less than 100%, error value will attenuate
and when KP is more than 100%, error value will amplify.
2. This command should be controlled with many parameters. Please follow setting
rule to avoid error occurs.
Example 1: block diagram for using PID command to control position (control method
S3+4 should be set to 0)
Position command
(SV)
PID
MV
Plant
Encoder
PV
Example 2: block diagram for using PID command to control speed (control method
S3+4 should be set to 0)
7-105

S+MV
speed command
(S)
AC drive
Accel/Decel
output (MV)
Accel/Decel
command (SV)
speed
detection
equipment (P)
actual accel/decel
speed (PV=S-P)
PID
Example 3: block diagram for using PID command to control temperature (action
direction S3+4 should be set to 1)
temperature
command (SV)
add temperature
(MV)
heater
equipment
PID
temperature
detection
actual temperature(PV) equipment
Example 4: suggested steps of PID adjustment
Consider that transfer function of plant G (s ) =
b
(most general AC drive model is this
s+a
function) in control system, command value SV is 1 and sampling time Ts is 10ms.

Suggested steps are in the following:
Step1: set KI and KD to 0 first, then set KP to 5, 10, 20 and 40 in order and record (SV)
and (PV) state. The result will be shown as following figure.
1.5
K P =40
SV=1
K P =20
K P =10
KP =5
0.5
7-106
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
Time (sec)

Step 2: In above figure, we will choose the situation when KP is 10. The reason is in the
following:
When KP is 40, response has overshoot situation. So we wont use it.
When KP is 20, PV response is close to SV and wont have overshoot but transient MV
will be great due to start-up too fast. We also wont use it.
When KP is 10, PV response is close to SV and is smooth. So we consider to use it.
When KP is 5, the response is too slow. So we wont use it.
Example 3: When deciding to use the curve KP=10, arrange KI in order from small to big
(such as 1, 2, 4, 8) and not to large than KP. Then arrange KD in order from small to big
(such as 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2) and not to exceed 10% KP. Finally, you can get
following PV and SV relation figure.
1.5
PV=SV
1
0.5
KP =10,KI =8,KD =0.2
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
Time (sec)
Note: This example is only for reference. Therefore, user should adjust suitable control
parameters by himself according to real control system.
Application 1: using PID command in pressure control system. (use block diagram of
Applications
example 1)
Control destination: make control system reach pressure target value.
Control characteristics: this system should reach to control destination step by step,
therefore, it may cause system out of control or overload if reaching control destination
too fast.
Recommend solve method:
Method 1: reach by using long sampling time.
Method 2: reach by using delay command and its control block diagram is shown in the
following.
7-107

0
0rpm
511
3000
rpm
pressure
command SV
delay
D1
pressure
command
value (D0)
A
wave
PV
command
value
command
value
280
280
250
200
150
100
50
t
A wave
0V
255 5V
speed
convert
to
voltage D1116
voltage
convert
D1110
to
command
value
B
wave
MV
convert
to
speed
MV
D5
PID
AC
Drive
pressure
meter
0V
511
10V
D2 is command interval value

D3 is command interval time
user can adjust by require
t
B wave
Program application of command delay is in the following:
M1002
MOV
K10
D3
TMR
T0
D3
RST
T0
M0
T0
>
D0 D1
MOV
K50
D2
<
D0 D1
MOV
K-50
D2
D0 D1
MOV
K0
D2
ADD
D2
D1
D1
CMP
D2
K0
M10
M10
<
D1 D0
MOV
D0
D1
>
D1 D0
MOV
D0
D1
PID
D1
D1116
M12
M0
7-108
D10
D5

Application 2: speed control and pressure control system is controlled separately. (use
block diagram of example 2)
Control destination: Adding pressure control system (PID command) after using open
loop to control speed for a period time to reach pressure control.
Control characteristics: This architecture should use open loop to reach speed control
and then reach control target by close loop pressure control due to there is no relation
between speed and pressure of these two systems. Besides, you can add command
delay function of application 1 to avoid control command of pressure control system
changes too fast. Control block diagram is shown in the following.
0
M3
M2=ON
D40
Speed
command
+
D30
D31
0rpm
3000rpm
D0
pressure
command
255
D32
+
speed
convert D1116 AC
to
drive
voltage
MV
convert to
accel/decel
M0=ON
D5 MV
SV
delay
PV
D1
PID
function
(optional)
D1110 pressure
meter
M1=ON
Partial program application is in the following:
7-109

M1002
MOV
K1000
D40
MOV
D0
D1
MOV
K0
D5
MOV
D40
D30
ADD
D30
D31
M0
M1
M3
M2
>
D32 K3000
MOV
K3000
D32
<
D32
MOV
K0
D32
DIV
D32
K11
MOV
K255
D32
MOV
D32
D1116
PID
D1
D1110
>
D32
K0
K255
D32
D32
M1
7-110
D10
D5

API
100
MODBUS Data Read
MODRD
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2

n
Note: Operand S1 available range: K0~K255
Operand n available range: K1nK6
Command
Explanation
: Communication address.
D E F
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
MODRD
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS
command
: Address for reading data
: Read data
length.
MODRD is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode
communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except
VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODRD command can be
used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to the
Delta VFD series manual for more details.
is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be
informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141 turn
to be ON.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1085.
After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback
(return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.
If using ASCII mode, PLC will convert the data to value and store them in D1050 to
D1055 because the feedback (return) data are all ASCII characters. D1050 to D1055 will
be invalid if using RTU mode.
After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment
again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be
clear.
Program
Example
1
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off)
M1002
MOV
H87
D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication
protocol latched
MOV K100 D1129 time out 100ms
Setting communication command:
device address 01
K1
H2101 K6
MODRD
data address H2101
data length 6 words
SET M1120
X0
X1
SET M1122 Setting transmission flag
M1127
receiving
completed
PLC will convert the receiving data stored

Process of receiving data in D1070~D1085 from ASCII character to
value and store the value in D1050~D1055.
RST
M1127 receiving completed and flag reset
8-1

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2101 0006 D4
VFD-S PLC , PLC receiving: 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B
PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages)
Register
D1089 low
D1089 high
D1090 low
D1090 high
D1091 low
D1091 high
D1092 low
D1092 high
D1093 low
D1093 high
D1094 low
D1094 high
D1095 low
D1095 high
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
6
D
4
DATA
30 H
31 H
30 H
33 H
32 H
31 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
36 H
44 H
34 H
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
ADR (1,0) is AC drive

address
CMD (1,0) is command
code
Starting data address

LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0
LRC CHK (0,1) is error

check code
PLC receiving data register (response messages)

Register
D1070 low
D1070 high
D1071 low
D1071 high
D1072 low
D1072 high
D1073 low
D1073 high
D1074 low
D1074 high
D1075 low
D1075 high
D1076 low
D1076 high
D1077 low
D1077 high
D1078 low
D1078 high
D1079 low
D1079 high
D1080 low
D1080 high
D1081 low
D1081 high
D1082 low
D1082 high
D1083 low
D1083 high
D1084 low
D1084 high
D1085 low
D1085 high
8-2
0
1
0
3
0
C
0
1
0
0
1
7
6
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
6
0
0
0
0
3
B
DATA
30 H
31 H
30 H
33 H
30 H
43 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
36 H
36 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
33 H
36 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
33 H
42 H
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
PLC automatically convert
ASCII codes to value and
Content of
address 2101 H store the converted value in
D1050 = 0100 H
Content of
D1051 = 1766 H
Content of
D1052 = 0000 H
Content of
D1053 = 0000 H
Content of
D1054 = 0136 H
Content of
D1055 = 0000 H
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0

Program
Example
2
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)
M1002
MOV
H83
D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
M1120 Communication
protocol latched
SET
SET M1143
X0
MODRD
X1
Setting as RTU mode

device address 01
K1
H2102 K2
data address H2102
data length 2 words
M1127
receiving
completed
PLC
Process of receiving data The receiving data in HEX value

format is stored in D1070~D1085.
RST
M1127
receiving completed
and flag reset
VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2102 0002 6F F7
VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 03 04 1700 0000 FE 5C

Register
D1089 low
D1090 low
D1091 low
D1092 low
D1093 low
D1094 low
D1095 low
D1096 low
DATA
01 H
03 H
21 H
02 H
00 H
02 H
6F H
F7 H
Address
Function
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High

Register
D1070 low
D1071 low
D1072 low
D1073 low
D1074 low
D1075 low
D1076 low
D1077 low
D1078 low
Program
Example
3
DATA
01 H
03 H
04 H
17 H
70 H
00 H
00 H
FE H
5C H
Address
Function
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When

communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending
address.
When X0=On, read data from address H2100 of device 01 (VFD-S) and save in
D1070~D1085 with ASCII format. PLC will auto convert its content to numeral to save in
D1050~D1055.
8-3

Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request
from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140
and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from
M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.
M1002
D1120
MOV
H87
SET
M1120
MOV
K100
D1129
MODRW
K1
H2100
SET
M1122
Setting communication protocol

to 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication protocol latched
X0
X0
time-out to 100ms
device address 01,
K6
data address H2101
data length 6 words
Setting transmission request
M1129
Communication time-out Retry
M1140
data receive error Retry
M1141
M1127
sending address error Retry

receiving completed
handle received data
RST
M1127
RST
M1129
The receiving data in ASCII

format stored in D1070-D1085.
PLC will convert to numeral
and save into D1050-D1055
automatically.
receiving completed and

flag reset
communication time-out and flag reset
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)
Footnote
cant be used before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION
CODE H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will
be incorrect.
8-4

API
101
MODBUS Data Write In
MODWR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2

n
Command
Explanation
D E F
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
MODWR
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

command
: Communication address, K0~K255
: Address for writing data
Write data
MODWR is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode
communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except
VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODWR command can
be used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to
the Delta VFD series manual for more details.
is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be
informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141
turn to be ON. For example, 4000H is an illegal address to VFD-S, then M1141 will turn
ON, D1130=2. For the information of error codes, please refer to VFD-S series user
manual.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1076. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all
feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON.
After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment
again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be
clear.
Program
Example
1
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off)
M1002
MOV
H87
D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication
protocol latched
device address 01
K1
H0100 H1770
MODRW
data address H0100
data H1770
Setting
transmission
flag
SET M1122
SET M1120
X0
X1
receiving
completed

M1123
RST
M1123
The receiving data in ASCII character

format is stored in D1070~D1085
receiving completed
and flag reset
8-5

PLC
VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 0100 1770 71
VFD-B
PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 0100 1770 71

Register
D1089 low
D1089 high
D1090 low
D1090 high
D1091 low
D1091 high
D1092 low
D1092 high
D1093 low
D1093 high
D1094 low
D1094 high
D1095 low
D1095 high
DATA
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
30 H
31 H
30 H
36 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
37 H
31 H
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0

address
Data address
Data contents
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0

check code

Register
D1070 low
D1070 high
D1071 low
D1071 high
D1072 low
D1072 high
D1073 low
D1073 high
D1074 low
D1074 high
D1075 low
D1075 high
D1076 low
D1076 high
Program
Example
2
DATA
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
30 H
31 H
30 H
36 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
37 H
31 H
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
Data address
Data content
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0
Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On)
M1002
MOV
H87
D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
Communication
protocol latched
K100 D1129 time out 100ms
SET M1120
MOV
SET M1143
Setting as RTU mode
X0
MODRW
K1
H2000
X1
H12

device address 01
data address H2000
write in data H12

receiving
completed
M1123
RST
8-6
M1123
The receiving data in HEX value

format is stored in D1070~D1085.
receiving completed
and flag reset

PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
Register
DATA
D1089 low
01 H
Address
D1090 low
06 H
Function
D1091 low
20 H
Data address
D1092 low
00 H
D1093 low
00 H
Data content
D1094 low
12 H
D1095 low
02 H
CRC CHK Low
D1096 low
07 H
CRC CHK High
Register
DATA
D1070 low
01 H
Address
D1071 low
06 H
Function
D1072 low
20 H
Data address
D1073 low
00 H
D1074 low
00 H
Data content
D1075 low
12 H
D1076 low
02 H
CRC CHK Low
D1077 low
07 H
CRC CHK High
Program
Example
3
PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When

communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending
address.
When X0=On, PLC will write data H1770(K6000) into address H0100 of device 01
(VFD-S).
Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request
from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140
and ask M1122 to read again.
Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from
M1141 and ask M1122 to read again.
8-7

M1002
D1120
MOV
H87
SET
M1120
MOV
K100
D1129
MODRW
K1
H0100
SET
M1122
Setting communication protocol

to 9600, 8, E, 1
X0
X0
time-out to 100ms
H1770 device address 01,
data address H0100
data H1770
Setting transmission request
M1129
Communication time-out Retry
M1140
data receive error Retry
M1141
M1123
sending address error Retry

receiving completed
handle received data
RST
M1123
RST
M1129
The receiving data in ASCII

format stored in D1070-D1085.
receiving completed and
flag reset
communication time-out and flag reset
For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the
Footnote
footnote of API 80 RS command.

If using rising-edge (LDP, ANDP, ORP)/falling-edge (LDF, ANDF, ORF) before API 101
MODWR and API 150 MODRW (Function Code H06 and H10), it needs to start
transmission request M1122 to act correct.
API
102
FWD
Bit devices
X Y M S
VFD-A Series Drive Forward

Command
Word devices

S1
S2
n
Operand n available range: n=K1or K2
8-8
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
FWD
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

command

API
103
VFD-A Series Drive Reverse

Command
REV
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2

n
API
104
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2

n
Command
Explanation

Continuous
REV
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

command
VFD-A Series Drive Stop

Command
STOP
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
STOP
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

command.
: AC drive master frequency.
Command object.
FWD/REV/STOP are communication commands for Delta A/H series drive, make sure
to use the communication overtime setting (D1129) when applying these commands.
indicates AC drive master frequency. AC drive master frequency setting for
VFD-A series, K0000 to K4000, represents 0.0Hz to 400.0Hz. For H series AC drive,
the setting of K0000 to K1500 represent 0Hz to 1500Hz.
command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives
connected.
The feedback (return) data from perpherial equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1080. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all
feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1142 will be ON. If n = 2,
PLC will not receive the data.
8-9

Program
Example
Communication between PLC and VFD-A series AC drives, retry for communication
time-out and received data error.
M1002
H0073
D1120
SET
M1120
MOV
K100
FWD
K0
SET
M1122
X0
X0
M1129
M1142
protocol 4800, 8, O, 1
MOV
time-out 100ms
device address 0
K500
K1
frequency setting is 500Hz
K1 is the AC drive for
designated address
Setting transmission flag
D1129
communication time-out Retry

received data error Retry
M1123 receiving completed

RST
M1123
The receiving data in ASCII character

format is stored in D1070~D1085
receiving completed and flag reset
PLC VFD-A, PLC transmitting: C 0001 0500

VFD-A PLC, PLC receiving: C 0001 0500
Register
DATA
D1089 low
C
43 H
Command starting word
D1090 low
03 H
Check sum
D1091 low
01 H
Command object
D1092 low
0
30 H
D1093 low
0
30 H
Communication address
D1094 low
0
30 H
D1095 low
1
31 H
D1096 low
0
30 H
D1097 low
5
35 H
Operation command
D1098 low
0
30 H
D1099 low
0
30 H
8-10
Register
D1070 low
D1071 low
DATA
C
43 H
03 H
D1072 low
06 H
D1073 low
D1074 low
D1075 low
D1076 low
D1077 low
D1078 low
D1079 low
D1080 low
0
0
0
1
0
5
0
0
30 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
35 H
30 H
30 H
Command starting word

Check sum
Reply authorization (correct: 06H,
error: 07 H)
Communication address
Operation command

API
105
VFD-A Series Drive Status Read
RDST
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

n
Operand n available range: n=K0~ K3
: Communication address, K0~K31
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
RDST
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

command
: Status object
RDST is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC

drives and used to read the execution status of AC drive.
: Status object
n = 0 Frequency command n = 2 Output current
n = 1 Output frequency
n = 3 Operation command
The feedback (return) data stored in the low byte of address D1070 to D1080 are total
11 words (please refer to VFD-A series manual).
Q, S, B, Uu, Nn, ABCD
feedback
Explanation
Data storage
(return)
Q
Starting word: Q (51H).
D1070 low
S
Checksum code: 03H.
D0171 low
B
Command authorization. correct: 06H, error: 07H.
D1072 low
U
D1073 low
Communication address (address: 00~31). Uu =
(00~31) indicated by ASCII.
u
D1074 low
N
D1075 low
Status object (00~03).Nn = (00~03) indicated by ASCII.
n
D1076 low
A
D1077 low
Status data. The content of ABCD will be different
according to the status objects (00~03). 00~03 indicate
B
D1078 low
frequency, current and operation mode respectively.
C
D1079 low
Please refer to the explanation shown below for details.
D
D1080 low
Frequency command = ABC.DHz
Nn = 00
Output command = ABC.DHz
Nn = 01
Output current = ABC.DA
Nn = 02
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ABCD to value and store
the value in D1050. For example, if ABCD = 0600, PLC will
automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0600 (0258 H) and store
it in the special register in D1050.
Nn = 03
Operation command
8-11

A =
B =
CD =
0
Stop,
5 JOG(FWD)
1
FWD operation,
6 JOG(REV)
2
Stop,
7 JOG(REV)
3
REV operation,
8 Abnormal
4
JOG(FWD),
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of A to value and
store the value in D1051. For example, if A = 3, PLC will
automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0003 (03 H)
and store it in the special register in D1051.
b7
b6
b5
b4
Operation command source
0
0
0
0
Digital keypad
0
0
0
1
1st Step Speed
0
0
1
0
2nd Step Speed
0
0
1
1
3rd Step Speed
0
1
0
0
4th Step Speed
0
1
0
1
5th Step Speed
0
1
1
0
6th Step Speed
0
1
1
1
7th Step Speed
1
0
0
0
JOG frequency
1
0
0
1 Analog signal frequency command
1
0
1
0 RS-485 communication interface
1
0
1
1
Up/Down control
b3
=
0 No DC braking stop 1 DC braking stop
b2
=
0 No braking startup
1 DC braking startup
b1
=
0 FWD,
1 REV
b0
=
0 Stop,
1 Operation
PLC will store the value of B in special auxiliary relays
M1168(b0)~M1175(b7)
00
No abnormal record
10
OcA
01
oc
11
Ocd
02
ov
12
Ocn
03
oH
13
GFF
04
oL
14
Lv
05
oL1
15
Lv1
06
EF
16
cF2
07
cF1
17
bb
08
cF3
18
oL2
09
HPF
19
PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of CD to value and
store the value in D1052. For example, if CD = 06, PLC will
automatically convert ASCII word to the value of 0006 H and
store it in the special register in D1052.
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)
Footnote
before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE 03)
these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect.
8-12

API
106
VFD-A Series Drive Abnormal Reset
RSTEF
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

n
Operand n available range: n=K1 or K2
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
RSTEF
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

command.
: Command object.
RSTEF is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC

drives and used to reset the AC drive after an abnormal execution.
: Command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives
connected.
The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to
D1089. If n = 2, there is no feedback (return) data.
Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF,
ORF)before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE
H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be
incorrect.
For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the
Footnote
API
107
LRC
footnote of API 80 RS command.
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
ES series models do not support this command (LRC,
LRCP)
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
LRC Error Check

Continuous
Pulse
LRC
LRCP
execution
execution
32-bit command
8-13

: Starting device for the operation of sum check (ASCII mode)
Command
Explanation
numbers
: Operand
: Starting device for storing the operation result. LRC check: please
refer to the footnote.

: operand numbers should be even and range is from K1~K256. If it is out of
range, error will be occurred and commond wont be executed. At this time, M1067 and
M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will be record in D1067.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source
devcie
will be divided into upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit and perform the operation
of LRC command on
of device
numbers. Then, store the result into upper and lower 8-bit
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the
source devcie
into upper 8-bit (invalid data) and lower 8-bit and perform the
operation of LRC command on

of device
numbers. Then, store the result into lower 8-bit
and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of
all be zero (0)).
Communication between PLC and VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off),
Program
Example
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On), writing transmitting data in advance to read six data from
VFD-B parameter address H2101.
M1002
MOV
H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1
SET M1120 Communication protocol latched

transmission
request
pulse
MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication

time out 100ms

in advance

X10
RS
D100
K17
D120
K35
receiving
completed
M1123
RST M1123
PLC
receiving completed
and flag reset
VFD-B, PLC transmitting: : 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF

Register
D100 low
D101 low
D102 low
D103 low
D104 low
D105 low
D106 low
D107 high
D108 low
D109 low
D110 low
D111 low
D112 low
8-14
:
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
6
DATA
3A H
30 H
31 H
30 H
33 H
32 H
31 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
36 H
STX
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0

address
code
Register
D113 low
D114 low
D115 low
D116 low
D
4
CR
LF
DATA
44 H
34 H
AH
DH
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0

check code
END
The LRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by LRC command
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On).
M1000
LRC
D101
K12
D113
LRC check: 01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 01 H + 00 H + 06 H = 2C H, then take the complementary

of 2, D4H. At the time, D(44 H) is stored in the lower 8-bit of D113 and 4 (34 H) is stored in
the lower 8-bit of D114.
ASCII mode of communication data, the format is listed below:
STX
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
DATA (n-1)
.
DATA 0
Footnote
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
END Lo
:
0
1
0
3
2
1
0
2
0
0
0
2
D
7
CR
LF
Start word = : (3AH)

Communication:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCll codes
Function code:
8-bit function consists of 2 ASCll codes
Data content:
n 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll
codes
LRC check:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll codes
End word:
END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH)
Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for

Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters.
LRC check is the added sum from Address to Data contents. For example, 01H +
03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H.
API
108
CRC
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
CRC Error Check
Word devices
D
ES series models do not support this command (CRC,
CRCP)
K

Continuous
Pulse
CRC
CRCP
execution
execution
32-bit command
8-15

Command
Explanation
: Starting device for the operation of sum check (RTU mode)

numbers
: Operand
: Starting device for storing the operation result. CRC check: please

: range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond
wont be executed. At this time, M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will
be record in D1067.
16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source
devcie
will be divided into high byte and low byte. To perform the operation of
CRC command on
device
numbers and store the result into upper and lower 8-bit of
8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the
source devcie
into high byte (invalid data) and low byte. To perform the
operation of CRC command on

device
Program
Example
numbers and store the result into low byte of
and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of
all be zero (0)).
When PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode,
M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-S parameter address
H2000
M1002
MOV
SET
MOV
transmission
request
H87
D1120 protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
M1120 Communication protocol latched

K100 D1129
time out 100ms
SET
M1143 RTU Mode
SET
M1161 8-bit Mode
write transmitting data in advance

pulse
SET
X10
RS
D100
K8
D120
K8
receiving
completed
M1123
RST M1123 receiving completed and flag reset
PLC
8-16
VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

Register
D100 low
D101 low
D102 low
D103 low
D104 low
D105 low
D106 low
D107 low
DATA
01 H
06 H
20 H
00 H
00 H
12 H
02 H
07 H
Address
Function
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK 0
CRC CHK 1
The CRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by CRC command
(8-bit Mode, M1161=On).
M1000
CRC
D100
K6
D106
CRC check: At the time, 02 H is stored in the lower 8-bit of D106 and 07 H is stored in the
lower 8-bit of D107.
RTU mode of communication data, the format is listed below:
Footnote
START
Please refer to the following explanation
Address
Communication address: 8-bit binary
Function
DATA (n-1)
.
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
Function code: 8-bit binary

Data content:
n 8-bit data
CRC check:
16-bit CRC check sum consists of 2 8-bit binary
Please refer to the following explanation
CRC check:
CRC check starts from Address and ends in Data content. CRC check starts from
Address and ends in Data content. Its calculation is as follows:
Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC
register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit.
Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from
step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC
register, then store the result into the CRC register.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit.
Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message
commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is
the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must
be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command.
8-17

API
109
SWRD
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Digital Switch Read
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command (2 STEPS)
Pulse
SWRD Continuous SWRDP

D
execution
execution
ES series models do not support this command (SWRD, 32-bit command
SWRDP)
Flag: M1104~M1111 Digital switch

status
Command
Explanation
: Device for storing read value

Store the value that read from digital switch function card into the low byte of
Every digital switch has an associated BIT.

If executing this command without digital switch function card, there is no result and no
error message.
Program
Example
There are total 8 DIP switchs on the digital switch function card. After using SWRD
command to read value, these 8 switchs are in association with the contact M0 to M7.
M1000
SWRD
K2M0
M0
Y0
M1
MOV
K2M0
D0
CNT
C0
K10
RST
C0
TMR
T0
M2
M3
M4
K100
M0 to M7 can be executed by using each contact command.

When END command is executed, the process of input will complete. REF (I/O)
refreshcommand will be invalid.
The min. read one time bits are 4 bits when SWRD command use the input data of
digital switch function card (i.e. K1Y* or K1M* or K1S*).
When digital switch function card is inserted, 8 DIP switches correspond to
Footnote
8-18
M1104~M1111 individually.

API
110 D
ECMP
Binary Floating Point Comparison
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
D
Word devices
K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command

Continuous
Pulse
Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices.
DECMP
DECMPP
execution
execution
Flag: None
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format,
only 32-bit command DECMP, DECMPP are available.
command (DECMPP)
Command
Explanation
: Comparison value 1 of binary floating point

The data of
: Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.
is compared to the data of
showed by three bit devices in

If the source operand
: Comparison value 2 of
or
and the result (, , ) is
.
is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.
Program
Example
If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.

When X0=On and execute DECMP command, one of M10~M12 will be On. When
X0=Off and not to execute DECMP command, M10~M12 will retain the state before X0=
Off.
Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of , , are given.
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result.
X0
DECMP
D0
D100
M10
M10
M11
M12
Footnote
It is On when (D1A D0)>(D101A D100)

It is On when (D1A D0)=(D101A D100)
It is On when (D1A D0)<(D101A D100)
As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric
Values for detail.
8-19

API
111 D
EZCP
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Binary Floating Point Zone

Comparison
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
S
D
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse

DEZCP
DEZCPP
execution
execution
Flag:
None
Operand S should be smaller than operand S .
1

only 32-bit command DEZCP, DEZCPP are available.
command (DEZCPP).
Command
Explanation
: Lower limit of binary floating point zone comparison

floating point zone comparison
: Upper limit of binary
: Comparison value of binary floating point
: Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used.

The data of
is compared to the data range of
, ) is showed by three bit devices in

or
and the result (,
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare.

When
Program
Example
will be used as upper and lower limit for the comarison.
If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used.

When X1=On and execute DEZCP command, one of M0~M2 will be On. When X1=Off
and not to execute EZCP command, M0~M2 will retain the state before X1= Off.
Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result.
X0
DEZCP
M10
M11
M12
D0
D10
D20
M0

it is On when (D1A D0) < (D21A D20)<(D11A D10)
Footnote
8-20
Values for detail.

API
116 D
RAD
Degree
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices


This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DRAD
and DRADP.
S
D
: data source (degree)
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Radian
16-bit command
32 -bit command (9 STEPS)

Continuous
Pulse
DRAD
DRADP
execution
execution
Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021
Borrow flag, M1022 Carry flag
: Coverted result (radian).
Using following function to convert degree to radian:

Radian degree (/180)
If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On.
If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On.
When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to
Program
Example
save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point.

X0
DRAD
D0
D10
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
degree value
RAD value ( degree X /180)
Footnote
API
117 D
DEG
Values for detail.
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Radian
Word devices

Degree
D E F

This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DDEG
and DDEGP.
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
16-bit command

Continuous
Pulse
DDEG
DDEGP
execution
execution
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag
8-21

: data source (radian).
Command
Explanation
: Coverted result (degree).
Using following function to convert radian to degree:

degree radian (180/)
When X0=On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to
Program
Example
save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point.

X0
DDEG
D0
D10
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
radian value
degree value (radian X 180/ )
Footnote
API
118 D
EBCD
Values for detail.
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Convert Binary Floating Point to

Decimal Floating Point
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DEBCD
DEBCDP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DEBCD, DEBCDP are available.
Flag: None
commands (DEBCDP)
Command
Explanation
: Data source
: Coverted result
Convert binary floating point value at the register specified by

point value stored in the register specified by
to decimal floating
PLC floating point is operated by the binary floating point format. DEBCD command is
the specific command used to convert binary floating point to decimal floating point.
8-22

When X0=On, the binary floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to decimal
Program
Example
floating point stored in D3, D2.

X0
DEBCD
Binary
Floating Point
D1
D0
D0
D2
32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent

1 bit for symbol bit
Exponent Real number

Decimal
Floating Point
D3
D2
Real number
[D2] * 10
Exponent
[D3]
Footnote
Values for detail.
API
119 D
EBIN
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Applicable models
EP
EH
Convert Decimal Floating Point to

ES
Word devices
D
E F 16-bit command

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DEBIN
DEBINP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DEBIN, DEBINP are available.
Flag: None
commands (DEBINP).
Command
Explanation
: Data source
: Coverted result
Convert decimal floating point value at the register specified by

point value stored in the register specified by
For example,
=1234,
.
=1.2345 x 105
+1= 8 will become
must be a binary floating point format.
to binary floating
and
+1 represent the real
number and exponent of the floating point number respectively.

DEBIN command is the specific command used to convert decimal floating point to
binary floating point.
8-23

When X1=On, the decimal floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to binary
Program
Example
1
floating point stored in D3, D2.

X1
DEBIN
D0
D2
Exponent Real number
Exponent
Real number
Decim al
Floating P oint
D1
D0
[D1] * 10
Binary
Floating P oint
D3
D2
23 bits for real num ber, 8 bits for exponent

1 bit for symbol bit
[D0]
Before perform floating point operation, must use FLT (API 49) command to convert BIN
Program
Example
2
integer to binary floating point. The source data (the value which will be converted)
should be a BIN integer. However, DEBIN command can be used to convert floating
point value to binary floating point value.
When X0=On, move K314 to D0 and move K-2 to D1 to generate decimal floating point
format (3.14 = 314 10-2).
X0
MOVP K314
D0
K314
D0
[D1]
D1
314 x10
[D0]
-2
MOVP
K-2
D1
DEBIN
D0
D2
K-2
(D1 , D0)
314 x10
Footnote
API
120 D
EADD
(D3 , D2)
Binary
Floating Point
Values for detail.
Binary Floating Point Addition
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1

S2
D
Continuous
Pulse
DEADD
DEADDP
execution
execution
Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021
only 32-bit command DEADD, DEADDP are available.
(Borrow flag) and M1022
(Carry flag)
(DEADDP).
8-24

: Augend
Command
Explanation
: Addend
: Addition result
. The floating point value in the register specified by
are added and the result is stored in the register specified by
and
. All source
data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating
point format.
or
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition

operation.
and
as
and
can specify the same register number (the same device can be used
). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEADD
command, the data in the register will be added one time in every scan program during
the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution command
(DEADDP) is generally used.
When X0=On, add binary floating point value of (D1, D0) and binary floating point
Program
Example
1
value of (D3, D2) and store the result in (D11, D10).
X0
DEADD
D0
D2
D10
When X2=On, add binary floating point value of (D11, D10) and K1234 (automatically
Program
Example
2
converted to binary floating point) and store the result in (D21, D20).
X2
DEADD D10 K1234 D20

Footnote
API
Values for detail.
Applicable models
121 D
ESUB
Binary Floating Point Subtraction
Bit devices
X Y M S
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command
S1
S2
D
Continuous
Pulse
DESUB
DESUBP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DESUB, DESUBP are available.
(Borrow flag) and M1022
ES series models do not support pulse command
(Carry flag)
(DESUBP).
K
H KnX
8-25

: Minuend
Command
Explanation
: Subtrahend
subtracted from the floating point value in the register specified by

is stored in the register specified by
is
and the result
. All data will be operated in floating point
format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
or
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the subtraction

operation.
and
as
and
). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DESUB
command, the data in the register will be subtracted one time in every scan program
during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution
command (DESUBP) is generally used.
When X0=On, binary floating point value of (D3, D2) is subtracted from binary floating
Program
Example
1
point value of (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X0
DESUB
D0
D2
D10
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is subtracted from K1234
Program
Example
2
(automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESUB K1234
D0
D10
Footnote
API
122 D
EMUL
Values for detail.
Binary Floating Point Multiplication
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP EH
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Continuous
Pulse
DEMUL
DEMULP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DEMUL, DEMULP are available.
Borrow flag and M1022 Carry
flag
(DEMULP).
8-26

: Multiplicand
Command
Explanation
: Multiplier
: Multiplication result
multiplied with the floating point value in the register specified by

stored in the register specified by
is
and the result is
. All data will be operated in floating point format
and the result will be also stored in floating point format.

or
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the multiplication

operation.
and
as
and
). If in this case and on the continuous execution of the DEMUL
command, the data in the register will be multiplied one time in every scan program
during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse execution
command (DEMULP) is generally used.
When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with binary floating
Program
Example
1
point (D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20).

X1
DEMUL
D0
D10
D20
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with K1234
Program
Example
2
(automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DEMUL K1234
D0
D10
Footnote
Values for detail.
API
123 D
EDIV
Binary Floating Point Division
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
only 32-bit command DEDIV, DEDIVP are available.
(DEDIVP).
K
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DEDIV
DEDIVP
execution
execution
flag
8-27

: Dividend
Command
Explanation
: Divisor
: Quotient and Remainder
divided by the floating point value in the register specified by

stored in the register specified by
is
and the result is
. All data will be operated in floating point format
and the result will be also stored in floating point format.

or
will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the division operation.
If
is 0 (zero), the operation will fail and will result in an operand error, then this
command will not be executed.

When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by binary floating point
Program
Example
1
(D11, D10) and the remainder is stored in (D21, D20).
X1
DEDIV
D0
D10
D20
When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by K1234 (automatically
Program
Example
2
converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DEDIV
D0
K10
D10
Footnote
Values for detail.
API
124 D
EXP
Perform Exponent Operation of

Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
only 32-bit command DEXP, DEXPP are available.
(DEXPP).
8-28
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DEXP
DEXPP
execution
execution
flag

: operand source device.
Command
Explanation
: operand result device.
For example, the base e =2.71828 and exponent is

EXP[
+1,
]=[
+1,
No matter positive or negative value are valid for S. Specific register D needs to use
32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating
point.
When operand D= e S, e=2.71828 and S is specific source data.
Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).
Program
Example
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be exponent to perform exponent operation. The
value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and
save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10)
M0
RST
M1081
M1
DEXP
D10
D20
DEBCD
D20
D30
M2
Footnote
Values for detail.
API
125 D
LN
Perform Natural Logarithm

Operation of Binary Floating Point
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
D
only 32-bit command DLN, DLNP are available.
(DLNP).
K
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DLN
DLNP
execution
execution
flag
8-29

Command
Explanation
For example, perform natural logarithm operation ln to operand

LN[
+1,
]=[
+1,
Only positive number is valid for S. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and
floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating point.
When operand eD=S, operand D=lnS and S is specific source data.
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11).
Program
Example
When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be real number to perform natural logarithm operation.
The value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and
save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10)
M0
RST
M1081
M1
DLN
D10
D20
DEBCD
D20
D30
M2
Footnote
Values for detail.
API
126 D
LOG
Perform Logarithm Operation of

Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
D
only 32-bit command DLOG, DLOGP are available.
(DLOGP).
8-30
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DLOG
DLOGP
execution
execution
flag

: operand base device.
Command
Explanation
: operand result
device.
Perform logarithm operation to
and
and save the result to
Only positive number is valid for S2 (positive and negative number are valid for S1).
Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore,
S1 and S2 need to convert to floating point.
Consider S1D=S2, D=? Log S1S2=D
Consider S1=5,S2=125, D=log 5125=?
S1D=S25D=125D=log 5125=3
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in
Program
Example
register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.

When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to
perform logarithm operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal
floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the
power of 10)
M0
RST
M1081
D2
D12
D10
D12
D20
D30
M1
D20
M2
DEBCD
Footnote
API
127 D
ESQR
Values for detail.
Square Root of Binary Floating

Point
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP EH
Word devices
D
Note: Essential condition: S only can be a positive value. (S0)
Continuous
Pulse
DESQR
DESQRP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DESQR, DESQRP are available.
(Program execution error)
(DESQRP).
K
8-31

: Source device
Command
Explanation
This command performs a square root operation on the floating point value of source
device
and stores the result at the destination device
. All data will be
operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format.
or
is indicated as constant K or H, the integer
value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition
operation.
If operation result of
is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On.
only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a

negative value will result in an operation error and this command will not be executed.
M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1B will be record in D1067.
When X0=On, the square root of binary floating point (D1, D0) is stored in the register
Program
Example
1
specified by (D11, D10) after the operation of square root.

X0
DESQR
(D1, D0)
D0
D10
(D11 , D10)
When X2=On, the square root of K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating
Program
Example
2
point) is stored in (D11, D10).
X2
DESQR K1234 D10

Footnote
Values for detail.
API
128 D
POW
Perform Power Operation of

Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
S1
S2
D
Continuous
Pulse
DPOW
DPOWP
execution
execution
Flag: no.
only 32-bit command DPOW, DPOWP are available.
(DPOWP).
8-32

: base device.
Command
Explanation
: exponent device.
Perform power operation to binary floating point

to
and
and save the result
POW [
+1,
]^[
+1,
]=
Only positive number is valid for S1 and S2. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit
format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S1 and S2 need to convert to floating
point.
When S1S2=D, D=?
If S1=5,S2=3, D=53=?
D=53=125
Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068.
When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in
Program
Example
register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually.

When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to
perform power operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21).
When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal
floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the
power of 10)
M0
RST
M1081
D2
D12
D10
D12
D20
D30
M1
D20
M2
DEBCD
Footnote
API
129 D
INT
Values for detail.
Bit devices
X Y M S
Convert Binary Floating Point to

BIN Integer
Word devices
D
ES series models do not support this command (INTP,
DINTP).
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
INT
INTP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DINT
DINTP
execution
execution
(Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag)
8-33

: Source device
Command
Explanation
The binary floating point value of the register specified by

integer and stored in the register specified
is converted to BIN
. The decimal of Bin integer will be
discarded.
This command is the inverse of the API 49 (FLT) command.
If operation result of
is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On.
If there is any decimal discarded, the Borrow flag M1021=On.

If the result exceeds the following setting range (an overflow occurs), the Carry flag
M1022=On.
16-bit command : -32,768~32,767
32-bit command : -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647
When X0=On, the binary floating point value of (D1, D0) will be converted to BIN
Program
Example
integer and the result is stored in (D10). The decimal of BIN integer will be discarded.
When X1=On, the binary floating point value of (D21, D20) will be converted to BIN
integer and the result is stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of BIN integer will be
discarded.
X0
INT
D0
D10
DINT
D20
D30
X1
Footnote
API
130 D
SIN
Values for detail.
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
8-34
Sine Operation of Binary Floating

Point
Word devices
Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0 to 360;

i.e., 0S360
only 32-bit command DSIN, DSINP are available.
(DSINP).
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DSIN
DSINP
execution
execution
Flag: M1018 flag for radian/angle.

Command
Explanation
: Specified RAD value

Source desgnated by
: Area where calculated result is stored.

can be radian or angle by flag M1018.
When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle /180.

When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0angle360.
The SIN value of an angle data specified by
is calculated and the calculated
result is stored in the register specified by
Following shows the relation between radian and result:

R
S: Radian
R: Result
-2
- 32
-2
-2
3
2
-1
Program
Example
1
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When X0=On, specify RAD value (D1, D0).
Calculate SIN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in
(D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002
RST
M1018
DSIN
D0
X0
Program
Example
2
D10
D1
D0
RAD value (degree x

D1
D10
COS value
/ 180)
When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. Select angle from inputs X0 and X1 and convert it
to RAD value to calculate SIN value.
X0
MOVP K30
K6
(K30
D10)
MOVP K60
K6
(K60
D10)
X1
M1000
FLT
D10 D1120 (D10
D15, D14) binary floating point
DEDIV K31415926 K1800000000 D20
Program
Example
3
/180)
binary
floating point
(D21, D20)
binary
floating point
(D15, D14) degree x /180

(D41, D40) RAD binary floating point
DEMUL D14
D20
D40
D40
D50
(D41 , D40) RAD
DSIN
(D51, D50) SIN

When M1018=On, it is anlge mode. When X0=On, it designates angle value of (D1,
D0). Angle range is: 0angle value360. After converting to SIN value to save in
(D11, D10) with binary floating point number.
8-35

M1002
SET
M1018
DSIN
D0
X0
D1
D0
D 11
D 10
D10
angle value
SIN value
(binary floating point)
Footnote
API
131 D
COS
Values for detail.
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Word devices

C D E F

i.e., 0S360
only 32-bit command DCOS, DCOSP are available.
ES/EP series models do not support this command (DCOS,
DCOSP).
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP EH
Cosine Operation of Binary Floating

Point
: Specified RAD value.
16-bit command

Continuous
Pulse
DCOS
DCOSP
execution
execution
Flag: None
Source desgnated by

The COS value of an angle data specified by

.

R
S: Radian
R: Result
-2
- 32
-2
-2
3
2
-1
Flag M1018 radian/angle switch: when M1018=Off,

M1018=On,
8-36
is RAD value. When
is angle value (0-360).

Program
Example
1
Calculate COS value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)
and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002
RST
M1018
DCOS
D0
X0
D10
D1
D0
RAD value (degree x

D1
D10
COS value
/ 180)
When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle
Program
Example
2
range: 0angle360. After converting to COS value, save in (D11, D10) with binary
floating point.
M1002
SET
M1018
DCOS
D0
X0
D1
D0
D1
D 10
D10
angle value
COS value
Footnote
API
132 D
TAN
Values for detail.
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Tangent Operation of Binary Floating

Point
Word devices


i.e., 0S360
only 32-bit command DTAN, DTANP are available.
(DTANP).
16-bit command
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
DTAN
DTANP
execution
execution
Flag: None
8-37

Command
Explanation
: Specified RAD value.

Source desgnated by

The TAN value of an angle data specified by
.
R
S: Radian
R: Result
-2
-2
Program
Example
1
2
0
-1 1
- 32
2
3
2
Calculate TAN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0)
and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format.
M1002
RST
M1018
DTAN
D0
X0
Program
Example
2
D10
D1
D0
RAD value (degree x

D11
D10
TAN value
/ 180)
When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When X0=On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle
range: 0angle360. After converting to TAN value, save in (D11, D10) with binary
floating point.
M1002
SET
M1018
DTAN
D0
X0
D1
D0
D1
D 10
D10
angle value
TAN value
Footnote
8-38
Values for detail.

API
133 D
ASIN
Arc Sine Operation of Binary Floating

Point
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DASIN
DASINP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DASIN, DASINP are available.
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
: Specified source (binary floating point)
: Area where calculated result is
stored.
ASIN value=SIN 1
R
S: Radian
R: Result
-1,0
1,0
-2
Program
Example
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format.
X0
DASIN
D0
D10
D1
D0
D11
D10
ASIN value
Footnote
Values for detail.
8-39

API
134 D
ACOS
Arc Cosine Operation of Binary

Floating Point
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DACOS
DACOSP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DACOS, DACOSP are available.
Flag: None
S
D
Command
Explanation
stored
ACOS value=COS 1

R
S: Radian
R: Result
-1,0
Program
Example
1,0
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ACOS value and save
the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point
format.
X0
DACOS D0
D10
D1
D0
D11
D10
ACOS value
Footnote
8-40
Values for detail.

API
135 D
ATAN
Arc Tangent Operation of Binary

Floating Point
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DATAN
DATANP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DATAN, DATANP are available.
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
stored.
ATAN value=TAN 1
R
S: Radian
R: Result
2
Program
Example
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ATAN value and save
format.
X0
DATAN
D0
D10
D1
D0
D11
D10
ATAN value
Footnote
Values for detail.
8-41

API
136 D
SINH
Hyperbolic Sine Operation of Binary

Floating Point
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DSINH
DSINHP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DSINH, DSINHP are available.
Flag: None
S
D
Command
Explanation
stored
SINH value=(es-e-s)/2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate SINH value and save the
Program
Example
X0
DSINH D0
D10
137 D
COSH
D1
D0
D11
D10
SINH value
Footnote
API
Values for detail.
Applicable models
EP
EH
Hyperbolic Cosine Operation of Binary

ES
Floating Point
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DCOSH
DCOSHP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DCOSH, DCOSHP are available.
Flag: None
S
D
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
8-42
stored
COSH value=(es+e-s)/2
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate COSH value and save
format.

X0
DCOSH D0
138 D
TANH
D1
D0
D11
D10
COSH value
Footnote
API
D10
Values for detail.
Hyperbolic Tangent Operation of

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Word devices

Continuous
Pulse
This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, DTANH
DTANHP
execution
execution
only 32-bit command DTANH, DTANHP are available.
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
Program
Example
Footnote
stored
TANH value=(es-e-s)/(es+e-s)
When X0=On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the
X0
DTANH D0
D10
D1
D0
D11
D10
TANH value
Values for detail.
8-43

API
144 D
GPWM
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
General Pulse Width Modulation

Output
Word devices
S1
S2

D
Continuous
Pulse
Note: Please refer to command explanation for usage range of
DPOW
DPOWP
execution
execution
operand S1, S2 and D.
Flag: no.
Operand S2 occupies 3 devices.
K
Operand S1 should be less or equal to operand S2.

: Pulse output width.
Command
Explanation
: Pulse output cycle.
: pulse output device.
is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms.

is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms,
+1 and
+2 is for system, please dont use them.
pulse output devices: Y, M and S.

When GPWM command has been executed, the pulse output width
output cycle
When
0, there is no pulse output from the pulse output device. When

, the pulse output device will be always On.
and
Program
Example
is output through pulse output device
and pulse
can be modified when executing PWM command.
When X0=On, Y10 will output following pulse. When X0=Off, Y10 output will also be
Off.
X0
GPWM
K1000
K2000
Y10
t=1000ms
Output Y10
Footnote
T=2000ms
This command counts by scan cycle so the maximum offset will be a PLC scan cycle.
The value of
and (
) should be larger than PLC scan cycle.
Otherwise, there will be error occurs for GPWM outputs.

Please notice that if using this command in subroutine or interruption, GPWM output
may not be accurate.
8-44

API
145
Applicable models
ES
EP EH
Fuzzy Temperature Control
FTC
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
S3
D
Note: Refer to command explanation for operand S1, S2 and D
usage range.
Operand S3 occupies continuous 6 devices.
Refer to footnote for PID usage times in program.
: Target value (SV)
Command
Explanation

Continuous
FTC
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Present measured value (PV)
: Parameter
: Output value (MV)

Operand S1 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1C ~300C. The unit is 0.1C. If (
+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1C~300C.
Operand S2 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1C ~300C. The unit is 0.1C. If (
+1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1C~300C.
Therefore, when user gets the result that analog converts to digital from temperature
sensor, it needs to convert to the value during 1~3000 by using the four fundamental
operations of arithmetic.
is sampling time setting. If setting is less than K1, command wont act. If setting
exceeds K200, it will be regarded as K200.
+1) only can be K0 (means C) and K1 (means F). When setting
The setting of (
is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0.
Operand D usage range is 0~100 to show 0%~100%. User should use with other
commands by heater type when using this command. For example, it can use with
GPWM command to control pulse output as shown in footnote (example 1).
Program
Example
Finishing parameter setting before executing FTC command.

When X0=On, command is executed and save result in D150. When X0=Off, command
is not executed and previous data is unchanged.
X0
FTC
D0
D1
D100
D150
8-45

Footnote
is in the following:
The setting of
Device
Function
Usage range
Explanation
When TS is less than a scan time, PID

command will execute for a scan time.
When TS=0, it wont act. Therefore, the
Sampling time (TS) 1~200
minimum setting of TS should be larger
:
(unit: 10ms)
(unit: 100ms)
than program scan time.
When setting exceeds 200, it will be
regarded as 200.
When setting is not these two settings
+1: Temperature unit K0=CK1=F (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to
K0.
+2:
For system uses, please dont use.
+5:
Control Diagram:
FTC
Fuzzy
MV
Controller
PV
Temperature
Sensor
Attention and suggestion:

It is recommended to set sampling time to twice and above of sampling time of
temperature sensor to get better temperature control.
Example 1: control diagram
FTC
SV
D0
Fuzzy
Controller
MV
D10
PWM
Program
Y10
PV D1
Pt Module
Temperature
Sensor
Following time chart is using GPWM command to output Y10. (t is pulse output width
and T is pulse output cycle time)
8-46

T11
T10
The setting of FTC command is sampling time D2=K10 (unit: 10ms) and temperature
unit is D3=K0(). Other example for using with temperature control are shown in
following.
M3
<>
<=
>
D11
D11
D10 D11
K0
K99
FTC
D0
MOV
D10
SET
M4
RST
Y10
CJ
P0
SET
Y10
CJ
P0
SET
Y10
RST
M4
TMR
T10
TMR
T11
RST
Y10
SET
Y10
RST
T10
D11
M4
>
T10
K99
M3
Y10
T11
T10
8-47

API
147 D
SWAP
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

command.
The continuous command (SWAP, DSWAP) are only
provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series
models and EP/EH series models.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Swap High/Low Byte
16-bit command (5 STEPS

Continuous
Pulse
SWAP
SWAPP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DSWAP
DSWAPP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Device for swapping high/low byte.

When being 16-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.
When being 32-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.of two registers
separately.
This command is usually pulse execution (SWAPP, DSWAPP).
Program
Example
1
When X0=ON, swapping the content of high/low byte of D0.
X0
SWAPP
D0
D0
High Byte Low Byte
Program
Example
2
When X0=ON, swapping upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of D11 and swapping upper 8-bit
and lower 8-bit of D10.
X0
DSWAP
D11
High Byte
Low Byte
8-48
D10
D10
High Byte
Low Byte

API
148 D
MEMR
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Data Backup MEMORY Read
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
Continuous
Pulse
m
MEMR
MEMRP
execution
execution
n
Note: The setting range of m operand: EP series model:
Continuous
Pulse
DMEMR
DMEMRP
m=0~1,599; EH series models: m=0~9,999.
execution
execution
The setting range of D operand: EP series model:
Flag: M1101 (Please refer the
D2000~D4999; EH series model: D2000~D9999
following footnote for detail)
The setting range of n operand:
16-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K1,600; EH
series models: n=K1K8,000.
32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series
models: n=K1K4,000.
Command
Explanation
: Address (Constant) for reading data of file register.

for storing read data.
: Address (Constant)
: Quantity of one time reading data.
EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the
read data in the data register.
EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models
provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.
Operand
If operands
and
,
for EP series models dont support register E and F.

and
is out of range, operand error will be occurred.
M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.
Program
Example
1
16-bit command MEMR reads 100 items data from the 10th address of file register and
store the read data in the data register started from D2000.
When X0=On, the command is executed. When X0 goes to Off, the command is not
executed and the content of previous read data has no change.
X0
MEMR
K10
D2000
K100
Program
Example
2
32-bit command DMEMR reads 100 items data from the 20th address of file register
and store the read data in the data register started from D3000.
X0
DMEMR
K20
D3000
K100
8-49

API
149 D
MEMW
Data Backup MEMORY Write In
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
n
Note: The setting range of S operand: EP series model:
S=D2000~D4999; EH series model: S=D2000~D9999.
The setting range of m operand:
EP series model: m=K0~K1,599; EH series models:
m=K0~K9,999.
The setting range of n operand:
16-bit command: EP series model: n= K1~ K1,600; EH
series models: n=K1K8,000.
32-bit command: EP series model: n=K1~ K800; EH series
models: n=K1K4,000.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
MEMW
MEMWP
execution
execution
Continuous DMEMW Pulse
DMEMW
execution P
execution
Flag: M1101 (Please refer the
following footnote for detail)
: Address (Constant) for data writing in, D2000~D9999

(Constant) for file register writing in, K0~K9,999
: Address
: Quantity of one time reading
data, K1~K8,000
EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the
read data in the data register.
EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models
provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers.
Operand
If operands
and
,
for EP series models dont support register E and F.

and
is out of range, operand error will be occurred.
M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067.
Program
Example
When X0=On, the double word command DMEMW is executed. Write 100 items 32-bit
data started from D2001, D2000 in the file register address 0 to 199.
X0
DMEMW D2000
K0
K100
EH series models: when EH series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EH
File Register
series PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file
register starts to give number, K0~K9,999), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being
read, K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,
specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K9,999) and decide if
automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.
EH series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0, or the value of D1103 is
less than 2,000 or more than 9,999, reading data from file register to data register is
disabled.
8-50

EP series models: when EP series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EP series
PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file register
starts to give number, K0~K1,600), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being read,
K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register,
specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K4,999) and decide if
automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register.
EP series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0 or more than 1,600, or the
value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 4,999, reading data from file register to
data register is disabled.
When file register read data to data register D, if the address of file register or data
register exceeds the limit range, PLC will stop reading.
As for the data read and write in of file register, in PLC program only can use API
command 147 MEMR to read and use API command 148 MEMW to write in. For
detailed information about file registers, please refer to CH2 section 2.8.3.
There are 32,768 file registers. The file registers dont have real number, therefore the
read/write in function of file register should be performed by the API command 147
MEMR and 148 MEMW, or using a peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft software.
The destination device is not always continuous. One part is on the inner SRAM and
the other part is on the SRAM CARD. If user did not insert the SRAM CARD and the
read address exceeds 2,000 addresses, then the read value will be all 0(zero).
Related special relays and registers of file register:
Flag
M1101 If startup the function of file register, Latched, Default is Off

Special
Register
D1101 File register starts to give number K0~K9,999, Latched, Default is 0
D1102
Numbers of file registers of being read K1~K8,000, Latched, Default is 0
D1103
Destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified
data register D start to give number K2,000~K9,999, Latched, Default is
2,000
8-51

API
150
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
S3
S
n
MODBUS Data Read/ Write Applicable models

ES
EP
EH
In
MODRW
Word devices
Note: The setting range of S1 operand: K0~K255

The limit of S2 operand is specified as K3(H3), K6(H6),
K16(H10)
The setting range of n operand: n=K1~K8
This command (MODRW) is only provided in V4.9(included)
or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series
models.
Command
Explanation
: Connection device address

read or write

Continuous
MODRW
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143

(Please refer the following footnote)
: Function code
: Register of being read/write
: Address of being
: Length of read/write data
: Connection device address (UNIT ADDRESS). The setting range K0 to K255.

: FUNCTION CODE. For example: the command of AC drive or DVP-PLC to
read many items is H03. Write command of AC drive or DVP-PLC is H06 and the
command of write many items is H10. Only above three function codes are provided
and the other function codes are disabled. Please refer the following program
examples.
: Device address that being read/write data (DEVICE ADDRESS). This is an
inner device address of connection device. If the address is illegal to the specified
device, there will be fault code store in D1130 and at the same time, M1141 will be
ON. For example, 4000H is illegal to VFD-S, M1141 will be ON and D1130 = 2. Please
refer to VFD-S user manual for the details of fault codes.
: Source or destination of being read/write (SOURCE or DESTINATION). User
can set register to write data length in advance or store data after reading.
: Read/Write data length (DATA LENGTH). The specified range K1~K8
(WORD).
Program
Example
1
Function code K3(H3) : read many items data

1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF)
2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON)
Received data is stored in 16 continuous registers that start from D0 with ASCII format
when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content to Hexadecimal and store in
registers D1296~D1311 automatically. M1131=ON when it starts converting to
hexadecimal and M1131 will be OFF after completing converting.
9-1

User can use MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands to move D1296~D1311 that store
Program
Example
1
hexadecimal data to general register to use. For ES series, other command is invalid
to this area.
Received data is stored in 8 continuous registers that start from D0 and specified by
users in hexadecimal format in RTU mode. At the same time, D1296~D1311 is invalid.
In ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in D1256~D1295.
Users can move these register data to general register by using MOV, DMOV or
BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
Data received from AC drive is stored in registers specified by users. After complete
receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is
any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code.
Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal
to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault
code.
After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received
data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset.
M1002
MOV
H87
SET M1120
MOV
setting communication
protocol 9600, 8, E, 1
D1120
communication protocol
K100 D1129
time out 100ms
X10
M1143
RTU mode setting
X0
MODRW
K1
K3
H2100
D0
K8
connection function data address data stored read/write data

code K3 H2100
device
register
length (word)
address K1 read many
items data
X0
SET M1122
Setting sending request
M1127
handling received data
ASCII mode : received data is stored in 16 consecutive registers that start
from D0 with ASCII format when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content
to hexadecimal and store in registers D1296~D1311 automatically
RTU mode : received data is stored in 8 consecutive registers that start from
D0 and specified by users in hexadecimal type in RTU mode
RST M1127
9-2
receiving data completed and reset flag

ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive.
PLC
VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 0100 1770 71
VFD-S
PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 0100 1770 71
PLC transmits data register (transmit message)

Register
D1256 Low
D1256 High
D1257 Low
D1257 High
D1258 Low
D1258 High
D1259 Low
D1259 High
D1260 Low
D1260 High
D1261 Low
D1261 High
D1262 Low
D1262 High
DATA
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
Explanation
30 H
31 H
30 H
36 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
37 H
31 H
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0

address
Data Address
Data contents
The content of register D50

(H1770=K6000)
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0

check
PLC receives data register (response message)

Register
D1070 Low
D1070 High
D1071 Low
D1071 High
D1072 Low
D1072 High
D1073 Low
D1073 High
D1074 Low
D1074 High
D1075 Low
D1075 High
D1076 Low
D1076 High
DATA
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
Explanation
30 H
31 H
30 H
36 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
37 H
31 H
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
Data Address
Data content
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive

PLC
VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
VFD-S
PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07
Register
DATA
Explanation
D1256 Low
01 H
Address
D1257 Low
06 H
Function
D1258 Low
20 H
D1259 Low
00 H
Data Address
9-3
Register
DATA
Explanation
D1260 Low
00 H
D1261 Low
12 H
D1262 Low
02 H
CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low
07 H
CRC CHK High
Data content
(H12)
Program
Example
2
Register
DATA
Explanation
D1070 Low
01 H
Address
D1071 Low
06 H
Function
D1072 Low
20 H
D1073 Low
00 H
D1074 Low
00 H
D1075 Low
12 H
D1076 Low
02 H
CRC CHK Low
D1077 Low
07 H
CRC CHK High
Data Address
Data content
Function code K6(H6) : write one WORD data into register

When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII
format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers
D1070~D1076.
When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal
format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers
D1070~D1077.
When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers
D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV
or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is
correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
code.
9-4

M1002
H87
MOV
SET M1120
MOV
D1120
K100 D1129
time out 100ms
X10
M1143
X0
MODRW
K6
K1
H2000
D50
K1

code K6 H2000
device
register
length (word)
address K1 write one
data in
X0
SET M1122
setting transmit flag
M1127
ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
RST M1127

PLC
VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 0100 1770 71
VFD-S
PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 0100 1770 71

Register
D1256 Low
D1256 High
D1257 Low
D1257 High
D1258 Low
D1258 High
D1259 Low
D1259 High
D1260 Low
D1260 High
D1261 Low
D1261 High
D1262 Low
D1262 High
DATA
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
30 H
31 H
30 H
36 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
37 H
31 H
Explanation
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0

address
code
Data Address
Data contents

(H1770=K6000)
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0

check
9-5
Register
D1070 Low
D1070 High
D1071 Low
D1071 High
D1072 Low
D1072 High
D1073 Low
D1073 High
D1074 Low
D1074 High
D1075 Low
D1075 High
D1076 Low
D1076 High
DATA
0
1
0
6
0
1
0
0
1
7
7
0
7
1
30 H
31 H
30 H
36 H
30 H
31 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
37 H
31 H
Explanation
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
Data Address
Data content
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive

PLC
VFD-S
VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07

Register
DATA
D1256 Low
D1257 Low
D1258 Low
D1259 Low
D1260 Low
D1261 Low
D1262 Low
D1263 Low
01 H
06 H
20 H
00 H
00 H
12 H
02 H
07 H
Explanation
Address
Function
Data Address
Data content
The content of
register D50 (H12)
CRC CHK Low

CRC CHK High
9-6
Register
DATA
D1070 Low
D1071 Low
D1072 Low
D1073 Low
D1074 Low
D1075 Low
D1076 Low
D1077 Low
01 H
06 H
20 H
00 H
00 H
12 H
02 H
07 H
Explanation
Address
Function
Data Address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High

Program
Example
3
Function code K16(H10) : write many items WORD data into register
When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII
format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive
will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.
When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal
format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive
will be stored in registers D1070~D1078.
When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers
D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV
or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area.
After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is
correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON.
code.
M1002
MOV
H87
SET M1120
MOV
D1120
K100 D1129
time out 100ms
X10
M1143
X0
MODRW
K1
K16 H2000
D50
K8

code K16 H2000
device
register
length (word)
address K1 write one
data in
X0
SET M1122
setting transmit flag
M1127
ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078.
RST M1127
9-7

PLC
VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 30
VFD-S
PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 CD
PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)

Register
D1256 Low
D1256 High
D1257 Low
D1257 High
D1258 Low
D1258 High
D1259 Low
D1259 High
D1260 Low
D1260 High
D1261 Low
D1261 High
D1262 Low
D1262 High
D1263 Low
D1263 High
D1264 Low
D1264 High
D1265 Low
D1265 High
D1266 Low
D1266 High
D1267 Low
D1267 High
DATA
0
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
4
0
0
1
2
1
7
7
0
3
0
30 H
31 H
31 H
30 H
32 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
32 H
30 H
34 H
30 H
30 H
31 H
32 H
31 H
37 H
37 H
30 H
33 H
30 H
Explanation
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0

address
code
Data Address
Number of Register
Byte Count
Data contents 1
The content of register

D50 (H12)
Data contents 2
The content of register

D51 (H1770=K6000)
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0

check
PLC receives data register (response messages)

Register
D1070 Low
D1070 High
D1071 Low
D1071 High
D1072 Low
D1072 High
D1073 Low
D1073 High
D1074 Low
D1074 High
D1075 Low
D1075 High
D1076 Low
D1076 High
DATA
0
1
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
C
D
30 H
31 H
31 H
30 H
32 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
30 H
32 H
43 H
44 H
Explanation
ADR 1
ADR 0
CMD 1
CMD 0
Data Address
Number of Register
LRC CHK 1
LRC CHK 0
RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drives

PLC
VFD-S
9-8
VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 C4 7F

PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 4A 08

PLC transmits data register (transmits messages)
Register
DATA
Explanation
D1256 Low
01 H
Address
D1257 Low
10 H
Function
D1258 Low
20 H
D1259 Low
00 H
D1260 Low
00 H
D1261 Low
02 H
D1262 Low
04 H
D1263 Low
00 H
D1264 Low
12 H
D1265 Low
17 H
D1266 Low
70 H
D1262 Low
C4 H
CRC CHK Low
D1263 Low
7F H
CRC CHK High
Data Address
Number of Register
Byte Count
Data content 1
Data content 2

(H12)
(H1770=K6000)
PLC receives data register (response messages)
Register
DATA
Explanation
D1070 Low
01 H
Address
D1071 Low
10 H
Function
D1072 Low
20 H
D1073 Low
00 H
D1074 Low
00 H
D1075 Low
02 H
D1076 Low
4A H
CRC CHK Low
D1077 Low
08 H
CRC CHK High
Data Address
Number of Register
9-9

The startup condition (the contact) before MODRD, RDST, MODRW these three
Footnote
commands, cannot use rising-edge contact and falling-edge. Otherwise, the data
stored in received register will be incorrect.
Related flags and special registers of RS-485 communication MODRW command:
Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command for more detail information.
Flag/Special
Register
M1120
M1121
M1122
M1123
M1124
M1125
M1126
M1127
M1128
M1129
M1130
M1131
M1140
M1141
M1142
M1143
D1070~D1085
D1120
D1121
D1122
D1123
D1124
D1125
D1126
D1129
D1130
D1256~D1295
D1296~D1311
9-10
Function Description
Communication setting latched. The change of D1120 will be
invalid after setting.
When it is Off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication data.
Delivery request
Receive completed
Receive waiting message
Receive status disable
STX/ETX system definition selection
MODRD / RDST / MODRW commands data receive completed
Transmitting/receiving indication
Receive time out
Users/system definition STX/ETX
MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data convert to HEX, M1131=ON
MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data receive error
MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command parameter error
VFD-A convenience command data receive error
ASCII/RTU
mode
selection
(use
with
commands
MODRD/MODWR/MODRW) (Off is ASCII mode, ON is RTU
mode)
It is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command.
This command will send messages during executing and if the
receiver receives, it will return messages and save it in
D1070~D1085. Users can view return data by this register
content.
RS-485 communication protocol
PLC communication address.(save PLC communication address,
has latched function)
Remainder characters of delivery data
Remainder characters of received data
Start text definitionSTX
Definition of the first end characterETX1
Definition of the second end characterETX2
Communication time out abnormal. Time unit:ms
Return fault code record of MODBUS
This is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience
command MODRW. The message that this command sends
during executing will be saved in D1256~D1295. User can check
according to this register content.
PLC will automatically convert ASCII data saved in the register
specified by users to hexadecimal format.

API
151
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Input Pulse Width Detection
PWD
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
C D E F
Note: The limit of S operand is specified as X10~X17

The setting range of D operand: D=D0~D999, two
continuous devices are used and only can be used one
time in the program.
Command
Explanation
: Source device
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
PWD
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Destenstation device which stores detection result
This command is used to detect the On pulse width of X10~X17 inputs and time unit is
100us.
occupy two continuous devices. The longest detectable time is 214,748.3647
seconds, about 3,579.139 minutes, about 59.652 hours.
If the On pulse width is less than 100us, the value of specified
is equal to
0(zero).
Program
Example
API
152
When X0=On, record the On pulse width of input X10 and store in D1, D0.
X0
PWD
X10
D0
Applicable models
EP
EH
Start to Measure the Execution

ES
Time of I Interrupt
RTMU
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Word devices

Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9
The limit of D operand is specified as K1~K1,000

Continuous
PWD
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
Command
Explanation
: Source device
: Destination device which stores measure time (time
unit is 1us)
The limit range of
is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten
interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165

in order. For example, when the value of
is K5, it means the number of
specified special D register is D1161.
9-11

After executing RTMU command, if the range of
inputted by user is
legal, this command will get the timer started to measure the execution time of I
interrupt and reset the content of special D register specified by
to 0(zero)
simultaneously. When reaching RTMD command, the timer will be closed and
measuring the execution time of I interrupt will end. At the same time, specify the
measuring execution time to the special D register specified by RTMD command.
This RTMU command is used with the next introduced RTMD command and these
two commands are all be used to measure the execution time of I interrupt service
program for the user to deal with high speed response and restrict to providing the
execution time of ISR (Interrupt Service Routine) at the beginning of the program
development.
API
153
Applicable models
EP
EH
End to Measure the Execution

ES
Time of I Interrupt
RTMD
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9

Continuous
PWD
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
: Source device
Command
Explanation
The limit range of
is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten
interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165

in order. For example, when the value of
is K5, it means the number of
specified special D register is D1161

When X0 is OffOn, enter into I001 interrupt subtoutine, the RTMU command will
Program
Example
start a 8-bit timer (unit time is 10us). When reaching RTMD command K0 , close the
timer and store the measurin time in special D register (there are totally ten registers
D1156~D1165 and it is specified as K0~K9).
FEND
M1000
I 001
RTMU
K0
RTMD
K0
D0
M1000
IRET
9-12

After developing PLC program completed, we recommanded that user should remove
Footnote
this command.
Additional Explanation:
1. Due to the time interrupt executed by RTMU command is a less priority (less
important than other interrupts), the timer may not be triggered and cannot count the
time when executing high-speed pulse input counting or specifying high-speed pulse
input during the execution period of RTMU command.
2. If user execute RTMU command but not execute RTMD command before the end of
program interrupt, then the interrupt will not be ended.
3. Please specially notice that RTMU command is executed by starting one inner timer
interrupt of PLC, therefore, the timer may be disordered if execute multiple RTMU or
RTMD commands simultaneously.
D1156~D1165: Special D registers specified by RTMU, RTMD command (numbers is
from K0 to K9).
API
154
RAND
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
D
Word devices

Note: S1 operand S2 operand

The usage range of operands S1, S2 is: K0 S1 , S2
K32,767
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Random Number

Continuous
RAND
RANDP
execution
32-bit command
Pulse
executioin
Flag: No
: lower bound for producing random number.

random number.
: upper bound for producing
: result for producing random number.
When user inputs S1 > S2, PLC will occur operand error and wont execute it, and
then M1067, M1068=On, and records error code 0E1A(HEX) in D1067.
Program
Example
When X10=On, the random number that produced during lower bound D0 and upper
bound D10 will save in D20.
X10
RAND
D0
D10
D20
9-13

API
155 D
S
D1
D2
Absolute Current Value Read
ABSR
Bit devices
X Y M S

Word devices
16-bit command

Continuous
DABSR
execution
Flag: For the description of M1010,
M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335,
M1336, M1337, M1346, please

command, DABSR is available and it can only be used for
ONCE in program.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
This command provides continuous absolute position data read function of mitsubishi
servo drive MR-J2 (with absolute position check function).
: Input signal from Servo
: Control signal for controling Servo
Absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo

is the input signal from Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices
+2. Device
and
data transmitting. Device
+1,
+1 are connected to the ABS (bit0, bit1) of Servo for

+2 is connected to Servo for transmitting data ready flag.
Please see the wiring drawing below for details.

is the control signal for controling Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices
+1,
+2. Device
is connected to Servo On (SON) of Servo, device
+1 is connected to ABS data transmitting mode of Servo and
+2 is connected
to ABS data request signal. Please see the wiring drawing below for details.
PLC
DVP32EH00T
SERVO AMP
MR-J2-A
+24V
S/S
X0
X1
X2
24G
Y4
Y5
Y6
C4
9-14
ABS(bit 0)
ABS(bit 1)
transmission data is ready
SERVO ON
ABS transmission mode
ABS requirement
CN1B
VDD
D01
ZSP
TLC
SG
4
19
6
10
SON
ABSM
ABSR
5
8
9

is the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo and it will use 2 continuous
devices
+1.
is low word and
+1 is high word. The absolute
position data should be stored in the current value registers (D1337, D1336)
corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339, D1338) corresponding
to CH1 pulse, so it is recommanded to specify these two registers. If specify other
devices, finally, the user still have to transmit the data into the current value registers
(D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339,
D1338) corresponding to CH1 pulse.
When DABSR command drvie contact turns ON and read starts, the command execution
completed flag M1029, M1030 will be energized. The flags must be reset by user.
When driving the DABSR command, please specify normally open contact. If the drive
contact of DABSR command turns Off when DABSR command read starts, the execution
of absolute current value read will be interrupted and result in incorrect data. Please be
careful and notice that.
If the drive contact of DABSR command turns Off after the read is completed, the Servo
On (SON) signal connected to
Program
Example
will also turn Off and the operation will be disabled.
When X7= On, the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo should be stored in the
current value register (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse. At the same time,
drive a timer T10 to count 5 second. If over 5 second and the absolute position data (32
bit) read not complete, it will drvie M10=On and this means the absolute position data (32
bit) read is abnormal.
When connecting to system, please set the power of DVP-PLC and SERVO AMP to be
On at the same time or set the SERVO AMP to be ON earlier than the power of DVP-PLC.
X7
DABS
X0
Y4
TMR
T0
K50
D1336
M11
ABS read completed
T0
M10
ABS absolute position

data read is abnormal
Read overtime
M1029
SET
execution completed
flag
M11
ABS absolute position

data read completed
9-15

Wiring
PLC Controller
DVP-20EH
+
24V
SERVO AMP
MR-H-A
X0
X1
X2
COM
Y4
Y5
Y6
COM4
ABS(bit 0)
ABS(bit 1)
SERVO AMP
MR-J2-A
CN1
transmitting data ready flag
SERVO ON
ABS data transmitting mode
ABS data request
CN1B
PF
ZSP
TLC
SG
24
23
25
16
X0
X1
X2
COM
SON
D13
D14
12
44
45
Y4
Y5
Y6
D01
ZSP
TLC
SG
4
19
6
10
SON
ABSM
ABSR
5
8
9
Time chart explanation of DABSR command absolute position data read:
Footnote
When DABSR command starts to execute, it will drive the signal of Servo On (SON)
and ABS data transmitting mode to output.
By the transmitting data ready flag and ABS request signal can confirm the
transmission and receipt of both sides and process the data transmission of current
value position data (32 bit) plus check data (6 bit).
Data is transmitted by ABS (bit0, bit1) two bits.
SERVO ON
SON
ABS data
transmitting mode ABSM
Transmitting
data ready
TLC
ABS data
request
ABSR
ABS(bit 1)
ABS(bit 0)
AMP output
Controller output
ZSP
AMP output
D01
AMP output
Current value position data 32-bit
+(plus) check data 6-bit
9-16

This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning
function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-J2-A Servo drive.
The Servo motor with absolute positioning function should be rotated more than one
revolution and given the reset signal before manufacturing equipments. Please use one of
the following methods to proceed the first time zero point return:
1.
Complete zero point return by using reset signal function to execute API 156 ZRN
command.
2.
After using JOG or manual operation to adjust the zero point position of the
equipment, input reset signal SERVO AMP. As for the reset signal input, please refer
to the external switches diagram below to see if using DVP-PLC controller to output.
For the detail of the wiring between DVP-PLC and Mitsubishi MR-J2-A, please
refer to the API 159 DRVA.
Use M itsubishi MR-J2as example
reset
CR
SG
10
Flags description:
M1010:
In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will
output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
M1029:
In EH series MPU, M1029=On after the first group pulse (Y0, Y1) pulse output
complete or other relative command complete execution.
M1030:
In EH series MPU, M1030= On after the second group pulse (Y2, Y3) pulse
output complete.
M1334:
In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On.
M1335:
M1336:
In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag
M1337:
M1346:
In EH series MPU, ZRN command CLEAR output signal enable flag
Special registers description:
D1337, D1336:
1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the
current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156
ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the
first output group Y0, Y1, the current value increases or decreases
in accordance with the direction of rotation.
2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY,
API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.
D1338, D1339:
1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the
current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156
ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the
second output group Y2, Y3, the current value increases or
decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation.
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY,
API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.
9-17

D1340:
D1341, D1342:
D1343:
API
156 D
S1
S2
S3
D
Zero Point Return
ZRN
Bit devices
X Y M S
Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and

last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 57
PLSY, API 59 PLSR) are executed.
Setting range: This speed can not less than 10Hz. If the speed is less
than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output by 10Hz.
Factory setting is 200Hz.
Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting
speed.
D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the
maximum speed setting when positioning control commands ((API
156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: it is 200KHz.
Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which
maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step
acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control
commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are
executed.
Setting range: This acceleration / deceleration time cant be less than
50ms. If it less than 50ms or larger than 5000ms, it will output by
50ms.Facotry setting is 100ms.
Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting
speed.
Word devices

Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the

information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2,, D.
: Zero point return speed
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
16-bit command(9 STEPS)

Continuous
ZRN
execution

Continuous
DZRN
execution
M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335,
M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer
to the footnote of API 155 ABSR
command.
: Creep speed
: Near point signal (DOG)
: Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module)

is specified as the zero point return speed as, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10
to 200,000Hz.
is specified as the creep speed, the lower speed after near point signal (DOG)
turns On and its available range is 10 to 32,767Hz.
is specified as the near point signal (DOG) input (A contact input). If any Y, M, S
device other than an input relay (X) is specified for the near point signal, it will be
affected by the scanning cycle of the PLC and the dispersion of zero point may be
large.
9-18

Pulse output device
only can be specified as Y0, Y2.
When executing API 158 DRVI and API 159 DRVA command, the PLC store the
FWD/REV pulse which increase or decrease during operation in current vlaue
registers (Y0: D1337,D1336, Y2: D1339, D1338) so that it can always know the
machine position. However, the data may lost when the power of PLC is Off.
Therefore, the machine should execute zero point turn during initial operation to input
the zero point.
Program
Example
When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outpus from Y0 and zero point return will be
energized. When it reaches the near point signal (DOG), X5= On and it will change to
creep speed. Then, a frequency of 1KHz outpus from Y0 and the command will be
energized. Pulses output will stop until X5=Off.
M10
ZRN
K20000 K1000
X5
Y0
Time chart explanation of reset signal output:
Footnote
1.
When reset flag M1346= On, the reset signal is sent to the servo drive when zero
point trun is completed.
2.
Output device of reset signal:

CH0(Y0, Y1) reset output device (Y4)
CH1(Y2, Y3) reset output device (Y5)
Initial
position
Zero return speed
program interrupt
Creep speed
ON
Output near point

signal (DOG)
scan in circle
DOG ON
OFF
reset signal
Reset signal Y4 or Y5
about 20ms
+ 1 scan time
inside 1ms
ON
M1336, M1337
Pulse output monitor OFF
Explanation of zero point return operation:

1.
When ZRN command is executed, accelerate to Zero point return speed

and start to move.
2.
When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from Off to On, it will decelerate to Creep
speed
3.
When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from On to Off and the same time of pulse
output stop, the content value of current value register (D1337, D1336) of CH0
pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will be 0(zero). Also,
if the reset signal flag M1346= On, the reset signal Y4 or Y5 will output
simultaneously.
9-19

4.
When the operation of pulse output is completed and flag M1029, M1030 is
activated, indication flag M1336 sent by CH0 pulse or indication flag M1337 sent
by CH1 pulse will be Off.
5.
Hence, the command can not search the position of Near point signal (DOG) and
the operation of ZRN command only can be processed in unidirection. In the
operation of ZRN command, the content value of current value register (D1337,
D1336) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will
decrease.
Near point
signal
LSR
(Backward limit) (DOG)
ON switch near
zero point
DOG
LSF
(Forward limit)
Motor
Front end
Back end
Backward
Forward
decelerate to
Creep speed
initial position
Zero return speed
DOG back end detect DOG front end detect

( zero point position )
6.
This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning
function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-H-A Servo drive, MR-J2-A Servo
drvie. It can record current position even the power is Off. Besides, because the
current position of the servo drive can be read by API 155 ABSR command of
DVP-EH series PLC, the ZRN command should only be executed for one time.
After the power is Off, it is unnecessary to execute the ZRN command again.
7.
When CH0 and CH1 pulse execute the ZRN command, the current value of pulse
output frequency will display in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397). After the
operation of ZRN command is completed, the last output frequency value will be
stored in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397).
8.
When the drive contact of ZRN command is On, CH0 and CH1 pulse will read the
content value set by D1343t as aeceleration time. After accelerating to zero point
return speed, wait for the entry of the near point signal (DOG) and output the creep
speed of low speed by decelerating. Immediately stop output pulse when the near
point signal (DOG) turns Off..
9-20

API
157 D
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
D1
D2
Variable Speed Pulse Output
PLSV
Word devices

Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information
of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D.
Command
Explanation

output module)
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
PLSV
execution

Continuous
DPLSV
execution
M1029, M1030, M1334,
M1335, M1336, M1337, please
refer to the footnote of API 155
ABSR command.
: Pulse output device (Please use transistor as
: Rotation direction signal
is specified as pulse output frequemcy, 16-bit 1 to 32,767Hz and -1 to -32,768

Hz or 32-bit 1 to 200,000Hz, -1 to -200,000 Hz. The (+) and (-) symbol indicates the
positive and negative direction. The pulse output frequency can be changed even
when pulses are being output.
Pulse output device
only can be specified as Y0, Y2.
is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of

. When
is positive (+),
is On. When
is negative (-),
is
Off.
PLSV command do not has acceleration/deceleration setting function. Therefore,
acceleration/deceleration are not performed at start and stop. If cushion start and stop
is desired, please increase or decrease the output pulse frequency by using API 67
RAMPcommand.
If the drive contact turns Off while PLSV command execute to output pulse, the
machine will stop without deceleration.
When the drive contact of PLSV command truns Off, it is impossible to drive PLSV
command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse
send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set.
Program
Example
When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outputs from Y0. Y5= On represents the
positive direction.
M10
PLSV
K20000
Y0
Y5
9-21

API
158 D
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
D1
D2
Word devices

information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Drive to Increment
DRVI
: Numbers of pulses (Target device)
16-bit command(9 STEPS)

Continuous
DRVI
execution

Continuous
DDRVI
execution
M1029, M1030, M1334,
M1335, M1336, M1337,
M1346, please refer to the
footnote.
Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module)
Rotation direction signal

is specified as the numbers of pulses (relative positioning). The available
numbers of
are:
16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767

32-bit command: -999,999 to +999,999. The positive (+) and negative (-) symbol
indicates the forward and reverser direction.
is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of
are:
16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz

32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz
is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can
be specified as Y0, Y2.
. When
is positive (+),
is On. When
is negative (-),
is
Off.
The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336
low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of
CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value
register will decrease.
The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVI command is
executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.
If the drive contact turns off when the DRVI command is executed, the machine will
decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn
On.
9-22

When the drive contact of DRVI command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVI
Program
Example
When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0
(relative positioning). Y5= On represents the positive direction.
M10
DRVI K20000 K2000
Y0
Y5
Operation explanation of relative positioning control: Using a positive or a negative
Footnote
symbol to specify travel distance from the current position is also a kind of drive method
of relative positioning control.
+3,000
Current
position
-3,000
Settings of relative positioning and operation speed:

Maximum speed
(D1342,D1341)
Actual
acceleration
time
Initial value(default) : 200,000Hz

Actual
deceleration
time
Output pulse
frequency
First step
acceleration
(D1340)
Current
position
Last step
deceleration
(D1340)
Accel/Decel time
Accel/Decel time
Initial value : 100ms

(D1343)
Initial value: 100ms

(D1343)
Output pulse
numbers
The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is deternined
by the following equation:
1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency =
MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 ))
2. Even if the specified pulse output frequency
is lower than the value of the
calculation value of the equation above, the calculation value of the
equation
above
will still be actually used while outputting the pulses.

3. The actual output pulse frequency of the first step acceleration and last step
deceleration also use the calculation value of the equation above as the minimum value.
9-23

See below for an example:
1.
Minimum value of output pulse frequency =

50000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) = 500Hz .
2.
Although the specified output pulse frequency
is equal to 400 Hz (lower than
the calculation value, 500 Hz), the frequency of 500 Hz will be still be used when
output the pulses.
3.
If specifying the output pulse frequency
= 50,000 Hz, minimum value of
output pulse frequency for the first step acceleration and last step deceleration will
still be the calculation value, 500 Hz.
50000Hz
500Hz
500Hz
Flags description:
M1010:
In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse
M1029:
In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete.

M1030:
In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete.

9-24
M1334:
M1335:
M1336:
M1337:
M1346:
In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag

Special registers description:
D1337, D1336: 1.
D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the current

value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the
current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction
of rotation.
2.
D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total

number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API
59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1.
D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current

value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3,
the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the
direction of rotation.
number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API
59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3.
D1340:
Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last
step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN,
API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 1/10 or less of maximum speed (D1342, D1341)
If the current value exceeds the range, it is automatically set to 1/10 of
the maximum speed during operation.
3. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the
resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while
setting speed.
D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum

speed setting when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API
158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 10 to 200,000Hz, the factory setting (default) is 200,000Hz
Note: The output pulse frequency specified by operand S2 of API 158
DRVI command should be under this maximum speed.
D1343:
Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which

maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step
acceleration and last step deceleration (D1340) when positioning control
commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed.
Setting range: 50 to 5,000 ms, the factory setting (default) is 100ms
9-25

API
159 D
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
D1
D2
Data Backup MEMORY Write In
DRVA
Word devices

information of the usage range of Operand S1, S2, D1, D2.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
DRVA
execution

Continuous
DDRVA
execution
M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335,
M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer
to the footnote of API 158 DRVI
command.
: Numbers of pulses (Target device)
Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module)
Rotation direction signal

is specified as the numbers of pulses (absolute positioning). The available
numbers of
are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767
32-bit command: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647. The positive (+) and negative (-)
symbol indicates the forward and reverser direction.
is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of
are:
16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz. 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz

is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can
be specified as Y0, Y2.
. When
is positive (+),
is On. When
is negative (-),
is
Off
The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336
low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of
CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value
register will decrease.
The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVA command is
executed. The contents will be changed when the next execution is driven.
If the drive contact turns off when the DRVA command is executed, the machine will
decelerates and stops and the execution completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn
On. D1343 is used to set acceleration / deceleration time.
When the drive contact of DRVA command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVA
9-26

Program
Example
When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0
(absolute positioning), Y5= On represents the positive direction.
M10
DRVA K20000 K2000
Y0
Y5
Operation explanation of absolute positioning control: Specifying travel distance from a
Footnote
zero point is also a kind of drive method of absolute positioning control.

+3,000
F0 first step acceleration

last step deceleration
(D1340) min. speed: 10Hz
Target position
Zero point
0
Settings of absolute positioning and operation speed:

Tg acceleration
sampling time
Initial value: 200,000Hz

F max. speed
(D1342,D1341)
Fa accelerated gradient
output pulse frequency

F0 first step
(acceleration)
F0 last step (deceleration)
(D1340)
min. speedG 10Hz
(D1340)
T Accel/Decel time
Current Initial value: 50ms

(D1343)
position
Accel/Decel time
Initial value: 50ms

(D1343)
min. speedG 10Hz

output
pulse
number
The relation between actual frequency and acceleration / deceleration time is in the
following:
Tg: sampling time of acceleration / deceleration
T: acceleration / deceleration time
Fa: acceleration / deceleration gradient
F: Max. frequency
F0: first step acceleration, last step deceleration
P: total pulse number
1. Tg = T / ( 60 * 1000 )
2. Fa = (F F0) / 60
3. P0 (output pulse number of first step (acceleration)/last step (deceleration)) = 1
4. Each segment frequency:
i. F(n) = F0 + Fa * n ( n = 1~60)
5. Output pulse number of each segment:
P(n) = Tg * F (n)
Restriction:
1. When each segment of output pulse number P(n)1, PLC wont output pulse and
jump to next segment.
2. Speed of first step (acceleration) and last step (deceleration) F0 cant less than
10Hz. If it is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output 10Hz.
9-27

3. If total pulse number P 3, acceleration/deceleration function will be invalid.
Wiring of DVP-EH series and Delta ASDA servo drive:
Delta Servo Drive
EH MPU
ASDA series
220VAC
single-phase
N
+24V
W
CN1
S/S
DO_COM
24G
X0
start
X1
zero point reset
X2
JOG(+)
JOG(-)
X3
stop
X5
error reset
X6
forward limit
X7
reverse limit
DI 1 : servo start
X10
SRDY
X11
ZSPD
X12
TPOS
X13
ALARM
X14
DO1+
DO1-
17
DO2+
COM+ 11
DO2-
CN1
VDD
X4
servo motor
220VAC
3-phase power
24V
DI 1
DO3+
DI 5
33
DO3DO4+
DI 6
32
DI 7
31
26 DO4-
DI 8
30
SRDY
ZSPD
TPOS
ALARM
DO_COM
COM- 50
DI 5 : servo reset
DI 6 : forward limit
CN2
DI 7 : reverse limit
DI 8 : emergency stop
CN1
Z phase signal (zero point signal)

DO_COM
/OZ
Encoder
Error
Counter
24
COM- 45
Electric
Gear
pulse clear
DI 2
Y2
Y0
pulse output
200KPPS
/PLS 43
COM- 47
C0
Y1
10
COM- 45
C2
forward/reverse direction
C1
/SIGN 36
COM- 49
DVP32EH00T
Note:
Please connect forward/reverse limit switch to SERVO AMP.
Wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi
MR-J2-A Servo drive:
9-28

Mitsubishi servo drive
EH MPU
MR-J2 series
single power
N
+24V
CN1A
S/S
CN1B
24G
SON
X0
start
RES
14
X1
zero point reset
LSP
16
X2
JOG(+)
LSN
17
X3
JOG(-)
TL
X4
stop
X5
error reset
X6
forward limit
reverse limit SONG servo start
RESG servo reset
X7
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
Rcal1
Rcal2
Rcal3
EMG 15
SG
14
RD
Rc3
18
INP
Rc2
18
ALM
VDD
CN1B
Rc1
10
24V
13 COM
LSP G forward limit

servo
malfunctioin LSN G reverse limit
SV-END
TL G emergency stop
CN2
SV-READY
Z phase signal
(zero point signal)
servo motor
220VAC
220VAC
3-phase power
CN1A
OP
14
LG
Encoder
Error
Counter
Electric
Gear
Y2
pulse clear
C2
Y0
SG
20
pulse output
C0
Y1
CR
PP
SG
10
forward/reverse direction
C1
NP
SG
10
200KPPS
DVP32EH00T
1. Connect to PLC when detecting absolute position.

2. Connect the forward/reverse limit switch to the SERVO AMP.
Cautions when designing position control program:
There are no using time limit for position control command API 156 ZRN, API 157
PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA. User can use these commands many times in a
program but be sure to follow the following cautions below:
1.
Do not drive the position control commands which use the same output CH0(Y0,
Y1) or CH1(Y2, Y3) simultaneously. Otherwise, they will be treated as double coils
and can not function correctly.
2.
It is recommended to use step ladder commands (STL) to design positioning

control program (please see the programming example shown below).
Notes when using position control commands API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158
DRVI, API 159 DRVA with pulse output commandsAPI 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59
PLSR:
9-29

The current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current
value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 will both be used in position
control commands and pulse output commands and this will result in complicated
operation. To avoid incorrect operation when pulse output commands are required while
position control commands are used, it is recommended to use position control
commands in place of pulse output commands.
Explanation of pulse output terminals Y0, Y1of CH0 pulse and Y2, Y3 of CH1 pulse:
1.
Voltage range: DC5V to DC24V
2.
Current range: 10 mA to 100 mA
3.
Output pulse frequency: Y0, Y2 is 200KHz, Y1, Y3 is 10KHz.
Pulse output signal settings of positioning operation:

There are three kinds of pulse output signal of positioning operation for DVP-EH series
PLC:
1.
1-phase 1 output + direction (it is recommended to use this)

U/D
2.
U/D FLAG
1-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)
3.
D
2-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz)
A
B
Please follow the PLC output settings above to set the pulse input type of parameters
on SERVO AMP or stepping motor.
Flags description:
M1010:
In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will
output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will
M1029:
In EH series MPU, M1029= On after first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse
output complete or other relative commands complete execution.
M1030:
In EH series MPU, M1030= On after second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse
output complete.
M1334:
M1335:
M1336:
M1337:
M1346:
In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag
9-30

Special registers description of EH series MPU:
The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two
D1220:
1. K0: Y0 output
4. K3: Y1 output
D1221:
The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two
1. K0: Y2 output
4. K3: Y3 output
When several high speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) and position
control commands (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) all use Y0 to output pulse in one
program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will
perform the command which has fewest step numbers.
Programming example for forward/reverse operation:
For wiring, please refer to the wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series
PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2-A Servo drive.
There is one operation positionng is performed by using the absolute position method
shown below:
500000
Output pulse frequency

200,000Hz
100
Zero point
500Hz
500Hz
Acceleration/
Deceleration time
200ms
In this example, the minimum output pulse frequency calculated by equation=

MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 ))
as the actual minimum output pulse frequency=

200,000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) = 1,000Hz .
9-31

Programming example when using step ladder command (STL):
X0
M1334
Output to X-axis (Y0)

is stopped
M1346
Return to the zero point

with reset signal is valid
Stop
M1000
S0
S10 S11
S12
S13
S1334
M5
Operation is stopped
Zero point JOG(+) JOG(-) Positioning Positioning Y0

return
in normal
in reverse
output stop
rotation
rotation
M1002
DMOV
K10000
D1341
Set the maximum speed

200,000Hz D1342,D13
MOV
K200
D1343
Set the acceleration/

deceleration time
200ms D1343
1. If the maximum speed (D1342,D1341), the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) can set

in their factory setting value (default), then the programming is not required. The
factory setting value (default) of the maximum speed (D1342,D1341) is 200,000Hz.
The factory setting value (default) of the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) is 100
ms.
9-32

X1
M5
Zero point
return
X2
Operation
being stopped
RST
M10
Reset the zero point return

completed flag
RST
M12
Reset the normal rotation

positioning completed flag
RST
M13
Reset the reverse rotation

SET
S0
Drive the zero point return

status (S0)
RST
M12

RST
M13

SET
S10
Drive the JOG(+) status (S11)
RST
M12

RST
M13

SET
S11
Drive the JOG(-) status (S11)
RST
M12

RST
M13

SET
S12
Drive the normal rotation

positioning status(S12)
RST
M12

RST
M13

SET
S13
Drive the reverse rotation

positioning status(S13)
M5
Operation
being stopped
JOG(+)
2
X3
M5
Operation
being stopped
JOG(-)
2
X4
M5
Positioning
in normal
rotation
X5
Zero point
Operation
being stopped return
completed
flag
M5
Positioning
in reverse
rotation
M10
M10
Zero point
Operation
being stopped return
completed
flag
2. The maximum size of a JOG command is 999,999 pulses, as this is equal to the
maximum number of output pulses for API 158 DRVI command. If a greater distance is
required, please execute the JOG command again.
9-33

S0
M50
DZRN
Zero point
return
K50000
K5000
Zero point
return
speed
Creep
speed
X6
Y0
Zero point return command

operate in the (-) direction
Near point
Pulse output
signal (DOG) device
M1029
Execution
completed
SET
M10
RST
S0
M1336 M50
Y0 being
output
Reset the zero point return

completed flag
Zero point return is completed

(auto-reset)
M1000
M50
S10
JOG(+)
X2
M51
DDRVI K999999 K30000
JOG(+)
Y0
Output
Output pulse Output
pulse
numbers
pulse
(maximum
frequency device
value in (+)
direction)
M1336 M51
RST
S10
Y0 being
output
Y4
Using relative positioning

command execute the JOG
operation in the (+) direction
(Y4=On)
Rotation
direction
signal output
device
JOG(+) operation is completed

(auto-reset)
M1000
M51
S11
X3
M52
DDRVI K-999999 K30000
JOG(-)
JOG(-)
Output
Output pulse Output
pulse
numbers
pulse
(maximum
frequency device
value in (-)
direction)
M1336 M52
RST
Y0 being
output
M1000
Y0
S11
Y4
Using relative positioning

command execute the JOG
operation in the (-) direction
(Y4=Off)
Rotation
direction
signal output
device
JOG(-) operation is completed

(auto-reset)
3
M52
RUN monitor
3. In order to prevent position control commands being driven at the same time, the
command drive timing is delayed by one scanning cycle.
9-34

S12
M53
Positioning
in normal
rotation
DDRVA K500000 K100000

M1029
Execution
completed
Y0
SET
M12
Normal rotation positioning

completed flag
RST
M12
Normal rotation positioning

is completed (auto-reset)
M1336 M53
Y0 being
output
Y4
Using absolute positioning

command move to the
absolute position ? 00000
(Y4=On)
M1000
M53
S13
M54
DDRVA K100
Positioning
in reverse
rotation
K100000
M1029
Y0
Y4
SET
M13
Reverse rotation positioning

completed flag
RST
M13
Reverse rotation positioning

is completed (auto-reset)
Execution
completed
Using absolute positioning

command move to the
absolute position ? 00
(Y4=Off)
M1336 M54
Y0 being
output
M1000
M54
RET
END
API
160
TCMP
S1
S2
S3
S
D
Time Compare
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T

Note: The range of operand S1, S2, S3: S1=0~23, S2 =S3=S0~59
Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices.

Continuous
Pulse
TCMP
TCMPP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None
9-35

: setting the hour of comparison time, setting range is K0~K23
Command
Explanation
the minute of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59

of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59
: setting
: setting the second
: Current time of real time clock
: Comparison result
,
is compared to the current value of the head address
save the comparsion result in
and
is the hour of current time and the content is K0~K23.

current time and the content is K0~K59.
+1 is the minute of
+2 is the second of current time and the
content is K0~K59.
The current time of real time clock specified by
is read by using TRD command
previously and then compared by using TCMP command. If the content of

exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the command wont
be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
When X10= On, the command is executed and the current time of real time clock in
Program
Example
(D20~D22) is compared to the set value 12:20:45 and the result is shown at
M10~M12. When X10 goes from OnOff, the command is not executed but the
On/Off state before M10~M12 is kept.
Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of , , are given.
X10
M10
TCMP
K12
K20
K45
D20
M10
ON when 12:20:45
>
ON when 12:20:45
ON when 12:20:45
<
M11
M12
API
161
TZCP
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
S1
S2
S

D
Note: Operand S1, S2, S occupies 3 continuous devices.
S1 should be less than S2, i.e. S1 S2
9-36
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Time Zone Compare
D E F

Continuous
Pulse
TZCP
TZCPP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: None

: Lower limit time data
Command
Explanation
time clock
: Upper limit time data
: Comparison result
is compared to the time period of

stored in
: Current time of real
and the comparsion result is
+1,
+2: respectively represent Hours, Minutes, Seconds of
the lower limit time data.

,
+1,
the Upper limit time data

,
+1,
the current time of perpetual calender.

The current time of real time clock specified by
is read by using TRD command
previously and then compared by using TZCP command. If the content of

,
S ,
exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the
command wont be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A
(HEX) in D1067.
If
<
situations,
is On. If
>
+2 is On. Besides these two
+1 is On. (Lower bound
should be less than upper bound
.)
When X10= On, the command is executed and one of M10~M12 will be On. When
Program
Example
X10=Off, the command is not executed but the state of M10~M12 before X10=Off is
kept.
X10
TZCP
D0
D10
D20
M10
M10
ON when
M11
ON when
M12
ON when
API
162
TADD
S1
S2
D
Time Addition
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices
H KnX KnY KnM KnS T
Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.

D E F

Continuous
Pulse
TADD
TADDP
execution
execution
32-bit command

M1022 (Carry flag)
9-37

: Time augend
Command
Explanation
: Time addend
. The time data in the register specified by
the time data in the register specified by

register specified by
If the time data in
: Addition result
is added to
and the addition result is stored in the
.
,
exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At
this time, the command wont be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067.
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On. The
value of the result shows in
is the time remaining above 24 hours.
If the addition result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
When X10= On, the command is executed. Add the time data specified by D0~D2 and
Program
Example
D10~D12 and store the result in the register specified by D20~D22.
X10
TADD
D0
D10
D20
8
10
20
6
40
6
14
50
26
08:10:20
06:40:06
14:50:26
If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On.
X10
TADD
API
163
TSUB
Bit devices
X Y M S
D0
D20
18
40
30
11
30
8
6
10
38
18:40:30
11:30:08
06:10:38
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Time Subtraction
Word devices

S1

S2

D
Note: Operand S1, S2, D occupies 3 continuous devices.
ES series models do not support this command
TSUBP).
9-38
D10
D E F
(TSUB,

Continuous
Pulse
TSUB
TSUBP
execution
execution
32-bit command

M1021 (Borrow flag)

: Time Minuend
Command
Explanation
: Time Subtrahend
. The time data in the register specified by
from the time data in the register specified by

register specified by
If the time data in
is subtracted
and the result is stored in the
.
,
exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At
this time, the command wont be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the Zero flag M1020= On.
The value of the result shows in
is the time remaining below 0 (zero) hour.
If the subtraction result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag
M1020= On.
Except using API 166 TRD command, MOV command also can be used to move the
special register D1315 (Hours), D1314 (Minutes), D1313 (Seconds) to the three
registers specified to read the current time of real time clock.
Program
Example
When X10= On, the command is executed. The time data specified by D10~D12 is
subtracted from the time data specified by D0~D2 and the result is stored in the
register specified by D20~D22.
X10
TSUB
D0
D10
D20
20
20
5
14
30
8
5
49
57
20:20:05
14:30:08
05:49:57
If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the borrow flag M1021= On.
X10
TSUB
D0
D10
D20
5
20
30
19
11
15
10
9
15
05:20:30
19:11:15
10:09:15
9-39

API
Time Data Read
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Word devices

D

Continuous
Pulse
TRD
TRDP
execution
execution
166
TRD
Bit devices
X Y M S
32-bit command
Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076

(Please refer the footnote for detail.)
Command
Explanation
: The device stored the reading current time of perpetual calender

A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC and this clock
provide year (A.D.), week, month, date, hours, minutes and seconds total 7 data
devices stored in D1319~D1313. The function of TRD command is for program
designer to read the current time of perpetual calender directly and store the reading
data in the 7 data registers specified by
D1319 is read as a two digit number and this setting can be change to a four digit
number, please refer the footnote of API 167 TWR command for the detail.
Program
Example
When X0=On, read the current time of perpetual calender to the specified register
D0~D6.
The content of D1318: 1 is indicated Monday, 2 is indicated Tuesday,, 7 is indicated
Sunday.
X0
TRD
Special D
device
D1319
Meaning
Content
00~99
1~7
D1
D1317
Year (A.D.)
Day
(Mon.~Sun.)
Month
General D
device
D0
1~12
D2
Year (A.D.)
Day
(Mon.~Sun.)
Month
D1316
Date
1~31
D3
Date
D1315
Hours
0~23
D4
Hours
D1314
Minutes
0~59
D5
Minutes
D1313
Seconds
0~59
D6
Seconds
D1318
9-40
D0
Meaning

Error Flag of the real time clock built in DVP-EH/EP series PLC:
Footnote
Device
M1016
Name
year display
of perpetual
calender
M1017
30 seconds
correction
M1076
perpetual
calender fault
Function
It displays 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319
when it is Off.
It displays (2000+ 2 right-most digit number of year of
D1319) when it is On.
It will correct when it is from Off On. (if it is 0-29
seconds, it will reset to 0. If it is 30-59 seconds, add 1 to
minute and set 0 to second)
It will be On when setting is out of range or run out of
battery. (it only check when power is on)
Device
D1313
D1314
D1315
D1316
D1317
D1318
D1319
Name
Second
Minue
Hour
Day
Month
Week
Year
Range
0-59
0-59
0-23
1-31
1-12
1-7
0-99 (two right-most digit number of year)
The method to correct perpetual calender:

There are two methods to correct built-in API perpetual calender:
1. specified command to correct
please refer to command TWR (API 167) for reference.
2. setting by peripheral
using WPLSoft (software to edit ladder diagram) to set
Display four digit number of year:
1. It usually displays 2 digit number of year (for example: only display 03 for year
2003). If you want to display 4 digit number, please key in following program at the
start of program.
M1002
SET
M1016
display 4 digit number for year
2. It will display 4 bits (two right-most digit number + 2000) to replace original 2 digit
number.
3. If you want to write new time setting in 4 digit number display mode, only 2 digit
number you can write in and its range is 00-99 which corresponds to year
2000-2099. For example, 00=year 2000, 50=year 2050 and 99=year 2099.
9-41

API
167
TWR
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Time Data Write In
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S

Continuous
Pulse
TWR
TWRP
execution
execution
32-bit command
Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076

Please refer the footnote of API 166
TRD command.
Command
Explanation
: The device stored the new setting time of perpetual calender

A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC. This command can
be used to write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock when
adjusting the built in perpetual calender.
When executing this command, new setting time will be written in the internal
perpetual calender clock immediately. Therefore, please notice that the written-in new
setting time if match the current time then when executing this command.
If the time data in
exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this
time, the command wont be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
Program
Example
1
When X0= On, write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock.
X0
TWRP D20
Meaning
Content
Special D
device
Meaning
D20
Year (A.D.)
00~99
D1319
Year (A.D.)
D21
Day
(Mon.~Sun.)
1~7
D1318
Day
(Mon.~Sun.)
D22
Month
1~12
D1317
Month
D23
Date
1~31
D1316
Date
D24
Hours
0~23
D1315
Hours
D25
Minutes
0~59
D1314
Minutes
D26
Seconds
0~59
D1313
Seconds
Real Time Clock
New setting time
9-42
General D
device

Program
Example
2
Set the current time of perpetual calender and adjust the time to 2002/03/23, Tuesday,
15:27:30 (please refer the following program example).
The content of D0~D6 is the new setting time of perpetual calender.
When X10= On, then can change the current time of perpetual calender clock to
setting time.
When X11=On every time, the perpetual calender clock will perform the 30 seconds
correction. Correction means that if the second hand of perpetual calender colock is
located between 1~29, the second time will be automatically calculated as 0 (zreo)
second and the minute time wont change. However, if the second hand of perpetual
calender colock is located between 30~59, the second time will also be automatically
calculated as 0 (zreo) second but the minute time will increase 1 minute.
X10
MOV
K02
D0
Year (2002)
MOV
K2
D1
Day (Tuesday)
MOV
K3
D2
Month(March)
MOV
K26
D3
Date
MOV
K15
D4
Hours
MOV
K27
D5
Minutes
MOV
K30
D6
Seconds
TWR
D0
Write the setting time in the perpetual calender
X11
M1017
Footnote
30 seconds correction
Using WPLSoftsoftware also can set the time of perpetual calender.

The year (A.D.) display four digit number:
1. The year usually only dispaly two digit number (for example, year 1998 only
display 98). But this can be changed to a four digit number by setting the following
program during the first program scan.
M1002
MOV
K2000
D1018
The year dispaly four digit number
2. The year display will switch from two digit number to four digit number after the first
scan program when PLC is running. K2,000 in the command is a fix value.
3. If the new setting time is desired to be written in under the four digit number mode,
also only two digit number can be written in. The range for the year of two digit
number is 0~99. Hence, the corresponding range for the year of four digit number
is 1980~2079.
9-43

For example:
80(a two digit number) is equal to 1980(a four digit number)
99(a two digit number) is equal to 1999(a four digit number)
00(a two digit number) is equal to 2000 (a four digit number)
79(a two digit number) is equal to 2079 (a four digit number)
API
169 D
HOUR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Hour Meter
Word devices

S1
S2

D
Note: Operand S only can use 16-bit command when using F
device.
Operand D1 occupies 2 continuous devices.
Command HOUR can be used for four times in program.
Command
Explanation
: setting time for turning

Continuous
HOUR
execution
32-bit command
Continuous
DHOUR
execution
Flag: None
on and unit is hour. Its setting range is
K1~K32,767.
: current time suring counting and unit is hour. Its setting range is
K1~K32,767.
: output device.
+1 saves current time that less than one
hour and unit is second. Its setting range is K0~K3,599.

If using input contact to be timer, output device will be On when attaining setting time
(unit is hour). It can provide user a timer for managing machine operation or maintain.
After output device is On, timer will keep on counting.
When 16-bit timer counts up to max. value (32,767 hours and 3,599 seconds) of
16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount,
-
and
+1 need to clear to 0.
When 32-bit timer counts up to max. value (2,147,483,647 hours and 3,599 seconds)
of 16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount,
Program
Example
1
For 16-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When
the time reaches 100 hours, Y0 will turns On and D0 will record the current time (unit
is hour, but if D0 is less than one hour, unit will be second and its range is 0~3599).
X0
Y10
Y10
HOUR K100
Program
Example
2
D0
Y0
For 32-bit command: When X0=On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When
the time reaches 40000 hours, Y0 will turns On. D0 and D1 will record the current time
(unit is hour). If current time is less than one hour, D2 will record the current time (unit:
second).
9-44

X0
Y10
Y10
DHOUR K40000
API
170 D
GRY
D0
BIN
Y0
Bit devices
X Y M S
S
D
Word devices

Note: Operands S and D only can use 16-bit command when
using F device.
Command
Explanation
: Source device
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
GRAY CODE

Continuous
Pulse
GRY
GRYP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DGRY
DGRYP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Device which store Gray code
The BIN value in the specified device by
is converted to the GRAY CODE
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by

The range of
that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows:
16-bit command 0~32,767

32-bit command 0~2,147,483,647
If the BIN value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as Operation Error.
At this time, the command wont be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error
Program
Example
When X0=On, constant K 6513 is converted to the GRAY CODE and stored in the
K4Y20.
X0
GRY
K6513
K4Y20
b0
b15
K6513=H1971 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
Y37
Y20
GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
K4Y20
9-45

API
171 D
GBIN
GRAY CODE
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S
D
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
BIN

Continuous
Pulse
GBIN
GBINP
execution
execution
Continuous
Pulse
DGBIN
DGBINP
execution
execution
Flag: None
: Source device which store GRAY CODE
: Device which store
converted BIN value

The GRAY CODE value in the specified device by
is converted to the BIN value
equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by
This command can be used to read the value from an absolute position type encoder
(it is generally a gray code encoder) which is connected to PLC inputs. Convert the
value to the BIN value and store it in the specified register.
Program scan time plus input response time is equal to the output delay time specified
by
If the source is set to inputs X0~X17, it can speed up the input response time by using
REFF command (API151) or D1020 (adjust input response time).
The range of
that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows:
16-bit command 0~32,767

32-bit command 0~2,147,483,647
If the GRAY CODE value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as
Operation Error.
Program
Example
When X20=On, the GRAY CODE value in the absolute position type encoder
connected to X0~X17 inputs is converted to BIN value and stored in D10.
X20
GBIN
K4X0
D10
X17
K4X0
X0
GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15
b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
9-46

API
180
MAND
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2
n
Note: specific range of operand n is 1~256.
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX,
KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix AND
: Area where
: matrix length
Do matix AND operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of

the result in
Flag: None
: matrix source device 2.

calculated result is stored

Continuous
Pulse
MAND
MANDP
execution
execution
and save
The operation rule of matix AND is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are all 1 otherwise it is 0.
Program
Example
When X0=On, do MAND and matrix AND operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows
(D20-D22) of 16-bit register.
X0
MAND
D0
D10
b15
D20
K3
b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Before
Execution
MAND
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After
Execution
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Explanation for matrix command:
Footnote
1. A matix is made up of 1 and above continuous 16-bit registers. The register

number that made up matrix is called matrix length n. There are 16 X n bits (dots)
for a matix and a bit (dot) once for a oprand unit.
2. 16 X n bits (serial number b0 b16n-1) will be regarded as a set of a serial single
point for matrix command. Thus, operate with a specific point in the set not value.
3. The matrix command is convenient and important application command for dealing
with single point to multi-points or multi-point to multi-point, such as move, copy,
compare, search, etc.
9-47

4. It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one point of 16 X n points during
marix operation. This regsiter calls Pr (pointer). The setting range is 0 16n-1 and
correspond to b0 b16n-1 in matrix individually.
5. There are actions: shift left, shift right or rotate during operation. Large number is
defined to left and small number is defined to right as shown in the following.
Left
width is 16-bit
Right
b15
D0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0
D1
b31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b16
D2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b32
b47
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Dn-1
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
b16n-1
6. Fixed width of matrix is 16-bit.
7. Pr: matrix pointer. If Pr is 15, it means designated point is b15.
8. Matrix length is n and n is 1-256.
Example: The matrix that is made up of D0 and n=3, D0=HAAAA, D1=H5555,
D2=HAAFF
R0
R1
R2
C15
1
0
1
C14
0
1
0
C13
1
0
1
C12
0
1
0
C11
1
0
1
C10
0
1
0
C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2
Example: The matrix that is made up of K2X0 and n=3, K2X0=H37, K2X10=H68,
K2X20=H45
C15 C14 C13
R0 0 0 0
R1 0 0 0
R2 0 0 0
C12
0
0
0
C11
0
0
0
C10
0
0
0
C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
X0~X7
X10~X17
X20~X27
It needs to fill 0 to R0(C15-C8), R1(C15-C8), R2(C15-C8) once the value is empty.
9-48

API
181
MOR
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix OR
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
D
n
Word devices
Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256.

For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate KnX, KnY,
KnM and KnS, n can only be 4.
Command
Explanation
: Area where
: matrix length
Do matix OR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of

the result in
Flag: None


Continuous
Pulse
MOR
MORP
execution
execution
and save
The operation rule of matrix OR is: bit is 1 when one of 2 bits is 1 and only 2 bits are 0
bit will be 0.
Program
Example
When X0=On, do MOR and matrix OR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register
and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of
16-bit register.
X0
MOR
D0
D10
b15
D20
K3
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
Execution
MOR
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
Execution
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
9-49

API
182
MXOR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2
n
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix XOR
: Area where
: matrix length
Do matix XOR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of

the result in
Flag: None


Continuous
Pulse
MXOR
MXORP
execution
execution
and save
The operation rule of matrix XOR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are different otherwise it is 0.
Program
Example
When X0=On, do MXOR and matrix XOR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
X0
MXOR
D0
D10
b15
D20
K3
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
Execution
MXOR
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
Execution
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 11 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
9-50

API
183
MXNR
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix XNR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2
n
Command
Explanation
: Area where
: matrix length
Do matix XNR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of

the result in
Flag: None


Continuous
Pulse
MXNR
MXNRP
execution
execution
and save
The operation rule of matrix XNR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are the same otherwise it is 0.
Program
Example
When X0=On, do MXNR and matrix XNR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit
X0
MXNR
D0
D10
D20
b15
K3
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before
Execution
MXNR
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
After
Execution
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
9-51

API
184
MINV
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix Inverse
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
Continuous

MINV
MINVP
execution


Flag:
None
S
D
n
: Matrix source device
Command
Explanation
: result
: matrix length
Do matix inverse operation to matix source device 1 by length of

result in
Pulse
execution
and save the
When X0=On, do MINV operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows
Program
Example
(D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register.
X0
MINV
D0
D20
K3
b15
Before
Execution
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
MINV
After
Execution
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
API
185
MCMP
Bit devices
X Y M S
Matrix Compare
Word devices

S1

S2

n
9-52
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
Pulse
MCMP
MCMPP
execution
execution
Flag: Please refer to explanation for

M1088-M1092.

Command
Explanation

: Area where
: pointer Pr, save target address.
For each comparison, it will compare each bit of
with
from address Pr.
To find the address of different value and save the address in
to complete this
comparison.
You can find the result of comparison from comparison flag M1088. If the same,
M1088=1 and M1088=0 for difference. Once comparsion attains, it will stop
comparing immediately and set bit search flag M1091=1. When comparison attains
the last bit, matrix search end flag M1089 will be On and comparison attained number
is saved in
. For next scan period, it will start comparing from the first bit and set
matrix search start flag M1090=1. When
value exceeds the usage range, point
error flag M1092 =1.

It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one of 16n points in matrix to operate.
This register is called pointer, Pr. This is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1
that correspond to bit b0 b16n-1 individually. You should avoid to change Pr in
operation to affect correct comparison search. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix
pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command wont be executed.
Matrix search end flag M1089 and set bit search flag M1091 will be 1 at the same
time.
Program
Example
When X0 is from OffOn, matrix search start falg M1090=0 thus it will start comparing
to find the different bit from the bit that present value +1. (M1088=0 means difference)
When present value of pointer D20=2, it can get following four results ( , , , )
when X0 is executed from OffOn for four times.
D20=5, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0.
X0
MCMPP
D0
D10
K3
D20
2
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
D20
pointer
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
MCMP
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
9-53

Explanation for flag signal
Footnote
M1088: matrix comparison flag, if the result of comparison is the same, M1088=1,
otherwise M1088=0.
M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1.
M1090: matrix search start flag, start comparing from the first bit, M1090=1.
M1091: matrix bit search flag, it will stop comparing once comparison attained,
M1091=1.
M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1.
API
186
MBRD
Matrix Bit Read
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

n
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
: matrix source device.

Continuous
Pulse
MBRD
MBRDP
execution
execution

M1089-M1095
: matrix length
pointer Pr, save target
address.
When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.
If it is On, pointer
will be cleared to 0 and read
from the 0 bit and read
On/Off state of each bit to M1095 (matrix rotate/shift/output/carry). It will see if M1093
(matrix pointer increase flag) is On after reading a bit. And increase 1 to
if it is
On. When reading to the last bit, M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer
records the number of read bit and then end executing this command.
Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0
b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will
be 1 and this command wont be executed.
Program
Example
When X0 is from OffOn, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag
M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after reading a bit.
When present value of pointer D20=45, it can get following three results ( ,
when X0 is executed from OffOn for three times.

D20=46, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=0, matrix search end flag
M1089=0.
M1089=0.
9-54

M1089=1.
X0
MBRD
D0
D10
K3
D20
b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
pointer
b47
45
D20
Footnote
M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.
M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag.
API
187
MBWR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

n
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix Bit Write

Continuous
Pulse
MBWR
MBWRP
execution
execution

M1089-M1096
: matrix length
pointer Pr, save target
address.
When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On.
If it is On, pointer
will be cleared to 0 and write M1096 (matrix shift/input
complement flag) in the 0 bit of
. It will see if M1093 (matrix pointer increase flag)
is On after writing a bit. And increase 1 to

M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer
and then end executing this command. If
if it is On. When writing to the last bit,

records the number of read bit
exceeds range, M1092=1.
Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0
b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will
be 1 and this command wont be executed.
9-55

When X0 is from OffOn, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag
Program
Example
M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after writing a bit.

When present pointer is D20=45, M1094 (matrix shift/input complement flag) =1.
When X0 is executed once from OffOn, it can get following result:
X0
MBWRP
D0
K3
D20
b0
Before
Execution
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
D20 pointer
45
After
Execution
M1096
(Matrix shift/input complement flag)
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
D20 pointer
45
Footnote
M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer.
M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0.
M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag
API
188
MBS
Matrix Bit Shift
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

D

n
For EP series, when operands S1, S2 and D designate
Command
Explanation
9-56
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
D E F 16-bit command (5 STEPS)

Continuous
Pulse
MBS
MBSP
execution
execution
KnX, KnY,
M1095-M1097
: matrix length
: result.

This command is used to shift
to left or right by matrix length. M1097=0 moves
to left and M1097=1 moves to right. It needs to use the state of M1096 (complement
flag) to fill the empty bit (shift to left is b0 and shift to right is b16n-1) due to shiftment
for each bit. If there is one more bit due to shiftment (shift to left is b16n-1 and shift to
right is b0), it needs to send the state to M1095 (carry flag) and save the result in
.
The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBSP).
Program
Example
1
When X0=On, M1097=Off means shift matrix to left. Setting complement flag
M1096=0, shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to left and save the result in 16-bit register
D20-D22 and carry flag M1095 will be 1.
X0
RST
M1097
MBSP
D0
D20
K3
M1096
0
b15
Before
Execution
b0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBS
M1097=0
After shifting
to left
M1095
Program
Example
2
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
When X1=On, M1097=On to shift matrix to right. Setting complement flag M1096=1,
shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 and
carry flag M1095 will be 0.
X1
M1097
MBSP
D0
D20
K3
0
b15
Before
Execution
M1096
b0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBS
M1097=0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M1095
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
9-57

Footnote
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag

M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag
M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag
API
189
MBR
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix Bit Rotate
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
Continuous
Pulse

S
MBR
MBRP
execution
execution

n

M1095,
M1097
Command
Explanation
: matrix length
This command is used to rotate
: result.
to right or left by matrix length. M1097=0
moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. The empty bit (rotate to left is b0 and shift
to right is b16n-1) due to rotation will be filled by the bit (rotate to left is b16n-1 and
shift to right is b0) that rotated out and save the result in
. The bit that is rotated
out is not only used to fill the empty bit but also send its state to carry flag M1095.
The most use of this command is pulse execution command (MBRP).
Program
Example
1
When X0=On, M1097=Off means rotate matrix to left. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2
to left and save the result in 16-bit register D20-D22. The carry flag M1095 will be 1.
X0
RST
M1097
MBRP
D0
b15
Before
Execution
D20
K3
b0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095
MBR
M1097=0
After rotating
to left
M1095
9-58
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

When X1=On, M1097=On to rotate matrix to right. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2 to
Program
Example
2
right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 . The carry flag M1095 will be 0.
X1
M1097
MBRP
D0
D20
K3
b15
Before
Execution
b0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
M1095
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MBR
M1097=0
After rotating
to right
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M1095
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Footnote
M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag

M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag
API
190
MBC
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

n
Note: usage range of operand n is K1~K256.
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
Matrix Bit State Count
: Matrix source device

Continuous
MBC
MBCP
execution
Pulse
execution
: result
To count number of bit 1 or bit 0 by matrix length

M1098, M1099
: matrix length
and number in
When M1098=1, count the number of bit 1. And count the number of bit 0 when
M1098=0. If counting result is 0, M1099=1.
Program
Example
When X10=On, it counts bit 1 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. When
M1098=0, it counts bit 0 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10.
X10
MBC
D0
K3
D10
9-59

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
12
M1098=0
36
M1098=1
Explanation for matrix command:
Footnote
M1098: matrix count bit 1 or bit 0 flag

M1099: it is On when counted result is 0.
API
196
HST
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

Note: usage range of operand S is K0 (H0), K1(H1).
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH
High Speed Counter

Continuous
Pulse
HST
HSTP
execution
execution
Flag: M1015 high speed connected

timer action
Command
Explanation
: the ondition to stop high speed timer start

When
=1, start high speed timer and set M1015=On, high speed timer starts and
records present value in D1015. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.

The range for D1015 to count is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next
count will be 0.
When
=0, stop high speed timer and set M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting
immediately.
When
Program
Example
is not 1 or 0, command HSTMR wont act.
When X10=On, M1015=On. It will start high speed timer and record present value in
D1015.
When X10=Off, M1015=Off. It will stop high speed timer.
X10
HST
K1
HST
K0
X10
9-60

Footnote
M1015: high speed timer start flag

D1015: high speed timer
This command doesnt support for EH models. Following is the explanation for using
special M and special D directly.
1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.
2. When M1015=On, only start high speed timer D1015 as PLC executes END
command of that scan period. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us.
3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will
be 0.
4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting in command END or HST.
This command doesnt support for EP models. Following is the explanation for using
special M and special D directly.
1. It is only valid when PLC RUN.
2. When D1015=On, start high speed timer D1015 immediately. The min. unit of
D1015 is 100us.
3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will
be 0.
4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately.
9-61

API
215~
D
217
The Contact Type Logic Operation

LD#
LD#
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
Word devices

Note: : &, |, ^
Command
Explanation
Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
LD#
execution
Continuous
DLD#
execution
Flag: None
: Data source device 1
Compare the contents of
and
. To take LD& as an example, if the
comparison result is not 0 , the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0 , the contact is in

discontinuity.
Command LD# could connect directly with the BUS.
API No.
215
16 -bit
command
LD&
32 -bit
command
DLD&
Continuity
condition
Discontinuity
condition
&
&
=0
216
LD|
DLD|
=0
217
LD^
DLD^
=0
& : Logic AND operation

| : Logic OR operation
^ : Logic XOR operation
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to
use the 32-bit command (DLD#). If the 16-bit command (LD#) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as Program Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will
be blinking.
Program
Example
When the result that using the LD& (Logic AND operation) command to compare the
content of C0 and C10 is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.
When the result that using the LD| (Logic OR operation) command to compare the
content of D200 and D300 is not equal to 0 and X1=ON, Y10=ON and retain.
When the result that using the LD^ (Logic XOR operation) command to compare the
content of C201 and C200 is not equal to 0 or M3=ON, M50=ON.
LD &
C0
C10
LD I
D200
D300
SET
DLD ^
C201
C200
M50
Y10
X1
Y011
M3
10-1

API
218~
D
220
The Series Connection Contact

Type Logic Operation AND#
AND#
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
Word devices


Continuous
AND#
execution
Note: : &, |, ^
Command
Explanation
: Data source device 1.

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
DAND#
execution
Flag: None
and of
. To take AND& as an example, if the
comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, the contact is in

discontinuity.
The AND# command is used to connect to contact in series.
API No.
218
16 -bit
command
AND&
32 -bit
command
DAND&
Continuity
condition
Discontinuity
condition
&
&
=0
219
AND|
DAND|
=0
220
AND^
DAND^
=0

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use
the 32-bit command (DAND#). Or if the 16-bit command (AND#) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as Program Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be
blinking.
Program
Example
When X0=ON, using the AND& (Logic AND operation) command to compare the content of
C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y10=ON.
When X1=OFF, using the AND| (Logic OR operation) command to compare the content of
D10 and D0. If the result is not equal to 0, Y11=ON and retain.
When X2=ON, using the AND^ (Logic XOR operation) command to compare the content of
32-bit registers D200(D201) and D100(D101). If the result is not equal to 0 or
M3=ON,M50=ON.
10-2

X0
AND &
C0
C10
Y10
AND I
D10
D0
SET
DAND ^
D200
D100
M50
X1
Y11
X2
M3
API
221~
D
223
The Parallel Connection Contact

Type Logic Operation OR#
OR#
Bit devices
X Y M S
S1
S2
Word devices

Note: : &, |, ^
Command
Explanation

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
OR#
execution

Continuous
DOR#
execution
Flag: None

and of
. Take OR& as an example, if the
comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, he contact is in

discontinuity.
Command OR# is used to connect to contact in parallel.
API No.
16 -bit
32 -bit
Continuity
Discontinuity
command
command
condition
condition
221
OR&
DOR&
&
&
=0
222
OR|
DOR|
=0
223
OR^
DOR^
=0

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure
to use the 32-bit command (DOR#). Or if the 16-bit command (OR#) is utilized, CPU
will determine it as Program Error , and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel
will be blinking.
10-3

Program
Example
When X1=ON, using the OR& (Logic AND operation) command to compare the
content of C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y0=ON.
If both X2 and M30 are ON, or when using the OR| (Logic OR operation) command
to compare the content of D10 and D20 and the result is not equal to 0, or when using
the OR^ (Logic XOR operation) command to compare the content of D100 and D200
and the result is not equal to 0, M60=ON.
X1
Y0
OR &
X2
C0
C10
M30
M60
API
224~
D
230
DOR I
D10
D20
DOR ^
D100
D200
The Contact Type Comparison

LD
LD
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2
Note: : =, >, <, <>, ,
Command
Explanation

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
LD
execution
Continuous
DLD
execution
Flag: None

and of
. To take API 224 LD= as an example, if
the comparison result is = , the contact is in continuity, and if it is , the contact is in

discontinuity.
Command LDcan connect to BUS directly.
224
16 -bit
command
LD
32 -bit
command
DLD
Continuity
condition
Discontinuity
condition
225
LD
DLD
226
LD
DLD
228
LD
DLD
229
LD
DLD
230
LD
DLD
API No.
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from
and
is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for
comparison.
10-4

If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to
use the 32-bit command (DLD). If the 16-bit command (LD) is utilized, CPU will
determine it as Program Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will
be blinking.
Program
Example
If the content of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y10=ON.

When the content of D200 is smaller or equal to K30, and that X1=ON, Y11=ON and
retain.
If the content of C200 is smaller than K678,493 or when M3=ON, M50=ON.
LD=
K200
C10
LD>
D200
K-30
Y10
X1
DLD>
K678493
SET
Y11
M50
C200
M3
API
232~
D
238
The Series Connection Contact

Type Comparison AND
AND
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices
K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D

S1

S2
Note: : =, >, <, <>, ,
Command
Explanation

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
AND
execution
Continuous
DAND
execution
Flag: None

and of
. To take API 232 AND= as an
example, if the comparison result is = , the contact is in continuity, and if it is , the

contact is in discontinuity.
Command ANDis the comparison command that connect to contact in series.
232
16 -bit
command
AND
32 -bit
command
DAND
Continuity
condition
Discontinuity
condition
233
AND
DAND
234
AND
DAND
236
AND
DAND
237
AND
DAND
238
AND
DAND
API No.
10-5

When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),
from
and
is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value
for comparison.
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be
sure to use the 32-bit command (DAND). Or if the 16-bit command (AND) is
utilized, CPU will determine it as Program Error, and the red ERROR indicator on
the MPU panel will be blinking.
Program
Example
If X0=ON and that the current value of counter C10 equals K200, Y10=ON.
If X1=OFF and that the content of register D0 not equal to K10, Y11=ON and retain.
If X2=ON and that the contents of the 32-bit registers D11 and D0 are smaller than
K678,493, M50=ON.
X0
AND=
K200
C10
Y10
AND<>
K-10
D0
SET
X1
Y11
X2
DAND>
K678493
M50
D10
M3
API
240~
D
246
The Parallel Connection Contact

Type Comparison OR
OR
Bit devices
X Y M S
Word devices

S1

S2
Note: : =, >, <, <>, ,
Command
Explanation

Applicable models
ES
EP
EH

Continuous
OR
execution
Continuous
DOR
execution
Flag: None

and of
. Take API 240 (OR=) as an example, if
the comparison result is =, the contact is in continuity, and if it is , the contact is in

discontinuity.
Command ORis the comparison command that connect to contact in parallel.
10-6
240
16 -bit
command
OR
32 -bit
command
DOR
241
OR
DOR
242
OR
DOR
244
OR
245
246
API No.
Continuity
condition
Discontinuity
condition
DOR
OR
DOR
S1
S1
OR
DOR
S1
S1
When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31),
and
from
is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value
for comparison.
If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be
sure to use the 32-bit command (DOR). Or if the 16-bit command (OR) is utilized,
CPU will determine it as Program Error , and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU
panel will be blinking.
Program
Example
If X1=ON, or that the current value of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y0=ON.
If both X2 and M30 are ON, or if the contents of the 32-bit registers D101 and D100
are greater or equal to K100,000, M60=ON.
X1
Y0
OR=
X2
K200
C10
M30
M60
DOR>
=
D100
K100000
10-7

DVP-PLC Application Manual Programming】: Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DVP-PLC Application Manual Programming】: Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DVP-PLC Application Manual

Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function

Chapter 3 Basic Commands

Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands

Chapter 5 Application Commands

Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49........................................... 6-1

1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram

1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram

PLC Ladder Diagram